Chevrolet 2011 Suburban Owner Manual

Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (1,1)
2011 Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Performance and
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1
Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-46
Universal Remote System . . . . 5-54
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 7-34
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-27
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-37
Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-52
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-58
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73
Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-91
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (2,1)
2011 Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual M
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-3
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-7
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-10
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-2
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-15
Vehicle Data Recording
and Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (3,1)
Introduction
The names, logos, emblems,
slogans, vehicle model names, and
vehicle body designs appearing in
this manual including, but not limited
to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET,
the CHEVROLET Emblem, TAHOE,
SUBURBAN, and Z71 are
trademarks and/or service marks
of General Motors LLC, its
subsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.
Please refer to the purchase
documentation relating to your
specific vehicle to confirm each of
the features found on your vehicle.
For vehicles first sold in Canada,
substitute the name “General
Motors of Canada Limited” for
Chevrolet Motor Division wherever
it appears in this manual.
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
hybrid supplement for more
information.
Keep this manual in the vehicle
for quick reference.
This manual describes features that
may or may not be on your specific
vehicle either because they are
options that you did not purchase or
due to changes subsequent to the
printing of this owner manual.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 25965917 B Second Printing
©
iii
Canadian Vehicle Owners
Propriétaires Canadiens
A French language copy of this
manual can be obtained from your
dealer or from:
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
ce guide en français auprès du
concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
suivante:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
Numéro de poste 6438
de langue française
www.helminc.com
2010 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
iv
Black plate (4,1)
Introduction
Using this Manual
To quickly locate information about
the vehicle, use the Index in the
back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the
manual and the page number where
it can be found.
Danger, Warnings, and
Cautions
Warning messages found on vehicle
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or
reduce them.
{ WARNING
These mean there is something
that could hurt you or other
people.
Notice: This means there is
something that could result in
property or vehicle damage. This
would not be covered by the
vehicle's warranty.
The vehicle has components and
labels that use symbols instead of
text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or
information relating to a specific
component, control, message,
gauge, or indicator.
M : This symbol is shown when
you need to see your owner manual
for additional instructions or
information.
* : This symbol is shown when
you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
information.
Danger indicates a hazard with a
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a
hazard that could result in injury or
death.
Symbols
A circle with a slash through it is a
safety symbol which means “Do
Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let
this happen.”
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (5,1)
Introduction
Vehicle Symbol Chart
Here are some additional symbols
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more
information on the symbol, refer to
the Index.
0 : Adjustable Pedals
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
% : Audio Steering Wheel Controls
" : Charging System
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
# : Fog Lamps
. : Fuel Gauge
+ : Fuses
3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer
or OnStar®
j : LATCH System Child
Restraints
$:
*:
Brake System Warning Light
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
g : Outside Power Foldaway
Mirrors
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
_ : Tow/Haul Mode
F : Traction Control
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
v
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
vi
Black plate (6,1)
Introduction
2 NOTES
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (1,1)
In Brief
In Brief
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Heated and Ventilated
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Head Restraint
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Sensing System for
Passenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Steering Wheel
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Throttle and Brake Pedal
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . .
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-15
1-15
1-15
1-16
1-17
1-18
1-19
1-20
Vehicle Features
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Portable Audio Devices . . . . . .
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . .
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . .
Side Blind Zone
Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Vision
Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . .
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Remote System . . .
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-21
1-23
1-23
1-23
1-23
1-24
1-24
1-25
1-25
1-25
1-26
1-26
1-26
1-1
Performance and Maintenance
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-27
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-28
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-28
Driving for Better Fuel
Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Roadside Assistance
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
1-2
In Brief
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview
United States Version Shown; Canada Similar
Black plate (2,1)
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (3,1)
In Brief
A. Air Vents on page 8‑13.
I.
P.
B. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever.
See Turn and Lane-Change
Signals on page 6‑5.
Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 6‑1.
J.
Dome Lamps on page 6‑7.
Q. Horn on page 5‑5.
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 6‑7.
R. Steering Wheel Controls on
page 5‑3.
Fog Lamps on page 6‑6
(If Equipped).
S. Climate Control Systems on
page 8‑1 (If Equipped).
Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑5.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑6.
C. Instrument Cluster on
page 5‑12.
D. Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 6‑5 (Out of View).
E. Shift Lever. See Automatic
Transmission on page 9‑37.
F.
Manual Mode on page 9‑40
(If Equipped).
Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑41
(If Equipped).
G. Driver Information Center (DIC)
Buttons. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑27.
H. Infotainment on page 7‑1.
L.
Integrated Trailer Brake
Controller (If Equipped).
See Towing Equipment on
page 9‑82.
T.
O. Cruise Control on page 9‑55.
Power Outlets on page 5‑9.
U. StabiliTrak® System on
page 9‑52 (If Equipped).
M. Data Link Connector (DLC)
(Out of View). See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 5‑20.
N. Automatic Transfer Case
Control. (If Equipped). See
Four-Wheel Drive (Two Speed
Automatic Transfer Case) on
page 9‑43 or Four-Wheel Drive
(Single Speed Automatic
Transfer Case) on page 9‑47.
Steering Wheel Adjustment on
page 5‑2.
Dual Automatic Climate
Control System on page 8‑4
(If Equipped).
K. Hood Release. See Hood on
page 10‑5.
Pedal Adjust Button (If
Equipped). See Adjustable
Throttle and Brake Pedal on
page 9‑28.
Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
page 9‑58 (If Equipped).
Power Assist Steps on
page 2‑14 (If Equipped).
V.
1-3
Glove Box on page 4‑1.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
1-4
Black plate (4,1)
In Brief
Lock and unlock feedback can
be personalized. See Vehicle
Personalization (With DIC Buttons)
on page 5‑46.
Initial Drive
Information
This section provides a brief
overview about some of the
important features that may or may
not be on your specific vehicle.
m : Press and hold to unlock the
liftglass.
& : Press and hold to open or
close the power liftgate.
For more detailed information, refer
to each of the features which can be
found later in this owner manual.
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System
The RKE transmitter is used to
remotely lock and unlock the doors
from up to 60 m (195 ft) away from
the vehicle.
L : Press and release to locate
the vehicle.
K : Press to unlock the driver door.
Press K again within three seconds
to unlock all remaining doors.
Q:
Press to lock all doors.
Press L and hold for more than
two seconds to sound the panic
alarm.
Press L again to cancel the panic
alarm.
See Keys on page 2‑2 and Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System on
page 2‑2.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (5,1)
In Brief
1-5
Remote Vehicle Start
Canceling a Remote Start
Door Locks
With this feature the engine can be
started from outside of the vehicle.
To cancel a remote start:
There are several ways to lock and
unlock the vehicle.
.
Starting the Vehicle
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle.
2. Press
Q.
3. Immediately after completing
Step 2, press and hold / until
the turn signal lamps flash.
When the vehicle starts, the parking
lamps will turn on and remain on as
long as the engine is running. The
doors will be locked and the climate
control system may come on.
The engine will continue to run for
10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a
10-minute time extension. Remote
start can be extended only once.
Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle and press and hold /
until the parking lamps turn off.
.
Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
.
Turn the ignition on and then
back off.
See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2‑5.
From outside, use the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or
the key in the driver door. From
inside, use the power door locks or
the manual door locks. To lock or
unlock the door with the manual
locks, push down or pull up on the
manual lock knob.
Power Door Locks
If available, these switches are on
the front doors.
K:
Q:
Press to unlock the doors.
Press to lock the doors.
See Door Locks on page 2‑8.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
1-6
Black plate (6,1)
In Brief
Liftgate
Power Liftgate
.
Press & on the overhead
console inside the vehicle.
.
Press the touchpad switch (B)
on the outside liftgate handle
to open.
.
Press the l button next to
the liftgate latch to close.
Windows
To disable the power liftgate
function, press OFF on the
overhead console.
Liftglass
There are two ways to unlatch the
liftglass:
Press K on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter or use the
power door lock switches to unlock
the liftgate.
There are several ways to open and
close the power liftgate:
.
Press and hold & on the RKE
transmitter until the liftgate starts
moving.
.
Press the button on the
underside of the license plate
applique (A).
.
Press m on the RKE
transmitter.
See Liftgate (Power) on page 2‑10
or Liftgate (Manual) on page 2‑12.
The power window switches are
located on the driver door. In
addition, each passenger door
has a switch for its own window.
Press the switch to lower the
window. Pull the switch up to
raise it.
For more information, see:
.
Windows on page 2‑21.
.
Power Windows on page 2‑22.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (7,1)
In Brief
Seat Adjustment
Power Seats
Manual Seats
.
1-7
If available, raise or lower the
entire seat by moving the entire
control up or down.
See Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3‑4 for more information.
Lumbar Adjustment
Manual Lumbar
To adjust a power seat, if equipped:
To adjust the seat:
.
Move the seat forward or
rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.
.
If available, raise or lower the
front or rear part of the seat
cushion by moving the front or
rear of the control up or down.
1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the bar.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure the seat is
locked in place.
See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3
for more information.
If equipped, increase or decrease
manual lumbar support by turning
the knob forward or rearward.
See Lumbar Adjustment on
page 3‑6 for more information.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
1-8
Black plate (8,1)
In Brief
Power Lumbar
.
On vehicles with four-way
lumbar, press and hold the front
or rear of the control to increase
or decrease lumbar support. To
raise or lower the height of the
support, press and hold the top
or bottom of the control.
Reclining Seatbacks
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
See Lumbar Adjustment on
page 3‑6 for more information.
To adjust the power lumbar support,
if equipped:
.
On vehicles with two-way
lumbar, press and hold the top
or bottom of the control to
increase or decrease lumbar
support.
To recline a manual seatback:
1. Lift the lever.
2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, and then
release the lever to lock the
seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (9,1)
In Brief
To return the seatback to the upright
position:
Power Reclining Seatbacks
1-9
Memory Features
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
See Reclining Seatbacks on
page 3‑7 for more information.
To adjust a power seatback,
if equipped:
.
Tilt the top of the control
rearward to recline.
.
Tilt the top of the control forward
to raise.
See Reclining Seatbacks on
page 3‑7 for more information.
On vehicles with the memory
feature, the controls on the driver
door are used to program and recall
memory settings for the driver seat,
outside mirrors, and the adjustable
throttle and brake pedals, if the
vehicle has this feature.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
1-10
Black plate (10,1)
In Brief
Storing Memory Positions
To save into memory:
1. Adjust the driver seat and
seatback recliner, both outside
mirrors, and the throttle and
brake pedals, if available.
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑18
and Adjustable Throttle and
Brake Pedal on page 9‑28 for
more information.
Not all mirrors and adjustable
throttles and brake pedals will
have the ability to save and
recall their positions.
2. Press and hold “1” until
two beeps sound.
3. Repeat for a second driver
position using “2.”
To recall, press and release “1” or
“2.” The vehicle must be in P (Park).
A single beep will sound. The seat,
outside mirrors, and adjustable
throttle and brake pedals,
if available, will move to the position
previously stored for the identified
driver.
See “Memory Seat, Mirrors, and
Pedals” under Power Seat
Adjustment on page 3‑4 and Vehicle
Personalization (With DIC Buttons)
on page 5‑46 for more information.
Easy Exit Driver Seat
This feature can move the seat
rearward to allow extra room to
exit the vehicle.
B : Press to recall the easy exit
seat position. The vehicle must be
in P (Park).
See “Memory Seat, Mirrors, and
Pedals” under Power Seat
Adjustment on page 3‑4 and Vehicle
Personalization (With DIC Buttons)
on page 5‑46 for more information.
Second Row Seats
On vehicles with a 60/40 split bench
or buckets seats, the seatbacks can
be folded for additional cargo space,
or the seats can be folded and
tumbled for easy entry/exit to the
third row seats, if equipped. On
vehicles with bucket seats, the
seatbacks also recline.
See Second Row Seats on
page 3‑12 for more information.
Third Row Seats
On vehicles with third row seats, the
seatbacks can be folded, and the
entire seat can be tumbled or
removed from the vehicle.
For detailed instructions, see
Third Row Seats on page 3‑16.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (11,1)
In Brief
Heated Seats
Front Seats
Press the button once for the
highest setting. With each press of
the button, the heated seat will
change to the next lower setting,
and then to the off setting. The
lights indicate three for the highest
setting and one for the lowest.
1-11
Rear Seats
See Heated Front Seats on
page 3‑9.
If available, the buttons are on the
front doors.
I:
Press to heat the
seatback only.
J:
Press to heat the seat and
seatback.
If available, the buttons are on the
Rear Sear Audio (RSA) panel on the
rear of the center console.
Press M or L to heat the left
outboard or right outboard seat
cushion and to cycle through the
temperature settings.
See Heated Rear Seats on
page 3‑11.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
1-12
Black plate (12,1)
In Brief
Heated and Ventilated
Seats
Press the button once for the
highest setting. With each press of
the button, the seat will change to
the next lower setting, and then to
the off setting. The lights indicate
three for the highest setting and
one for the lowest.
Safety Belts
See Heated and Ventilated Front
Seats on page 3‑10.
Head Restraint
Adjustment
If available, the buttons are on the
front doors.
H : Press to cool the seat.
I : Press to heat the
seatback only.
J:
Press to heat the seat and
seatback.
Do not drive until the head restraints
for all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
To achieve a comfortable seating
position, change the seatback
recline angle as little as necessary
while keeping the seat and the head
restraint height in the proper
position.
For more information see Head
Restraints on page 3‑2 and Seat
Adjustment on page 3‑3.
Refer to the following sections for
important information on how to use
safety belts properly.
.
Safety Belts on page 3‑20.
.
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly on page 3‑24.
.
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑28.
.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑61.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (13,1)
In Brief
1-13
Sensing System for
Passenger Airbag
Mirror Adjustment
The passenger sensing system,
if equipped, will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag under
certain conditions. The driver airbag,
seat‐mounted side impact airbags
(if equipped), and roof‐rail airbags
are not affected by this.
Vehicles with manual outside
mirrors can be adjusted so that the
side of the vehicle and the area
behind are seen.
If the vehicle has one of the
indicators pictured in the following
illustrations, then the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position.
The passenger airbag status
indicator, if equipped, will be visible
on the overhead console when the
vehicle is started.
Exterior Mirrors
United States
See Manual Mirrors on page 2‑18
Canada and Mexico
See Passenger Sensing System on
page 3‑45 for important information.
If the vehicle has towing mirrors,
they can be adjusted for a clearer
view of the objects behind you.
Manually pull out the mirror head to
extend it for better visibility when
towing a trailer. See Trailer-Tow
Mirrors on page 2‑18.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
1-14
Black plate (14,1)
In Brief
Power Mirrors
Power Foldaway Mirrors
Interior Mirrors
To fold the mirrors:
Vehicles with a manual rearview
mirror can be adjusted to see clearly
behind the vehicle. Hold the mirror
in the center to move it up or down
and side to side. Adjust the mirror to
avoid glare from the headlamps
behind you. Push the tab forward for
daytime use and pull it for
nighttime use.
1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out
to the driving position.
2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to
the folded position.
The mirrors may also include a
memory function that works with the
memory seats. See “Memory Seat,
Mirrors, and Pedals” in Power Seat
Adjustment on page 3‑4 for more
information.
Vehicles with outside power mirrors
and foldaway mirrors have controls
located on the driver door.
1. Press (A) or (B) to select the
driver or passenger side mirror.
2. Press the arrows on the control
pad to move the mirror up,
down, right, or left.
3. Press either (A) or (B) again to
deselect the mirror.
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑18.
Manual Foldaway Mirrors
Manually fold the mirrors inward
to prevent damage when going
through an automatic car wash.
To fold, push the mirror toward the
vehicle. Push the mirror outward,
to return to its original position.
See Folding Mirrors on page 2‑19.
Vehicles with the automatic dimming
feature will automatically reduce
glare from the headlamps of the
vehicle behind you. The dimming
feature comes on and the indicator
light illuminates each time the
vehicle is started.
See Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror on page 2‑20 for more
information.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (15,1)
In Brief
Steering Wheel
Adjustment
1-15
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
Interior Lighting
Throttle and Brake Pedal
Adjustment
The dome lamps are located in the
overhead console.
On vehicles with this feature, you
can change the position of the
throttle and brake pedals.
They come on when any door is
opened and turn off after all the
doors are closed.
Dome Lamps
Turn the instrument panel
brightness knob located below the
dome lamp override button,
clockwise to the farthest position to
manually turn on the dome lamps.
The dome lamps remain on until the
knob is turned counterclockwise.
The tilt lever is located on the lower
left side of the steering column.
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Hold the steering wheel and pull
the lever.
The control used to adjust the
pedals is located on the instrument
panel below the climate control
system.
2. Move the steering wheel up
or down.
Press the bottom of the control to
move the pedals closer to your
body. Press the top of the control to
move the pedals away.
3. Release the lever to lock the
wheel in place.
See Adjustable Throttle and Brake
Pedal on page 9‑28.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
1-16
Black plate (16,1)
In Brief
Dome Lamp Override
Reading Lamps
The dome lamp override button is
located next to the exterior lamps
control.
For vehicles with reading lamps in
the overhead console, press the
button located next to the lamp to
turn it on or off.
Exterior Lighting
The vehicle may also have reading
lamps in other locations. To turn the
lamps on or off, press the button
located next to the lamp.
For more information about interior
lamps, see:
k : Press the button in and the
dome lamps remain off when a door
is opened. Press the button again to
return it to the extended position so
that the dome lamps come on when
a door is opened.
.
Dome Lamps on page 6‑7.
.
Reading Lamps on page 6‑8.
.
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 6‑7.
The exterior lamps control is located
on the instrument panel to the left of
the steering wheel.
O : Turns off the automatic
headlamps and Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL). Turn the headlamp
control to the off position again to
turn the automatic headlamps or
DRL back on.
For vehicles first sold in Canada,
the off position will only work when
the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (17,1)
In Brief
AUTO: Automatically turns on
the headlamps, parking lamps,
taillamps, instrument panel lights,
and license plate lamps.
Windshield Wiper/Washer
For more information, see:
Rear Wiper Window Wiper/Washer
To turn the rear wiper on, slide the
lever to a wiper position.
9 : Turns the wiper off.
5 : Turns on the rear wiper delay.
Z : Turns on the rear wiper.
= : Press the button on the end of
;: Turns on the parking lamps,
taillamps, instrument panel lights,
and license plate lamps.
2: Turns on the headlamps,
parking lamps, taillamps, instrument
panel lights, and license plate
lamps.
1-17
8:
Single wipe, turn to 8, then
release. Several wipes, hold the
band on 8 longer.
.
Exterior Lamp Controls on
page 6‑1.
9 : Turns the windshield
wipers off.
.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
on page 6‑3.
.
Fog Lamps on page 6‑6.
Turn the band up for more
frequent wipes or down for less
frequent wipes.
6:
6 : Slow wipes.
? : Fast wipes.
L : Push this paddle to spray
washer fluid on the windshield.
the lever to spray washer fluid on
the rear window.
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑5 and Rear Window Wiper/
Washer on page 5‑6.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
1-18
Black plate (18,1)
In Brief
Climate Controls
The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with
these systems.
If this vehicle is a Hybrid, see the hybrid supplement for more information.
A. Fan Control
E. Air Conditioning
B. REAR (Rear Climate Control)
F.
C. Air Recirculation
D. Air Delivery Mode Control
Driver and Passenger
Temperature Controls
G. Rear Window Defogger
See Climate Control Systems on
page 8‑1.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (19,1)
In Brief
1-19
Transmission
Range Selection Mode
Base Trim Shown (Uplevel Similar)
A. Fan Control
K. Air Conditioning
B. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
L.
C. Defrost
M. Passenger Temperature Control
D. Air Recirculation
See Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 8‑4. For vehicles
with rear heating and air
conditioning controls, see Rear
Climate Control System (Rear
Climate Control Only) on page 8‑10
or Rear Climate Control System
(Rear Climate with Rear Seat Audio)
on page 8‑11.
E. REAR (Rear Climate Control)
F.
Air Delivery Mode Control
G. Driver Temperature Control
H. Display
I.
Power Button
J.
Rear Window Defogger
PASS
The Range Selection Mode switch
is located on the shift lever. To
enable the Range Selection feature,
move the column shift lever to the
M (Manual) position. The current
range will appear next to the M. This
is the highest attainable range with
all lower gears accessible. As an
example, when 5 (Fifth) gear is
selected, 1 (First) through 5 (Fifth)
gears are available.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
1-20
Black plate (20,1)
In Brief
Press the plus/minus buttons,
located on the steering column shift
lever, to select the desired range of
gears for current driving conditions.
See Manual Mode on page 9‑40.
Automatic Transfer Case
While using Range Selection Mode,
cruise control and the Tow/Haul
mode can be used.
Grade Braking is not available when
Range Selection Mode is active.
See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑41.
Four-Wheel Drive
If the vehicle has Four-Wheel Drive,
you can send the engine's driving
power to all four wheels for extra
traction.
Single Speed Transfer Case
Two Speed Transfer Case
The transfer case knob is located
to the left of the instrument panel
cluster. Use this knob to shift into
and out of the different Four-Wheel
Drive modes.
2 m : This setting is used for driving
in most street and highway
situations.
AUTO: This setting is ideal for
use when road surface traction
conditions are variable.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (21,1)
In Brief
4 m : Use the Four-Wheel-Drive
High position when extra traction is
needed, such as on snowy or icy
roads or in most off-road situations.
1-21
Vehicle Features
Radio(s)
4 n : Vehicles with a two speed
transfer case have a
Four-Wheel-Drive Low position. This
setting sends maximum power to all
four wheels. You might choose
Four-Wheel-Drive Low if you are
driving off-road in deep sand, deep
mud, deep snow, and while climbing
or descending steep hills.
N (Neutral): Vehicles with a
two speed transfer case have a
N (Neutral) position. Shift the
transfer case to N (Neutral) only
when towing the vehicle. See
Recreational Vehicle Towing on
page 10‑87 or Towing the Vehicle
on page 10‑87.
See Four-Wheel Drive (Two Speed
Automatic Transfer Case) on
page 9‑43 or Four-Wheel Drive
(Single Speed Automatic Transfer
Case) on page 9‑47.
Radio with USB, CD, and DVD (MP3)
O : Press to turn the system on
and off. Turn to increase or
decrease the volume.
BAND: Press to choose between
FM, AM, or XM™, if equipped.
f : Select radio stations.
© ¨ : Seek or scan stations.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
1-22
Black plate (22,1)
In Brief
4:
Press to switch the display
between the radio station frequency
and the time. While the ignition is
off, press this button to display the
time. Press to display additional text
information related to the current
FM-RDS or XM station; or CD, MP3,
or WMA song. If information is
available during XM, CD, MP3,
or WMA playback, the song title
information displays on the top line
of the display and artist information
displays on the bottom line. When
information is not available, “NO
INFO” displays.
For more information about these
and other radio features, see
Operation on page 7‑3.
For vehicles with a Rear Seat
Entertainment System (RSE) and
Rear Seat Audio System (RSA),
see Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System on page 7‑34 and Rear
Seat Audio (RSA) System on
page 7‑45 for more information.
Storing Radio Stations
Setting the Clock
A maximum of 36 stations can be
stored as favorites using the
six softkeys located below the radio
station frequency tabs and by using
the radio FAV button. Press FAV to
go through up to six pages of
favorites, each having six favorite
stations available per page. Each
page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or XM
stations.
To set the time and date for the
radio with CD, DVD, and USB Port:
For more information, see “Storing
Radio Stations” in AM-FM Radio on
page 7‑8.
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, then
press O, to turn the radio on.
2. Press H to display HR, MIN,
MM, DD, and YYYY (hour,
minute, month, day, and year).
3. Press the softkey located under
any one of the labels to be
changed.
4. To increase or decrease the time
or date, turn f clockwise or
counter‐clockwise.
For detailed instructions on setting
the clock for the vehicle's specific
audio system, see Clock on
page 5‑8.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (23,1)
In Brief
Satellite Radio
XM is a satellite radio service based
in the 48 contiguous United States
and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM satellite radio has a wide
variety of programming and
commercial-free music, coast to
coast, and in digital-quality sound.
A fee is required to receive the
XM service.
For more information, refer to:
.
www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 (U.S.)
.
www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 (Canada)
See Satellite Radio on page 7‑9.
Portable Audio Devices
This vehicle has an auxiliary input,
located on the audio faceplate,
and a USB port located on the
instrument panel or in the center
console. External devices such as
iPod®, laptop computers,
MP3 players, CD changers, USB
storage device, etc. can be
connected to the auxiliary port using
a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack or the
USB port depending on the audio
system.
1-23
Steering Wheel Controls
See Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑30
for further information.
Bluetooth®
For vehicles with a Bluetooth
system, it allows users with a
Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone to
make and receive hands-free calls
using the vehicle’s audio system
and controls.
The Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone
must be paired with the Bluetooth
system before it can be used in the
vehicle. Not all phones will support
all functions. For more information,
visit www.gm.com/bluetooth.
For more information, see Bluetooth
on page 7‑47.
If available, some audio controls
can be adjusted at the steering
wheel.
w/cx:
Press to select preset
or favorite radio stations, select
tracks on a CD/DVD, or to navigate
an iPod or USB device.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
1-24
Black plate (24,1)
In Brief
b g : Press to silence the vehicle
speakers only. Press again to turn
the sound on. Press and hold longer
than two seconds to interact with
OnStar® or Bluetooth systems,
if equipped.
Cruise Control
[ : Press to disengage cruise
control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
+ e − e : Press to increase or
decrease volume.
See Cruise Control on page 9‑55.
Navigation System
c x : Press to reject an
incoming call, or to end a call.
SRCE: Press to switch between
the radio and CD, and for equipped
vehicles, the DVD, front auxiliary,
and rear auxiliary.
¨:
Press to seek the next radio
station, the next track or chapter
while sourced to the CD or DVD
slot, or to select tracks and folders
on an iPod or USB device.
For more information, see Steering
Wheel Controls on page 5‑3.
SET − : Press to set the speed and
activate cruise control or make the
vehicle decelerate.
The cruise control buttons are
located on the left side of the
steering wheel.
T:
Press to turn the system on
or off. The indicator light is on when
cruise control is on and turns off
when cruise control is off.
+ RES : Press briefly to make the
vehicle resume to a previously set
speed, or press and hold to
accelerate.
If the vehicle has a navigation
system, there is a separate
Navigation System Manual that
includes information on the radio,
audio players, and navigation
system.
The navigation system provides
detailed maps of most major
freeways and roads. After a
destination has been set, the
system provides turn-by-turn
instructions for reaching the
destination. In addition, the system
can help locate a variety of points of
interest (POIs), such as banks,
airports, restaurants, and more.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (25,1)
In Brief
See the navigation system manual
for more information.
Side Blind Zone
Alert (SBZA)
If available, this feature will alert you
to vehicles located in the vehicle's
side blind zone. When the system
detects a vehicle in the side blind
zone, an amber SBZA display will
light up in the corresponding outside
side mirror.
The system is enabled at every
vehicle startup. It can be disabled
through the Driver Information
Center (DIC).
If the message SIDE BLIND ZONE
SYSTEM UNAVAILABLE appears
on the DIC, the system has been
disabled because the sensor is
blocked and cannot detect vehicles
in the blind zone. The sensor may
be blocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice,
slush, or even heavy rainstorms.
This message may also activate
during heavy rain or due to road
spray. The vehicle does not need
service.
See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
on page 9‑60 for more information.
Rear Vision
Camera (RVC)
If available, the rear vision camera
displays a view of the area behind
the vehicle when the vehicle is
shifted into R (Reverse). The
display will appear on either the
inside rearview mirror or navigation
screen, if equipped.
To clean the camera lens, located
above the license plate, rinse it with
water and wipe it with a soft cloth.
See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) on
page 9‑62.
1-25
Ultrasonic Parking Assist
If available, Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) uses sensors on the
rear bumper to detect objects while
parking the vehicle. URPA comes
on automatically when the shift lever
is moved into R (Reverse) and
operates at speeds less than 8 km/h
(5 mph). URPA uses audio beeps to
provide distance and system
information.
Keep the sensors on the vehicle's
rear bumper clean to ensure proper
operation.
The system can be disabled by
pressing the rear park aid disable
button located next to the radio.
See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
page 9‑58 for more information.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
1-26
Black plate (26,1)
In Brief
Power Outlets
Universal Remote System
Sunroof
The accessory power outlets can be
used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
There are two under the climate
controls, one inside the center floor
console, one on the rear of the
center floor console and one
accessory power outlet in the rear
cargo area on the passenger side.
The accessory power outlets are
powered, even with the ignition off.
Continuing to use accessory power
outlets while the ignition is in LOCK/
OFF may cause the vehicle's
battery to run down.
See Power Outlets on page 5‑9.
This system provides a way to
replace up to three remote control
transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door
openers, security systems, and
home automation devices.
Read the instructions completely
before attempting to program the
transmitter. Because of the steps
involved, it may be helpful to have
another person assist with
programming the transmitter.
See Universal Remote System on
page 5‑54.
There are two sunroof switches on
the overhead console above the
rearview mirror.
To open or close the sunroof, press
the open or close switch (A) to the
first detent position.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (27,1)
In Brief
To express open or close the
sunroof, press the open or close
switch (A) to the second detent
position and release. To stop the
movement, press the switch again.
Performance and
Maintenance
To automatically vent or close the
sunroof, press the vent open or
close switch (B).
If equipped, the vehicle has a
traction control system that limits
wheel spin and the StabiliTrak
system that assists with directional
control of the vehicle in difficult
driving conditions. Both systems
turn on automatically every time the
vehicle is started.
The sunroof also has a sunshade
that you can pull forward to block
the rays of the sun. The sunshade
must be opened and closed
manually.
See Sunroof on page 2‑23.
®
StabiliTrak System
.
.
To turn off traction control, press
and release 5 on the instrument
panel. F illuminates and the
appropriate DIC message
displays. See Ride Control
System Messages on page 5‑42.
To turn off both traction control
and StabiliTrak, press and hold
5 until F illuminates and the
appropriate DIC message
displays. See Ride Control
System Messages on page 5‑42.
.
1-27
Press and release 5 again to
turn on both systems.
For more information, see
StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑52.
Tire Pressure Monitor
This vehicle may have a Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
The TPMS warning light alerts you
to a significant loss in pressure of
one of the vehicle's tires. If the
warning light comes on, stop as
soon as possible and inflate the
tires to the recommended pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑22. The warning
light will remain on until the tire
pressure is corrected.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
1-28
Black plate (28,1)
In Brief
During cooler conditions, the low tire
pressure warning light may appear
when the vehicle is first started and
then turn off. This may be an early
indicator that the tire pressures are
getting low and the tires need to be
inflated to the proper pressure.
The TPMS does not replace normal
monthly tire maintenance. It is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressures.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 10‑55.
Engine Oil Life System
The engine oil life system calculates
engine oil life based on vehicle use
and, on most vehicles, displays a
DIC message when it is necessary
to change the engine oil and filter.
The oil life system should be reset
to 100% only following an oil
change.
Resetting the Oil Life System
To reset the Engine Oil Life System
on most vehicles:
1. Display OIL LIFE REMAINING
on the DIC. If the vehicle does
not have DIC buttons, the
vehicle must be in P (Park) to
access this display.
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET
button on the DIC, or the trip
odometer reset stem if the
vehicle does not have DIC
buttons, for more than
five seconds. The oil life will
change to 100%.
On all vehicles, the Engine Oil Life
System can be reset as follows:
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
the engine off.
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal
slowly three times within
five seconds.
3. Display OIL LIFE REMAINING
on the DIC. If the display shows
100%, the system is reset.
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑10.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge
and a yellow fuel cap can use either
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on
page 9‑69. For all other vehicles,
use only the unleaded gasoline
described under Recommended
Fuel on page 9‑68.
Driving for Better Fuel
Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel
mileage. Here are some driving tips
to get the best fuel economy
possible.
.
Avoid fast starts and accelerate
smoothly.
.
Brake gradually and avoid
abrupt stops.
.
Avoid idling the engine for long
periods of time.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (29,1)
In Brief
.
When road and weather
conditions are appropriate,
use cruise control.
Roadside Assistance
Program
.
Always follow posted speed
limits or drive more slowly
when conditions require.
U.S.: 1-800-243-8872
.
Keep vehicle tires properly
inflated.
.
Combine several trips into a
single trip.
.
Replace the vehicle's tires with
the same TPC Spec number
molded into the tire's sidewall
near the size.
.
Follow recommended scheduled
maintenance.
TTY Users (U.S.): 1-888-889-2438
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
Mexico: 01-800-466-0800
As the owner of a new Chevrolet,
you are automatically enrolled in
the Roadside Assistance program.
See Roadside Assistance Program
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑7 or
Roadside Assistance Program
(Mexico) on page 13‑9 for more
information.
1-29
Roadside Assistance and OnStar
(U.S. and Canada)
If you have an active OnStar
subscription, press the Q button
and the current GPS location will
be sent to an OnStar advisor who
will assess your problem, contact
Roadside Assistance, and relay
your exact location to get the help
you need.
Online Owner Center (U.S. and
Canada)
The Online Owner Center is a
complimentary service that includes
online service reminders, vehicle
maintenance tips, online owner
manual, special privileges,
and more.
Sign up today at:
www.chevyownercenter.com
(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
1-30
Black plate (30,1)
In Brief
OnStar®
OnStar uses several innovative
technologies and live Advisors to
provide a wide range of safety,
security, navigation, diagnostics,
and calling services.
Automatic Crash Response
In a crash, built‐in sensors can
automatically alert an OnStar
Advisor who is immediately
connected to the vehicle to
see if you need help.
How OnStar Service Works
Q : This blue button connects
you to a specially trained OnStar
Advisor to verify your account
information and to answer
questions.
] : Push this red emergency
button to get priority help from
specially trained OnStar Emergency
Advisors.
For a full description of OnStar
services and system limitations,
see the OnStar Owner's Guide in
the glove box.
X : Push this button for hands‐free,
voice‐activated calling and to give
voice commands for Turn‐by‐Turn
Navigation.
OnStar service is subject to the
OnStar Terms and Conditions
included in the OnStar Glove
Box Kit.
Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle
Assistance, Vehicle Diagnostics,
Remote Door Unlock, Roadside
Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn
Navigation, and Hands‐Free
Calling are available on most
vehicles. Not all OnStar services
are available on all vehicles. For
more information see the OnStar
Owner's Guide or visit
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
www.onstar.ca (Canada), contact
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY
1‐877‐248‐2080, or push Q to
speak with an OnStar Advisor
24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
OnStar service requires wireless
communication networks and the
Global Positioning System (GPS)
satellite network. Not all OnStar
services are available everywhere
or on all vehicles at all times.
OnStar service can’t work unless
your vehicle is in a place where
OnStar has an agreement with a
wireless service provider for service
in that area, and the wireless
service provider has coverage,
network capacity, reception, and
technology compatible with OnStar
service. Service involving location
information about your vehicle can’t
work unless GPS signals are
available, unobstructed, and
compatible with the OnStar
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (31,1)
In Brief
hardware. The vehicle has to have a
working electrical system and
adequate battery power for the
OnStar equipment to operate.
OnStar service may not work if the
OnStar equipment isn’t properly
installed or you haven’t maintained
it and your vehicle is in good
working order and in compliance
with all government regulations.
If you try to add, connect, or modify
any equipment or software in your
vehicle, OnStar service may not
work. Other problems OnStar can’t
control may prevent service to you,
such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
weather, electrical system design
and architecture of your vehicle,
damage to important parts of your
vehicle in a crash, or wireless phone
network congestion or jamming.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑18 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-210/220/310.
OnStar Steering Wheel
Controls
This vehicle may have a b g / c
x Talk/Mute button that can be
used to interact with OnStar
Hands-Free Calling. See Steering
Wheel Controls on page 5‑3 for
more information.
On some vehicles, the mute button
can be used to dial numbers into
voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner's
Guide for more information.
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if
the OnStar Advisor cannot be
heard.
If the light next to the OnStar
buttons is red, the system may not
be functioning properly. Push Q
and request a vehicle diagnostic
1-31
check. If the light appears clear
(no light is appearing), your OnStar
subscription has expired and all
services have been deactivated.
Push Q to confirm that the OnStar
equipment is active.
OnStar®
If the vehicle is equipped with an
active OnStar system, that system
may also record data in crash or
near crash-like situations. The
OnStar Terms and Conditions
provides information on data
collection and use and is available
in the OnStar Glove Box Kit, at
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
www.onstar.ca (Canada), or by
pushing Q and speaking to an
Advisor.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
1-32
Black plate (32,1)
In Brief
2 NOTES
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (1,1)
Keys, Doors and Windows
Keys, Doors and
Windows
Doors
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . .
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . .
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior Mirrors
Liftgate (Power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Liftgate (Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Vehicle Security
Keys and Locks
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-5
2-8
2-8
2-9
2-9
2-9
2-9
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . .
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . .
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-20
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Windows
2-14
2-14
2-15
2-16
Exterior Mirrors
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer-Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . .
Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2-17
2-18
2-18
2-18
2-19
2-19
2-20
2-20
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
2-2
Black plate (2,1)
Keys, Doors and Windows
Keys and Locks
See your dealer if a replacement
key or additional key is needed.
Keys
Notice: If the keys get locked in
the vehicle, it may have to be
damaged to get them out. Always
carry a spare key.
{ WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the ignition key is dangerous for
many reasons. Children or others
could be badly injured or even
killed. They could operate the
power windows or other controls
or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the
keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed
if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
The key is used for the ignition and
all door locks.
The key has a bar-coded key tag
that the dealer or qualified locksmith
can use to make new keys. Store
this information in a safe place, not
in the vehicle.
If you are locked out of the vehicle,
call the Roadside Assistance
Center. See Roadside Assistance
Program (U.S. and Canada) on
page 13‑7 or Roadside Assistance
Program (Mexico) on page 13‑9.
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑18 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-210/220/310.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (3,1)
Keys, Doors and Windows
If there is a decrease in the RKE
operating range:
.
Check the location. Other
vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
.
Check the transmitter's battery.
See “Battery Replacement” later
in this section.
.
The following functions may be
available if your vehicle has the
RKE system:
Check the distance. The
transmitter may be too far from
the vehicle.
.
If the transmitter is still not
working correctly, see your
dealer or a qualified technician
for service.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start):
For
vehicles with this feature, press to
start the engine from outside the
vehicle using the RKE transmitter.
See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2‑5 for additional information.
Q (Lock):
Press to lock all the
doors.
With Remote Start and Liftglass
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter functions work up to
60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle.
There are other conditions which
can affect the performance of the
transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑2.
2-3
If enabled through the Driver
Information Center (DIC), the turn
signal lamps flash once to indicate
locking has occurred. If enabled
through the DIC, the horn chirps
when the lock button is pressed
again within three seconds. See
Vehicle Personalization (With DIC
Buttons) on page 5‑46 for additional
information.
Pressing Q arms the content theft‐
deterrent system. See Anti-Theft
Alarm System on page 2‑14.
With Remote Start and Power
Liftgate and Liftglass
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
2-4
Black plate (4,1)
Keys, Doors and Windows
K (Unlock):
Press once to unlock
only the driver door. If K is pressed
again within three seconds, all
remaining doors unlock. The interior
lamps may come on and stay on for
20 seconds or until the ignition is
turned on.
If enabled through the DIC, the turn
signal lamps flash twice to indicate
unlocking has occurred. See Vehicle
Personalization (With DIC Buttons)
on page 5‑46. If enabled through
the DIC, the exterior lights turn on
briefly if it is dark enough outside.
See “Approach Lighting” under
Vehicle Personalization (With DIC
Buttons) on page 5‑46.
Pressing K on the RKE transmitter
disarms the content theft‐deterrent
system. See Anti-Theft Alarm
System on page 2‑14.
m (Liftglass):
Press and hold to
unlock the liftglass.
& (Power Liftgate): Press and
hold to open and close the liftgate.
The taillamps flash and a chime
sounds to indicate when the liftgate
is opening and closing.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic
Alarm): Press and release to
locate the vehicle. The turn signal
lamps flash and the horn sounds
three times.
Press and hold L for more than
two seconds to activate the panic
alarm. The turn signal lamps flash
and the horn sounds repeatedly for
30 seconds. The alarm turns off
when the ignition is moved to ON/
RUN or L is pressed again. The
ignition must be in LOCK/OFF for
the panic alarm to work.
The vehicle comes with two
transmitters. Each transmitter will
have a number on it, “1” or “2”.
These numbers correspond to
the driver of the vehicle. For
example, the memory seat position
for driver 1 will be recalled when
using the transmitter labeled “1”,
if enabled through the DIC. See
“Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals”
under Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3‑4 and Vehicle
Personalization (With DIC Buttons)
on page 5‑46 for more information.
Programming Transmitters to
the Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed
to this vehicle will work. If a
transmitter is lost or stolen, a
replacement can be purchased and
programmed through your dealer.
When the replacement transmitter is
programmed to this vehicle, all
remaining transmitters must also be
reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen
transmitters will no longer work
once the new transmitter is
programmed. The vehicle can have
a maximum of eight transmitters
programmed to it. See your dealer
to program transmitters to the
vehicle.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (5,1)
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-5
Battery Replacement
To replace the battery:
Remote Vehicle Start
Replace the battery if the REPLACE
BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
message displays in the DIC. See
“REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE
KEY” under Key and Lock
Messages on page 5‑41 for
additional information.
1. Separate the transmitter with a
flat, thin object, such as a flat
head screwdriver.
If available, this feature allows you
to start the engine from outside of
the vehicle. It may also start up the
vehicle's heating or air conditioning
systems and rear window defogger.
Normal operation of the system will
return after the key is turned to the
ON/RUN position.
Notice: When replacing the
battery, do not touch any of the
circuitry on the transmitter. Static
from your body could damage the
transmitter.
.
Carefully insert the tool
into the notch located
along the parting line of the
transmitter. Do not insert
the tool too far. Stop as
soon as resistance is felt.
.
Twist the tool until the
transmitter is separated.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not
use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive
side facing down. Replace with a
CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Snap the transmitter back
together.
If the vehicle has an automatic
climate control system, the climate
control system will default to a
heating or cooling mode depending
on the outside temperatures. If the
vehicle does not have an automatic
climate control system, the system
will turn on at the setting the vehicle
was set to when the vehicle was
last turned off.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
2-6
Black plate (6,1)
Keys, Doors and Windows
During a remote start, if the vehicle
has an automatic climate control
system and heated seats, the
heated seats will turn on during
colder outside temperatures and will
shut off when the key is turned to
ON/RUN. If the vehicle does not
have an automatic climate control
system, during remote start,
manually turn the heated seats on
and off. See Heated Front Seats on
page 3‑9 for additional information.
Laws in some communities may
restrict the use of remote starters.
For example, some laws may
require a person using the remote
start to have the vehicle in view
when doing so. Check local
regulations for any requirements
on remote starting of vehicles.
Do not use the remote start feature
if the vehicle is low on fuel. The
vehicle may run out of fuel.
If the vehicle has the remote start
feature, the RKE transmitter
functions will have an increased
range of operation. However, the
range may be less while the vehicle
is running.
There are other conditions which
can affect the performance of the
transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑2 for
additional information.
/ (Remote Start):
This button will
be on the RKE transmitter if the
vehicle has remote start.
To start the vehicle using the remote
start feature:
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle.
2. Press
Q.
3. Immediately press and hold /
until the turn signal lamps flash.
If you cannot see the vehicle's
lamps, press and hold / for
two to four seconds.
When the vehicle starts, the
parking lamps will turn on and
remain on while the vehicle is
running. The doors will be
locked and the climate control
system may come on.
The engine will continue to run
for 10 minutes. Repeat the steps
for a 10-minute time extension.
Remote start can be extended
only once.
After entering the vehicle during a
remote start, insert and turn the key
to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (7,1)
Keys, Doors and Windows
To cancel a remote start:
.
Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle and press and hold /
until the parking lamps turn off.
.
Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
.
Turn the ignition on and then
back off.
The vehicle can be remote started
two separate times between driving
sequences. The engine will run for
10 minutes after each remote start.
Or, you can extend the engine run
time by another 10 minutes within
the first 10 minute remote start time
frame, and before the engine stops.
2-7
For example, if Q and then / are
pressed again after the vehicle
has been running for 5 minutes,
10 minutes are added, allowing
the engine to run for 15 minutes.
Also, the engine will turn off during a
remote vehicle start if the coolant
temperature gets too high or if the
oil pressure gets low.
The additional 10 minutes are
considered a second remote
vehicle start.
If the vehicle does not have the
remote vehicle start feature, it may
have the remote start ready feature.
This feature allows your dealer to
add the manufacturer's remote
vehicle start feature.
Once two remote starts, or a single
remote start with one time extension
has been done, the vehicle must be
started with the key. After the key
is removed from the ignition, the
vehicle can be remote started again.
The vehicle cannot be remote
started if the key is in the ignition,
the hood is not closed, or if there
is an emission control system
malfunction and the check engine
light is on.
Remote Start Ready
See your dealer to add the
manufacturer's remote vehicle
start feature to the vehicle.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
2-8
Black plate (8,1)
Keys, Doors and Windows
Door Locks
WARNING (Continued)
{ WARNING
Unlocked doors can be
dangerous.
.
.
Passengers, especially
children, can easily open the
doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is
locked, the handle will not
open it. The chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in
a crash is increased if the
doors are not locked. So,
all passengers should wear
safety belts properly and
the doors should be locked
whenever the vehicle is
driven.
Young children who get into
unlocked vehicles may be
unable to get out. A child can
be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
(Continued)
injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Always lock the
vehicle whenever leaving it.
.
Power Door Locks
With power door locks, the switches
on the front doors can be used to
lock and unlock the vehicle.
Outsiders can easily enter
through an unlocked door
when you slow down or stop
the vehicle. Locking the doors
can help prevent this from
happening.
There are several ways to lock and
unlock the vehicle.
From outside, use the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or
the key in the driver door.
From inside, use the power door
locks or manual door locks. To lock
or unlock the door with the manual
locks, push down or pull up on the
manual lock knob.
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
doors.
Q (Lock):
Press to lock the doors.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (9,1)
Keys, Doors and Windows
Delayed Locking
When locking the doors with the
power lock switch and a door or the
liftgate is open, the doors will lock
five seconds after the last door is
closed. You will hear three chimes
to signal that the delayed locking
feature is in use.
Pressing the power lock switch
twice will override the delayed
locking feature and immediately
lock all the doors.
This feature will not operate if the
key is in the ignition.
You can program this feature using
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See “Delay Door Lock” under
Vehicle Personalization (With DIC
Buttons) on page 5‑46.
Automatic Door Locks
The vehicle may have an automatic
lock/unlock feature. This feature
can be programmed using the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
2-9
See Vehicle Personalization (With
DIC Buttons) on page 5‑46 for more
information on DIC programming.
Lockout Protection
If the driver side power door lock
switch is pressed when the driver
door is open and the key is in the
ignition, all of the doors will lock and
then the driver door will unlock.
If the passenger side power door
lock switch is pressed when the
front passenger door is open and
the key is in the ignition, all of the
doors will lock and then the front
passenger door will unlock.
Safety Locks
The vehicle has rear door security
locks to prevent passengers from
opening the rear doors from the
inside.
Open the rear doors to access the
security locks on the inside edge of
each door.
To set the locks, insert a key into
the slot and turn it to the horizontal
position. The door can only be
opened from the outside with the
door unlocked. To return the door to
normal operation, turn the slot to the
vertical position.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
2-10
Black plate (10,1)
Keys, Doors and Windows
Doors
WARNING (Continued)
Liftgate (Power)
.
Power Liftgate Operation
{ WARNING
Adjust the Climate Control
system to a setting that
brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the
highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle if it is driven with the
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with
any objects that pass through the
seal between the body and the
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
On vehicles with a power liftgate the
button is on the overhead console.
If the vehicle must be driven with
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:
The vehicle must be in P (Park) to
use the power liftgate feature.
.
Close all of the windows.
.
Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
(Continued)
.
If the vehicle is equipped with
a power liftgate, disable the
power liftgate function.
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑35.
& : Press the top of the button to
open or close the power liftgate.
OFF: Press the bottom of the
button for manual operation of the
power liftgate.
The taillamps will flash and a chime
will sound when the power liftgate is
moving.
{ WARNING
You or others could be injured if
caught in the path of the power
liftgate. Make sure there is no one
in the way of the liftgate as it is
opening and closing.
Notice: If you open the liftgate
without checking for overhead
obstructions such as a garage
door, you could damage the
liftgate or the liftgate glass.
Always check to make sure the
area above and behind the liftgate
is clear before opening it.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (11,1)
Keys, Doors and Windows
The power liftgate can be power
opened and closed in the
following ways:
.
Press and hold & on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter until the liftgate starts
moving. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation
on page 2‑3.
.
Press & on the overhead
console.
.
Press the touchpad on the
outside liftgate handle.
Pressing the buttons, or touchpad
switch a second time while the
liftgate is moving reverses the
direction.
l : The liftgate can also be
closed by pressing this button
next to the liftgate latch.
Press the button a second time
during liftgate operation to reverse
that operation.
The power liftgate may be
temporarily disabled under extreme
temperatures, or under low battery
conditions. If this occurs, the liftgate
can still be operated manually.
If the transmission is shifted out of
P (Park) while the power function is
in progress, the liftgate power
function will continue to completion.
If the transmission is shifted out of
P (Park) and the vehicle accelerates
before the power liftgate latches
closed, the liftgate may reverse to
the open position. Cargo could fall
out of the vehicle. Always make
sure the power liftgate is closed and
latched before you drive away.
If you power open the liftgate and
the liftgate support struts have lost
pressure, the lamps will flash and a
chime will sound. The liftgate will
stay open temporarily, then slowly
close. See your dealer for service
before using the liftgate.
2-11
Obstacle Detection Features
If the liftgate encounters an obstacle
during a power open or close cycle,
a warning chime will sound and the
liftgate will automatically reverse
direction to the full closed or open
position. After removing the
obstruction, the power liftgate
operation can be used again.
If the liftgate encounters multiple
obstacles on the same power cycle,
the power function will deactivate,
and you must manually open or
close the liftgate. The REAR
ACCESS OPEN warning message
in the Driver Information Center
(DIC) will indicate that the liftgate
is open. After removing the
obstructions, manually open the
liftgate to the full open position or
close the liftgate to the fully closed
and latched position. The liftgate will
now resume normal power
operation.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
2-12
Black plate (12,1)
Keys, Doors and Windows
Pinch sensors are located on the
sides of the liftgate. If an object is
caught between the liftgate and the
body and presses against this
sensor, the liftgate will reverse
direction and open fully. The liftgate
will remain open until it is activated
again or closed manually. Do not
force the liftgate open or closed
during a power cycle.
Manual Operation of Power
Liftgate
To change the liftgate to manual
operation, press the switch on the
overhead console to the OFF
position.
With the power liftgate disabled and
all of the doors unlocked, the liftgate
can be manually opened and
closed.
To open the liftgate, press the
touchpad on the handle on the
outside of the liftgate, and lift the
gate open. To close the liftgate, use
the pull cup to lower the liftgate and
close. The liftgate latch will power
close. Always close the liftgate
before driving.
If the RKE button or the power close
button on the liftgate is pressed
while power operation is disabled,
the lamps will flash three times,
but the liftgate will not move.
It is not recommended that you
drive with the liftgate open,
however, if you must drive with the
liftgate open, the liftgate should be
set to manual operation by pressing
the OFF switch on the center
console.
The liftgate has an electric latch.
If the battery is disconnected or
has low voltage, the liftgate will
not open. The liftgate will resume
operation when the battery is
reconnected and charged.
If the battery is properly connected
with adequate voltage, the switch is
not disabled, and the liftgate still will
not function, your vehicle should be
taken to a dealer for service.
Liftgate (Manual)
{ WARNING
It can be dangerous to drive
with the liftglass or liftgate open
because carbon monoxide (CO)
gas can come into your vehicle.
You cannot see or smell CO.
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death.
If you must drive with the liftglass
or liftgate open, or if electrical
wiring or other cable connections
must pass through the seal
between the body and the
liftglass or liftgate:
.
Make sure all other windows
are shut.
.
Turn the fan on your heating
or cooling system to its
highest speed with the
recirculation mode off. That
will force outside air into your
vehicle. See Climate Control
(Continued)
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (13,1)
Keys, Doors and Windows
The liftgate or liftglass cannot be
opened if the rear wipers are in
motion. Attempting to open the
liftgate or liftglass while the rear
wipers are in motion will cause the
release of the liftglass or liftgate to
delay until the wipers are moved off
the liftglass.
WARNING (Continued)
Systems on page 9‑35 or
Dual Automatic Climate
Control System on page 8‑4.
.
If you have air outlets on or
under the instrument panel,
open them all the way.
.
If your vehicle has a power
liftgate, disable the power
liftgate function.
See Engine Exhaust on
page 9‑35.
Press K on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter or use the
power door lock switches to unlock
the liftgate. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 2‑3.
2-13
On vehicles with a liftglass, press
the button on the underside of the
license pocket applique (A) to open
it. The liftglass can also be opened
by pressing m on the RKE
transmitter.
To open the entire liftgate, press the
touchpad on the underside of the
liftgate handle (B). The vehicle must
be in PARK (P) to open the liftgate.
To close the liftgate, use the pull
cup or pull strap.
Both the liftglass and liftgate have
an electric latch. If the battery is
disconnected or has low voltage,
the liftglass and liftgate will not
open. The liftglass and liftgate will
resume operation when the battery
is reconnected and charged.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
2-14
Black plate (14,1)
Keys, Doors and Windows
Power Assist Steps
Vehicle Security
The vehicle may have power assist
steps.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent
features; however, they do not make
it impossible to steal.
Anti-Theft Alarm System
Your vehicle has a content
theft-deterrent alarm system.
The assist steps cannot be disabled
in the extended position.
If the delayed locking feature is
turned on, the theft‐deterrent
system will not start the arming
process until the last door is
closed and the delay timer has
expired. See Delayed Locking
on page 2‑9.
3. Close all doors. The security
light should go off after about
30 seconds. The alarm is not
armed until the security light
goes off.
The switch used to disable the
power assist steps is located on the
center console below the climate
control system.
The power assist steps
automatically extend from beneath
the vehicle on the side in which the
door has been opened. Once the
door is closed, the assist steps
automatically move back under the
vehicle after a brief delay. The
vehicle must not be moving for the
assist steps to extend or retract.
arming. If a door is open when
the doors are locked, the
security light will flash.
This is the security light.
To arm the theft-deterrent system:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
or the power door lock switch.
The security light will come on to
inform the driver the system is
If a locked driver door is opened
without using the RKE transmitter,
a 10-second pre-alarm will occur.
The horn will chirp and the lights
will flash. If the key is not placed in
the ignition and turned to START or
the door is not unlocked by pressing
the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter during the 10-second
pre-alarm, the alarm will go off.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (15,1)
Keys, Doors and Windows
Your vehicle's headlamps will flash
and the horn will sound for about
30 seconds, then will turn off to save
the battery power.
The theft-deterrent system will not
activate if the doors are locked with
the vehicle's key or the manual door
lock. It activates only if you use the
power door lock switch with the door
open or the RKE transmitter. You
should also remember that you can
start your vehicle with the correct
ignition key if the alarm has been
set off.
To avoid setting off the alarm by
accident:
.
.
If you do not want to activate
the theft-deterrent system, the
vehicle should be locked with
the door key after the doors are
closed.
Always unlock the doors with the
RKE transmitter. Unlocking a
door any other way will set off
the alarm if it is armed.
If you set off the alarm by accident,
press unlock on the RKE transmitter
or place the key in the ignition and
turn it to START to turn off the
alarm. The alarm will not stop if you
try to unlock a door any other way.
Testing the Alarm
To test the alarm:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower
the driver window and open the
driver door.
2. Activate the system by locking
the doors with the power door
lock switch while the door is
open, or with the RKE
transmitter.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the
door and wait for the security
light to go out.
4. Then reach in through the
window, unlock the door with the
manual door lock and open the
door. This should set off the
alarm.
2-15
While the alarm is set, the power
door unlock switch will not work.
If the alarm does not sound when
it should but the headlamps flash,
check to see if the horn works. The
horn fuse may be blown. To replace
the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 10‑39.
If the alarm does not sound or the
headlamps do not flash, the vehicle
should be serviced by your dealer.
Immobilizer
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑18 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-210/220/310.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
2-16
Black plate (16,1)
Keys, Doors and Windows
Immobilizer Operation
This vehicle has PASS-Key® III+
(Personalized Automotive Security
System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key III+ is a passive
theft-deterrent system.
The system is automatically armed
when the key is removed from the
ignition.
The system is automatically
disarmed when the key is turned
to ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,
or START from the LOCK/OFF
position.
You do not have to manually arm
or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if
there is a problem with arming or
disarming the theft-deterrent
system.
When the PASS-Key III+ system
senses that someone is using the
wrong key, it prevents the vehicle
from starting. Anyone using a
trial-and-error method to start the
vehicle will be discouraged because
of the high number of electrical key
codes.
If the engine does not start and the
security light on the instrument
panel cluster comes on when trying
to start the vehicle, there may be a
problem with the theft-deterrent
system. Turn the ignition off and try
again.
If the engine still does not start, and
the key appears to be undamaged,
try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the
fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 10‑39. If the
engine still does not start with the
other key, the vehicle needs service.
If the vehicle does start, the first key
may be faulty. See your dealer who
can service the PASS-Key III+ to
have a new key made.
It is possible for the PASS-Key III+
decoder to learn the transponder
value of a new or replacement key.
Up to 10 keys may be programmed
for the vehicle. The following
procedure is for programming
additional keys only. If all the
currently programmed keys are lost
or do not operate, you must see
your dealer or a locksmith who can
service PASS-Key III+ to have keys
made and programmed to the
system.
See your dealer or a locksmith who
can service PASS-Key III+ to get a
new key blank cut exactly as the
ignition key that operates the
system.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (17,1)
Keys, Doors and Windows
To program the new additional key:
1. Verify that the new key has
a 1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the original, already
programmed key in the ignition
and start the engine. If the
engine will not start, see your
dealer for service.
3. After the engine has started,
turn the key to LOCK/OFF,
and remove the key.
4. Insert the new key to be
programmed and turn it to
the ON/RUN position within
five seconds of turning the
ignition to the LOCK/OFF
position in Step 3.
The security light will turn off
once the key has been
programmed.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if
additional keys are to be
programmed.
If you lose or damage your
PASS-Key III+ key, see your dealer
or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key III+ to have a new
key made.
Do not leave the key or device
that disarms or deactivates the
theft-deterrent system in the
vehicle.
2-17
Exterior Mirrors
Convex Mirrors
{ WARNING
A convex mirror can make things,
like other vehicles, look farther
away than they really are. If you
cut too sharply into the right lane,
you could hit a vehicle on the
right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
The passenger side mirror is convex
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
2-18
Black plate (18,1)
Keys, Doors and Windows
Manual Mirrors
Adjust the outside mirrors for a
clearer view.
Using hood-mounted air deflectors
and add-on convex mirror
attachments could decrease
mirror performance.
Trailer-Tow Mirrors
The lower portion of the mirror is
convex. A convex mirror's surface is
curved to see more from the driver
seat. The convex mirror can be
adjusted manually to the driver
preferred position for better vision.
The mirror may have a turn signal
arrow that flashes in the direction
of the turn or lane change.
Power Mirrors
To adjust each mirror:
1. Press (A) or (B) to select the
driver or passenger side mirror.
2. Press the arrows on the control
pad to move the mirror up,
down, right, or left.
3. Adjust each outside mirror so
that a little of the vehicle and
the area behind it can be seen.
4. Press either (A) or (B) again to
deselect the mirror.
The mirrors may also include a
memory function that works with the
memory seats. See “Memory Seat,
Mirrors, and Pedals” under Power
Seat Adjustment on page 3‑4 for
more information.
If the vehicle has towing mirrors,
they can be adjusted for a clearer
view of the objects behind you.
Manually pull out the mirror head to
extend it for better visibility when
towing a trailer.
Vehicles with outside power mirrors
have the controls on the driver door
armrest.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (19,1)
Keys, Doors and Windows
Folding Mirrors
Resetting the Power Foldaway
Mirrors
Reset the power foldaway mirrors if:
Vehicles with outside power
foldaway mirrors have the controls
located on the driver door armrest.
Power Foldaway
1. Press (A) to fold the mirrors
out to the driving position.
2. Press (B) to fold the mirrors
in to the folded position.
.
The mirrors are accidentally
obstructed while folding.
.
They are accidentally manually
folded/unfolded.
.
The mirrors will not stay in the
unfolded position.
.
The mirrors shake and flutter
at normal driving speeds.
Fold and unfold them one time
using the mirror controls to reset
them to their normal position.
Manual Foldaway
Manually fold the mirrors inward
to prevent damage when going
through an automatic car wash.
To fold, push the mirrors toward the
vehicle. Push the mirrors outward,
to return to its original position.
2-19
Turn Signal Indicator
The vehicle may have a turn signal
indicator on the mirror. An arrow on
the mirror flashes in the direction of
the turn or lane change.
Ground Illumination Lamps
The mirrors may also include
ground illumination lamps in the
base of the mirror. These lamps
help to see the area near the
base of the front doors when
it is dark out.
Heated Mirrors
For vehicles with heated mirrors:
< (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to heat the mirrors.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 8‑4 or Climate
Control Systems on page 8‑1 for
more information.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
2-20
Black plate (20,1)
Keys, Doors and Windows
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
Park Tilt Mirrors
If your vehicle has the Side Blind
Zone Alert (SBZA) system, see Side
Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on
page 9‑60.
Vehicles with the memory package
have a passenger and/or driver
mirror that tilts to a preselected
position when the vehicle is in
R (Reverse). This feature lets the
driver view the curb when parallel
parking. The mirror(s) return to the
original position when the vehicle is
shifted out of R (Reverse), or the
ignition is turned off.
Automatic Dimming
Mirror
Vehicles with the dimming feature
have a driver outside mirror that
adjusts for the glare of headlamps
behind you. See Manual Rearview
Mirror on page 2‑20 for more
information.
Turn this feature on or off through
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See Vehicle Personalization (With
DIC Buttons) on page 5‑46 for more
information.
Interior Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
Hold the mirror in the center to
move it for a clearer view of behind
your vehicle. Adjust the mirror to
avoid glare from the headlamps
behind you. Push the tab at the
bottom of the mirror forward for
daytime use and pull it for
nighttime use.
Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror
The vehicle may have an automatic
dimming inside rearview mirror.
Automatic dimming reduces the
glare from the headlamps of the
vehicle behind you. The dimming
feature comes on and the indicator
light illuminates each time the
ignition is turned to start.
O (On/Off):
Press to turn the
dimming feature on or off.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (21,1)
Keys, Doors and Windows
The vehicle may also have a Rear
Vision Camera (RVC). See Rear
Vision Camera (RVC) on page 9‑62
for more information.
If the vehicle has RVC, the O button
for turning the dimming feature on or
off will not be available.
Vehicles with OnStar have three
additional control buttons for the
OnStar system. See your dealer for
more information about OnStar and
how to subscribe to it. See the
OnStar Owner Guide for more
information about the services
OnStar provides.
Cleaning the Mirror
Do not spray glass cleaner directly
on the mirror. Use a soft towel
dampened with water.
2-21
Windows
{ WARNING
Leaving children, helpless adults,
or pets in a vehicle with the
windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer
permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a
child, a helpless adult, or a pet
alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
The vehicle aerodynamics are
designed to improve fuel economy
performance. This may result in a
pulsing sound when either rear
window is down and the front
windows are up. To reduce the
sound, open either a front window
or the sunroof (if equipped).
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
2-22
Black plate (22,1)
Keys, Doors and Windows
Power Windows
Express Down Windows
Windows that have the express‐
down feature allow the windows to
be lowered without holding the
switch. Press the window switch
fully and release it to activate the
express‐down feature. The express
mode can be canceled at any time
by briefly pressing, or pulling the
switch.
{ WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the keys is dangerous for many
reasons. Children or others could
be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power
windows or other controls or even
make the vehicle move. The
windows will function and they
could be seriously injured or killed
if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave keys in a
vehicle with children.
When there are children in the
rear seat use the window lockout
button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
Window Lockout
The power window controls are
located on each of the side doors.
The driver door also has switches
that control the passenger and rear
windows. The power windows work
when the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY, or in Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). See
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 9‑32
Press the switch to lower the
window. Pull up the front of the
switch to raise the window.
o (Window Lockout):
The
window lockout switch is on the
driver door. This feature prevents
the rear passenger windows from
operating, except from the driver
position. Press the switch to turn
the lockout feature on or off. An
indicator light shows the feature
is on.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (23,1)
Keys, Doors and Windows
Sun Visors
Roof
Sunroof
2-23
The sunroof only operates when
the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY, or in Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). See
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 9‑32 for more information.
To open or close the sunroof, press
the open or close switch (A) to the
first detent position.
To express open or close the
sunroof, press the open or close
switch (A) to the second detent
position and release. To stop the
movement, press the switch again.
Pull the sun visor down to block
glare. Detach the sun visor from the
center mount to pivot to the side
window, or to extend along the rod,
if available.
A. Open or Close Sunroof
B. Vent
On vehicles with a sunroof, there
are two sunroof switches on the
overhead console above the
rearview mirror.
The sunroof has a comfort stop
feature which stops the sunroof from
opening to the full-open position.
From the comfort stop position,
press the open or close switch (A) a
second time to open the sunroof to
the full-open position.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
2-24
Black plate (24,1)
Keys, Doors and Windows
water drainage system. Periodically
open the sunroof and remove any
obstacles or loose debris. Wipe the
sunroof seal and roof sealing area
using a clean cloth, mild soap, and
water. Do not remove grease from
the sunroof.
To automatically vent or close the
sunroof, press the vent open or
close switch (B).
When the sunroof is opened, an air
deflector will automatically raise.
The air deflector will retract when
the sunroof is closed.
The sunroof also has a sunshade
which can be pulled forward to block
sun rays. The sunshade must be
opened and closed manually.
If an object is in the path of the
sunroof while it is closing, the
anti-pinch feature will detect the
object and stop the sunroof.
Dirt and debris may collect on the
sunroof seal or in the track. This
could cause an issue with sunroof
operation, noise, or plugging the
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (1,1)
Seats and Restraints
Seats and
Restraints
Head Restraints
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Front Seats
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Heated and Ventilated Front
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Rear Seats
Heated Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Safety Belts
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-35
Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Airbag System
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-39
When Should an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-50
Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-51
Replacing Airbag System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-52
3-1
Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child Restraint Systems . . . . .
Where to Put the Restraint . . .
Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . .
Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seat Position) . . . . . . . .
Securing Child Restraints
(Center Front Seat
Position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing Child Restraints
(Right Front Seat
Position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-52
3-54
3-57
3-60
3-61
3-69
3-69
3-72
3-72
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-2
Black plate (2,1)
Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
The front seats have adjustable
head restraints in the outboard
seating positions.
{ WARNING
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not
drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of the restraint is at the same
height as the top of the occupant's
head. This position reduces the
chance of a neck injury in a crash.
Pull the head restraint up to raise it.
To lower the head restraint, press
the button, located on the top of the
seatback, and push the
restraint down.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (3,1)
Seats and Restraints
Push down on the head restraint
after the button is released to make
sure that it is locked in place.
The head restraints are not
designed to be removed.
The vehicle's 2nd-row seats have
head restraints in the outboard
seating positions that cannot be
adjusted.
The vehicle's 3rd-row seat,
if equipped, has headrests that
can be adjusted up and down.
3-3
Front Seats
Seat Adjustment
{ WARNING
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
To adjust the seat:
1. Lift the bar under the front edge
of the seat cushion to unlock
the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the bar.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure the seat is
locked in place.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-4
Black plate (4,1)
Seats and Restraints
Center Seat
Power Seat Adjustment
If equipped, the center front
seatback doubles as an armrest and
cupholder/storage area for the driver
and passenger when the center
front seat is not used. Do not use it
as a seating position when the
seatback is folded down.
To adjust the seatback, see “Power
Reclining Seatbacks” under
Reclining Seatbacks on page 3‑7.
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and
Pedals
To adjust a power seat, if equipped:
.
Move the seat forward or
rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.
.
If available, raise or lower the
front or rear part of the seat
cushion by moving the front or
rear of the control up or down.
.
If available, raise or lower the
entire seat by moving the entire
control up or down.
On vehicles with the memory
feature, the controls on the driver
door are used to program and recall
memory settings for the driver seat,
outside mirrors, and the adjustable
throttle and brake pedals,
if equipped.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (5,1)
Seats and Restraints
Storing Memory Positions
Memory Remote Recall
To save into memory:
The memory feature can recall the
driver seat, outside mirrors, and
pedals, if available, to stored
positions when entering the vehicle.
1. Adjust the driver seat, seatback
recliner, both outside mirrors,
and the throttle and brake
pedals, if available.
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑18
and Adjustable Throttle and
Brake Pedal on page 9‑28 for
more information.
Not all mirrors and adjustable
throttles and brake pedals will
have the ability to save and
recall their positions.
2. Press and hold “1” until
two beeps sound.
3. Repeat for a second driver
position using “2.”
To recall, press and release “1” or
“2.” The vehicle must be in P (Park).
A single beep will sound. The seat,
outside mirrors, and adjustable
throttle and brake pedals will move
to the position previously stored for
the identified driver.
To activate, unlock the driver
door with the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. The driver
seat, outside mirrors, and adjustable
pedals, if available, will move to the
memory position associated with the
transmitter used to unlock the
vehicle.
This feature can be turned on or off
using the vehicle personalization
menu. See “Memory Seat Recall”
under Vehicle Personalization (With
DIC Buttons) on page 5‑46 for more
information.
To stop recall movement, press one
of the power seat controls, memory
buttons, or power mirror buttons,
or the adjustable pedal switch.
3-5
If something has blocked the driver
seat and/or the adjustable pedals
while recalling a memory position,
the recall may stop. Remove the
obstruction; then press and hold the
appropriate manual control for the
memory item that is not recalling
for two seconds. Try recalling the
memory position again by pressing
the appropriate memory button.
If the memory position is still not
recalling, see the dealer for service.
Easy Exit Driver Seat
This feature can move the seat
rearward to allow extra room to
exit the vehicle.
B (Easy Exit Driver Seat):
Press
to recall the easy exit seat position.
The vehicle must be in P (Park).
If the easy exit seat feature is
programmed on in the vehicle
personalization menu, automatic
seat movement occurs when the
ignition key is removed.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-6
Black plate (6,1)
Seats and Restraints
A single beep sounds. The driver
seat moves back approximately
8 cm (3 in). To move the seat back
farther, press the easy exit seat
button again until the seat is all
the way back.
Lumbar Adjustment
Manual Lumbar
If something has blocked the driver
seat while recalling the exit position,
the recall may stop. Remove the
obstruction; then press and hold
the power seat control rearward for
two seconds. Try recalling the exit
position again. If the exit position is
still not recalling, see the dealer for
service.
See “Easy Exit Recall” and “Easy
Exit Setup” under Vehicle
Personalization (With DIC Buttons)
on page 5‑46 for more information.
Power Lumbar
If equipped, increase or decrease
manual lumbar support by turning
the knob forward or rearward.
To adjust the power lumbar support,
if equipped:
.
On vehicles with two-way
lumbar, press and hold the top
or bottom of the control to
increase or decrease lumbar
support.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (7,1)
Seats and Restraints
.
On vehicles with four-way
lumbar, press and hold the front
or rear of the control to increase
or decrease lumbar support. To
raise or lower the height of the
support, press and hold the top
or bottom of the control.
Reclining Seatbacks
{ WARNING
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job when reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its
job because it will not be against
your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash, you could
go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
(Continued)
3-7
WARNING (Continued)
The lap belt cannot do its job
either. In a crash, the belt could
go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at
your pelvic bones. This could
cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the
vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the
safety belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if
the vehicle is moving.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-8
Black plate (8,1)
Seats and Restraints
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
To return the seatback to the upright
position:
{ WARNING
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
To adjust a manual seatback:
1. Lift the lever.
{ WARNING
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
The seatback will automatically
fold forward.
2. To recline, move the seatback
rearward to the desired position,
then release the lever to lock the
seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (9,1)
Seats and Restraints
Power Reclining Seatbacks
3-9
Heated Front Seats
{ WARNING
To recline a power seatback,
if equipped:
.
Tilt the top of the control
rearward to recline.
.
Tilt the top of the control forward
to raise.
If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin, the
seat heater may cause burns
even at low temperatures. To
reduce the risk of burns, people
with such a condition should use
care when using the seat heater,
especially for long periods of
time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
cover, or similar item. This may
cause the seat heater to
overheat. An overheated seat
heater may cause a burn or
may damage the seat.
If available, the buttons are on the
front doors.
I (Heated Seatback):
Press to
heat the seatback only.
J (Heated Seat and Seatback):
Press to heat the seat and
seatback.
Press the button once for the
highest setting. With each press of
the button, the heated seat will
change to the next lower setting,
and then to the off setting. The
lights indicate three for the highest
setting and one for the lowest.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-10
Black plate (10,1)
Seats and Restraints
The passenger seat may take
longer to heat up.
The heated seats will be canceled
10 seconds after the ignition is
turned off.
Remote Start Heated Seats
When it is cold outside, the heated
seats may turn on automatically
during a remote vehicle start. The
heated seats will be canceled when
the ignition is turned on. Press the
desired button to use the heated
seats after the vehicle is started.
Heated and Ventilated
Front Seats
{ WARNING
If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin, the
seat heater may cause burns
even at low temperatures. See
the Warning under Heated Front
Seats on page 3‑9.
If available, the buttons are on the
front doors.
The lights on the heated seat
buttons do not turn on during a
remote start.
H (Cooled Seat):
The temperature performance of an
unoccupied seat may be reduced.
This is normal.
heat the seatback only.
See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2‑5 for more information.
Press to cool
the seat.
I (Heated Seatback):
Press to
J (Heated Seat and Seatback):
Press to heat the seat and
seatback.
Press the button once for the
highest setting. With each press of
the button, the seat will change to
the next lower setting, and then to
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (11,1)
Seats and Restraints
the off setting. The lights indicate
three for the highest setting and
one for the lowest.
The heated and cooled seats turn
off automatically when the ignition is
turned off. To use this feature after
restarting the vehicle, press the
desired button again.
Remote Start Heated Seats
When it is cold outside, the heated
seats may turn on automatically
during a remote vehicle start. The
heated seats will be canceled when
the ignition is turned on. Press the
desired button to use the heated
seats after the vehicle is started.
The lights on the heated seat
buttons do not turn on during a
remote start.
The temperature performance of an
unoccupied seat may be reduced.
This is normal.
See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2‑5 for more information.
3-11
Rear Seats
Heated Rear Seats
{ WARNING
If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin, the
seat heater may cause burns
even at low temperatures. See
the Warning under Heated Front
Seats on page 3‑9.
If available, the buttons are on the
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) panel on the
rear of the center console.
Press M or L to heat the left
outboard or right outboard seat
cushion. An indicator on the RSA
display appears when this feature
is on.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-12
Black plate (12,1)
Seats and Restraints
Press the button once for the
highest setting. With each press of
the button, the heated seat changes
to the next lower setting, and then
the off setting. Indicator bars next to
the symbol show the setting: three
for high, two for medium, and one
for low.
To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position.
{ WARNING
The heated seats are canceled
when the ignition is turned off.
Second Row Seats
The second row seats can be folded
for additional cargo space or folded
and tumbled for easy entry and exit
to the third row seat, if equipped.
The seat has either the manual fold
and tumble feature or the automatic
seat release fold and tumble
feature.
Reclining Seatbacks (Bucket
Seats Only)
On vehicles with second row bucket
seats, the seatbacks can be
reclined.
To return the seatback to the upright
position:
1. Lift the lever on the outboard
side of the seat.
2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, and then
release the lever to lock the
seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback
to make sure it is locked.
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (13,1)
Seats and Restraints
3-13
Manual Fold and Tumble
Feature
Folding and Tumbling the Seat
To fold and tumble the seat:
1. Make sure that there is nothing
under, in front of, or on the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with
the safety belts still fastened may
cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the
safety belts and return them to
their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
2. Lift the lever, on the outboard
side of the seat, to release the
seatback.
The seatback will fold forward to
create a flat load floor.
If the seatback cannot fold flat,
try moving the front seat forward
and/or put the front seatback in
the upright position.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-14
Black plate (14,1)
Seats and Restraints
Folding and Tumbling the Seat
from the Third Row Seat
{ WARNING
3. Lift the lever again to release the
rear of the seat from the floor.
The seat will tumble forward.
Using the third row seating
position while the second row is
folded, or folded and tumbled,
could cause injury in a sudden
stop or crash. Be sure to return
the seat to the passenger seating
position. Push and pull on the
seat to make sure it is locked
into place.
To fold and tumble the seat from the
third row seat, if equipped:
1. Make sure that there is nothing
under, in front of, or on the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with
the safety belts still fastened may
cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the
safety belts and return them to
their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
60/40 Split-Bench Seat Shown,
Bucket Seat Similar
2. Lift the lever, on the bottom rear
of the second row seat on the
inboard side, to release the
seatback. The seatback will fold
forward.
3. Lift the same lever again to
release the rear of the seat from
the floor. The seat will tumble
forward.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (15,1)
Seats and Restraints
Automatic Fold and Tumble
Feature
{ WARNING
The transmission must be in
P (Park) for this feature to work.
Using the third row seating
position while the second row is
folded, or folded and tumbled,
could cause injury in a sudden
stop or crash. Be sure to return
the seat to the passenger seating
position. Push and pull on the
seat to make sure it is locked
into place.
{ WARNING
Automatically folding and
tumbling the seat when someone
is sitting in the seat, could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always make sure there is no one
sitting in the seat before pressing
the automatic seat release button.
Folding and Tumbling the
Second Row Seat from the
Third Row Seat or Outside the
Vehicle
To fold and tumble the seat from
the third row seat, if equipped:
1. Make sure that there is nothing
under, in front of, or on the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with
the safety belts still fastened may
cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the
safety belts and return them to
their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
3-15
Driver Side Rear Panel Button
Shown
2. Press the automatic seat release
button on the panel behind the
rear doors.
The seatback automatically
folds flat and the seat tumbles
forward. There will be a slight
delay between the folding of the
seatback and the tumbling of
the seat.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-16
Black plate (16,1)
Seats and Restraints
Returning the Seat to the
Sitting Position
To return the seat to the sitting
position from the tumbled position:
1. Pull the seat down until it latches
to the floor. The seatback cannot
be raised if the seat is not
latched to the floor.
{ WARNING
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
2. Lift the seatback and push it
rearward. Push and pull on the
seatback to make sure it is
locked.
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is improperly
routed, not properly attached,
or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could
be seriously injured. After raising
the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts
are properly routed and attached,
and are not twisted.
3. For the 60/40 split-bench seat,
make sure the safety belt in the
center seating position is not
caught between the two seats
and is not twisted.
Third Row Seats
If the vehicle has a third row seat,
the seatback can be folded, and
the entire seat can be tumbled or
removed from the vehicle.
Folding the Seatback
To fold the seatback:
1. Open the liftgate to access the
controls for the seat.
2. Remove all items on the seat
cushion.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with
the safety belts still fastened may
cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the
safety belts and return them to
their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (17,1)
Seats and Restraints
{ WARNING
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
Tumbling the Third Row Seat
Returning the Seatback to the
Upright Position
1. Open the liftgate to access the
controls for the seat.
To return the seatback to the upright
position:
2. Make sure the headrests are
completely lowered and there is
nothing under, in front of, or on
the seat.
2. Raise the seatback to the
upright position.
3. Fold the seatbacks forward
using lever “1” and the
instructions listed previously
under “Folding the Seatback.”
The seat cannot be unlatched
from the floor unless the
seatback is folded.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
3. Lift the release lever “1,” on the
bottom rear of the seatback on
the outboard side of the seat,
and the seatback folds forward.
1. Open the liftgate to access the
controls for the seat.
3-17
To tumble the seat:
4. Unlatch the seat from the floor
by lifting lever “2” next to the
carrying handle on the rear of
the seat, near the bottom.
5. Lift the rear of the seat up from
the floor.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-18
Black plate (18,1)
Seats and Restraints
6. Tilt the seat fully forward to lock
it into place.
7. Push and pull on the seat to
make sure it is locked.
Put the seat in this position only
when necessary for additional cargo
space.
Returning the Third Row Seat
from a Tumbled Position
To return the seat to the normal
seating position:
5. Raise the seatback to the
upright position.
{ WARNING
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
1. Open the liftgate to access the
controls for the seat.
6. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
2. Make sure there is nothing that
could become trapped under
the seat.
Removing the Third Row Seat
3. Release the seat from the
tumbled position by lifting lever
“2” next to the carrying handle
at the bottom rear of the seat.
4. Pull the seat down until it latches
to the floor. The seatback cannot
be raised to the upright position
unless the seat is latched to the
floor.
To remove the seat:
1. Open the liftgate to access the
controls for the seat.
2. Fold the seatbacks forward
using lever “1” and the
instructions listed previously
under “Folding the Seatback.”
The seat cannot be unlatched
from the floor unless the
seatback is folded.
3. Unlatch the seat from the floor
by pulling the handle at the rear
of the seat “3 Removal Only”
toward the rear of the vehicle.
4. Roll the seat out of the vehicle.
There is a track in the floor to
guide the seat wheels out of the
vehicle.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (19,1)
Seats and Restraints
Installing the Third Row Seat
To install the seat:
1. Open the liftgate to access the
rear of the vehicle.
2. Slide the front outboard seat
wheels into the track on the floor
and roll the seat forward. The
front latches should lock into
place. If the latches do not lock,
try tilting the rear of the seat
upward slightly.
3. Lower the rear of the seat and
push down on the seat to
engage the rear floor latches.
{ WARNING
A seat that is not locked into
place properly can move around
in a collision or sudden stop.
People in the vehicle could be
injured. Be sure to lock the seat
into place properly when
installing it.
4. Push and pull on the seat to
make sure it is locked into place.
The seatback cannot be raised
to the upright position unless the
seat is latched to the floor.
5. Raise the seatback to the
upright position.
{ WARNING
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
6. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
3-19
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is improperly
routed, not properly attached,
or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After raising the
rear seatback, always check to be
sure that the safety belts are
properly routed and attached,
and are not twisted.
7. Make sure the safety belts are
returned to the original position
over the seatbacks.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-20
Black plate (20,1)
Seats and Restraints
Safety Belts
This section of the manual
describes how to use safety belts
properly. It also describes some
things not to do with safety belts.
{ WARNING
Do not let anyone ride where a
safety belt cannot be worn
properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing
safety belts, the injuries can be
much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be
ejected from the vehicle. You
and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be,
if you are buckled up. Always
fasten your safety belt, and check
that your passenger(s) are
restrained properly too.
{ WARNING
It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is
not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in
the vehicle is in a seat and using
a safety belt properly.
This vehicle has indicators as a
reminder to buckle the safety belts.
See Safety Belt Reminders on
page 5‑17 for additional information.
In most states and in all Canadian
provinces, the law requires wearing
safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a
crash. If you do have a crash, you
do not know if it will be a
serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some
crashes can be so serious that even
buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people
who buckle up can survive and
sometimes walk away. Without
safety belts they could have been
badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety
belts in vehicles, the facts are clear.
In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (21,1)
Seats and Restraints
3-21
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything,
you go as fast as it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose
it is just a seat on wheels.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the
vehicle. The rider does not stop.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-22
Black plate (22,1)
Seats and Restraints
The person keeps going until
stopped by something. In a real
vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down
as the vehicle does. You get more
time to stop. You stop over more
distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety
belts make such good sense.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (23,1)
Seats and Restraints
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a
safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are
wearing a safety belt or not. But
your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is
much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety
belt, even if you are
upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why
should I have to wear safety
belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental
systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of
them. Whether or not an airbag
is provided, all occupants still
have to buckle up to get the
most protection. That is true not
only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other
collisions.
3-23
Q: If I am a good driver, and I
never drive far from home,
why should I wear safety
belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver,
but if you are in a crash — even
one that is not your fault — you
and your passenger(s) can be
hurt. Being a good driver does
not protect you from things
beyond your control, such as
bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within
40 km (25 mi) of home. And the
greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at
speeds of less than
65 km/h (40 mph).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-24
Black plate (24,1)
Seats and Restraints
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly
This section is only for people of
adult size.
First, before you or your
passenger(s) wear a safety belt,
there is important information you
should know.
Be aware that there are special
things to know about safety belts
and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and
infants. If a child will be riding in the
vehicle, see Older Children on
page 3‑52 or Infants and Young
Children on page 3‑54. Follow those
rules for everyone's protection.
It is very important for all occupants
to buckle up. Statistics show that
unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety
belts.
this applies force to the strong
pelvic bones and you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt would
apply force on your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are
best able to take belt restraining
forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a
sudden stop or crash.
Sit up straight and always keep your
feet on the floor in front of you. The
lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs. In a crash,
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (25,1)
Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
Q: What is wrong with this?
3-25
{ WARNING
You can be seriously hurt if the
lap belt is too loose. In a crash,
you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.
The lap belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose.
It will not give as much
protection this way.
{ WARNING
You can be seriously hurt if the
shoulder belt is too loose. In a
crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase
injury. The shoulder belt should fit
snugly against your body.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will
not give nearly as much
protection this way.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-26
Black plate (26,1)
Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING (Continued)
could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle the belt
into the buckle nearest you.
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong
buckle.
{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured if
the belt is buckled in the wrong
place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there,
not on the pelvic bones. This
(Continued)
A: The belt is over an armrest.
{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured if the
belt goes over an armrest like
this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide
under the belt. The belt force
would then be applied on the
abdomen, not on the pelvic
bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure
the belt goes under the armrests.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (27,1)
Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING (Continued)
Also, the belt would apply too
much force to the ribs, which are
not as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure
internal organs like your liver or
spleen. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The shoulder belt is worn under
the arm. It should be worn over
the shoulder at all times.
{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured if
you wear the shoulder belt under
your arm. In a crash, your body
would move too far forward,
which would increase the
chance of head and neck injury.
(Continued)
A: The belt is behind the body.
3-27
{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured by
not wearing the lap-shoulder belt
properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder
belt. Your body could move too
far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then
be applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-28
Black plate (28,1)
Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle
have a lap-shoulder belt except for
the center front passenger position,
if equipped, which has a lap belt.
See Lap Belt on page 3‑34 for more
information.
Use the following pictures to
determine the latch plate style:
The lap‐shoulder belts for the first
and second row seating positions
are equipped with free‐falling latch
plates. If the vehicle has a third row,
the lap‐shoulder belts have either
free‐falling or cinching latch plates.
A: The belt is twisted across
the body.
{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured by a
twisted belt. In a crash, you would
not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt
is twisted, make it straight so it
can work properly, or ask your
dealer to fix it.
Free-Falling Latch Plate
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (29,1)
Seats and Restraints
3-29
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
the belt across you. Do not let it
get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
you pull the belt across you very
quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
Cinching Latch Plate
The following instructions explain
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
adjustable, so you can sit up
straight. To see how, see
“Seats” in the Index.
If the shoulder portion of a
passenger belt with a free‐falling
latch plate is pulled out all the
way, the child restraint locking
feature may be engaged. If this
happens, let the belt go back all
the way and start again.
Engaging the child restraint
locking feature in the right front
seating position may affect the
passenger sensing system,
if equipped. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 3‑45
for more information.
If the belt stops before it reaches
the buckle, for lap‐shoulder belts
with cinching latch plates, tilt the
latch plate and keep pulling the
safety belt until it can be
buckled.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-30
Black plate (30,1)
Seats and Restraints
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt
height adjuster, move it to the
height that is right for you. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”
in this section for instructions on
use and important safety
information.
To unlatch the belt, push the button
on the buckle. The belt should
return to its stowed position.
Before a door is closed, be sure the
safety belt is out of the way. If a
door is slammed against a safety
belt, damage can occur to both the
belt and the vehicle.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
The vehicle has a shoulder belt
height adjuster for the driver and
right front passenger positions.
3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks. If you find
that the latch plate will not go
fully into the buckle, see if you
are using the correct buckle.
Pull up on the latch plate to
make sure it is secure. If the belt
is not long enough, see Safety
Belt Extender on page 3‑35.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull
up on the shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull
stitching on the safety belt
through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller
occupants.
Adjust the height so the shoulder
portion of the belt is on the shoulder
and not falling off of it. The belt
should be close to, but not
contacting, the neck. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of
the safety belt in a crash. See How
to Wear Safety Belts Properly on
page 3‑24.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (31,1)
Seats and Restraints
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Squeeze the buttons (A) on the
sides of the height adjuster and
move the height adjuster to the
desired position.
The adjuster can be moved up just
by pushing up on the shoulder belt
guide.
After the adjuster is set to the
desired position, try to move it down
without squeezing the buttons to
make sure it has locked into
position.
This vehicle has safety belt
pretensioners for front outboard
occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they
are part of the safety belt assembly.
They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal, near
frontal, or rear crash if the threshold
conditions for pretensioner
activation are met. And, if the
vehicle has side impact airbags,
safety belt pretensioners can help
tighten the safety belts in a side
crash or a rollover event.
Pretensioners work only once. If the
pretensioners activate in a crash,
the pretensioners and probably
other parts of the vehicle's safety
belt system will need to be replaced.
See Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts After a Crash on page 3‑36.
3-31
Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides
This vehicle may have rear shoulder
belt comfort guides. If not, they are
available through your dealer. The
guides may provide added safety
belt comfort for older children who
have outgrown booster seats and
for some adults. When installed and
properly adjusted, the comfort guide
positions the belt away from the
neck and head.
There is one guide, if equipped,
for each outside passenger position
in the second row seat and the
third row, if the vehicle has one.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-32
Black plate (32,1)
Seats and Restraints
Second Row
Here is how to install a comfort
guide to the safety belt:
1. For the second row, remove the
guide from its storage clip on the
interior body.
Third Row
If your vehicle has a third row,
remove the guide from its
storage pocket on the side of
the seat.
2. Place the guide over the belt,
and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (33,1)
Seats and Restraints
3-33
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
3. Be sure that the belt is not
twisted and it lies flat. The
elastic cord must be under the
belt and the guide on top.
4. Buckle, position, and release
the safety belt as described
previously in this section. Make
sure the shoulder portion of the
belt is on the shoulder and not
falling off of it. The belt should
be close to, but not contacting,
the neck.
To remove and store the comfort
guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt can
be removed from the guide. Slide
the guide into its storage clip on the
interior body or storage pocket on
the side of the seat.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-34
Black plate (34,1)
Seats and Restraints
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone,
including pregnant women. Like all
occupants, they are more likely to
be seriously injured if they do not
wear safety belts.
The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety
belt is worn properly, it is more likely
that the fetus will not be hurt in a
crash. For pregnant women, as for
anyone, the key to making safety
belts effective is wearing them
properly.
Lap Belt
This part is only for the lap belt. To
learn how to wear a lap-shoulder
belt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 3‑28.
The vehicle may have a center
seating position. When you sit in the
center front seating position, you
have a lap safety belt, which has no
retractor.
A pregnant woman should wear a
lap-shoulder belt, and the lap
portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding,
throughout the pregnancy.
To make the belt longer, tilt the latch
plate and pull it along the belt.
Buckle, position and release it the
same way as the lap part of a
lap-shoulder belt.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (35,1)
Seats and Restraints
To make the belt shorter, pull its free
end as shown until the belt is snug.
If the belt is not long enough, see
Safety Belt Extender on page 3‑35.
Make sure the release button on the
buckle is positioned so you would
be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if necessary.
If you find that the latch plate will
not go fully into the buckle, see if
you are using the correct buckle. Be
sure that the latch plate clicks when
inserted into the buckle.
3-35
Safety Belt Extender
Safety System Check
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten
around you, you should use it.
Now and then, check that the safety
belt reminder light, safety belts,
buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job. See your dealer
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under
impact forces. If a belt is torn or
frayed, get a new one right away.
But if a safety belt is not long
enough, your dealer will order you
an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you
will wear, so the extender will be
long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone
else use it, and use it only for the
seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults. Never
use it for securing child seats. To
wear it, attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with
the extender.
Make sure the safety belt reminder
light is working. See Safety Belt
Reminders on page 5‑17 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑36.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-36
Black plate (36,1)
Seats and Restraints
Safety Belt Care
Keep belts clean and dry.
{ WARNING
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them. In
a crash, they might not be able to
provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts After a
Crash
{ WARNING
A crash can damage the safety
belt system in the vehicle.
A damaged safety belt system
may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure the
safety belt systems are working
properly after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as
possible.
After a minor crash, replacement of
safety belts may not be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that
were used during any crash may
have been stressed or damaged.
See your dealer to have the safety
belt assemblies inspected or
replaced.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the safety belt
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
Have the safety belt pretensioners
checked if the vehicle has been in a
crash, or if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start the vehicle
or while you are driving. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5‑18.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (37,1)
Seats and Restraints
3-37
Airbag System
The vehicle may have the following
airbags:
The vehicle has the following
airbags:
.
A seat‐mounted side impact
airbag for the driver.
With seat‐mounted side impact
airbags, the word AIRBAG will
appear on the side of the seatback
closest to the door.
.
A seat‐mounted side impact
airbag for the right front
passenger.
With roof-rail airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear along the
headliner or trim.
If the vehicle has a third row
seat, it will have a third row
roof-rail airbag.
Airbags are designed to supplement
the protection provided by safety
belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce
the risk of injury from the force of an
inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
.
A frontal airbag for the driver.
.
A frontal airbag for the right front
passenger.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the driver
and passenger directly behind
the driver.
.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the right
front passenger and the person
seated directly behind that
passenger.
All of the airbags in the vehicle will
have the word AIRBAG embossed
in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the middle
part of the steering wheel for the
driver and on the instrument panel
for the right front passenger.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-38
Black plate (38,1)
Seats and Restraints
Here are the most important things
to know about the airbag system:
{ WARNING
You can be severely injured or
killed in a crash if you are not
wearing your safety belt — even if
you have airbags. Airbags are
designed to work with safety
belts, but do not replace them.
Also, airbags are not designed to
deploy in every crash. In some
crashes safety belts are your only
restraint. See When Should an
Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑41.
Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce your chance
of hitting things inside the vehicle
or being ejected from it. Airbags
are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. Everyone in your
vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
{ WARNING
{ WARNING
Airbags inflate with great force,
faster than the blink of an eye.
Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, any airbag when it
inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to any airbag, as you would
be if you were sitting on the edge
of the seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in
position before and during a
crash. Always wear a safety belt,
even with airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible
while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag
when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection
for adults and older children, but
not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle safety belt
system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young
children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always
secure children properly in the
vehicle. To read how, see Older
Children on page 3‑52 or Infants
and Young Children on
page 3‑54.
Occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door or side
windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags
and/or roof-rail airbags.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (39,1)
Seats and Restraints
3-39
Where Are the Airbags?
There is an airbag readiness light
on the instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag
electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5‑18 for
more information.
The driver frontal airbag is in the
middle of the steering wheel.
The right front passenger frontal
airbag is in the instrument panel
on the passenger's side.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-40
Black plate (40,1)
Seats and Restraints
Driver Side Shown, Passenger
Side Similar
Driver Side Shown, Passenger
Side Similar
Driver Side Shown, Passenger
Side Similar
If the vehicle has seat‐mounted side
impact airbags for the driver and
right front passenger, they are in the
side of the seatbacks closest to
the door.
The roof-rail airbags for the driver,
right front passenger, and second
row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
If the vehicle has a third row
passenger seat, the roof-rail airbags
are located in the ceiling above the
rear windows for the outboard
passenger positions in the third row.
{ WARNING
If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
(Continued)
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (41,1)
Seats and Restraints
WARNING (Continued)
that person causing severe injury
or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept
clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories that
block the inflation path of a
seat-mounted side impact airbag.
Never secure anything to the roof
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags
by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
When Should an Airbag
Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to
inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes to help
reduce the potential for severe
injuries mainly to the driver's or right
front passenger's head and chest.
However, they are only designed to
inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds
are used to predict how severe a
crash is likely to be in time for the
airbags to inflate and help restrain
the occupants.
Whether the frontal airbags will or
should deploy is not based on
how fast the vehicle is traveling.
It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down.
3-41
Frontal airbags may inflate at
different crash speeds. For
example:
.
If the vehicle hits a stationary
object, the airbags could inflate
at a different crash speed than if
the vehicle hits a moving object.
.
If the vehicle hits an object that
deforms, the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits an object
does not deform.
.
If the vehicle hits a narrow object
(like a pole), the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide
object (like a wall).
.
If the vehicle goes into an object
at an angle, the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight
into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with
specific vehicle design.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-42
Black plate (42,1)
Seats and Restraints
Frontal airbags are not intended to
inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts.
In addition, the vehicle has
dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the
restraint according to crash severity.
The vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing
system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a more
severe frontal impact. For moderate
frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags
inflate at a level less than full
deployment. For more severe frontal
impacts, full deployment occurs.
The vehicle has a seat position
sensor. Vehicles with dual stage
airbags also have seat position
sensors which enable the sensing
system to monitor the position of
the driver seat and may or may not
monitor the position of the front
passenger seat.
The seat position sensor provides
information that is used to determine
if the airbags should deploy at a
reduced level or at full deployment.
The vehicle may or may not have
seat‐mounted side impact airbags.
The vehicle has roof-rail airbags.
See Airbag System on page 3‑37.
Seat‐mounted side impact airbags
and roof-rail airbags are intended to
inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes. In addition, these roof-rail
airbags are intended to inflate
during a rollover or in a severe
frontal impact. Seat‐mounted side
impact airbags and roof-rail airbags
will inflate if the crash severity is
above the system's designed
threshold level. The threshold level
can vary with specific vehicle
design.
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to
inflate in rear impacts. A seat‐
mounted side impact airbag is
intended to deploy on the side of the
vehicle that is struck. Both roof-rail
airbags will deploy when either side
of the vehicle is struck or if the
sensing system predicts that the
vehicle is about to roll over, or in a
severe frontal impact.
In any particular crash, no one can
say whether an airbag should have
inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because
of what the repair costs were.
For frontal airbags, inflation is
determined by what the vehicle hits,
the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down.
For seat‐mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags, deployment is
determined by the location and
severity of the side impact. In a
rollover event, roof-rail airbag
deployment is determined by the
direction of the roll.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (43,1)
Seats and Restraints
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate?
How Does an Airbag
Restrain?
In a deployment event, the sensing
system sends an electrical signal
triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
airbag causing the bag to break out
of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are
all part of the airbag module.
In moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal collisions, even belted
occupants can contact the steering
wheel or the instrument panel. In
moderate to severe side collisions,
even belted occupants can contact
the inside of the vehicle.
Frontal airbag modules are located
inside the steering wheel and
instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat‐mounted side impact airbags,
there are airbags modules in the
side of the front seatbacks closest
to the door. For vehicles with
roof-rail airbags, there are airbag
modules in the ceiling of the vehicle,
near the side windows that have
occupant seating positions.
Airbags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Frontal
airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the
occupant's upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually.
Seat‐mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags distribute the force
of the impact more evenly over the
occupant's upper body.
3-43
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags
are designed to help contain the
head and chest of occupants in the
outboard seating positions in the
first, second, and third rows,
if equipped with a third row seat.
The rollover capable roof-rail
airbags are designed to help reduce
the risk of full or partial ejection in
rollover events, although no system
can prevent all such ejections.
But airbags would not help in many
types of collisions, primarily
because the occupant's motion is
not toward those airbags. See When
Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 3‑41 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement
to safety belts.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-44
Black plate (44,1)
Seats and Restraints
What Will You See After
an Airbag Inflates?
After the frontal airbags and
seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not
even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after
they deploy. Some components of
the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the
airbag modules, see What Makes
an Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑43.
The parts of the airbag that come
into contact with you may be warm,
but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming
from the vents in the deflated
airbags. Airbag inflation does not
prevent the driver from seeing out of
the windshield or being able to steer
the vehicle, nor does it prevent
people from leaving the vehicle.
{ WARNING
When an airbag inflates, there
may be dust in the air. This dust
could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of
asthma or other breathing trouble.
To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as
it is safe to do so. If you have
breathing problems but cannot
get out of the vehicle after an
airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door.
If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
The vehicle may have a feature that
may automatically unlock the doors,
turn on the interior lamps and
hazard warning flashers, and shut
off the fuel system after the airbags
inflate. You can lock the doors, turn
off the interior lamps and hazard
warning flashers by using the
controls for those features.
{ WARNING
A crash severe enough to inflate
the airbags may have also
damaged important functions in
the vehicle, such as the fuel
system, brake and steering
systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
appears to be drivable after a
moderate crash, there may be
concealed damage that could
make it difficult to safely operate
the vehicle.
Use caution if you should attempt
to restart the engine after a crash
has occurred.
In many crashes severe enough to
inflate the airbag, windshields are
broken by vehicle deformation.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (45,1)
Seats and Restraints
Additional windshield breakage may
also occur from the right front
passenger airbag.
.
.
Airbags are designed to inflate
only once. After an airbag
inflates, you will need some new
parts for the airbag system.
If you do not get them, the
airbag system will not be there
to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly
other parts. The service manual
for your vehicle covers the need
to replace other parts.
The vehicle has a crash sensing
and diagnostic module which
records information after a
crash. See Vehicle Data
Recording and Privacy on
page 13‑16 and Event Data
Recorders on page 13‑16.
.
3-45
Let only qualified technicians
work on the airbag systems.
Improper service can mean that
an airbag system will not work
properly. See your dealer for
service.
Passenger Sensing
System
If the vehicle has the passenger
airbag status indicator pictured in
the following illustration, then the
vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger
position. The passenger airbag
status indicator, if equipped, is
visible on the overhead console
when the vehicle is started.
In addition, if the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position, the
label on the vehicle's sun visors
refers to “ADVANCED AIRBAGS”.
United States
Canada and Mexico
The words ON and OFF, or the
symbols for on and off, will be
visible during the system check.
If you are using remote start,
if equipped, to start the vehicle from
a distance, you may not see the
system check. When the system
check is complete, either the word
ON or OFF, or the symbol for on or
off, will be visible. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on
page 5‑19.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-46
Black plate (46,1)
Seats and Restraints
The passenger sensing system will
turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag under certain
conditions. The driver airbag,
seat‐mounted side impact airbags
(if equipped) and the roof-rail
airbags are not affected by the
passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system
works with sensors that are part of
the right front passenger seat and
safety belt. The sensors are
designed to detect the presence of
a properly-seated occupant and
determine if the right front
passenger frontal airbag should be
enabled (may inflate) or not.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
secured in a rear seat in the correct
child restraint for their weight
and size.
We recommend that children be
secured in a rear seat, including:
an infant or a child riding in a
rear-facing child restraint; a child
riding in a forward-facing child seat;
an older child riding in a booster
seat; and children, who are large
enough, using safety belts.
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
{ WARNING
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the
airbag is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the
airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (47,1)
Seats and Restraints
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag if:
.
The right front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
.
The system determines an infant
is present in a child restraint.
.
A right front passenger takes
his/her weight off of the seat
for a period of time.
.
There is a critical problem
with the airbag system or the
passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front
passenger frontal airbag, the off
indicator will light and stay lit as a
reminder that the airbag is off. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 5‑19.
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn on (may inflate) the
right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting
properly in the right front
passenger seat.
When the passenger sensing
system has allowed the airbag to be
enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit as a reminder that the
airbag is active.
For some children, including
children in child restraints, and for
very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not turn
off the right front passenger frontal
airbag, depending upon the
person's seating posture and body
build. Everyone in the vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints
should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
3-47
{ WARNING
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 5‑18 for more
information, including important
safety information.
If the On Indicator is Lit for a
Child Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from
the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items
from the seat such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-48
Black plate (48,1)
Seats and Restraints
4. Reinstall the child restraint
following the directions
provided by the child restraint
manufacturer and refer to
Securing Child Restraints (Rear
Seat Position) on page 3‑69 or
Securing Child Restraints
(Center Front Seat Position) on
page 3‑72 or Securing Child
Restraints (Right Front Seat
Position) on page 3‑72.
6. Restart the vehicle.
The passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the
airbag for a child in a child
restraint depending upon the
child’s seating posture and body
build. It is better to secure the
child restraint in a rear seat.
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
5. If, after reinstalling the child
restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
recline the vehicle seatback and
adjust the seat cushion,
if adjustable, to make sure that
the vehicle seatback is not
pushing the child restraint into
the seat cushion.
Also make sure the child
restraint is not trapped under the
vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head
restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 3‑2.
use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and
enable the right front passenger
frontal airbag:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material
from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully
upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in
the seat, centered on the seat
cushion, with legs comfortably
extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the
person remain in this position for
two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
If a person of adult size is sitting in
the right front passenger seat, but
the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting
properly in the seat. If this happens,
Additional Factors Affecting
System Operation
Safety belts help keep the
passenger in position on the seat
during vehicle maneuvers and
braking, which helps the passenger
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (49,1)
Seats and Restraints
sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See
“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”
in the Index for additional
information about the importance
of proper restraint use.
If the shoulder portion of the belt is
pulled out all the way, the child
restraint locking feature will be
engaged. This may unintentionally
cause the passenger sensing
system to turn the airbag off for
some adult‐size occupants. If this
happens, let the belt go back all the
way and start again.
A thick layer of additional material,
such as a blanket or cushion,
or aftermarket equipment such as
seat covers, seat heaters, and seat
massagers, can affect how well
the passenger sensing system
operates. We recommend that
you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when
approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑50 for more information
about modifications that can affect
how the system operates.
The on indicator may be lit if an
object, such as a briefcase,
handbag, grocery bag, laptop,
or other electronic device, is put on
an unoccupied seat. If this is not
desired, remove the object from
the seat.
{ WARNING
Stowing of articles under the
passenger seat or between the
passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the
proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle
should be serviced. There are parts
of the airbag system in several
places around the vehicle.
3-49
Your dealer and the service manual
have information about servicing the
vehicle and the airbag system. To
purchase a service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering
Information on page 13‑14.
{ WARNING
For up to 10 seconds after the
ignition is turned off and the
battery is disconnected, an airbag
can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you
are close to an airbag when it
inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow
proper service procedures, and
make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-50
Black plate (50,1)
Seats and Restraints
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add
to or change about the vehicle
that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that
change your vehicle's frame,
bumper system, height, front end
or side sheet metal, they may
keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or
moving any parts of the front
seats, safety belts, the airbag
sensing and diagnostic module,
steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules,
ceiling headliner or pillar garnish
trim, overhead console, front
sensors, side impact sensors,
or airbag wiring can affect the
operation of the airbag system.
In addition, the vehicle may have
a passenger sensing system for
the right front passenger's
position, which includes sensors
that are part of the passenger's
seat. The passenger sensing
system may not operate properly
if the original seat trim is
replaced with non-GM covers,
upholstery or trim, or with GM
covers, upholstery or trim
designed for a different vehicle.
Any object, such as an
aftermarket seat heater or a
comfort enhancing pad or
device, installed under or on top
of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of
the passenger sensing system.
This could either prevent proper
deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the
passenger sensing system
from properly turning off the
passenger airbag(s). See
Passenger Sensing System on
page 3‑45.
If you have any questions
about this, you should contact
Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. The phone
numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in
this manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure (U.S.
and Canada) on page 13‑2 or
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure (Mexico) on
page 13‑4.
If the vehicle has rollover
roof-rail airbags, see Different
Size Tires and Wheels on
page 10‑62 for additional
important information.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (51,1)
Seats and Restraints
Q: What if I added a snow plow?
Will it keep the airbags from
working properly?
A: We have designed our airbag
systems to work properly under
a wide range of conditions,
including snow plowing with
vehicles that have the optional
Snow Plow Prep Package
(RPO VYU). But do not change
or defeat the snow plow's
“tripping mechanism.” If you do,
it can damage your snow plow
and your vehicle, and it may
cause an airbag inflation.
Q: Because I have a disability,
I have to get my vehicle
modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my
airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call
Customer Assistance. The
phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure (U.S.
and Canada) on page 13‑2 or
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure (Mexico) on
page 13‑4.
In addition, your dealer and the
service manual have information
about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic
module and airbag wiring.
3-51
Airbag System Check
The airbag system does not need
regularly scheduled maintenance or
replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See
Airbag Readiness Light on
page 5‑18 for more information.
Notice: If an airbag covering is
damaged, opened, or broken, the
airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag
coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers,
have the airbag covering and/or
airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules,
see What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? on page 3‑43. See your
dealer for service.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-52
Black plate (52,1)
Seats and Restraints
Replacing Airbag System
Parts After a Crash
If an airbag inflates, you will need to
replace airbag system parts. See
your dealer for service.
{ WARNING
If the airbag readiness light stays on
after the vehicle is started or comes
on when you are driving, the airbag
system may not work properly.
Have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 5‑18 for more information.
A crash can damage the
airbag systems in the vehicle.
A damaged airbag system
may not work properly and
may not protect you and your
passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
in serious injury or even death.
To help make sure the airbag
systems are working properly
after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as
possible.
Child Restraints
Older Children
Older children who have outgrown
booster seats should wear the
vehicle safety belts.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (53,1)
Seats and Restraints
The manufacturer's instructions that
come with the booster seat state the
weight and height limitations for that
booster. Use a booster seat with a
lap-shoulder belt until the child
passes the fit test below:
.
.
Sit all the way back on the seat.
Do the knees bend at the seat
edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.
Does the shoulder belt rest on
the shoulder? If yes, continue.
If no, try using the rear safety
belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides”
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 3‑28 for more information.
If the shoulder belt still does not
rest on the shoulder, then return
to the booster seat.
.
Does the lap belt fit low and
snug on the hips, touching the
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
.
Can proper safety belt fit be
maintained for the length of the
trip? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
Q: What is the proper way to
wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the
additional restraint a shoulder
belt can provide. The shoulder
belt should not cross the face or
neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just
touching the top of the thighs.
This applies belt force to the
child's pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the
abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
3-53
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 3‑28.
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
In a crash, children who are not
buckled up can strike other people
who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older
children need to use safety belts
properly.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-54
Black plate (54,1)
Seats and Restraints
{ WARNING
{ WARNING
Never do this.
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear
the same safety belt. The safety
belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the
two children can be crushed
together and seriously injured.
A safety belt must be used by
only one person at a time.
Never allow a child to wear the
safety belt with the shoulder belt
behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly.
In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt.
The child could move too far
forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
Infants and Young
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs
protection! This includes infants
and all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and
size of the traveler changes the
need, for everyone, to use safety
restraints. In fact, the law in every
state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says
children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (55,1)
Seats and Restraints
{ WARNING
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never
allow children to play with the
safety belts.
Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle's
safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Every
time infants and young children ride
in vehicles, they should have the
protection provided by appropriate
child restraints.
Children who are not restrained
properly can strike other people,
or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
{ WARNING
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child
while riding in a vehicle. Due to
crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it during a crash.
For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
infant will suddenly become a
110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
arms. An infant should be
secured in an appropriate
restraint.
3-55
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-56
Black plate (56,1)
Seats and Restraints
{ WARNING
Never do this.
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag when
it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat. Secure a rear-facing child
restraint in a rear seat. It is also
better to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it
will go.
Q: What are the different types of
add-on child restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which
are purchased by the vehicle
owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular
restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's
weight, height, and age but also
whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
For most basic types of child
restraints, there are many
different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint, be
sure it is designed to be used in
a motor vehicle. If it is, the
restraint will have a label saying
that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer's
instructions that come with the
restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular
child restraint. In addition, there
are many kinds of restraints
available for children with
special needs.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (57,1)
Seats and Restraints
{ WARNING
{ WARNING
To reduce the risk of neck and
head injury during a crash, infants
need complete support. This is
because an infant's neck is not
fully developed and its head
weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing child
restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest
part of an infant's body, the back
and shoulders. Infants should
always be secured in rear-facing
child restraints.
A young child's hip bones are still
so small that the vehicle's regular
safety belt may not remain low
on the hip bones, as it should.
Instead, it may settle up around
the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal
injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, young children should
always be secured in appropriate
child restraints.
3-57
Child Restraint Systems
(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat
A rear-facing infant seat (A)
provides restraint with the seating
surface against the back of the
infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-58
Black plate (58,1)
Seats and Restraints
Securing an Add-On Child
Restraint in the Vehicle
{ WARNING
(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat
A forward-facing child seat (B)
provides restraint for the child's
body with the harness.
(C) Booster Seats
A booster seat (C) is a child restraint
designed to improve the fit of the
vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a
child to see out the window.
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured
in the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
instructions that came with that
child restraint and the instructions
in this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury,
the child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. Child restraint
systems must be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (59,1)
Seats and Restraints
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by
the LATCH system. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3‑61 for
more information. Children can be
endangered in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in
the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child
restraint, refer to the instructions
that come with the restraint which
may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual.
The child restraint instructions
are important, so if they are not
available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in
the vehicle — even when no child is
in it.
In some areas of the United States
and Canada, Certified Child
Passenger Safety Technicians
(CPSTs) are available to inspect
and demonstrate how to correctly
use and install child restraints. In
the U.S., refer to the National
Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) website
to locate the nearest child safety
seat inspection station. For CPST
availability in Canada, check with
Transport Canada or the Provincial
Ministry of Transportation office.
3-59
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
{ WARNING
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a crash if the child is
not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child
properly following the instructions
that came with that child restraint.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-60
Black plate (60,1)
Seats and Restraints
Where to Put the
Restraint
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer
when properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
We recommend that children and
child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint;
a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are
large enough, using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
{ WARNING
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
The vehicle may have a
passenger sensing system which
is designed to turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag
under certain conditions.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Even if the passenger sensing
system, if equipped, has turned
off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, no system is
fail-safe. No one can guarantee
that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual
circumstance, even though
it is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child
restraints in a rear seat, even if
the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 3‑45 for additional
information.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (61,1)
Seats and Restraints
{ WARNING
A child in a child restraint in the
center front seat can be badly
injured or killed by the frontal
airbags if they inflate. Never
secure a child restraint in the
center front seat. It is always
better to secure a child restraint
in a rear seat.
Do not use child restraints in the
center front seat position.
When securing a child restraint in
a rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with your
child restraint to make sure it is
compatible with this vehicle.
Child restraints and booster seats
vary considerably in size, and some
may fit in certain seating positions
better than others. Always make
sure the child restraint is properly
secured.
Depending on where you place
the child restraint and the size of
the child restraint, you may not be
able to access adjacent safety belt
assemblies or LATCH anchors for
additional passengers or child
restraints. Adjacent seating
positions should not be used if the
child restraint prevents access to
or interferes with the routing of the
safety belt.
Wherever a child restraint is
installed, be sure to secure the
child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in
your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
3-61
Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children
(LATCH System)
The LATCH system holds a child
restraint during driving or in a crash.
This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier.
The LATCH system uses anchors in
the vehicle and attachments on the
child restraint that are made for use
with the LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible
child restraint is properly installed
using the anchors, or use the
vehicle's safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions
that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-62
Black plate (62,1)
Seats and Restraints
When installing a child restraint with
a top tether, you must also use
either the lower anchors or the
safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must
never be attached using only the top
tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system
in your vehicle, you need a child
restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint
manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child
restraint and its attachments. The
following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these
attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or
child restraints have lower anchors
and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments.
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars
built into the vehicle. There are
two lower anchors for each
LATCH seating position that will
accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top
of the child restraint to the vehicle.
A top tether anchor is built into
the vehicle. The top tether
attachment (B) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (63,1)
Seats and Restraints
Your child restraint may have a
single tether (A) or a dual tether (C).
Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the
top tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints with top
tethers are designed for use with
or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for your child
restraint.
3-63
Lower Anchor and Top Tether
Anchor Locations
Second Row — Bucket
Second Row — 60/40
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors.
i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors.
i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-64
Black plate (64,1)
Seats and Restraints
For models with a third row seat,
see the information following for
installing a child restraint with a top
tether in the third row, if your vehicle
has one. Never install two top
tethers using the same top tether
anchor.
Third Row Seat
i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
There is one top tether anchor that
can be used for either the third row
center or driver side seating position
but not both at the same time.
For models with 60/40 second
row seating, the rear right side
passenger and center seating
positions have exposed metal
anchors located in the crease
between the seatback and the
seat cushion.
For models with second row bucket
seats, both rear seating positions
have exposed metal anchors
located in the crease between the
seatback and the seat cushion.
Second Row Seat — Bucket
For models with bucket second row
seating, the top tether anchors are
located at the bottom rear of the
seat cushion for each seating
position in the second row. Be sure
to use an anchor located on the
same side of the vehicle as the
seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (65,1)
Seats and Restraints
3-65
Do not secure a child restraint in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
Second Row Seat — 60/40
For models with 60/40 second row
seating, the top tether anchors are
located at the bottom rear of the
seat cushion for each seating
position in the second row. Be sure
to use an anchor located on the
same side of the vehicle as the
seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
Third Row Seat
For vehicles with a third row seat,
there is one top tether anchor
located at the bottom rear of the
seat cushion that can be used for
either the third row center or driver
side seating position. Never install
two top tethers using the same top
tether anchor.
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position. See Where to Put the
Restraint on page 3‑60 for
additional information.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-66
Black plate (66,1)
Seats and Restraints
Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH
System
{ WARNING
If a LATCH-type child restraint is
not attached to anchors, the child
restraint will not be able to protect
the child correctly. In a crash, the
child could be seriously injured or
killed. Install a LATCH-type child
restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle safety
belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that
came with the child restraint and
the instructions in this manual.
{ WARNING
{ WARNING
Do not attach more than one child
restraint to a single anchor.
Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could
cause the anchor or attachment
to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others
could be injured. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries
during a crash, attach only
one child restraint per anchor.
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Buckle any unused safety
belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull
the shoulder belt all the way out
of the retractor to set the lock,
if the vehicle has one, after the
child restraint has been installed.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH
attachments rub against the
vehicle’s safety belts. This may
damage these parts. If necessary,
move buckled safety belts to
avoid rubbing the LATCH
attachments.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (67,1)
Seats and Restraints
Do not fold the empty rear seat
with a safety belt buckled. This
could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the
safety belt to its stowed position,
before folding the seat.
1. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments to the lower
anchors. If the child restraint
does not have lower
attachments or the desired
seating position does not have
lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and
the safety belts. Refer to your
child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions
in this manual.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer
recommends that the top tether
be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether
anchor, if the vehicle has one.
Refer to the child restraint
instructions and the following
steps:
are using a single tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Route, attach, and tighten
the top tether according to
your child restraint
instructions and the
following instructions:
1.1. Find the lower anchors
for the desired seating
position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child
restraint to the lower
anchors.
3-67
.
If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
.
If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-68
.
Black plate (68,1)
Seats and Restraints
If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
raise the headrest or head
restraint and route the
tether under the headrest
or head restraint and in
between the headrest or
head restraint posts.
.
.
If the position you are using
has a fixed headrest or
head restraint and you are
using a single tether, route
the tether around the
inboard or outboard side
of the headrest or head
restraint.
If the position you are using
has a fixed or an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a dual
tether, route the tether
around the headrest or
head restraint.
3. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
LATCH path and attempt to
move it side‐to‐side and back‐
and‐forth. There should be no
more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of
movement, for proper
installation.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (69,1)
Seats and Restraints
Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash
{ WARNING
A crash can damage the LATCH
system in the vehicle. A damaged
LATCH system may not properly
secure the child restraint,
resulting in serious injury or even
death in a crash. To help make
sure the LATCH system is
working properly after a crash,
see your dealer to have the
system inspected and any
necessary replacements made
as soon as possible.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system
and it was being used during a
crash, new LATCH system parts
may be needed.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the LATCH
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seat Position)
When securing a child restraint in
a rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with the
child restraint to make sure it is
compatible with this vehicle.
If the child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑61 for how and
where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is
secured in the vehicle using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑61 for top tether anchor
locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
3-69
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
If the child restraint does not have
the LATCH system, you will be
using the safety belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be
sure to follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when
and as the instructions say.
If more than one child restraint
needs to be installed in the rear
seat, be sure to read Where to Put
the Restraint on page 3‑60.
The vehicle's lap‐shoulder belts for
the first and second row seating
positions are equipped with
free‐falling latch plates. If the
vehicle has a third row, the
lap‐shoulder belts have either
free‐falling or cinching latch
plates.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-70
Black plate (70,1)
Seats and Restraints
Use the following pictures to
determine the latch plate style:
Cinching Latch Plate
Free‐Falling Latch Plate
1. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
For third row seating positions,
with cinching latch plates, tilt the
latch plate to adjust the belt if
needed.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (71,1)
Seats and Restraints
3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
4. For passenger seating positions
with a lap‐shoulder belt and a
free‐falling latch plate, pull the
rest of the shoulder belt all the
way out of the retractor to set
the lock. When installing a child
restraint using a lap‐shoulder
belt and a cinching latch plate,
skip Step 4 and proceed to
Step 5.
3-71
5. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-72
Black plate (72,1)
Seats and Restraints
6. If the child restraint has a top
tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑61 for more
information.
7. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt to
move it side‐to‐side and back‐
and‐forth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top
tether anchor, disconnect it.
Securing Child Restraints
(Center Front Seat
Position)
{ WARNING
A child in a child restraint in the
center front seat can be badly
injured or killed by the frontal
airbags if they inflate. Never
secure a child restraint in the
center front seat. It is always
better to secure a child restraint
in a rear seat.
Do not use child restraints in the
center front seat position.
Securing Child Restraints
(Right Front Seat
Position)
This vehicle has airbags. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a
forward-facing child restraint. See
Where to Put the Restraint on
page 3‑60.
In addition, the vehicle may have a
passenger sensing system which is
designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag under
certain conditions. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 3‑45 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 5‑19 for more information,
including important safety
information.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (73,1)
Seats and Restraints
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great if the
airbag deploys.
{ WARNING
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
The vehicle may have a
passenger sensing system which
is designed to turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag
under certain conditions.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Even if the passenger sensing
system, if equipped, has turned
off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, no system is
fail-safe. No one can guarantee
that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual
circumstance, even though
it is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the
airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 3‑45 for additional
information.
3-73
If the child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑61 for how and
where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is
secured using a safety belt and it
uses a top tether, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3‑61 for
top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-74
Black plate (74,1)
Seats and Restraints
You will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it
will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the
lock. When the retractor lock is
set, the belt can be tightened but
not pulled out of the retractor.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (75,1)
Seats and Restraints
7. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt to
move it side‐to‐side and back‐
and‐forth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
6. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt,
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 5 and 6.
If the vehicle is equipped with the
passenger sensing system, and
when the passenger sensing system
has turned off the right front
passenger frontal airbag, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag
status indicator should light and stay
lit when you start the vehicle. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 5‑19.
3-75
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit, see “If the
On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
System on page 3‑45 for more
information.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
3-76
Black plate (76,1)
Seats and Restraints
2 NOTES
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (1,1)
Storage
Storage
Storage
Compartments
Storage Compartments
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center Console Storage . . . . . .
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-2
4-2
Additional Storage Features
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Roof Rack System
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Glove Box
Lift up on the glove box lever to
open it.
Cupholders
For vehicles with cupholders located
in the front and rear of the floor
console or in the fold down armrest,
adjust the front cupholders by
moving the insert forward or
rearward.
Pull downward on the lid to access
the rear floor console cupholders.
There could also be cupholders
located in the second and third row
seat armrest areas.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
4-2
Black plate (2,1)
Storage
Armrest Storage
For vehicles with a rear seat
armrest, pull the loop at the top of
the armrest down to access the
cupholders.
Rear Storage
For vehicles with a rear storage
area, it is located in the rear cargo
area of the vehicle on the
driver side.
Turn the knobs and pull the storage
door to access. The door can be
removed.
Center Console Storage
For vehicles with a console
compartment, it is located between
the bucket seats.
Press the button and lift the lid to
access the console compartment.
A cupholder located in the rear of
the console, swings down for the
rear seat passenger to use.
Additional Storage
Features
Cargo Cover
{ WARNING
An improperly stored cargo cover
could be thrown about the vehicle
during a collision or sudden
maneuver. Someone could be
injured. If the cover is removed,
always store it in the proper
storage location. When it is
replaced, always be sure that
it is securely reattached.
To use the cargo cover, if equipped:
1. Pull the cover handle toward the
rear of the vehicle.
2. Latch the cover posts into the
retaining sockets on the cargo
area trim panels.
To return the cover to the retracted
position:
1. Pull up on the cover handle to
release the cover posts from the
retaining sockets.
2. Let the cover move forward to
the full retracted position.
To remove the cover from a regular
wheelbase model:
1. Let the cover go all the way into
the holder.
2. Then, grasping the driver side
cover end cap, push the cover
end cap toward the passenger
side of the vehicle.
3. Swing the cover rearward and
take it out of the vehicle.
To put the cover in the vehicle:
1. Make sure the cover slot in the
holder faces rearward with the
round surface facing down.
2. Then, hold the cover at an angle
and place the cover end cap into
the slot in the passenger side
trim panel.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (3,1)
Storage
3. Move the other end of the cover
forward and hold it next to the
driver side trim panel slot.
4. Press the end caps in, to allow
the cover to fit into the trim slot.
5. Pull lightly on the cover holder to
make sure it is secure.
On extended wheelbase models
there are two cover positions.
The slots furthest forward allow
the cover to be used if the
third seat is removed or folded
down. The cover can be
installed and removed from
either side.
Roof Rack System
{ WARNING
If something is carried on top of
the vehicle that is longer or wider
than the roof rack — like paneling,
plywood, or a mattress — the
wind can catch it while the vehicle
is being driven. The item being
carried could be violently torn off,
and this could cause a collision
and damage the vehicle. Never
carry something longer or wider
than the roof rack on top of the
vehicle unless using a GM
certified accessory carrier.
For vehicles with a roof rack, the
rack can be used to load items.
For roof racks that do not have
crossrails included, GM Certified
crossrails can be purchased as an
accessory. See your dealer for
additional information.
4-3
Notice: Loading cargo on the
roof rack that weighs more than
91 kg (200 lbs) or hangs over the
rear or sides of the vehicle may
damage the vehicle. Load cargo
so that it rests evenly between
the crossrails, making sure to
fasten cargo securely.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo
when driving, check to make sure
crossrails and cargo are securely
fastened. Loading cargo on the roof
rack will make the vehicle’s center
of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,
sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden
braking or abrupt maneuvers,
otherwise it may result in loss of
control. If driving for a long distance,
on rough roads, or at high speeds,
occasionally stop the vehicle to
make sure the cargo remains in its
place.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
4-4
Storage
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle
capacity when loading the vehicle.
For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑22.
.
.
Black plate (4,1)
If small heavy objects are placed
on the roof, cut a piece of 9 mm
or 3/8 inch plywood to fit inside
the crossrails and siderails to
spread the load. Tie the plywood
to the siderail supports.
Tie the load and secure it to
the crossrails or the siderail
supports. Use the crossrails only
to keep the load from sliding. To
move a crossrail, lift the release
lever up, on both sides of the
rail. Then slide the crossrail to
the desired position balancing
the force side to side. Press the
release lever down on both
sides of the rail, down to tighten
it. Try to slide the crossrail back
and forth slightly to make sure it
is tight.
.
To carry long items, move
the crossrails as far apart as
possible. Tie the load to the
crossrails and the siderails or
siderail supports. Also tie the
load to the bumpers, but do not
tie the load so tightly that the
crossrails or siderails are
damaged.
.
After moving a crossrail, be sure
it is securely locked into the
siderail.
A Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL) is located above the rear
window glass.
Make sure items loaded on the
roof of the vehicle do not block or
damage the CHMSL.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (1,1)
Instruments and Controls
Instruments and
Controls
Controls
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-3
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-5
Rear Window Wiper/
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Engine Oil Pressure
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-17
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-18
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-20
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Brake System Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . 5-24
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . 5-24
Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-25
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-26
Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-26
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Information Displays
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5-1
Vehicle Messages
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Voltage and Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake System Messages . . . .
Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . .
Engine Cooling System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . .
Engine Power Messages . . . .
Fuel System Messages . . . . . .
Key and Lock Messages . . . . .
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Object Detection System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ride Control System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag System Messages . . . .
Anti-Theft Alarm System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission Messages . . . . .
Vehicle Reminder
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . .
5-36
5-36
5-37
5-37
5-38
5-39
5-40
5-40
5-41
5-41
5-41
5-42
5-43
5-43
5-44
5-44
5-45
5-46
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
5-2
Black plate (2,1)
Instruments and Controls
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization (With
DIC Buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Universal Remote System
Universal Remote System . . . 5-54
Universal Remote System
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Universal Remote System
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
Controls
Steering Wheel
Adjustment
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Hold the steering wheel and pull
the lever.
2. Move the steering wheel up
or down.
3. Release the lever to lock the
wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
The tilt lever is located on the lower
left side of the steering column.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (3,1)
Instruments and Controls
Steering Wheel Controls
To select preset or favorite radio
stations:
Navigating Folders on an iPod or
USB Device (Vehicles without a
Navigation System):
Press and release w or c x to
go to the next or previous radio
station stored as a preset or
favorite.
1. Press and hold w or c x
while listening to a song until the
contents of the current folder
display on the radio display.
CD/DVD
2. Press and hold c x to go
back to the previous folder list.
Radio
To select tracks on a CD/DVD:
Press and release w or c x to
go to the next or previous track.
If equipped, some audio controls
can be adjusted at the steering
wheel.
w / c x (Next/Previous):
Press
to select preset or favorite radio
stations, select tracks on a
CD/DVD, or navigate an iPod or
USB device.
5-3
3. Press and release w or c
to scroll up or down the list.
.
To select a folder, press
and hold w, or press ¨
when the folder is
highlighted.
.
To go back further in the
folder list, press and
hold c x.
Selecting Tracks on an iPod or
USB Device (Vehicles without a
Navigation System)
1. Press and hold w or c x
while listening to a song until the
contents of the current folder
display on the radio display.
2. Press and release w or c x
to scroll up or down the list, then
press and hold w, or press ¨ to
play the highlighted track.
x
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
5-4
Black plate (4,1)
Instruments and Controls
Navigating an iPod or USB Device
on the Main Audio Screen
(Vehicles with a Navigation
System)
1. Press and release w or c x
to select the next or previous
track within the selected
category.
2. Press and hold w or c x to
move quickly through the tracks.
3. Press and release ¨ to move up
one track within the selected
category.
Navigating an iPod or USB Device
on the Music Navigator Screen
(Vehicles with a Navigation
System)
1. Press and release w or c x
to select the next or previous
track within the selected
category.
2. Press and hold w or c x to
move quickly through the tracks
within the selected category.
3. Press and release ¨ to move up
one track within the selected
category.
b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press to
silence the vehicle speakers only.
Press again to turn the sound on.
For vehicles with Bluetooth or
OnStar systems, press and hold for
longer than two seconds to interact
with those systems. See Bluetooth
on page 7‑47 and the OnStar
Owner's Guide for more information.
c x (End):
initiate voice recognition. See “Voice
Recognition” in the Navigation
System manual for more
information.
¨ (Seek):
Press to go to the next
radio station while in AM,
FM, or XM™.
For vehicles with or without a
navigation system:
Press ¨ to go to the next track or
chapter while sourced to the CD or
DVD slot.
Press ¨ to select a track or a folder
when navigating folders on an iPod
or USB device.
Press to reject an
incoming call, or end a current call.
For vehicles with a navigation
system:
SRCE (Source/Voice
Recognition): Press to switch
between the radio and CD, and for
equipped vehicles, the DVD, front
auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.
1. Press and hold ¨ until a beep is
heard, to place the radio into
SCAN mode. A station will play
for five seconds before moving
to the next station.
For vehicles with the navigation
system, press and hold this button
for longer than one second to
2. To stop the SCAN function,
press ¨ again.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (5,1)
Instruments and Controls
While listening to a CD/DVD, press
and hold ¨ to quickly move forward
through the tracks. Release to stop
on the desired track.
+ e − e (Volume): Press to
increase or to decrease the volume.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the center
pad on the steering wheel.
Windshield Wiper/Washer
9 (Off): Turns the windshield
wipers off.
6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes):
Turn the band up for more frequent
wipes or down for less frequent
wipes.
6
(Low Speed): Slow
wipes.
? (High Speed):
8 (Mist):
Single wipe, turn to 8,
then release. Several wipes, hold
the band on 8 longer.
Windshield Washer
{ WARNING
In freezing weather, do not use
the washer until the windshield is
warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the
windshield, blocking your vision.
Fast wipes.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If frozen
to the windshield, carefully loosen or
thaw them. Damaged wiper blades
should be replaced. See Wiper
Blade Replacement on page 10‑33.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the
wiper motor. A circuit breaker will
stop the motor until it cools down.
Turn the band with the wiper symbol
to control the windshield wipers.
5-5
L (Washer Fluid):
Push this
paddle to spray washer fluid on the
windshield. The wipers clear the
window and then either stop or
return to the preset speed.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
5-6
Black plate (6,1)
Instruments and Controls
Rear Window Wiper/
Washer
{ WARNING
In freezing weather, do not use
the washer until the windshield is
warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the
windshield, blocking your vision.
return to your preset speed. For
more washer cycles, press and hold
the button.
The rear window wiper/washer will
not operate if the liftgate or liftglass
is open or ajar. If the liftgate or
liftglass is opened while the rear
wiper is on, the wiper returns to the
parked position and stops.
Compass
The rear wiper control is located on
the turn and lane‐change lever.
The vehicle may have a compass in
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
To turn the rear wiper on, slide the
lever to a wiper position.
Compass Zone
9 (Off): Turns the wiper off.
5 (Rear Wiper Delay): Turns on
the rear wiper delay.
Z (Rear Wiper):
Turns on the
rear wiper.
= (Rear Wiper Wash):
Press this
button on the end of the lever to
spray washer fluid on the rear
window. The wipers will clear the
rear window and either stop or
The zone is set to zone eight upon
leaving the factory. Your dealer will
set the correct zone for your
location.
Under certain circumstances,
such as during a long-distance,
cross-country trip or moving to a
new state or province, it will be
necessary to compensate for
compass variance by resetting the
zone through the DIC if the zone is
not set correctly.
Compass variance is the difference
between the earth's magnetic north
and true geographic north. If the
compass is not set to the zone
where you live, the compass may
give false readings. The compass
must be set to the variance zone in
which the vehicle is traveling.
To adjust for compass variance,
use the following procedure:
Compass Variance (Zone)
Procedure
1. Do not set the compass zone
when the vehicle is moving.
Only set it when the vehicle
is in P (Park).
Press the vehicle information
button until PRESS V TO
CHANGE COMPASS ZONE
displays. Or, if the vehicle does
not have DIC buttons, press the
trip odometer reset stem until
CHANGE COMPASS ZONE
displays.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (7,1)
Instruments and Controls
two seconds to select the next
available variance zone. Repeat
this step until the appropriate
variance zone is displayed.
5. If calibration is necessary,
calibrate the compass. See
“Compass Calibration
Procedure” following.
Compass Calibration
2. Find the vehicle's current
location and variance zone
number on the map.
Zones 1 through 15 are
available.
3. Press the set/reset button to
scroll through and select the
appropriate variance zone.
4. Press the trip/fuel button until
the vehicle heading, for
example, N for North, is
displayed in the DIC. Or, if the
vehicle does not have DIC
buttons, press and hold the
trip odometer reset stem for
The compass can be manually
calibrated. Only calibrate the
compass in a magnetically clean
and safe location, such as an
open parking lot, where driving the
vehicle in circles is not a danger.
It is suggested to calibrate away
from tall buildings, utility wires,
manhole covers, or other industrial
structures, if possible.
If CAL should ever appear in the
DIC display, the compass should
be calibrated.
If the DIC display does not show a
heading, for example, N for North,
or the heading does not change
after making turns, there may be a
5-7
strong magnetic field interfering with
the compass. Such interference
may be caused by a magnetic CB
or cell phone antenna mount, a
magnetic emergency light, magnetic
note pad holder, or any other
magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle,
move the magnetic item, then turn
on the vehicle and calibrate the
compass.
To calibrate the compass, use the
following procedure:
Compass Calibration Procedure
1. Before calibrating the compass,
make sure the compass zone is
set to the variance zone in which
the vehicle is located. See
“Compass Variance (Zone)
Procedure” earlier in this
section.
Do not operate any switches
such as window, sunroof,
climate controls, or seats during
the calibration procedure.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
5-8
Black plate (8,1)
Instruments and Controls
2. Press the vehicle information
button until PRESS V TO
CALIBRATE COMPASS
displays. Or, if the vehicle does
not have DIC buttons, press the
trip odometer reset stem until
CALIBRATE COMPASS
displays.
3. Press the set/reset button to
start the compass calibration.
Or, if the vehicle does not have
DIC buttons, press and hold the
trip odometer reset stem for
two seconds to start the
compass calibration.
4. The DIC will display
CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN
CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in
tight circles at less than 8 km/h
(5 mph) to complete the
calibration. The DIC will display
CALIBRATION COMPLETE
for a few seconds when the
calibration is complete. The
DIC display will then return to
the previous menu.
Clock
To set the time and date:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, then
press the O button to turn the
radio on.
2. Press the H button to display
HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour,
minute, month, day, and year).
3. Press the softkey located under
any one of the tabs to change
that setting.
4. To increase the time or date, do
one of the following:
.
Press the softkey below the
selected tab.
.
Press the
.
.
¨ SEEK button.
Press the \ FWD button.
Turn the f knob clockwise.
5. To decrease the time or date, do
one of the following:
.
.
.
© SEEK button.
Press the s REV button.
Turn the f knob
Press the
counterclockwise.
To change the time default setting
from 12 hour to 24 hour or to change
the date default setting from month/
day/year to day/month/year:
1. Press the H button and then
the softkey located below the
forward arrow tab. 12H, 24H, the
date MM/DD (month and day),
and DD/MM/ (day and month)
displays.
2. Press the softkey located below
the desired option.
3. Press the H button again to
apply the desired option, or let
the screen time out.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (9,1)
Instruments and Controls
Power Outlets
The accessory power outlets can be
used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
There are two under the climate
controls, one inside the center floor
console, one on the rear of the
center floor console and one
accessory power outlet in the rear
cargo area on the passenger side.
Remove the cover to access and
replace when not in use.
The accessory power outlets are
powered, even with the ignition off.
Continuing to use accessory power
outlets while the ignition is in LOCK/
OFF may cause the vehicle's
battery to run down.
{ WARNING
Power is always supplied to the
outlets. Do not leave electrical
equipment plugged in when the
vehicle is not in use because the
vehicle could catch fire and cause
injury or death.
Notice: Leaving electrical
equipment plugged in for an
extended period of time while
the vehicle is off will drain the
battery. Always unplug electrical
equipment when not in use and
do not plug in equipment that
exceeds the maximum 20 ampere
rating.
5-9
Certain accessory plugs may not
be compatible with the accessory
power outlet and could overload
adapter or vehicle fuses. If a
problem is experienced, see your
dealer.
When adding electrical equipment,
be sure to follow the proper
installation instructions included
with the equipment. Do not use
equipment exceeding the
maximum amperage rating of
20 amperes. See Add-On Electrical
Equipment on page 9‑91.
Notice: Hanging heavy
equipment from the power outlet
can cause damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty. The
power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only, such
as cell phone charge cords.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
5-10
Black plate (10,1)
Instruments and Controls
Power Outlet 110 Volt
Alternative Current
The vehicle may have a power
outlet that can be used to plug in
electrical equipment that uses a
maximum limit of 150 watts.
An indicator light on the outlet turns
on to show it is in use. The light
comes on when the ignition is in
ON/RUN and equipment requiring
less than 150 watts is plugged into
the outlet, and no system fault is
detected.
If equipment is connected using
more than 150 watts or a system
fault is detected, a protection circuit
shuts off the power supply and the
indicator light turns off. To reset the
circuit, unplug the item and plug it
back in or turn the Remote
Accessory Power (RAP) off and
then back on. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9‑32
The power outlet is located on the
rear of the center console.
The power outlet is not designed for
and may not work properly, if the
following are plugged in:
.
Equipment with high initial
peak wattage such as:
compressor-driven refrigerators
and electric power tools.
.
Other equipment requiring
an extremely stable power
supply such as:
microcomputer-controlled
electric blankets, touch
sensor lamps, etc.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (11,1)
Instruments and Controls
Warning Lights,
Gauges, and
Indicators
Gauges can indicate when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Often gauges and warning
lights work together to indicate a
problem with the vehicle.
Warning lights and gauges can
signal that something is wrong
before it becomes serious enough
to cause an expensive repair or
replacement. Paying attention to the
warning lights and gauges could
prevent injury.
When one of the warning lights
comes on and stays on while
driving, or when one of the gauges
shows there may be a problem,
check the section that explains what
to do. Follow this manual's advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly
and even dangerous.
Warning lights come on when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Some warning lights come
on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
5-11
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
5-12
Instruments and Controls
Instrument Cluster
English 6‐Speed Shown, Metric and 2500 Series Similar
Black plate (12,1)
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (13,1)
Instruments and Controls
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
hybrid supplement for more
information.
Speedometer
The speedometer shows the
vehicle speed in both kilometers
per hour (km/h) and miles per
hour (mph).
Odometer
The odometer shows how far the
vehicle has been driven, in either
kilometers or miles.
5-13
Trip Odometer
Tachometer
The trip odometer can show how far
the vehicle has been driven since
the trip odometer was last set
to zero.
The tachometer displays the
engine speed in revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Press the reset button, located on
the instrument panel cluster next to
the trip odometer display, to toggle
between the trip odometer and the
regular odometer. Holding the reset
button for approximately one second
while the trip odometer is displayed
resets it.
To display the odometer reading
with the ignition off, press the reset
button.
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
hybrid supplement for more
information.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
5-14
Black plate (14,1)
Instruments and Controls
Fuel Gauge
When the fuel tank is low, the FUEL
LEVEL LOW message appears in
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See Fuel System Messages on
page 5‑40 for more information.
Here are some situations owners
may experience with the fuel gauge.
None of these indicate a problem
with the fuel gauge.
.
At the gas station, the fuel pump
shuts off before the gauge
reads full.
.
It takes a little more or less fuel
to fill up than the fuel gauge
indicated. For example, the
gauge may have indicated the
tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than
half the tank's capacity to fill
the tank.
.
The gauge goes back to empty
when the ignition is turned off.
English
Metric
The fuel gauge, when the ignition
is on, shows how much fuel the
vehicle has left in the tank.
An arrow on the fuel gauge
indicates the side of the vehicle
the fuel door is on.
The gauge first indicates empty
before the vehicle is out of fuel, and
the vehicle's fuel tank should be
filled soon.
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
hybrid supplement for more
information.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (15,1)
Instruments and Controls
Engine Oil Pressure
Gauge
Metric
5-15
English
Oil pressure may vary with engine
speed, outside temperature and oil
viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the
normal operating range. When
the oil pressure reaches the low
pressure zone, the OIL PRESSURE
LOW STOP ENGINE message
appears in the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Engine Oil
Messages on page 5‑39 and Engine
Oil on page 10‑8 for more
information.
The oil pressure gauge shows the
engine oil pressure in psi (pounds
per square inch) when the engine is
running. Canadian vehicles indicate
pressure in kPa (kilopascals).
A reading in the low pressure zone
may be caused by a dangerously
low oil level or some other problem
causing low oil pressure. Check the
oil as soon as possible.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
5-16
Black plate (16,1)
Instruments and Controls
{ WARNING
Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge
Do not keep driving if the oil
pressure is low. The engine can
become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check
the oil as soon as possible and
have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil
maintenance can damage the
engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always follow the maintenance
schedule for changing engine oil.
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
hybrid supplement for more
information.
English
Metric
This gauge shows the engine
coolant temperature.
It also provides an indicator of how
hard the vehicle is working. During a
majority of the operation, the gauge
reads 100°C (210°F) or less. If you
are pulling a load or going up hills,
it is normal for the temperature to
fluctuate and approach the 122°C
(250°F) mark. If the gauge reaches
the 125°C (260°F) mark, it indicates
that the cooling system is working
beyond its capacity.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (17,1)
Instruments and Controls
See Engine Overheating on
page 10‑21.
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
hybrid supplement for more
information.
Voltmeter Gauge
When the engine is not running, but
the ignition is on, this gauge shows
the battery's state of charge in
DC volts.
When the engine is running, the
gauge shows the condition of the
charging system. The charging
system regulates voltage based on
the state of the battery for improved
fuel economy and battery life. The
gauge may transition from a higher
to lower or a lower to higher
reading, this is normal. Readings
between the low and high warning
zones indicate the normal operating
range. The gauge may also read
low during the fuel economy mode,
this is normal.
Readings in the low warning zone
may occur when a large number of
electrical accessories are operating
in the vehicle and the engine is left
at an idle for an extended period.
This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to
provide full power at engine idle.
As engine speeds are increased,
this condition should correct itself
as higher engine speeds allow
the charging system to create full
power. If there is a problem with the
battery charging system, this light
5-17
will come on or the SERVICE
BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM
DIC message will display. See
Battery Voltage and Charging
Messages on page 5‑36 and
Charging System Light on
page 5‑20 for more information.
Safety Belt Reminders
Driver Safety Belt Reminder
Light
When the engine is started, a chime
sounds for several seconds to
remind a driver to fasten the safety
belt, unless the driver safety belt is
already buckled.
The safety belt light comes on and
stays on for several seconds, then
flashes for several more.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
5-18
Black plate (18,1)
Instruments and Controls
Airbag Readiness Light
This chime and light are repeated if
the driver remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion. If the driver
safety belt is already buckled,
neither the chime nor the light
comes on.
Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light
For vehicles equipped with the
passenger safety belt reminder light,
several seconds after the engine is
started, a chime sounds for several
seconds to remind the front
passenger to buckle their safety
belt. The passenger safety belt light,
located on the instrument panel,
comes on and stays on for several
seconds and then flashes for
several more.
This chime and light are repeated if
the passenger remains unbuckled
and the vehicle is in motion.
If the passenger safety belt is
buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
The front passenger safety belt
warning light and chime may turn on
if an object is put on the seat such
as a briefcase, handbag, grocery
bag, laptop or other electronic
device. To turn off the warning light
and or chime, remove the object
from the seat or buckle the
safety belt.
The system checks the airbag's
electrical system for possible
malfunctions. If the light stays on
it indicates there is an electrical
problem. The system check
includes the airbag sensor, the
pretensioners, the airbag modules,
the wiring, and the crash sensing
and diagnostic module. For more
information on the airbag system,
see Airbag System on page 3‑37.
The airbag readiness light comes on
solid for a few seconds when the
engine is started. If the light does
not come on then, have it fixed
immediately.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (19,1)
Instruments and Controls
{ WARNING
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator
If the airbag readiness light stays
on after the vehicle is started or
comes on while driving, it means
the airbag system might not be
working properly. The airbags in
the vehicle might not inflate in a
crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid
injury, have the vehicle serviced
right away.
If the vehicle has the airbag status
indicator pictured in the following
illustration, then the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position. The
passenger airbag status indicator is
on the overhead console. See
Passenger Sensing System on
page 3‑45 for important safety
information.
If there is a problem with the airbag
system, a Driver Information Center
(DIC) message can also come on.
See Airbag System Messages on
page 5‑43 for more information.
In addition, if the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position, the
label on the vehicle's sun visors
refers to “ADVANCED AIRBAGS.”
United States
5-19
Canada and Mexico
When the vehicle is started, the
passenger airbag status indicator
will light ON and OFF, or the
symbols for on and off, for several
seconds as a system check. If you
are using remote start, if equipped,
to start the vehicle from a distance,
you may not see the system check.
Then, after several more seconds,
the status indicator will light either
ON or OFF, or either the on or off
symbol to let you know the status of
the right front passenger frontal
airbag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is
lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the right
front passenger frontal airbag is
enabled (may inflate).
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
5-20
Black plate (20,1)
Instruments and Controls
If the word OFF or the off symbol is
lit on the airbag status indicator, it
means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front
passenger frontal airbag.
If, after several seconds, both
status indicator lights remain on,
or if there are no lights at all, there
may be a problem with the lights
or the passenger sensing system.
See your dealer for service.
{ WARNING
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 5‑18 for more
information, including important
safety information.
Charging System Light
must be driven a short distance with
the light on, turn off accessories,
such as the radio and air
conditioner.
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
hybrid supplement for more
information.
This light comes on briefly when
the ignition key is turned to START,
but the engine is not running, as a
check to show it is working.
If it does not, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer.
The light should go out once the
engine starts. If it stays on,
or comes on while driving, there
could be a problem with the
charging system. A charging system
message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC) can also appear. See
Battery Voltage and Charging
Messages on page 5‑36 for more
information. This light could indicate
that there are problems with a
generator drive belt, or that there is
an electrical problem. Have it
checked right away. If the vehicle
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
A computer system called OBD II
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second
Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems. It ensures that
emissions are at acceptable levels
for the life of the vehicle, helping to
produce a cleaner environment.
This light should come on when
the ignition is on, but the engine
is not running, as a check to
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (21,1)
Instruments and Controls
show it is working. If it does
not, have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer.
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on and stays on while the
engine is running, this indicates that
there is an OBD II problem and
service is required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by
the system before any problem is
apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage
to the vehicle. This system assists
the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If the vehicle is
continually driven with this light
on the emission controls might
not work as well, the vehicle fuel
economy might not be as good,
and the engine might not run as
smoothly. This could lead to
costly repairs that might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the
engine, transmission, exhaust,
intake, or fuel system of the
vehicle or the replacement of the
original tires with other than
those of the same Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) can
affect the vehicle's emission
controls and can cause this light
to come on. Modifications to
these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by the
vehicle warranty. This could also
result in a failure to pass a
required Emission Inspection/
Maintenance test. See
Accessories and Modifications on
page 10‑3.
This light comes on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
Light Flashing: A misfire condition
has been detected. A misfire
increases vehicle emissions and
could damage the emission control
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
5-21
To prevent more serious damage to
the vehicle:
.
Reduce vehicle speed.
.
Avoid hard accelerations.
.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
.
If towing a trailer, reduce the
amount of cargo being hauled
as soon as it is possible.
If the light continues to flash, when
it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.
Find a safe place to park the
vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at
least 10 seconds, and restart the
engine. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps and see
your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
Light On Steady: An emission
control system malfunction has
been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be
required.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
5-22
Instruments and Controls
The following may correct an
emissions system malfunction:
.
.
.
Black plate (22,1)
Make sure the fuel cap is fully
installed. See Filling the Tank on
page 9‑70. The diagnostic
system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or
missing fuel cap allows fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap
properly installed should turn the
light off.
Make sure the electrical system
is not wet. The system could be
wet if the vehicle was driven
through a deep puddle of water.
The condition is usually
corrected when the electrical
system dries out. A few driving
trips should turn the light off.
Make sure to fuel the vehicle
with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality
causes the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed and can
cause: stalling after start-up,
stalling when the vehicle is
changed into gear, misfiring,
hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration.
These conditions might go away
once the engine is warmed up.
inspection, the emission system
test equipment is connected to
the vehicle’s Data Link
Connector (DLC).
If one or more of these conditions
occurs, change the fuel brand used.
It will require at least one full tank of
the proper fuel to turn the light off.
See Recommended Fuel on
page 9‑68.
If none of the above have made
the light turn off, your dealer can
check the vehicle. The dealer
has the proper test equipment
and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems
that might have developed.
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local
governments may have programs
to inspect the on-vehicle emission
control equipment. For the
The DLC is under the instrument
panel to the left of the steering
wheel. See your dealer if assistance
is needed.
The vehicle may not pass
inspection if:
.
The malfunction indicator lamp is
on with the engine running, or if
the light does not come on when
the ignition is turned to ON/RUN
while the engine is off.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (23,1)
Instruments and Controls
.
The critical emission control
systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the
system. This can happen if
the battery has recently been
replaced or if the battery has
run down. The diagnostic system
evaluates critical emission
control systems during normal
driving. This can take
several days of routine driving.
If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the
inspection, your dealer can
prepare the vehicle for
inspection.
The vehicle brake system
consists of two hydraulic circuits.
If one circuit is not working, the
remaining circuit can still work to
stop the vehicle. For normal braking
performance, both circuits need
to be working.
If the warning light comes on and
a chime sounds there could be a
brake problem. Have the brake
system inspected right away.
This light can also come on due to
low brake fluid. See Brake Fluid on
page 10‑27 for more information.
Brake System Warning
Light
With the ignition on, the brake
system warning light comes on
when the parking brake is set. If the
vehicle is driven with the parking
brake engaged, a chime sounds
when the vehicle speed is greater
than 8 km/h (5 mph).
Metric
English
This light comes on briefly when the
ignition key is turned to ON/RUN.
If it does not come on then, have it
fixed so it is ready to warn if there is
a problem.
5-23
{ WARNING
The brake system might not be
working properly if the brake
system warning light is on.
Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after
the vehicle has been pulled off
the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for
service.
If the light comes on while driving,
pull off the road and stop carefully.
The pedal might be harder to push
or might go closer to the floor. It can
take longer to stop. If the light is still
on, have the vehicle towed for
service. See Towing the Vehicle on
page 10‑87.
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
hybrid supplement for more
information.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
5-24
Black plate (24,1)
Instruments and Controls
Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
For vehicles with the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), this light comes on
briefly when the engine is started.
If it does not, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer. If the
system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the
ignition off. If the light comes on
while driving, stop as soon as it is
safely possible and turn the ignition
off. Then start the engine again to
reset the system. If the ABS light
stays on, or comes on again while
driving, the vehicle needs service.
If the regular brake system warning
light is not on, the vehicle still has
brakes, but not antilock brakes.
If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, the vehicle does not
have antilock brakes and there is a
problem with the regular brakes.
See Brake System Warning Light on
page 5‑23.
For vehicles with a Driver
Information Center (DIC), see Brake
System Messages on page 5‑37 for
all brake related DIC messages.
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
hybrid supplement for more
information.
Tow/Haul Mode Light
For vehicles with the Tow/Haul
Mode feature, this light comes on
when the Tow/Haul Mode has been
activated.
For more information, see Tow/Haul
Mode on page 9‑41.
StabiliTrak® Indicator
Light
For vehicles with the StabiliTrak
system, this light comes on briefly
while starting the engine.
If it does not, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer. If the
system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
If the light comes on and stays on
while driving, there could be a
problem with the StabiliTrak system
and the vehicle might need service.
When this warning light is on, the
StabiliTrak system is off and does
not limit wheel spin.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (25,1)
Instruments and Controls
The light flashes if the system is
active and is working to assist the
driver with directional control of the
vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
See StabiliTrak® System on
page 9‑52 for more information.
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
hybrid supplement for more
information.
Tire Pressure Light
When the Light is On Steady
Engine Oil Pressure Light
This indicates that one or more
of the tires are significantly
underinflated.
A tire pressure message can
accompany the light. See Tire
Messages on page 5‑44 for more
information. Stop as soon as
possible, and inflate the tires to the
pressure value shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See
Tire Pressure on page 10‑53 for
more information.
When the Light Flashes First and
Then is On Steady
For vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), this light
comes on briefly when the engine
is started. It provides information
about tire pressures and the TPMS.
5-25
This indicates that there may be a
problem with the TPMS. The light
flashes for about a minute and stays
on steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence
repeats with every ignition cycle.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 10‑56 for more
information.
{ WARNING
Do not keep driving if the oil
pressure is low. The engine can
become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check
the oil as soon as possible and
have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine
oil maintenance can damage the
engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always follow the maintenance
schedule for changing engine oil.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
5-26
Black plate (26,1)
Instruments and Controls
This light comes on briefly while
starting the engine. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer. If the system is working
normally the indicator light then
goes off.
If the light comes on and stays on, it
means that oil is not flowing through
the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and it might
have some other system problem.
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
hybrid supplement for more
information.
This light and a chime comes on
when the fuel tank is low on fuel.
The Driver Information Center also
displays a “FUEL LEVEL LOW”
message. See Fuel System
Messages on page 5‑40 for more
information. When fuel is added this
light and message should go off. If it
does not, have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer.
High-Beam On Light
Security Light
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer on page 6‑2 for more
information.
This light comes on when the
high-beam headlamps are in use.
Front Fog Lamp Light
Low Fuel Warning Light
For information regarding this light
and the vehicle's security system,
see Anti-Theft Alarm System on
page 2‑14.
This light, under the fuel gauge,
comes on briefly while the engine
is being started.
The fog lamp lights come on when
the fog lamps are in use.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (27,1)
Instruments and Controls
The lights go out when the fog
lamps are turned off. See Fog
Lamps on page 6‑6 for more
information.
Cruise Control Light
Information Displays
Driver Information
Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver
Information Center (DIC).
The DIC displays information
about your vehicle. It also displays
warning messages if a system
problem is detected.
The cruise control light comes on
whenever the cruise control is set.
The light goes out when the cruise
control is turned off. See Cruise
Control on page 9‑55 for more
information.
All messages will appear in the
DIC display located below the
tachometer in the instrument panel
cluster.
The DIC comes on when the ignition
is on. After a short delay, the DIC
will display the information that was
last displayed before the engine
was turned off.
5-27
The DIC has different displays
which can be accessed by pressing
the DIC buttons located on the
instrument panel, next to the
steering wheel. If the vehicle does
not have DIC buttons, the trip
odometer reset stem can be used to
access some of the menu items.
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and
vehicle system information, and
warning messages if a system
problem is detected.
The DIC also allows some features
to be customized. See Vehicle
Personalization (With DIC Buttons)
on page 5‑46 for more information.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
5-28
Black plate (28,1)
Instruments and Controls
DIC Buttons
The buttons are the trip/fuel, vehicle
information, customization, and set/
reset buttons. The button functions
are detailed in the following pages.
3 (Trip/Fuel):
Press to display
the odometer, trip odometer, fuel
range, average economy, fuel used,
timer, instantaneous economy
and Active Fuel Management™
indicator, and transmission
temperature. The compass and
outside air temperature will also
be shown in the display. The
temperature will be shown in °C or
°F depending on the units selected.
T (Vehicle Information): Press
to display the oil life, units, side
blind zone system on/off, tire
pressure readings for vehicles with
the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), trailer brake gain and
output information for vehicles with
the Integrated Trailer Brake Control
(ITBC) system, engine hours,
compass zone setting, and compass
recalibration.
U (Customization):
Press to
customize the feature settings on
your vehicle. See Vehicle
Personalization (With DIC Buttons)
on page 5‑46 for more information.
V (Set/Reset): Press to set or
reset certain functions and to turn
off or acknowledge messages on
the DIC.
Trip/Fuel Menu Items (With
DIC Buttons)
3 (Trip/Fuel):
Press to scroll
through the following menu items:
Odometer
Press the trip/fuel button until
ODOMETER displays. This display
shows the distance the vehicle has
been driven in either kilometers (km)
or miles (mi). Pressing the trip
odometer reset stem will also
display the odometer.
To switch between English and
metric measurements, see “Units”
later in this section.
Trip Odometer
Press the trip/fuel button until TRIP
displays. This display shows the
current distance traveled in either
kilometers (km) or miles (mi) since
the last reset for the trip odometer.
Pressing the trip odometer reset
stem will also display the trip
odometer.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (29,1)
Instruments and Controls
The trip odometer can be reset to
zero by pressing the set/reset
button while the trip odometer is
displayed. You can also reset the
trip odometer while it is displayed
by pressing and holding the trip
odometer reset stem.
The trip odometer has a feature
called the retro-active reset. This
can be used to set the trip odometer
to the number of kilometers (miles)
driven since the ignition was last
turned on. This can be used if the
trip odometer is not reset at the
beginning of the trip.
To use the retro-active reset feature,
press and hold the set/reset button
for at least four seconds. The trip
odometer will display the number of
kilometers (km) or miles (mi) driven
since the ignition was last turned on
and the vehicle was moving. Once
the vehicle begins moving, the trip
odometer will accumulate mileage.
For example, if the vehicle was
driven 8 km (5 miles) before it is
started again, and then the
retro-active reset feature is
activated, the display will show
8 km (5 miles). As the vehicle
begins moving, the display will
then increase to 8.2 km (5.1 miles),
8.4 km (5.2 miles), etc.
Fuel Range
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL
RANGE displays. This display
shows the approximate number
of remaining kilometers (km) or
miles (mi) the vehicle can be driven
without refueling. The display will
show LOW if the fuel level is low.
The fuel range estimate is based on
an average of the vehicle's fuel
economy over recent driving history
and the amount of fuel remaining in
the fuel tank. This estimate will
change if driving conditions change.
5-29
For example, if driving in traffic and
making frequent stops, this display
may read one number, but if the
vehicle is driven on a freeway, the
number may change even though
the same amount of fuel is in the
fuel tank. This is because different
driving conditions produce different
fuel economies. Generally, freeway
driving produces better fuel
economy than city driving. Fuel
range cannot be reset.
Average Economy
Press the trip/fuel button until
AVG ECONOMY displays. This
display shows the approximate
average liters per 100 kilometers
(L/100 km) or miles per gallon
(mpg). This number is calculated
based on the number of L/100 km
(mpg) recorded since the last time
this menu item was reset. To reset
AVG ECONOMY, press and hold the
set/reset button.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
5-30
Black plate (30,1)
Instruments and Controls
Fuel Used
Press the trip/fuel button until
FUEL USED displays. This display
shows the number of liters (L) or
gallons (gal) of fuel used since the
last reset of this menu item. To reset
the fuel used information, press and
hold the set/reset button while FUEL
USED is displayed.
to 99 hours, 59 minutes and
59 seconds (99:59:59) after which
the display will return to zero.
To stop the timer, press the set/reset
button briefly while TIMER is
displayed.
To reset the timer to zero, press
and hold the set/reset button while
TIMER is displayed.
Timer
Transmission Temperature
Press the trip/fuel button until
TIMER displays. This display can
be used as a timer.
Press the trip/fuel button until
TRANS TEMP displays. This
display shows the temperature of
the automatic transmission fluid in
either degrees Celsius (°C) or
degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
To start the timer, press the set/
reset button while TIMER is
displayed. The display will show
the amount of time that has passed
since the timer was last reset, not
including time the ignition is off.
Time will continue to be counted as
long as the ignition is on, even if
another display is being shown
on the DIC. The timer will record up
Instantaneous Economy and
Active Fuel Management™
Indicator
If your vehicle has this display,
press the trip/fuel button until INST
ECON V8 displays. This display
shows the current fuel economy at a
particular moment and will change
frequently as driving conditions
change. This display shows the
instantaneous fuel economy in liters
per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or
miles per gallon (mpg). Unlike
average economy, this screen
cannot be reset.
An Active Fuel Management
indicator will display on the right
side of the DIC, while INST ECON
displays on the left side. Active Fuel
Management allows the engine to
operate on either four or eight
cylinders, depending on your driving
demands. When Active Fuel
Management is active, V4 will
display on the DIC. When Active
Fuel Management is inactive,
V8 will display. See Active Fuel
Management® on page 9‑34 for
more information.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (31,1)
Instruments and Controls
Vehicle Information Menu
Items (With DIC Buttons)
T (Vehicle Information): Press
to scroll through the following menu
items:
Oil Life
Press the vehicle information
button until OIL LIFE REMAINING
displays. This display shows an
estimate of the oil's remaining useful
life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE
REMAINING on the display, that
means 99% of the current oil life
remains. The engine oil life system
will alert you to change the oil on a
schedule consistent with your
driving conditions.
When the remaining oil life is low,
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message will appear on the display.
See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”
under Engine Oil Messages on
page 5‑39. You should change the
oil as soon as you can. See Engine
Oil on page 10‑8. In addition to the
engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance
Schedule in this manual. See
Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑3 for more information.
Remember, you must reset the OIL
LIFE display yourself after each oil
change. It will not reset itself. Also,
be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE
display accidentally at any time
other than when the oil has just
been changed. It cannot be reset
accurately until the next oil change.
To reset the engine oil life system,
see Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑10.
Side Blind Zone Alert
If your vehicle has the Side Blind
Zone Alert (SBZA) system, this
display allows the system to be
turned on or off. Once in this
display, press the set/reset button to
select between ON or OFF. If you
choose ON, the system will be
turned on. If you choose OFF, the
system will be turned off. When the
SBZA system is turned off, the DIC
will display the SIDE BLIND ZONE
5-31
ALERT SYSTEM OFF message as
a reminder that the system has
been turned off. See Object
Detection System Messages on
page 5‑41 and Side Blind Zone Alert
(SBZA) on page 9‑60 for more
information.
Units
Press the vehicle information button
until UNITS displays. This display
allows you to select between metric
or English units of measurement.
Once in this display, press the set/
reset button to select between
METRIC or units ENGLISH. All of
the vehicle information will then be
displayed in the unit of
measurement selected.
Tire Pressure
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), the
pressure for each tire can be viewed
in the DIC. The tire pressure will be
shown in either kilopascals (kPa)
or pounds per square inch (psi).
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
5-32
Black plate (32,1)
Instruments and Controls
Press the vehicle information button
until the DIC displays FRONT
TIRES kPa (PSI) LEFT ##
RIGHT ##. Press the vehicle
information button again until the
DIC displays REAR TIRES kPa
(PSI) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
If a low tire pressure condition is
detected by the system while
driving, a message advising you to
add pressure in a specific tire will
appear in the display. See Tire
Pressure on page 10‑53 and Tire
Messages on page 5‑44 for more
information.
If the tire pressure display shows
dashes instead of a value, there
may be a problem with your vehicle.
If this consistently occurs, see your
dealer for service.
Trailer Gain and Output
On vehicles with the Integrated
Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,
the trailer brake display appears in
the DIC. Press the vehicle
information button until TRAILER
GAIN and OUTPUT display.
TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer
gain setting. This setting can be
adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either
a trailer connected or disconnected.
To adjust this setting, see
“Integrated Trailer Brake Control
System” under Towing Equipment
on page 9‑82 for more information.
Compass Recalibration
OUTPUT shows the power output to
the trailer anytime a trailer with
electric brakes is connected. Output
is displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashes
may appear in the OUTPUT display.
See “Integrated Trailer Brake
Control System” under Towing
Equipment on page 9‑82 for more
information.
Trip Odometer Reset Stem
Menu Items (With DIC Buttons)
Engine Hours
Press the vehicle information button
until ENGINE HOURS displays.
This display shows the total number
of hours the engine has run.
Compass Zone Setting
This display allows for setting the
compass zone. See Compass on
page 5‑6
This display allows for calibrating
the compass. See Compass on
page 5‑6
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
Use the trip odometer reset stem
to view the odometer and trip
odometer. The Language selection
and Engine Hours display can also
be accessed with the trip odometer
reset stem.
Odometer
Press the trip odometer reset stem
until ODOMETER displays. This
display shows the distance the
vehicle has been driven in either
kilometers (km) or miles (mi).
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (33,1)
Instruments and Controls
Trip Odometer
Press the trip odometer reset stem
until TRIP displays. This display
shows the current distance traveled
in either kilometers (km) or
miles (mi) since the last reset for
the trip odometer.
The trip odometer can be reset to
zero by pressing and holding the trip
odometer reset stem while the trip
odometer is displayed.
was last turned on and the vehicle
was moving. Once the vehicle
begins moving, the trip odometer
will accumulate mileage. For
example, if the vehicle was driven
8 km (5 miles) before it is started
again, and then the retro-active
reset feature is activated, the
display will show 8 km (5 miles).
As the vehicle begins moving, the
display will then increase to 8.2 km
(5.1 miles), 8.4 km (5.2 miles), etc.
The trip odometer has a feature
called the retro-active reset. This
can be used to set the trip odometer
to the number of kilometers (miles)
driven since the ignition was last
turned on. This can be used if the
trip odometer is not reset at the
beginning of the trip.
Language
To use the retro-active reset feature,
press and hold the trip odometer
reset stem for at least four seconds.
The trip odometer will display the
number of kilometers (km) or
miles (mi) driven since the ignition
2. While in the ODOMETER
display, press and hold the
trip odometer reset stem for
three seconds until the currently
set language displays.
This display allows you to select
the language in which the DIC
messages will appear. To select a
language:
1. Press the trip odometer reset
stem until ODOMETER displays.
5-33
3. Continue to press and hold the
trip odometer reset stem to scroll
through all of the available
languages.
The available selections are
ENGLISH (default), FRANCAIS
(French), ESPANOL (Spanish),
and NO CHANGE.
4. Once the desired language is
displayed, release the trip
odometer reset stem to set
your choice.
Engine Hours
To display the ENGINE HOURS,
place the ignition in LOCK/OFF or
ACC/ACCESSORY, then press and
hold the trip odometer reset stem for
four seconds while viewing the
ODOMETER. This display shows
the total number of hours the engine
has run.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
5-34
Black plate (34,1)
Instruments and Controls
Trip Odometer Reset Stem
Menu Items (Without DIC
Buttons)
Language
This display allows you to select
the language in which the DIC
messages will appear. To select a
language:
1. Press the trip odometer reset
stem until ODOMETER displays.
2. While in the ODOMETER
display, press and hold the
trip odometer reset stem for
three seconds until the currently
set language displays.
3. Continue to press and hold the
trip odometer reset stem to scroll
through all of the available
languages.
The available languages are
ENGLISH (default), FRANCAIS
(French), ESPANOL (Spanish),
and NO CHANGE.
4. Once the desired language is
displayed, release the trip
odometer reset stem to set
your choice.
Trip Odometer
Press the trip odometer reset stem
until TRIP displays. This display
shows the current distance traveled
in either kilometers (km) or
miles (mi) since the last reset for
the trip odometer.
The trip odometer can be reset to
zero by pressing and holding the trip
odometer reset stem while the trip
odometer is displayed.
The trip odometer has a feature
called the retro-active reset. This
can be used to set the trip odometer
to the number of kilometers (miles)
driven since the ignition was last
turned on. This can be used if the
trip odometer is not reset at the
beginning of the trip.
To use the retro-active reset feature,
press and hold the trip odometer
reset stem for at least four seconds.
The trip odometer will display the
number of kilometers (km) or
miles (mi) driven since the ignition
was last turned on and the vehicle
was moving. Once the vehicle
begins moving, the trip odometer
will accumulate mileage. For
example, if the vehicle was driven
8 km (5 miles) before it is started
again, and then the retro-active
reset feature is activated, the
display will show 8 km (5 miles).
As the vehicle begins moving, the
display will then increase to 8.2 km
(5.1 miles), 8.4 km (5.2 miles), etc.
Transmission Temperature
Press the trip odometer reset stem
until TRANS TEMP displays. This
display shows the temperature of
the automatic transmission fluid in
either degrees Celsius (°C) or
degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (35,1)
Instruments and Controls
Trailer Gain and Output
Compass Zone Setting
On vehicles with the Integrated
Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,
the trailer brake display appears in
the DIC. Press the trip odometer
reset stem until TRAILER GAIN
and OUTPUT display.
This display allows for setting the
compass zone. See Compass on
page 5‑6 for more information.
TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer
gain setting. This setting can be
adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either
a trailer connected or disconnected.
To adjust this setting, see
“Integrated Trailer Brake Control
System” under Towing Equipment
on page 9‑82 for more information.
OUTPUT shows the power output
to the trailer anytime a trailer with
electric brakes is connected. Output
is displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashes
may appear in the OUTPUT display.
See “Integrated Trailer Brake
Control System” under Towing
Equipment on page 9‑82 for more
information.
Compass Recalibration
This display allows for calibrating
the compass. See Compass on
page 5‑6 for more information.
Oil Life
To access this display, the vehicle
must be in P (Park). Press the trip
odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display
shows an estimate of the oil's
remaining useful life. If you see
99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the
display, that means 99% of the
current oil life remains. The engine
oil life system will alert you to
change the oil on a schedule
consistent with your driving
conditions.
5-35
When the remaining oil life is low,
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message will appear on the display.
See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”
under Engine Oil Messages on
page 5‑39. You should change the
oil as soon as you can. See Engine
Oil on page 10‑8. In addition to the
engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance
Schedule in this manual. See
Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑3 for more information.
Remember, you must reset the OIL
LIFE display yourself after each oil
change. It will not reset itself. Also,
be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE
display accidentally at any time
other than when the oil has just
been changed. It cannot be reset
accurately until the next oil change.
To reset the engine oil life system,
see Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑10.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
5-36
Black plate (36,1)
Instruments and Controls
Relearn Tire Positions
Your vehicle may have this display.
To access this display, the vehicle
must be in P (Park). If your vehicle
has the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS), after rotating the
tires or after replacing a tire or
sensor, the system must re-learn the
tire positions. To re-learn the tire
positions, see Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 10‑55. See Tire
Inspection on page 10‑59, Tire
Rotation on page 10‑59 and Tire
Messages on page 5‑44 for more
information.
Vehicle Messages
Messages displayed on the DIC
indicate the status of the vehicle or
some action may be needed to
correct a condition. Multiple
messages may appear one after
another.
The messages that do not
require immediate action can be
acknowledged and cleared by
pressing V (Set/Reset) or the
trip odometer reset stem.
The messages that require
immediate action cannot be cleared
until that action is performed.
All messages should be taken
seriously and clearing the message
does not correct the problem.
The following are the possible
messages and some information
about them.
Battery Voltage and
Charging Messages
BATTERY LOW START
VEHICLE
When the vehicle’s battery is
severely discharged, this message
will display and four chimes will
sound. Start the vehicle
immediately. If the vehicle is not
started and the battery continues to
discharge, the climate controls,
heated seats, and audio systems
will shut off and the vehicle may
require a jump start. These systems
will function again after the vehicle
is started.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (37,1)
Instruments and Controls
SERVICE BATTERY
CHARGING SYSTEM
On some vehicles, this message
displays if there is a problem with
the battery charging system. Under
certain conditions, the charging
system light may also turn on in
the instrument panel cluster.
See Charging System Light on
page 5‑20. Driving with this problem
could drain the battery. Turn off all
unnecessary accessories. Have the
electrical system checked as soon
as possible. See your dealer.
Brake System Messages
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
This message displays along with
the brake system warning light if
there is a problem with the brake
system. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 5‑23. If this message
appears, stop as soon as possible
and turn off the vehicle. Restart the
vehicle and check for the message
on the DIC display. If the message
is still displayed or appears again
when you begin driving, the brake
system needs service as soon as
possible. See your dealer.
SERVICE BRAKES SOON
This message displays if there is a
problem with the brake system.
If this message appears, stop as
soon as possible and turn off the
vehicle. Restart the vehicle and
check for the message on the
DIC display. If the message is still
displayed or appears again when
you begin driving, the brake system
needs service. See your dealer.
SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE
SYSTEM
On vehicles with the Integrated
Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,
this message displays and a chime
sounds when there is a problem
with the ITBC system.
When this message displays, power
is no longer available to the trailer
brakes.
5-37
As soon as it is safe to do so,
carefully pull your vehicle over to
the side of the road and turn the
ignition off. Check the wiring
connection to the trailer and turn the
ignition back on. If this message still
displays, either your vehicle or the
trailer needs service. See your
dealer.
See “Integrated Trailer Brake
Control System” under Towing
Equipment on page 9‑82 for more
information.
Door Ajar Messages
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime
sounds if the driver door is not fully
closed and the vehicle is shifted out
of P (Park). Stop and turn off the
vehicle, check the door for
obstructions, and close the door
again. Check to see if the message
still appears on the DIC.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
5-38
Black plate (38,1)
Instruments and Controls
HOOD OPEN
REAR ACCESS OPEN
This message displays and a chime
sounds if the hood is not fully
closed. Stop and turn off the
vehicle, check the hood for
obstructions, and close the hood
again. Check to see if the message
still appears on the DIC.
This message displays and a chime
sounds if the liftgate or liftglass is
open while the ignition is in ON/
RUN. Turn off the vehicle and check
the liftgate and liftglass. Restart the
vehicle and check for the message
on the DIC display.
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime
sounds if the driver side rear door is
not fully closed and the vehicle is
shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn
off the vehicle, check the door for
obstructions, and close the door
again. Check to see if the message
still appears on the DIC.
This message displays and a chime
sounds if the passenger side rear
door is not fully closed and the
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check
the door for obstructions, and close
the door again. Check to see if the
message still appears on the DIC.
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime
sounds if the front passenger door
is not fully closed and the vehicle is
shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn
off the vehicle, check the door for
obstructions, and close the door
again. Check to see if the message
still appears on the DIC.
Engine Cooling System
Messages
ENGINE HOT A/C (Air
Conditioning) TURNED OFF
This message displays when the
engine coolant becomes hotter than
the normal operating temperature.
See Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge on page 5‑16. To avoid
added strain on a hot engine,
the air conditioning compressor
automatically turns off. When the
coolant temperature returns to
normal, the air conditioning
compressor turns back on. You
can continue to drive your vehicle.
If this message continues to appear,
have the system repaired by your
dealer as soon as possible to avoid
damage to the engine.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (39,1)
Instruments and Controls
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE
ENGINE
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP
ENGINE
Notice: If you drive the vehicle
while the engine is overheating,
severe engine damage may
occur. If an overheat warning
appears on the instrument panel
cluster and/or DIC, stop the
vehicle as soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on
page 10‑21 for more information.
Notice: If you drive the vehicle
while the engine is overheating,
severe engine damage may
occur. If an overheat warning
appears on the instrument panel
cluster and/or DIC, stop the
vehicle as soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on
page 10‑21 for more information.
This message displays when the
engine coolant temperature is too
hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
idle until it cools down. See Engine
Coolant Temperature Gauge on
page 5‑16.
This message displays and a chime
sounds if the engine cooling system
reaches unsafe temperatures for
operation. Stop and turn off the
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so to avoid severe damage. This
message clears when the engine
has cooled to a safe operating
temperature.
See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 10‑23 for
information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
5-39
Engine Oil Messages
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays when the
engine oil needs to be changed.
When you change the engine oil, be
sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message. See Engine
Oil Life System on page 10‑10 for
information on how to reset the
message. See Engine Oil on
page 10‑8 and Scheduled
Maintenance on page 11‑3 for
more information.
ENGINE OIL HOT IDLE
ENGINE
This message displays when the
engine oil becomes hotter than the
normal operating temperature. Stop
and allow the vehicle to idle until it
cools down. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge on page 5‑16.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
5-40
Black plate (40,1)
Instruments and Controls
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP
ENGINE
Notice: If you drive the vehicle
while the engine oil pressure
is low, severe engine damage
may occur. If a low oil pressure
warning appears on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), stop
the vehicle as soon as possible.
Do not drive the vehicle until the
cause of the low oil pressure is
corrected. See Engine Oil on
page 10‑8 for more information.
This message displays if low oil
pressure levels occur. Stop the
vehicle as soon as safely possible
and do not operate it until the cause
of the low oil pressure has been
corrected. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer. See Engine
Oil on page 10‑8.
Engine Power Messages
Fuel System Messages
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This message displays and a chime
sounds when the cooling system
temperature gets too hot and the
engine further enters the engine
coolant protection mode. See
Engine Overheating on page 10‑21
for further information.
This message displays and a chime
sounds if the fuel level is low. Refuel
as soon as possible. See Fuel
Gauge on page 5‑14 and Fuel on
page 9‑67 for more information.
This message also displays when
the engine power is reduced.
Reduced engine power can affect
the vehicle's ability to accelerate.
If this message is on, but there
is no reduction in performance,
proceed to your destination. The
performance may be reduced the
next time the vehicle is driven. The
vehicle may be driven at a reduced
speed while this message is on,
but acceleration and speed may be
reduced. Anytime this message
stays on, the vehicle should be
taken to your dealer for service as
soon as possible.
This message may display along
with the check engine light on the
instrument panel cluster if the fuel
cap is not tightened properly. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 5‑20. Reinstall the fuel cap
fully. See Filling the Tank on
page 9‑70. The diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed.
A loose or missing fuel cap allows
fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. A few driving trips with
the cap properly installed should
turn this light and message off.
TIGHTEN GAS CAP
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (41,1)
Instruments and Controls
Key and Lock Messages
REPLACE BATTERY IN
REMOTE KEY
This message displays if a Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
battery is low. The battery needs
to be replaced in the transmitter.
See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2‑3.
Lamp Messages
TURN SIGNAL ON
This message displays and a chime
sounds if a turn signal is left on for
1.2 km (0.75 mile). Move the turn
signal/multifunction lever to the off
position.
Object Detection System
Messages
PARK ASST BLOCKED SEE
OWNERS MANUAL
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
this message displays if there is
something interfering with the park
assist system. See Ultrasonic
Parking Assist on page 9‑58 for
more information.
PARK ASSIST OFF
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
after the vehicle has been started,
this message displays to remind the
driver that the URPA system has
been turned off. Press the set/reset
button or the trip odometer reset
stem to acknowledge this message
and clear it from the DIC display.
To turn the URPA system back on,
see Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
page 9‑58.
5-41
SERVICE PARK ASSIST
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
this message displays if there is a
problem with the URPA system.
Do not use this system to help you
park. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist
on page 9‑58 for more information.
See your dealer for service.
SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONE
ALERT SYSTEM
If your vehicle has the Side Blind
Zone Alert (SBZA) system and this
message displays, both SBZA
displays will remain on indicating
there is a problem with the SBZA
system. If these displays remain on
after continued driving, the system
needs service. See your dealer. See
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on
page 9‑60 for more information.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
5-42
Black plate (42,1)
Instruments and Controls
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
SYSTEM OFF
If your vehicle has the Side Blind
Zone Alert (SBZA) system, this
message displays when the SBZA
system has been turned off. See
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on
page 9‑60 and Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑27 for more
information.
SIDE BLIND ZONE SYSTEM
UNAVAILABLE
If your vehicle has the Side Blind
Zone Alert (SBZA) system, this
message displays when the SBZA
system is disabled because the
sensor is blocked and cannot detect
vehicles in your blind zone. The
sensor may be blocked by mud, dirt,
snow, ice, or slush. This message
may also display during heavy rain
or due to road spray. It may also
come on when driving in isolated
areas with no guardrails, trees,
or road signs and light traffic.
Your vehicle does not need service.
For cleaning instructions, see
Washing Your Vehicle in Exterior
Care on page 10‑93. See Side Blind
Zone Alert (SBZA) on page 9‑60 for
more information.
Ride Control System
Messages
SERVICE STABILITRAK
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak® and
this message displays, it means
there may be a problem with the
StabiliTrak system. If you see this
message, try to reset the system.
Stop; turn off the engine for at least
15 seconds; then start the engine
again. If this message still comes
on, it means there is a problem. You
should see your dealer for service.
The vehicle is safe to drive,
however, you do not have the
benefit of StabiliTrak, so reduce
your speed and drive accordingly.
SERVICE SUSPENSION
SYSTEM
If your vehicle has the Autoride®
suspension system, this message
displays when the Autoride
suspension system is not operating
properly. Have your vehicle serviced
by your dealer.
SERVICE TRACTION
CONTROL
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this
message displays when there is a
problem with the Traction Control
System (TCS). When this message
displays, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving
accordingly. See your dealer for
service. See StabiliTrak® System on
page 9‑52 for more information.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (43,1)
Instruments and Controls
STABILITRAK OFF
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this
message displays when you turn off
StabiliTrak, or when the stability
control has been automatically
disabled. To limit wheel spin and
realize the full benefits of the
stability enhancement system, you
should normally leave StabiliTrak
on. However, you should turn
StabiliTrak off if your vehicle gets
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow
and you want to rock your vehicle
to attempt to free it, or if you are
driving in extreme off-road
conditions and require more wheel
spin. See If the Vehicle is Stuck on
page 9‑21. To turn the StabiliTrak
system on or off, see StabiliTrak®
System on page 9‑52.
There are several conditions that
can cause this message to appear.
.
One condition is overheating,
which could occur if StabiliTrak
activates continuously for an
extended period of time.
5-43
.
The message also displays if the
brake system warning light is on.
See Brake System Warning
Light on page 5‑23.
Adjust your driving accordingly. See
StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑52
for more information.
.
The message could display if
the stability system takes longer
than usual to complete its
diagnostic checks due to driving
conditions.
Airbag System Messages
.
The message displays if an
engine or vehicle related
problem has been detected
and the vehicle needs service.
See your dealer.
.
The message also displays
if the vehicle is shifted into
4LO (Two Speed Transfer
Case Only).
The message turns off as soon
as the conditions that caused the
message to be displayed are no
longer present.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this
message displays when the Traction
Control System (TCS) is turned off.
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays if there is a
problem with the airbag system.
Have your dealer inspect the
system for problems. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5‑18 and
Airbag System on page 3‑37 for
more information.
Anti-Theft Alarm System
Messages
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT
SYSTEM
This message displays when there
is a problem with the theft-deterrent
system. The vehicle may or may not
restart so you may want to take the
vehicle to your dealer before turning
off the engine. See Immobilizer
Operation on page 2‑16 for more
information.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
5-44
Black plate (44,1)
Instruments and Controls
Tire Messages
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
SYSTEM
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), this
message displays if a part on the
TPMS is not working properly. The
tire pressure light also flashes and
then remains on during the same
ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure
Light on page 5‑25. Several
conditions may cause this message
to appear. See Tire Pressure
Monitor Operation on page 10‑56 for
more information. If the warning
comes on and stays on, there may
be a problem with the TPMS. See
your dealer.
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), this
message displays when the TPMS
is re-learning the tire positions on
your vehicle. The tire positions must
be re-learned after rotating the tires
or after replacing a tire or sensor.
See Tire Inspection on page 10‑59,
Tire Rotation on page 10‑59, Tire
Pressure Monitor System on
page 10‑55, and Tire Pressure on
page 10‑53 for more information.
TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), this
message displays when the
pressure in one or more of the
vehicle's tires needs to be checked.
This message also displays LEFT
FRT (left front), RIGHT FRT
(right front), LEFT RR (left rear),
or RIGHT RR (right rear) to indicate
the location of the low tire. The low
tire pressure warning light will also
come on. See Tire Pressure Light
on page 5‑25. You can receive more
than one tire pressure message at a
time. To read the other messages
that may have been sent at the
same time, press the set/reset
button or the trip odometer reset
stem. If a tire pressure message
appears on the DIC, stop as soon
as you can. Have the tire pressures
checked and set to those shown on
the Tire Loading Information label.
See Tires on page 10‑46, Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑22, and Tire
Pressure on page 10‑53. The DIC
also shows the tire pressure values.
See “DIC Operation and Displays
(With DIC Buttons)” earlier in this
section.
Transmission Messages
SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE
This message displays if a problem
occurs with the four-wheel-drive
system. If this message appears,
stop as soon as possible and turn
off the vehicle. Make sure the key is
in the LOCK/OFF position for at
least one minute and then restart
the vehicle and check for the
message on the DIC display. If the
message is still displayed or
appears again when you begin
driving, the four-wheel-drive system
needs service. See your dealer.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (45,1)
Instruments and Controls
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE
ENGINE
Notice: If you drive the vehicle
while the transmission fluid is
overheating and the transmission
temperature warning is displayed
on the instrument panel cluster
and/or DIC, you can damage the
transmission. This could lead to
costly repairs that would not be
covered by the warranty. Do not
drive the vehicle with overheated
transmission fluid or while the
transmission temperature
warning is displayed.
This message displays along with a
sound if the transmission fluid in the
vehicle gets hot. Driving with the
transmission fluid temperature high
can cause damage to the vehicle.
Stop the vehicle and let it idle to
allow the transmission to cool. This
message clears and the chime
stops when the fluid temperature
reaches a safe level.
Vehicle Reminder
Messages
CHECK TRAILER WIRING
On vehicles with the Integrated
Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,
this message may display and a
chime may sound when one of the
following conditions exists:
.
A trailer with electric brakes
becomes disconnected from the
vehicle.
‐ If the disconnect occurs while
the vehicle is stopped, this
message clears itself after a
short time.
‐ If the disconnect occurs while
the vehicle is moving, this
message stays on until the
ignition is turned off.
.
There is a short in the wiring to
the electric trailer brakes.
When this message displays, power
is no longer available to the trailer
brakes.
5-45
As soon as it is safe to do so,
carefully pull the vehicle over to the
side of the road and turn the ignition
off. Check the wiring connection to
the trailer and turn the ignition back
on. This message clears if the trailer
is reconnected. This message also
clears if you acknowledge it. If this
message still displays, either the
vehicle or the trailer needs service.
See your dealer.
See “Integrated Trailer Brake
Control System” under Towing
Equipment on page 9‑82 for more
information.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE
WITH CARE
This message displays when ice
conditions are possible.
TRAILER CONNECTED
On vehicles with the Integrated
Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,
this message displays briefly when
a trailer with electric brakes is
first connected to the vehicle.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
5-46
Black plate (46,1)
Instruments and Controls
This message clears itself after
several seconds. This message also
clears if you acknowledge it. After
this message clears, the TRAILER
GAIN/OUTPUT display appears in
the DIC.
See “TRAILER GAIN/OUTPUT”
under Driver Information Center
(DIC) on page 5‑27 and “Integrated
Trailer Brake Control System” under
Towing Equipment on page 9‑82 for
more information.
Washer Fluid Messages
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD
FLUID
This message displays when the
windshield washer fluid is low. Fill
the windshield washer fluid reservoir
as soon as possible. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6 for the location of the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
Also, see Washer Fluid on
page 10‑25 for more information.
Vehicle
Personalization
To change customization
preferences, use the following
procedure.
Vehicle Personalization
(With DIC Buttons)
Entering the Feature
Settings Menu
Your vehicle may have
customization capabilities that allow
you to program certain features to
one preferred setting. Customization
features can only be programmed
to one setting on the vehicle and
cannot be programmed to a
preferred setting for two different
drivers.
All of the customization options may
not be available on your vehicle.
Only the options available will be
displayed on the DIC.
The default settings for the
customization features were set
when your vehicle left the factory,
but may have been changed from
their default state since then.
The customization preferences are
automatically recalled.
1. Turn the ignition on and place
the vehicle in P (Park).
To avoid excessive drain on the
battery, it is recommended that
the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press the customization button
to scroll through the available
customizable options.
Feature Settings Menu Items
The following are customization
features that allow you to program
settings to the vehicle:
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
This feature will only display if a
language other than English has
been set. This feature allows you to
change the language in which the
DIC messages appear to English.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (47,1)
Instruments and Controls
5-47
Press the customization button until
the PRESS V TO DISPLAY IN
ENGLISH screen appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to display all DIC
messages in English.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
You can also change the language
by pressing the trip odometer reset
stem. See “Language” under DIC
Operation and Displays (Without
DIC Buttons) earlier in this section
for more information.
SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default):
The doors will automatically lock
when the vehicle is shifted out of
P (Park).
This feature allows you to select
the language in which the DIC
messages will appear.
Press the customization button until
the DISPLAY LANGUAGE screen
appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button once to access
the settings for this feature. Then
press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings:
ENGLISH (default): All messages
will appear in English.
FRANCAIS: All messages will
appear in French.
ESPANOL: All messages will
appear in Spanish.
AUTO DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select
when the vehicle's doors will
automatically lock. See Automatic
Door Locks on page 2‑9 for more
information.
Press the customization button until
AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors
will automatically lock when the
vehicle speed is above 8 mph
(13 km/h) for 3 seconds.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select
whether or not to turn off the
automatic door unlocking feature.
It also allows you to select which
doors and when the doors will
automatically unlock. See Automatic
Door Locks on page 2‑9 for more
information.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
5-48
Black plate (48,1)
Instruments and Controls
Press the customization button until
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on
the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
OFF: None of the doors will
automatically unlock.
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the
driver door will unlock when the key
is taken out of the ignition.
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver
door will unlock when the vehicle is
shifted into P (Park) .
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors
will unlock when the key is taken
out of the ignition.
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the
doors will unlock when the vehicle is
shifted into P (Park).
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps
will flash when you press the lock
button on the RKE transmitter.
REMOTE DOOR LOCK
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound
on the second press of the lock
button on the RKE transmitter.
This feature allows you to select the
type of feedback you will receive
when locking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. You will not receive
feedback when locking the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter if the doors
are open. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 2‑3 for more information.
Press the customization button until
REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on
the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
OFF: There will be no feedback
when you press the lock button on
the RKE transmitter.
HORN & LIGHTS (default): The
exterior lamps will flash when you
press the lock button on the RKE
transmitter, and the horn will sound
when the lock button is pressed
again within five seconds of the
previous command.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (49,1)
Instruments and Controls
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select the
type of feedback you will receive
when unlocking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. You will not receive
feedback when unlocking the
vehicle with the RKE transmitter if
the doors are open. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2‑3 for more
information.
Press the customization button until
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears
on the DIC display. Press the set/
reset button once to access the
settings for this feature. Then press
the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps
will not flash when you press the
unlock button on the RKE
transmitter.
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior
lamps will flash when you press the
unlock button on the RKE
transmitter.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
DELAY DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select
whether or not the locking of the
vehicle's doors and liftgate will be
delayed. When locking the doors
and liftgate with the power door lock
switch and a door or the liftgate is
open, this feature will delay locking
the doors and liftgate until
five seconds after the last door is
closed. You will hear three chimes
to signal that the delayed locking
feature is in use. The key must be
out of the ignition for this feature to
work. You can temporarily override
delayed locking by pressing the
power door lock switch twice. See
Delayed Locking on page 2‑9 for
more information.
5-49
Press the customization button until
DELAY DOOR LOCK appears on
the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
OFF: There will be no delayed
locking of the vehicle's doors.
ON (default): The doors will not
lock until 5 seconds after the last
door or the liftgate is closed.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
EXIT LIGHTING
This feature allows you to select
the amount of time you want the
exterior lamps to remain on when
it is dark enough outside. This
happens after the key is turned
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
5-50
Black plate (50,1)
Instruments and Controls
Press the customization button until
EXIT LIGHTING appears on the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
APPROACH LIGHTING
OFF: The exterior lamps will not
turn on.
Press the customization button until
APPROACH LIGHTING appears on
the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
30 SECONDS (default): The
exterior lamps will stay on for
30 seconds.
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will
stay on for 1 minute.
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will
stay on for 2 minutes.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
This feature allows you to select
whether or not to have the exterior
lights turn on briefly during low light
periods after unlocking the vehicle
using the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
OFF: The exterior lights will not
turn on when you unlock the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter.
ON (default): If it is dark enough
outside, the exterior lights will turn
on briefly when you unlock the
vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
The lights will remain on for
20 seconds or until the lock button
on the RKE transmitter is pressed,
or the vehicle is no longer off.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2‑3 for
more information.
NO CHANGE : No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
CHIME VOLUME
This feature allows you to select the
volume level of the chime.
Press the customization button until
CHIME VOLUME appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
NORMAL: The chime volume will
be set to a normal level.
LOUD: The chime volume will be
set to a loud level.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (51,1)
Instruments and Controls
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
OFF (default): Neither outside
mirror will be tilted down when the
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
There is no default for chime
volume. The volume will stay at the
last known setting.
DRIVER MIRROR: The driver
outside mirror will be tilted down
when the vehicle is shifted into
R (Reverse).
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
PARK TILT MIRRORS
If your vehicle has this feature,
it allows you to select whether or
not the outside mirror(s) will
automatically tilt down when the
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
See Park Tilt Mirrors on page 2‑20
for more information.
Press the customization button until
PARK TILT MIRRORS appears on
the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
PASSENGER MIRROR: The
passenger outside mirror will be
tilted down when the vehicle is
shifted into R (Reverse).
BOTH MIRRORS: The driver and
passenger outside mirrors will be
tilted down when the vehicle is
shifted into R (Reverse).
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
5-51
EASY EXIT RECALL
If your vehicle has this feature, it
allows you to select your preference
for the automatic easy exit seat
feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors,
and Pedals in Power Seat
Adjustment on page 3‑4 for more
information.
Press the customization button until
EASY EXIT RECALL appears on
the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
DOOR BUTTON ONLY: No
automatic seat exit recall will occur.
The recall will only occur after
pressing the easy exit seat button.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
5-52
Black plate (52,1)
Instruments and Controls
BUTTON & KEY OUT (default): If
the features are enabled through the
EASY EXIT SETUP menu, the
driver seat will move back when the
key is removed from the ignition or
after pressing the easy exit seat
button.
The automatic easy exit seat
movement will only occur one time
after the key is removed from the
ignition. If the automatic movement
has already occurred, and you put
the key back in the ignition and
remove it again, the seat will stay in
the original exit position, unless a
memory recall took place prior to
removing the key again.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
EASY EXIT SETUP
If your vehicle has this feature, it
allows you to select which areas will
recall with the automatic easy exit
seat feature. It also allows you to
turn off the automatic easy exit
feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors,
and Pedals in Power Seat
Adjustment on page 3‑4 and “EASY
EXIT RECALL” earlier for more
information.
Press the customization button until
EASY EXIT SETUP appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:
OFF: No automatic seat exit will
recall.
SEAT ONLY (Default): The driver
seat will recall.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
MEMORY SEAT RECALL
If your vehicle has this feature, it
allows you to select your preference
for the remote memory seat recall
feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors,
and Pedals in Power Seat
Adjustment on page 3‑4 for more
information.
Press the customization button until
MEMORY SEAT RECALL appears
on the DIC display. Press the set/
reset button once to access the
settings for this feature. Then press
the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
OFF (default): No remote memory
seat recall will occur.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (53,1)
Instruments and Controls
5-53
ON: The driver seat and, on some
vehicles, the outside mirrors will
automatically move to the stored
driving position when the unlock
button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter is pressed. On
some vehicles with the adjustable
throttle and brake pedal feature, the
pedals will also automatically move.
Press the customization button until
REMOTE START appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
Press the customization button until
FACTORY SETTINGS appears on
the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
OFF : The remote start feature will
be disabled.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
ON (default): The remote start
feature will be enabled.
RESTORE ALL (default): The
customization features will be set
to their factory default settings.
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
REMOTE START
If your vehicle has this feature, it
allows you to turn the remote start
off or on. The remote start feature
allows you to start the engine from
outside of the vehicle using the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. See Remote Vehicle
Start on page 2‑5 for more
information.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
FACTORY SETTINGS
This feature allows you to set all of
the customization features back to
their factory default settings.
DO NOT RESTORE: The
customization features will not be
set to their factory default settings.
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
This feature allows you to exit the
feature settings menu.
Press the customization button until
PRESS V TO EXIT FEATURE
SETTINGS appears in the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button
once to exit the menu.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
5-54
Black plate (54,1)
Instruments and Controls
If you do not exit, pressing the
customization button again will
return you to the beginning of the
feature settings menu.
Exiting the Feature
Settings Menu
The feature settings menu will be
exited when any of the following
occurs:
.
The vehicle is no longer in
ON/RUN.
.
The trip/fuel or vehicle
information DIC buttons are
pressed.
.
The end of the feature settings
menu is reached and exited.
.
A 40 second time period has
elapsed with no selection made.
Universal Remote
System
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑18 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-210/220/310.
Universal Remote System
Programming
Vehicles with the Universal Remote
System will have these buttons
located in the headliner.
This system provides a way to
replace up to three remote control
transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door
openers, security systems, and
home automation devices.
Do not use this system with any
garage door opener that does not
have the stop and reverse feature.
This includes any garage door
opener model manufactured before
April 1, 1982.
Read the instructions completely
before attempting to program the
transmitter. Because of the steps
involved, it may be helpful to have
another person assist with
programming the transmitter.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (55,1)
Instruments and Controls
Be sure to keep the original remote
control transmitter for use in other
vehicles, as well as for future
programming. Only the original
remote control transmitter is needed
for Fixed Code programming. The
programmed buttons should be
erased when the vehicle is sold or
the lease ends. See “Erasing
Universal Home Remote Buttons” in
this section.
Park the vehicle outside of the
garage when programming a garage
door. Be sure that people and
objects are clear of the garage door
or gate that is being programmed.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
For questions or help programming
the Universal Home Remote
System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go
to www.learcar2u.com.
5-55
Most garage door openers sold
after 1996 are Rolling Code units.
Programming a garage door opener
involves time-sensitive actions, so
read the entire procedure before
starting. Otherwise, the device will
time out and the procedure will have
to be repeated.
To program up to three devices:
1. From inside the vehicle,
press the two outside buttons
at the same time for one to
two seconds, and immediately
release them.
2. In the garage, locate the
garage door opener receiver
(motor-head unit). Find the
“Learn” or “Smart” button. It can
usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit
and may be a colored button.
Press this button. After pressing
this button, complete the
following steps in less than
30 seconds.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
5-56
Black plate (56,1)
Instruments and Controls
3. Immediately return to the
vehicle. Press and hold the
Universal Home Remote button
that will be used to control the
garage door until the garage
door moves. The indicator light,
above the selected button,
should slowly blink. This button
may need to be held for up to
20 seconds.
different function button in Step 3
than what was used for the garage
door opener.
4. Immediately, within one second,
release the button when the
garage door moves. The
indicator light will blink rapidly
until programming is complete.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
5. Press and release the same
button again. The garage door
should move, confirming that
programming is successful
and complete.
To program another Rolling Code
device such as an additional garage
door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat
Steps 1 through 5, choosing a
If these instructions do not work,
the garage door opener is probably
a Fixed Code unit. Follow the
programming instructions that follow
for a Fixed Code garage door
opener.
For questions or help programming
the Universal Home Remote
System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go
to www.learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold
before 1996 are Fixed Code units.
Programming a garage door opener
involves time-sensitive actions, so
read the entire procedure before
starting. Otherwise, the device will
time out and the procedure will have
to be repeated.
To program up to three devices:
1. To verify that the garage door
opener is a Fixed Code unit,
remove the battery cover on the
hand-held transmitter supplied
by the manufacturer of the
garage door opener motor.
If there is a row of dip switches
similar to the graphic above, the
garage door opener is a Fixed
Code unit. If you do not see a
row of dip switches, return
to the previous section for
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (57,1)
Instruments and Controls
The switch positions on the
hand-held transmitter could be
labeled as follows:
Your hand-held transmitter can
have between 8 to 12 dip
switches depending on the
brand of transmitter.
The garage door opener receiver
(motor head unit) could also
have a row of dip switches that
can be used when programming
the Universal Home Remote.
If the total number of switches
on the motor head and
hand-held transmitter are
different, or if the dip switch
settings are different, use the dip
switch settings on the motor
head unit to program the
Universal Home Remote. The
motor head dip switch settings
can also be used when the
original hand-held transmitter is
not available.
5-57
Example of Eight Dip Switches
with Two Positions
Example of Eight Dip Switches
with Three Positions
The panel of switches might not
appear exactly as they do in the
examples above, but they
should be similar.
.
A switch in the up position
could be labeled as Up,
+, or On.
.
A switch in the down
position could be labeled as
Down, −, or Off.
.
A switch in the middle
position could be labeled as
Middle, 0, or Neutral.
2. Write down the 8 to 12 switch
settings from left to right as
follows:
.
When a switch is in the up
position, write “Left.”
.
When a switch is in the
down position, write “Right.”
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
5-58
.
Black plate (58,1)
Instruments and Controls
If a switch is set between
the up and down position,
write “Middle.”
Now press one button on the
Universal Home Remote for
each switch setting as follows:
The switch settings written
down in Step 2 now
become the button strokes
to be entered into the
Universal Home Remote in
Step 4. Be sure to enter the
switch settings written down
in Step 2, in order from left
to right, into the Universal
Home Remote, when
completing Step 4.
.
If you wrote “Left,” press
the left button (A) in the
vehicle.
.
If you wrote “Right,” press
the right button (C) in the
vehicle.
.
If you wrote “Middle,” press
the middle button (B) in the
vehicle.
3. From inside your vehicle,
first firmly press all three buttons
at the same time for about
three seconds. Release the
buttons to put the Universal
Home Remote into
programming mode.
A. Left Button (Up, +, or On)
B. Middle Button (Middle, 0,
or Neutral)
C. Right Button (Down, −,
or Off)
4. The indicator lights will blink
slowly. Enter each switch
setting from Step 2 into your
vehicle's Universal Home
Remote. You will have two and
one-half minutes to complete
Step 4.
5. After entering all of the switch
positions, once again firmly
press and release all three
buttons at the same time. The
indicator lights will turn on.
6. Press and hold the button that
will be used to control the
garage door until the garage
door moves. The indicator light
above the selected button
should slowly blink. This button
may need to be held for up to
55 seconds.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (59,1)
Instruments and Controls
7. Immediately release the button
when the garage door moves.
The indicator light will blink
rapidly until programming is
complete.
8. Press and release the same
button again. The garage door
should move, confirming that
programming is successful and
complete.
To program another Fixed Code
device such as an additional garage
door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat
Steps 1-8, choosing a different
button in Step 6 than what was used
for the garage door opener.
5-59
Universal Remote System
Operation
To erase either Rolling Code or
Fixed Code settings on the
Universal Home Remote device:
Press and hold the appropriate
button for at least half of a second.
The indicator light will come on
while the signal is being transmitted.
1. Press and hold the two outside
buttons at the same time for
approximately 20 seconds, until
the indicator lights, located
directly above the buttons, begin
to blink rapidly.
Reprogramming Universal
Home Remote Buttons
Any of the three buttons can be
reprogrammed by repeating the
instructions.
Erasing Universal Home
Remote Buttons
The programmed buttons should be
erased when the vehicle is sold or
the lease ends.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to
blink, release both buttons. The
codes from all buttons will be
erased.
For help or information on the
Universal Home Remote System,
call the customer assistance phone
number under Customer Assistance
Offices (U.S. and Canada) on
page 13‑5 or Customer Assistance
Offices (Mexico) on page 13‑5.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
5-60
Black plate (60,1)
Instruments and Controls
2 NOTES
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (1,1)
Lighting
Lighting
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Automatic Headlamp
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-5
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Auxiliary
Roof-Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Interior Lighting
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6-1
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls
Lighting Features
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Load Management . . . .
Battery Power Protection . . . . . .
6-8
6-8
6-9
6-9
The exterior lamps control is located
on the instrument panel to the left of
the steering wheel.
It controls the following systems:
.
Headlamps
.
Taillamps
.
Parking Lamps
.
License Plate Lamps
.
Instrument Panel Lights
The exterior lamps control has
four positions:
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
6-2
Black plate (2,1)
Lighting
O (Off): Turns off the automatic
headlamps and Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL). Turn the headlamp
control to the off position again to
turn the automatic headlamps or
DRL back on.
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the
headlamps together with the
following lamps listed below.
For vehicles first sold in Canada,
the off position will only work when
the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
AUTO (Automatic): Automatically
turns on the headlamps at normal
brightness, together with the
following:
.
Parking Lamps
.
Instrument Panel Lights
.
Taillamps
.
License Plate Lamps
; (Parking Lamps):
Turns on the
parking lamps together with the
following:
.
Instrument Panel Lights
.
Taillamps
.
License Plate Lamps
.
Parking Lamps
.
Instrument Panel Lights
.
Taillamps
.
License Plate Lamps
When the headlamps are turned
on while the vehicle is on, the
headlamps will turn off automatically
10 minutes after the ignition is
turned off. When the headlamps are
turned on while the vehicle is off,
the headlamps will stay on for
10 minutes before automatically
turning off to prevent the battery
from being drained. Turn the
headlamp control to off and then
back to the headlamp on position to
make the headlamps stay on for an
additional 10 minutes.
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder
A reminder chime will sound when
the headlamps or parking lamps are
manually turned on and the ignition
is off and a door is open. To disable
the chime, turn the light off.
Headlamp High/
Low-Beam Changer
5 3 (Headlamp High/Low
Beam Changer): To change the
headlamps from low to high beam,
push the lever toward the instrument
panel. To return to low-beam
headlamps, pull the multifunction
lever toward you. Then release it.
When the high beams are on, this
indicator light on the instrument
panel cluster will also be on.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (3,1)
Lighting
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use the
high-beam headlamps to signal
a driver in front of you that you
want to pass. It works even if the
headlamps are in the automatic
position.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever
toward you, then release it.
If the headlamps are in the
automatic position or on low beam,
the high-beam headlamps will turn
on. They will stay on as long as
you hold the lever toward you.
The high-beam indicator on the
instrument panel cluster will come
on. Release the lever to return to
normal operation.
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can
make it easier for others to see the
front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional daytime running
lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
The DRL system comes on when
the following conditions are met:
.
The ignition is on.
.
The exterior lamps control is
in AUTO.
.
The transmission is not in Park.
.
The light sensor determines it is
daytime.
When the DRL system is on,
only the DRL lamps are on. The
taillamps, sidemarker, instrument
panel lights, and other lamps will
not be on.
When it begins to get dark, the
automatic headlamp system
switches from DRL to the
headlamps.
6-3
To turn off the DRL lamps, turn the
exterior lamps control to the OFF
position and then release. For
vehicles first sold in Canada, the
transmission must be in the P (Park)
position before the DRL lamps can
be turned off.
Automatic Headlamp
System
When it is dark enough outside, the
automatic headlamp system turns
on the headlamps at the normal
brightness, along with the taillamps,
sidemarker, parking lamps, and the
instrument panel lights. The radio
lights will also be dim.
To turn off the automatic headlamp
system, turn the exterior lamps
switch to the off position and then
release it. For vehicles first sold in
Canada, the transmission must be
in the P (Park) position before the
automatic headlamp system can be
turned off.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
6-4
Black plate (4,1)
Lighting
under bridges or bright overhead
street lights does not affect the
system. The DRL and automatic
headlamp system are only affected
when the light sensor detects a
change in lighting lasting longer
than the delay.
The vehicle has a light sensor
located on the top of the instrument
panel which regulates when the
automatic headlamps turn on. Do
not cover the sensor, otherwise the
headlamps will come on whenever
the ignition is on.
The system may also turn on the
headlamps when driving through a
parking garage or heavy overcast
weather. This is normal.
There is a delay in the transition
between the daytime and nighttime
operation of the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic
headlamp systems so that driving
If the vehicle is started in a dark
garage, the automatic headlamp
system comes on immediately.
Once the vehicle leaves the garage,
it takes approximately one minute
for the automatic headlamp system
to change to DRL if it is bright
enough outside. During that delay,
the instrument panel cluster may not
be as bright as usual. Make sure the
instrument panel brightness control
is in the full bright position. See
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 6‑7.
To idle the vehicle with the
automatic headlamp system off,
turn the control to the off position.
The headlamps will also stay on
after you exit the vehicle. This
feature can be programmed using
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See Vehicle Personalization (With
DIC Buttons) on page 5‑46.
If the vehicle is not equipped
with DIC buttons, exit lighting is
automatic. When it is dark enough
outside, the exterior lamps remain
on for 30 seconds after the ignition
is moved from ON/RUN to
LOCK/OFF.
For vehicles without a radio, the
instrument panel light remains on
for 30 seconds with the driver door
closed. For vehicles with a radio,
the instrument panel light remains
on for 10 minutes with the driver
door closed. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9‑32.
The regular headlamp system can
be turned on when needed.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (5,1)
Lighting
Hazard Warning Flashers
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals
An arrow on the instrument panel
cluster flashes in the direction of the
turn or lane change.
| (Hazard Warning Flashers):
Press this button located on top of
the steering column, to make the
front and rear turn signal lamps
flash on and off. This warns others
that you are having trouble. Press
again to turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers
are on, the vehicle's turn signals will
not work.
Move the lever all the way up or
down to signal a turn.
Raise or lower the lever for less
than one second until the arrow
starts to flash to signal a lane
change. This causes the turn
signals to automatically flash
three times. It will flash six times if
tow-haul mode is active. Holding
the turn signal lever for more than
one second will cause the turn
signals to flash until you release
the lever.
6-5
The lever returns to its starting
position whenever it is released.
If after signaling a turn or a lane
change the arrows flash rapidly or
do not come on, a signal bulb could
be burned out.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb
is not burned out, check the fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 10‑39.
Turn Signal On Chime
If the turn signal is left on for more
than 1.2 km (3/4 of a mile), a chime
will sound at each flash of the turn
signal and the message TURN
SIGNAL ON will also appear in the
Driver Information Control (DIC).
To turn the chime and message off,
move the turn signal lever to the off
position.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
6-6
Black plate (6,1)
Lighting
Fog Lamps
When the headlamps are changed
to high beam, the fog lamps also go
off. When the high-beam headlamps
are turned off, the fog lamps will
come on again.
Some localities have laws that
require the headlamps to be on with
the fog lamps.
For vehicles with fog lamps, the
control is located next to the exterior
lamps control on the instrument
panel, to the left of the steering
column.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position for the fog lamps to
come on.
# (Fog Lamps): Press to turn the
fog lamps on or off. A light will come
on in the instrument panel cluster.
When the fog lamps are turned on,
the parking lamps automatically
turn on.
Auxiliary
Roof-Mounted Lamp
If the vehicle has this feature, this
button includes wiring provisions for
a dealer or a qualified service center
to install an auxiliary roof lamp.
This button is located on the
overhead console.
When the wiring is connected to
an auxiliary roof‐mounted lamp,
pressing the bottom of the button
will activate the lamp and illuminate
an indicator light at the bottom of
this button. Pressing the top of the
button will turn off the roof‐mounted
lamp and indicator.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (7,1)
Lighting
The emergency roof lamp circuit is
fused at 30 amps, so the total
current draw of the attached lamps
should be less than this value. The
attachment points for the roof lamp
circuits are two blunt cut wires
located above the overhead
console, a dark green switched
power wire and a black ground wire.
Interior Lighting
Instrument Panel
Illumination Control
Turn the knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to brighten or dim
the instrument panel lights. Turning
the knob to the farthest clockwise
position turns on the dome lamps.
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps are located in
the overhead console.
For more information on roof mount
emergency lamp installation, please
visit the GM Upfitter website at
www.gmupfitter.com or contact your
dealer.
If the vehicle has this button, the
vehicle may have the snow plow
prep package. For further
information, see Adding a Snow
Plow or Similar Equipment on
page 9‑91.
6-7
They come on when any door is
opened and turn off after all the
doors are closed.
D (Instrument Panel
Brightness): This feature controls
the brightness of the instrument
panel lights and is located next to
the exterior lamps control.
Push the knob to extend out and
then it can be turned.
Turn the instrument panel
brightness knob located below
the dome lamp override button,
clockwise to the farthest position to
manually turn on the dome lamps.
The dome lamps remain on until the
knob is turned counterclockwise.
Dome Lamp Override
The dome lamp override button is
located next to the exterior lamps
control.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
6-8
Black plate (8,1)
Lighting
Reading Lamps
Lighting Features
For vehicles with reading lamps
they are located on the overhead
console.
Entry Lighting
To turn on the reading lamps, press
the button located next to each
lamp. To turn them off, press the
button again.
k (Dome Off): Press the button
in and the dome lamps remain off
when a door is opened. Press the
button again to return it to the
extended position so that the dome
lamps come on when a door is
opened.
The vehicle may also have reading
lamps in other locations. To turn the
lamps on or off, press the button
located next to the lamp.
The lamps are fixed and cannot be
adjusted.
The vehicle has an illuminated entry
feature.
When the doors are opened, the
dome lamps will come on if the
dome override button is in the
extended position. If the dome
override button is pressed in, the
lamps will not come on.
Exit Lighting
The interior lamps come on when
the key is removed from the ignition.
They turn off automatically in
20 seconds. The lights do not come
on if the dome override button is
pressed in.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (9,1)
Lighting
Battery Load
Management
The vehicle has Electric Power
Management (EPM) that estimates
the battery's temperature and state
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage
for best performance and extended
life of the battery.
When the battery's state of charge
is low, the voltage is raised slightly
to quickly bring the charge back up.
When the state of charge is high,
the voltage is lowered slightly to
prevent overcharging. If the vehicle
has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage
display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you may see the
voltage move up or down. This is
normal. If there is a problem, an
alert will be displayed.
The battery can be discharged at
idle if the electrical loads are very
high. This is true for all vehicles.
This is because the generator
(alternator) may not be spinning fast
enough at idle to produce all the
power that is needed for very high
electrical loads.
A high electrical load occurs when
several of the following are on, such
as: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger,
climate control fan at high speed,
heated seats, engine cooling fans,
trailer loads, and loads plugged into
accessory power outlets.
EPM works to prevent excessive
discharge of the battery. It does this
by balancing the generator's output
and the vehicle's electrical needs.
It can increase engine idle speed to
generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce
the power demands of some
accessories.
6-9
Normally, these actions occur in
steps or levels, without being
noticeable. In rare cases at the
highest levels of corrective action,
this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information
Center (DIC) message might be
displayed, such as BATTERY LOW
START VEHICLE . If this message
displays, it is recommended that the
driver reduce the electrical loads as
much as possible and restart the
vehicle. See Battery Voltage and
Charging Messages on page 5‑36.
Battery Power Protection
This feature shuts off the dome, and
reading lamps if they are left on for
more than 10 minutes when the
ignition is off. This will keep the
battery from running down.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
6-10
Black plate (10,1)
Lighting
2 NOTES
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (1,1)
Infotainment System
Infotainment
System
Introduction
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Radio
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Rear Side Window
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-14
Audio Players
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Rear Seat Infotainment
Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Phone
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
7-1
Introduction
Infotainment
Read the following pages to
become familiar with the audio
system's features.
{ WARNING
Taking your eyes off the road
for extended periods could
cause a crash resulting in injury
or death to you or others. Do
not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
This system provides access to
many audio and non audio listings.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
7-2
Black plate (2,1)
Infotainment System
To minimize taking your eyes off the
road while driving, do the following
while the vehicle is parked:
.
Become familiar with the
operation and controls of the
audio system.
.
Set up the tone, speaker
adjustments, and preset radio
stations.
For more information, see Defensive
Driving on page 9‑2.
This vehicle's audio system may be
equipped with a noise reduction
system which can work improperly
if the audio amplifier, engine
calibrations, exhaust system,
microphones, radio, or speakers are
modified or replaced. This could
result in more noticeable engine
noise at certain speeds.
Notice: Contact your dealer
before adding any equipment.
Navigation/Radio System
Adding audio or communication
equipment could interfere with
the operation of the engine, radio,
or other systems, and could
damage them. Follow federal
rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
The vehicle has Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
the audio system can be played
even after the ignition is turned off.
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 9‑32 for more
information.
For vehicles with a navigation radio
system, see the separate Navigation
System manual.
TheftLock® is designed to
discourage theft of the vehicle's
radio by learning a portion of the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
The radio does not operate if it is
stolen or moved to a different
vehicle.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (3,1)
Infotainment System
Operation
Radio with CD (MP3) shown, Radio with USB and CD (MP3) similar
7-3
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
7-4
Black plate (4,1)
Infotainment System
System on page 7‑34 for more
information on the vehicle's RSE
system.
The DVD player is the top slot on
the radio faceplate. The player is
capable of reading the DTS
programmed DVD Audio or DVD
Video media, (DTS and DTS Digital
Surround are registered trademarks
of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.).
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the
double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
Using the Radio
Radio with USB, CD, and DVD (MP3)
The vehicle has one of these radios
as its audio system.
Radios with CD and DVD
Vehicles with a USB, CD, and
DVD radio have a Bose® Surround
Sound System. Some of its features
are explained later in this section
under, “Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade)”.
Vehicles with a USB, CD, and
DVD radio may have a Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) system. See
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
O (Power/Volume):
Press to turn
the system on and off.
Turn clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the volume.
4 (Information) (If available):
Press to switch the display between
the radio station frequency and the
time. While the ignition is off, press
this button to display the time. Press
to display additional text information
related to the current FM-RDS or
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (5,1)
Infotainment System
XM station; or CD, MP3, or WMA
song. If information is available
during XM, CD, MP3, or WMA
playback, the song title information
displays on the top line of the
display and artist information
displays on the bottom line. When
information is not available, “NO
INFO” displays.
Speed Compensated Volume
(SCV): Radios with Speed
Compensated Volume (SCV)
automatically adjusts the radio
volume to compensate for road and
wind noise as the vehicle's speed
changes while driving, so that the
volume level stays consistent.
To activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume to the
desired level.
2. Press the MENU button to
display the radio setup menu.
3. Press the softkey under the
AUTO VOLUM (automatic
volume) tab on the radio display.
4. Press the softkey under the
desired Speed Compensated
Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of
radio volume compensation.
The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each
higher setting allows for more
radio volume compensation at
faster vehicle speeds.
Noise Compensation
Technology: Vehicles with the LTZ
package and a Bose Audio System
include the Bose AudioPilot® noise
compensation technology. When
turned on, AudioPilot continuously
adjusts the audio system
equalization, to compensate for
background noise, so that music
always sounds the same at the set
volume level.
7-5
This feature is most effective at
lower radio volume settings where
background noise can affect how
well the music is heard. At higher
volume settings, where the music is
much louder than the background
noise, there might be little or no
adjustments by AudioPilot.
To activate:
1. Set the radio volume to the
desired level.
2. Press the MENU button to
display the radio setup menu.
3. Press the softkey under the
AUTO VOLUM (automatic
volume) tab on the radio display.
4. Press the softkey under the ON
tab. The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds.
For additional information on
AudioPilot, please visit
www.bose.com/audiopilot.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
7-6
Black plate (6,1)
Infotainment System
Setting the Tone (Bass/
Midrange/Treble)
If a station's frequency is weak or if
there is static, decrease the treble.
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,
or Treble): To adjust the bass,
midrange, or treble:
To quickly adjust bass, midrange,
or treble to the middle position,
press the softkey positioned under
the BASS, MID, or TREB tab for
more than 2 seconds. A beep
sounds and the level adjusts to
the middle position.
1. Press the f knob until the tone
control tabs display.
2. Highlight the desired tone
control tab by doing one of the
following:
f knob.
.
Pressing the
.
Press the softkey under the
desired tab.
3. Adjust the setting by doing one
of the following:
.
Turn the f knob clockwise
or counterclockwise.
To quickly adjust all tone and
speaker controls to the middle
position, press the f knob for more
than 2 seconds until a beep sounds.
EQ (Equalization): Press this
button to choose bass and treble
equalization settings designed for
different types of music. Selecting
MANUAL or changing bass or
treble, returns the EQ to the manual
bass and treble settings.
.
Press the ¨ SEEK, or
© SEEK button.
Unique EQ settings can be saved
for each source.
.
Press the \ FWD, or
s REV button.
If the radio has a Bose audio
system, the EQ settings are either
MANUAL or TALK.
Digital Signal Processing (DSP):
Press the EQ button to change the
DSP settings (only available on
Bose systems with the LTZ option
package). DSP settings provide a
choice of different listening
experiences.
The following DSP settings are
available:
.
Normal — Select this setting to
adjust the audio for normal
mode. This provides the best
sound quality for all seating
positions.
.
Driver — Select this setting to
adjust the audio for the driver to
receive the best possible sound
quality.
.
Rear — Select this setting to
adjust the audio for the rear seat
passengers to receive the best
possible sound quality.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (7,1)
Infotainment System
.
Surround (Centerpoint®) —
Select this setting to enable
Bose Centerpoint. Centerpoint
signal processing produces a
surround sound listening
experience from a CD or XM
stereo digital audio source.
Centerpoint delivers five
independent audio channels
from conventional two channel
stereo recordings. (Not available
for AM or FM.)
Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade)
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To
adjust the balance or fade:
1. Press the f knob until the
speaker control tabs display.
2. Highlight the desired speaker
control tab by doing one of the
following:
f knob.
.
Pressing the
.
Press the softkey under the
desired tab.
3. Adjust the setting by doing one
of the following:
.
Turn the f knob clockwise
or counterclockwise.
.
Press the ¨ SEEK, or
© SEEK button.
.
Press the \ FWD, or
s REV button.
To quickly adjust all speaker and
tone controls to the middle position,
press the f knob for more than
2 seconds.
If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is
turned on, the radio disables FADE
and mutes the rear speakers.
7-7
Radio Messages
Calibration Error: The audio
system has been calibrated
for the vehicle from the factory.
If Calibration Error displays, it
means that the radio has not been
configured properly for the vehicle
and it must be returned to your
dealer for service.
Locked or Loc : One of these
messages will display when the
TheftLock® system has locked up
the radio. Take the vehicle to your
dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if
an error cannot be corrected,
contact your dealer.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
7-8
Black plate (8,1)
Infotainment System
Radio
AM-FM Radio
Radio Data System (RDS)
For radios with the Radio Data
System (RDS) feature, it only works
with FM stations that broadcast
RDS information. This system relies
upon receiving specific information
from these stations and only works
when the information is available.
While the radio is tuned to an
FM-RDS station, the station name
or call letters displays. In rare
cases, a radio station could
broadcast incorrect information that
causes the radio features to work
improperly. If this happens, contact
the radio station.
4 (Information) (RDS Features):
For vehicles with RDS features,
press 4 to display additional text
information related to the current
FM-RDS station. If information is
available, the song title information
displays on the top line of the
display and artist information
displays on the bottom line. When
information is not available, “NO
INFO” displays.
stations. The radio only seeks and
scans stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
Finding a Station
\ FWD: Press to manually tune to
a radio station in ascending order.
BAND: Press to switch between
AM, FM, or XM™, if equipped.
s REV:
Press to manually tune to
a radio station in descending order.
f (Tune):
Turn to manually select
radio stations.
FAV (Favorites): Press to select
different favorite pages for stored
radio stations.
© SEEK:
Storing Radio Stations
Press to seek the
previous radio station. Press and
hold for a few seconds until a
beep sounds to scan for radio
stations in descending order, press
the © SEEK button again to stop
scanning radio stations. The radio
only seeks and scans stations with
a strong signal that are in the
selected band.
¨ SEEK:
Press to seek the next
radio station. Press and hold for a
few seconds until a beep sounds to
scan for radio stations in ascending
order, press the © SEEK button
again to stop scanning radio
Drivers are encouraged to store
radio station while the vehicle is
parked, see Defensive Driving on
page 9‑2. Tune to stored radio
stations using the presets, favorites
button, and steering wheel controls,
if the vehicle has this feature.
Up to 36 stations can be
programmed as favorites using the
6 softkeys below the radio station
frequency tabs and by using the
FAV button. Press the FAV button
to go through up to 6 pages of
favorites, each having 6 favorite
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (9,1)
Infotainment System
stations available per page. Each
page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or XM,
if equipped, stations.
3. Select the number of favorites
pages by pressing the softkey
located below the displayed
page numbers.
Storing a Radio Station as a
Favorite
4. Press the FAV button, or let
the menu time out, to return to
the original main radio screen
showing the radio station
frequency tabs and to begin
the process of programming
favorites.
To store a station as a favorite:
1. Tune to a radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display
the page where the station will
be stored.
3. Press and hold one of the
6 softkeys until a beep sounds.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 to
store additional radio stations.
The number of favorites pages can
be setup using the MENU button.
To setup the number of favorites
pages:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Press the softkey located below
the FAV 1-6 tab.
Satellite Radio
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM is a satellite radio service based
in the 48 contiguous United States
and 10 Canadian provinces. XM
Satellite Radio has a wide variety of
programming and commercial-free
music, coast to coast, and in
digital-quality sound. A service fee
is required to receive the XM
service. If the service needs to be
reactivated, the radio will display
“No Subscription Please Renew
on channel XM1.” For more
7-9
information, contact XM at
www.xmradio.com or
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.,
and www.xmradio.ca or
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
4 (Information) (XM Satellite Radio
Service): For vehicles with XM,
press 4 to display additional text
information related to the current
XM channel. If information is
available, the song title information
displays on the top line of the
display and artist information
displays on the bottom line. When
information is not available, “NO
INFO” displays.
Finding a Channel
BAND: Press to switch between
AM, FM, or XM™, if equipped.
f (Tune): Turn to manually select
an XM channel.
© SEEK:
Press to go to the
previous XM channel.
¨ SEEK:
Press to go to the next
XM channel.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
7-10
Infotainment System
s REV:
Press to go to the
previous XM category.
\ FWD: Press to go to the next
XM category.
FAV (Favorites): Press to select
different favorites pages for stored
radio stations.
CAT (Category): The CAT button is
used to find XM channels when the
radio is in the XM mode.
Finding a Category (CAT)
Station
To find XM channels in a category:
1. Press the CAT button to display
the category tabs. Continue
pressing the CAT button until the
desired category name displays.
.
Black plate (10,1)
Radios with CD and DVD
can also navigate the
category list by pressing the
\ FWD or the s REV
buttons.
2. Press either of the two softkeys
below the desired category tab
to immediately tune to the first
XM station in that category.
To go to the previous or next XM
station in the selected category,
do one of the following:
f knob.
.
Turn the
.
Press the softkey below the
right or left arrows in the
category tab.
.
Press
© SEEK or ¨ SEEK.
3. To exit the category search
mode, press the FAV button or
BAND button to display the
favorites again.
Adding and Removing Categories
Categories cannot be added or
removed while the vehicle is moving
faster than 8 km/h (5 mph).
To add or remove a category:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Press the softkey located below
the XM CAT tab.
3. Turn the f knob to display the
category to add or remove.
4. Press the softkey located under
the Add or Remove tab.
To restore all removed
categories, press the softkey
under the Restore All tab.
5. Repeat the steps to remove
more categories.
Storing XM Channels
Drivers are encouraged to store
XM channels while the vehicle is
parked; see Defensive Driving on
page 9‑2. Tune to stored radio
stations using the presets, favorites
button, and steering wheel controls,
if the vehicle has this feature.
Up to 36 stations can be
programmed as favorites using the
six softkeys below the radio station
frequency tabs and by using the
FAV button. Press the FAV button
to go through up to six pages of
favorites, each having six favorite
stations available per page.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (11,1)
Infotainment System
Each page of favorites can contain
any combination of AM, FM, or XM,
if equipped, stations.
Storing an XM Channel as a
Favorite
To store a station as a favorite:
1. Tune to an XM channel.
2. Press the FAV button to display
the page where the station will
be stored.
3. Press and hold one of the
six softkeys until a beep sounds.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 to
store additional radio stations.
The number of favorites pages can
be set up using the MENU button.
To set up the number of favorites
pages:
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Press the softkey located below
the FAV 1-6 tab.
3. Select the number of favorites
pages by pressing the softkey
located below the displayed
page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the
menu time out, to return to the
original main radio screen
showing the radio station
frequency tabs and to begin
the process of programming
favorites.
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language
Channels): These channels,
or any others, can be blocked at a
customer's request, by calling
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
XM Updating: The encryption code
in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process
should take no longer than
30 seconds.
7-11
No XM Signal: The system is
functioning correctly, but the vehicle
is in a location that is blocking the
XM signal. When the vehicle is
moved into an open area, the signal
should return.
Loading XM: The audio system is
acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This
message should disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air: This channel is
not currently in service. Tune in to
another channel.
Channel Unauth : This channel is
blocked or cannot be received with
your XM subscription package.
Channel Unavail: This previously
assigned channel is no longer
assigned. Tune to another station.
If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station
for that preset button.
No Artist Info: No artist
information is available at this time
on this channel. The system is
working properly.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
7-12
Black plate (12,1)
Infotainment System
No CAT Info: No category
information is available at this time
on this channel. The system is
working properly.
XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver
in the vehicle could have previously
been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM receivers cannot be
swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having
the vehicle serviced, check with
your dealer.
No Information: No text or
informational messages are
available at this time on this
channel. The system is working
properly.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,
this message alternates with the XM
Radio eight‐digit radio ID label. This
label is needed to activate the
service.
No Subscription Please Renew:
The XM subscription needs to be
reactivated. Contact XM at
www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and
www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Unknown: If this message is
received when tuned to channel 0,
there could be a receiver fault.
Consult with your dealer.
No Title Info: No song title
information is available at this time
on this channel. The system is
working properly.
CAT Not Found: There are no
channels available for the selected
category. The system is working
properly.
Check Antenna: If this message
does not clear within a short period
of time, the receiver or antenna
could have a fault. Consult with
your dealer.
Check XM Receivr: If this
message does not clear within a
short period of time, the receiver
could have a fault. Consult with
your dealer.
XM Not Available: If this message
does not clear within a short period
of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer.
Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static
can occur during normal radio
reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience
accessories, and external electronic
devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is
interference or static, unplug the
item from the accessory power
outlet.
AM
The range for most AM stations is
greater than for FM, especially at
night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere
with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations
boost the power levels during the
day, and then reduce these levels
during the night. Static can also
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (13,1)
Infotainment System
occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try
reducing the treble on the radio.
FM Stereo
FM signals only reach about
16 to 65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although
the radio has a built-in electronic
circuit that automatically works to
reduce interference, some static
can occur, especially around tall
buildings or hills, causing the
sound to fade in and out.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM Satellite Radio Service gives
digital radio reception from coast to
coast in the 48 contiguous United
States, and in Canada. Just as
with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals,
causing the sound to fade in and
out. In addition, traveling or standing
under heavy foliage, bridges,
garages, or tunnels may cause loss
of the XM signal for a period of time.
Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause
interference with the vehicle's radio.
This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls,
charging the phone's battery,
or simply having the phone on. This
interference causes an increased
level of static while listening to the
radio. If static is received while
listening to the radio, unplug the
cellular phone and turn it off.
Rear Side Window
Antenna
The AM-FM antenna is located in
the passenger rear side windows.
Make sure the inside surfaces of the
rear side windows are not scratched
and that the lines on the glass are
not damaged. If the inside surfaces
are damaged, they could interfere
with radio reception.
7-13
If a cellular telephone antenna
needs to be attached to the glass,
make sure that the grid lines for the
AM-FM antenna are not damaged.
There is enough space between the
grid lines to attach a cellular
telephone antenna without
interfering with radio reception.
Notice: Using a razor blade or
sharp object to clear the inside of
the rear side windows may affect
radio reception or damage the
rear side window antenna.
Repairs would not be covered by
the warranty. Do not clear the
inside of the rear side windows
with sharp objects.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket
glass tinting with metallic film.
The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or
distort the incoming radio
reception. Any damage caused to
the antenna due to metallic tinting
materials will not be covered by
the warranty.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
7-14
Black plate (14,1)
Infotainment System
Satellite Radio Antenna
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is
located on the roof of the vehicle.
Keep the antenna clear of
obstructions for clear radio
reception.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the
performance of the XM system
(if equipped) may be affected
if the sunroof is open.
Audio Players
CD Player
Care of the CD Player
Do not add any label to a CD.
It could get caught in the CD. If a
CD is recorded on a personal
computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the
recorded CD with a marking pen.
The use of CD lens cleaners for
CDs is not advised, due to the risk
of contaminating the lens of the CD
optics with lubricants internal to the
CD player mechanism.
Notice: If a label is added to a
CD, more than one CD is inserted
into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched
or damaged CDs, the CD player
could be damaged. While using
the CD player, use only CDs in
good condition without any label,
load one CD at a time, and keep
the CD player and the loading slot
free of foreign materials, liquids,
and debris.
If an error displays, see “
Messages” later in this section.
Care of CDs
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality
can be reduced due to CD-R or
CD-RW quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music
that has been recorded, and the
way the CD-R or CD-RW has been
handled. Handle them carefully.
Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their
original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. The CD player scans the
bottom surface of the disc. If the
surface of a CD is damaged, such
as cracked, broken, or scratched,
the CD does not play properly or not
at all. Do not touch the bottom side
of a CD while handling it; this could
damage the surface. Pick up CDs
by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (15,1)
Infotainment System
If the surface of a CD is soiled,
clean it with a soft, lint free cloth or
dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild,
neutral detergent solution mixed
with water. Make sure the wiping
process starts from the center to
the edge.
Inserting a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls it in
and the CD should begin playing.
Ejecting a CD
Z EJECT:
Press and release to
eject the disc. Remove the CD
when Remove Disc displays. If the
disc is not removed, after several
seconds, the disc is automatically
pulled back into the player.
Playing a CD
If the ignition or radio is turned off,
with a CD in the player, it stays in
the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts
playing where it stopped, if it was
the last selected audio source. The
CD is controlled by the buttons on
the radio faceplate or by the RSA
unit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
System on page 7‑45 for more
information.
When a CD is inserted, the CD
symbol displays on the left side of
the radio display. As each new track
starts to play, the track number
displays.
The CD player can play the smaller
8 cm (3 inch) single CDs with an
adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same
manner.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
cycle through CD or Auxiliary when
listening to the radio. The CD icon
and a message showing the disc
and/or track number displays when
a CD is in the player. Press again
and the system automatically
searches for an auxiliary input
device, see, Auxiliary Devices on
page 7‑30 for more information.
7-15
If a portable audio player is not
connected, “No Input Device Found”
displays.
4 (Information):
Press to display
additional text information related to
the current song. If information is
available, the song title information
displays on the top line of the
display and artist information
displays on the bottom line. When
information is not available, “NO
INFO” displays.
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on
the CD that is currently playing.
© SEEK:
Press to go to the start of
the current track, if more than ten
seconds on the CD have played.
Press to go to the previous track if
less than ten seconds on the CD
have played.
Press and hold, or press multiple
times to continue moving backward
through the tracks on the CD.
¨ SEEK:
track.
Press to go to the next
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
7-16
Black plate (16,1)
Infotainment System
Press and hold, or press multiple
times to continue moving forward
through the tracks on the CD.
s REV (Fast Reverse):
Press
and hold to reverse playback quickly
within a track.
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
Press
and hold to advance playback
quickly within a track.
RDM (Random): Press to listen
to tracks in random, rather than
sequential order. To use random:
1. Press the softkey positioned
under the RDM tab until Random
Current Disc displays.
2. Press the softkey again to turn
off random play.
MP3 Supported Files
The Radio with CD (MP3) and the
Radio with USB and CD (MP3),
have the capability of playing an
MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc.
Format
.
Up to 255 files.
Radios that have the capability of
playing MP3s can play .mp3 or .wma
files that were recorded onto a
CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can
be recorded with the following fixed
bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,
64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,
128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps,
224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps
or a variable bit rate.
.
Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl
extension.
.
Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda
file extension.
Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode
Discs
The radio can play discs that
contain both uncompressed CD
audio and MP3 files. If both formats
are on the disc, the radio reads
all MP3 files first, then the
uncompressed CD audio files.
CD‐R or CD‐RW Supported File
and Folder Structure
The radio supports:
.
.
.
Up to 50 folders.
Up to 8 folders in depth.
Up to 50 playlists.
Root Directory
The root directory is treated as a
folder. Files are stored in the root
directory when the disc or storage
device does not contain folders.
Files accessed from the root
directory of a CD display as
F1 ROOT.
Empty Folder
Folders that do not contain files are
skipped, and the player advances to
the next folder that contains files.
Order of Play
Compressed audio files are
accessed in the following order:
.
Playlists (Px).
.
Files stored in the root directory.
.
Files stored in folders in the root
directory.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (17,1)
Infotainment System
Tracks are played in the following
order:
.
.
Play begins from the first track
in the first playlist and continues
sequentially through all tracks
in each playlist. When the last
track of the last playlist has
played, play continues from the
first track of the first playlist.
Play begins from the first track
in the first folder and continues
sequentially through all tracks in
each folder. When the last track
of the last folder has played,
play continues from the first
track of the first folder.
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the
song name that is contained in the
ID3 tag. If the song name is not
present in the ID3 tag, then the
radio displays the file name without
the extension (such as .mp3) as the
track name.
Track names longer than
32 characters or four pages are
shortened. The display does not
show parts of words on the last
page of text and the extension of
the filename is not displayed.
Preprogrammed Playlists
CDs that have preprogrammed
playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or
Real Jukebox™ software can be
accessed, however, there is no
playlist editing capability using the
radio. These playlists are treated
as special folders containing
compressed audio song files.
Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls
file extension and are stored on a
USB device may be supported by
the radio with a USB port.
Playlists can be changed by using
the softkeys below the S c and
c T tabs, the f knob, the
© SEEK button or the ¨ SEEK
button. An MP3 CD-R or CD-RW
that has been recorded without
7-17
using file folders can be played.
If a CD-R or CD-RW contains more
than the maximum of 50 folders,
15 playlists, and 512 folders and
files, the player allows access and
navigates up to the maximum, but
all items over the maximum are not
accessible.
Playing an MP3
4 (Information):
Press to display
additional text information related
to the current song. If information is
available, the song title information
displays on the top line of the
display and artist information
displays on the bottom line. When
information is not available, “NO
INFO” displays.
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3 files
on the CD currently playing.
© SEEK:
Press to go to the start of
the track, if more than ten seconds
have played. Press and hold or
press multiple times to continue
moving backward through tracks.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
7-18
Black plate (18,1)
Infotainment System
¨ SEEK:
Press to go to the next
track. Press and hold or press
multiple times to continue moving
forward through tracks.
s REV (Reverse):
Press and hold
to reverse playback quickly. Sound
is heard at a reduced volume and
the elapsed time of the file displays.
Release s REV to resume playing.
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
Press
and hold to advance playback
quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume and the elapsed time of the
file displays. Release \ FWD to
resume playing. The elapsed time
of the file displays.
S c (Previous Folder): Press
the softkey below the S c tab to
go to the first track in the previous
folder.
c T (Next Folder): Press the
softkey below the c T tab to go
to the first track in the next folder.
RDM (Random): Press to listen
to tracks in random, rather than
sequential order. To use random:
1. Press the softkey positioned
under the RDM tab until Random
Current Disc displays.
2. Press the softkey again to turn
off random play.
h (Music Navigator): Press the
softkey below the h tab to have
the files played in order by artist or
album. The player scans the disc to
sort the files by artist and album ID3
tag information. It can take several
minutes to scan the disc depending
on the number of files on the disc.
The radio may begin playing while
it is scanning in the background.
When the scan is finished, the disc
begins playing files in order by
artist. The current artist playing is
shown on the second line of the
display. Once all songs by that artist
are played, the player moves to the
next artist in alphabetical order and
begins playing files by that artist.
To listen to files by another artist,
press the softkey located below
either arrow tab. The disc goes
to the next or previous artist in
alphabetical order. Continue
pressing either softkey below the
arrow tab until the desired artist
displays.
To change from playback by artist
to playback by album:
1. Press the softkey located below
the Sort By tab.
2. Press one of the softkeys below
the album tab from the sort
screen.
3. Press the softkey below the
back tab to return to the main
music navigator screen.
The album name displays on the
second line between the arrows
and songs from the current album
begins to play. Once all songs from
that album have played, the player
moves to the next album in
alphabetical order on the CD and
begins playing MP3 files from that
album.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (19,1)
Infotainment System
To exit music navigator mode, press
the softkey below the Back tab to
return to normal MP3 playback.
If the CD is not playing correctly,
for any other reason, try a known
good CD.
CD Player Messages
If any error occurs repeatedly or
if an error cannot be corrected,
contact your dealer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it
down and provide it to your dealer
when reporting the problem.
CHECK DISC: If this message
displays and/or the CD ejects, it
could be for one of the following
reasons:
.
.
It is very hot. When the
temperature returns to normal,
the CD should play.
The road is very rough. When
the road becomes smoother,
the CD should play.
.
The CD is dirty, scratched,
wet, or upside down.
.
The air is very humid. If so, wait
about an hour and try again.
.
There could have been a
problem while burning the CD.
.
The label could be caught in
the CD player.
CD/DVD Player
Care of the CD and DVD Player
Do not add any label to a disc.
It could get caught in the CD or
DVD player. If a disc is recorded
on a personal computer and a
description label is needed, try
labeling the top of the recorded
disc with a marking pen.
The use of CD/DVD lens cleaners
is not advised, due to the risk of
contaminating the lens of the optics
with lubricants internal to the CD
and DVD player mechanism.
7-19
Notice: If a label is added to a
CD, more than one CD is inserted
into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched
or damaged CDs, the CD player
could be damaged. While using
the CD player, use only CDs in
good condition without any label,
load one CD at a time, and keep
the CD player and the loading slot
free of foreign materials, liquids,
and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD
Messages” later in this section.
Care of CDs and DVDs
If playing a CD-R or CD-RW, the
sound quality can be reduced due to
CD-R or CD-RW quality, the method
of recording, the quality of the music
that has been recorded, and the
way the CD-R or CD-RW has been
handled. Handle them carefully.
Store CD-Rs or CD-RWs in their
original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
7-20
Black plate (20,1)
Infotainment System
and dust. The CD or DVD player
scans the bottom surface of the
disc. If the surface of a disc is
damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the disc does not play
properly or not at all. Do not touch
the bottom side of a disc while
handling it; this could damage the
surface. Pick up discs by grasping
the outer edges or the edge of the
hole and the outer edge.
Press the O button to turn the radio
on. The radio can be heard through
all of the vehicle speakers.
is turned on. See Rear Seat Audio
(RSA) System on page 7‑45 for
more information.
Front seat passengers can listen
to the radio (AM, FM, or XM if
equipped) by pressing the BAND
button or the DVD/CD AUX button
to select CD slot, DVD slot, front
auxiliary input, USB port, or rear
auxiliary input (if available).
Inserting a Disc
If the surface of a disc is soiled,
clean it with a soft, lint‐free cloth or
dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild,
neutral detergent solution mixed
with water. Make sure the wiping
process starts from the center to
the edge.
If a playback device is plugged into
the radio’s front auxiliary input jack,
USB port, or the rear auxiliary jack,
the front seat passengers are able
to listen to playback from this
source through the vehicle
speakers. See “Using the Auxiliary
Input Jack” in Auxiliary Devices on
page 7‑30, or “Audio/Video (A/V)
Jacks” under Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) System on
page 7‑34 for more information.
Audio Output
Only one audio source can be heard
through the speakers at one time.
An audio source is defined as
DVD slot, CD slot, XM, FM‐AM,
front auxiliary jack, USB port,
or rear auxiliary jack.
In some vehicles, depending on
audio options, the rear speakers
can be muted when the RSA power
Insert a disc partway into either slot,
label side up. The player pulls it in
and the disc should begin playing.
(Loading a disc into the system,
depending on media type and
format, ranges from 5 to 20 seconds
for a CD, and up to 30 seconds for a
DVD to begin playing.)
Ejecting a Disc
Z CD (Eject):
Press and release
to eject the disc that is currently
playing. The CD ejects from the
bottom slot. A beep sounds and
Ejecting Disc displays. Once the
disc is ejected, Remove Disc
displays. The disc can be removed.
If the disc is not removed, after
several seconds the disc
automatically pulls back into the
player.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (21,1)
Infotainment System
Z DVD (Eject):
Press and
release to eject the disc that is
currently playing in the top slot.
A beep sounds and Ejecting
Disc displays.
If loading and reading of a disc
cannot be completed, due to
unknown format, etc., and the
disc fails to eject, press and hold
for more than five seconds to force
the disc to eject.
Playing a CD (in Either the
DVD or CD Slot)
If the ignition or radio is turned off
with a CD in the player, it stays in
the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts
playing where it stopped, if it was
the last selected audio source. The
CD is controlled by the buttons on
the radio faceplate or by the RSA
unit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
System on page 7‑45 for more
information. The DVD/CD decks
(the upper slot is the DVD deck and
the lower slot is the CD deck) of the
radio are compatible with most
audio CDs, CD-Rs, CD-RWs,
and MP3s.
When a CD is inserted, the text tab
DVD or CD symbol displays on the
left side of the radio display. As
each new track starts to play, the
track number displays.
The CD player can play the smaller
8 cm (3 in) single CDs with an
adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same
manner.
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to
cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary
when listening to the radio. The
DVD/CD text tab and a message
showing the track or chapter
number will display when a disc is in
either slot. Press the DVD/CD AUX
button again and the system
automatically searches for an
auxiliary input device; see Auxiliary
Devices on page 7‑30 for more
information. If a portable audio
player is not connected, “No Aux
Input Device” displays. If a disc is in
7-21
both the DVD slot and the CD slot,
the DVD/CD AUX button cycles
between the two sources and does
not indicate “No Aux Input Device.”
If a front auxiliary device is
connected, the DVD/CD AUX button
cycles through all available options,
such as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front
Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if
available). See “Using the Auxiliary
Input Jack” in Auxiliary Devices on
page 7‑30 or “Audio/Video (A/V)
Jacks” under Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) System on
page 7‑34 for more information.
If a disc is inserted into the top DVD
slot, the rear seat operator can turn
on the video screen and use the
remote control to navigate the CD
(tracks only) through the remote
control.
4 (Information):
Press to display
additional text information related to
the current song. If information is
available, the song title information
displays on the top line of the
display and artist information
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
7-22
Black plate (22,1)
Infotainment System
displays on the bottom line. When
information is not available, “NO
INFO” displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on
the disc that is currently playing.
RDM (Random): Press to listen to
tracks in random, rather than
sequential order. To use random:
© SEEK:
Press to go to the start of
the current track, if more than
five seconds on the CD have
played.
Press to go to the previous track if
less than five seconds on the CD
have played.
Press and hold, or press multiple
times, to continue moving backward
through the tracks on the CD.
¨ SEEK:
Press to go to the next
track.
Press and hold, or press multiple
times, to continue moving forward
through the tracks on the CD.
s REV (Fast Reverse):
Press
and hold to reverse playback quickly
within a track.
Press
and hold to advance playback
quickly within a track.
1. Press the softkey under the
RDM tab until Random Current
Disc displays.
2. Press the softkey again to turn
off random play.
MP3 and WMA Supported Files
Format
The radio can play .mp3 or .wma
files that were recorded onto a
CD-R or CD-RW disc.
Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode
Discs
The radio plays discs that contain
both uncompressed CD audio and
MP3/WMA files depending on which
slot the disc is loaded into.
The DVD player only reads
uncompressed audio and ignores
MP3/WMA files on a mixed
mode disc.
The CD player reads both
uncompressed audio and MP3/
WMA files on a mixed mode disc.
Uncompressd audio is played
before MP3/WMA files. Press the
CAT (category) button to toggle
between uncompressed audio and
MP3/WMA files.
CD‐R or CD‐RW Supported File
and Folder Structure
The DVD player supports:
.
Up to 255 folders.
.
Up to 8 folders in depth.
.
Up to 15 playlists.
.
Up to 40 sessions.
.
Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl
extension.
.
Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda
file extension.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (23,1)
Infotainment System
The CD player supports:
.
Up to 512 files and folders.
.
Up to 8 folders in depth.
.
Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl
extension.
.
Files with an .mp3, .wma,
or .cda file extension.
Root Directory
The root directory of the disc is
treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio
files, the directory displays as
F1 ROOT on the radio.
If a disc contains both
uncompressed CD audio and
MP3/WMA files, a folder under the
root directory called CD accesses
all of the CD audio tracks on
the disc.
Empty Folder
Folders that do not contain files are
skipped, and the player advances to
the next folder that contains files.
No Folder
When the disc contains only
compressed files, the files are
located under the root folder. The
next and previous folder function
does not function on a disc that was
recorded without folders or playlists.
When displaying the name of the
folder, the radio displays ROOT.
When the disc contains only
playlists and compressed audio
files, but no folders, all files are
located under the root folder. The
folder down and the folder up
buttons search playlists first and
then go to the root folder. When
the radio displays the name of the
folder, the radio displays ROOT.
Order of Play
Compressed audio files are
accessed in the following order:
.
Playlists (Px).
.
Files stored in the root directory.
.
Files stored in folders in the root
directory.
7-23
Tracks are played in the following
order:
.
Play begins from the first track
in the first playlist and continues
sequentially through all tracks
in each playlist. When the last
track of the last playlist has
played, play continues from the
first track of the first playlist.
.
Play begins from the first track
in the first folder and continues
sequentially through all tracks in
each folder. When the last track
of the last folder has played,
play continues from the first
track of the first folder.
When play enters a new folder, the
display does not automatically show
the new folder name unless the
folder mode has been chosen as
the default display. The new track
name displays.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
7-24
Black plate (24,1)
Infotainment System
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the
song name that is contained in the
ID3 tag. If the song name is not
present in the ID3 tag, then the
radio displays the file name without
the extension (such as .mp3) as
the track name.
Track names longer than
32 characters or 4 pages are
shortened. Parts of words on the
last page of text and the extension
of the file name do not display.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that
were created using WinAmp™,
MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™
software can be accessed; however,
they cannot be edited using the
radio. These playlists are treated
as special folders containing
compressed audio song files.
Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls
file extension and are stored on a
USB device may be supported by
the radio with a USB port.
Playing an MP3 or WMA
(in Either the DVD or CD Slot)
If a disc is inserted into the top
DVD slot, the rear seat operator can
turn on the video screen and use
the remote control to navigate the
CD (tracks only).
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMA
files.
© SEEK:
Press to go to the start of
the track, if more than five seconds
have played. Press and hold or
press multiple times, if less than
five seconds have played, to
continue moving backward through
tracks.
¨ SEEK:
Press to go to the next
track.
Press and hold, or press multiple
times, to continue moving forward
through tracks.
s REV (Reverse):
Press and
hold to reverse playback quickly.
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
Press
and hold to advance playback
quickly.
S c (Previous Folder): Press
the softkey below the S c tab to
go to the first track in the previous
folder.
c T (Next Folder): Press the
softkey below the c T tab to go
to the first track in the next folder.
RDM (Random): Press to listen
to tracks in random, rather than
sequential order.
To use random:
1. Press the softkey under the
RDM tab until Random Current
Disc displays
2. Press the same softkey again
to turn off random play.
h (Music Navigator): Press the
softkey below the h tab to play
files in order by artist or album.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (25,1)
Infotainment System
The player scans the disc to sort
the files by artist and album ID3 tag
information. It can take several
minutes to scan the disc depending
on the number of files on the disc.
The radio may begin playing while
it is scanning in the background.
When the scan is finished, the disc
begins playing files in order by
artist. The current artist playing is
shown on the second line of the
display. Once all songs by that artist
are played, the player moves to the
next artist in alphabetical order and
begins playing files by that artist.
To listen to files by another artist,
press the softkey located below
either arrow tab. The disc goes
to the next or previous artist in
alphabetical order. Continue
pressing either softkey below the
arrow tab until the artist displays.
To change from playback by artist to
playback by album:
1. Press the softkey below the Sort
By tab.
2. Press one of the softkeys below
the Album tab from the sort
screen.
3. Press the softkey below the
Back tab to return to the main
music navigator screen.
The album name displays on the
second line between the arrows,
and songs from the current album
begin to play. Once all songs from
that album have played, the player
moves to the next album in
alphabetical order on the CD and
begins playing MP3 files from that
album.
To exit music navigator mode, press
the softkey below the Back tab to
return to normal MP3 playback.
7-25
Using the DVD Player
The DVD player can be controlled
by the buttons on the remote
control, the RSA system, or by the
buttons on the radio faceplate. See
“Remote Control” under Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) System on
page 7‑34 and Rear Seat Audio
(RSA) System on page 7‑45 for
more information.
The DVD player is only compatible
with DVDs of the appropriate region
code printed on the jacket of
most DVDs.
The DVD slot of the radio is
compatible with most audio CDs
and CD-R/RW, DVD-Video,
DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW, and DVD
+R/RW media, along with MP3 and
WMA formats.
If an error message displays on the
video screen or the radio, see “DVD
Display Error Messages” under,
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System on page 7‑34, and “CD/DVD
Player Messages” later in this
section for more information.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
7-26
Black plate (26,1)
Infotainment System
Inserting a Disc
Ejecting a Disc
Insert a disc partway into the top
slot, label side up. The player pulls
it in and the disc should begin
playing. “Loading Disc” shows on
the radio display. At the same time,
the radio displays a softkey menu of
option(s). Some discs automatically
play the movie while others default
to the softkey menu display, which
requires the Play, Enter,
or Navigation softkeys to be
pressed, either by softkey or by the
rear seat passenger using the
remote control.
Z DVD (Eject):
Loading a disc into the system,
depending on media type and
format, ranges from 5 to 20 seconds
for a CD, and up to 30 seconds for
a DVD.
Press and
release to eject the disc currently
playing in the top slot. A beep
sounds and Ejecting Disc displays.
If loading and reading of a disc
cannot be completed, due to
unknown format, etc., and the disc
fails to eject, press and hold for
more than five seconds to force the
disc to eject.
Playing a DVD
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to
cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary
when listening to the radio. The
DVD/CD text tab and a message
showing the track or chapter
number will display when a disc is in
either slot. Press the DVD/CD AUX
button again and the system
automatically searches for an
auxiliary input device; see Auxiliary
Devices on page 7‑30 for more
information. If a portable audio
player is not connected, “No Aux
Input Device” displays. If a disc is in
both the DVD slot and the CD slot,
the DVD/CD AUX button cycles
between the two sources and does
not indicate “No Aux Input Device.”
If a front auxiliary device is
connected, the DVD/CD AUX button
cycles through all available options,
such as: DVD slot, CD slot, front
auxiliary, and rear auxiliary (if
available). See “Using the Auxiliary
Input Jack” in Auxiliary Devices on
page 7‑30 or “Audio/Video (A/V)
Jacks” under Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) System on
page 7‑34 for more information.
If a disc is inserted into the top DVD
slot, the rear seat operator can turn
on the video screen and use the
remote control to navigate the CD
(tracks only) through the remote
control.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (27,1)
Infotainment System
O (Power): Press to turn the
radio on or off. Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the volume. Press and
hold for more than two seconds to
turn off the entire radio and Rear
Seat Entertainment (RSE) system
and to start the Parental Control
feature. Parental Control prevents
the rear seat occupant from
operating the Rear Seat Audio
(RSA) system or remote control.
A lock symbol displays next to the
clock display. The Parental Control
feature remains on until the knob is
pressed and held for more than
two seconds again, or until the
driver turns the ignition off and
exits the vehicle.
f (Tune):
Turn to select tracks on
a CD or DVD.
© SEEK:
Press to return to the start
of the current track or chapter.
Press again to go to the previous
track or chapter. This button might
not work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or the
previews.
¨ SEEK:
Press to go to the next
track or chapter. This button might
not work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or the
previews.
s REV (Fast Reverse):
Press to
quickly reverse the CD or DVD at
five times the normal speed. To stop
fast reversing, press again. This
button might not work when the
DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
Press
to fast forward the CD or DVD at
five times the normal speed. To stop
fast forwarding, press again. This
button might not work when the
DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
7-27
Using Softkeys to Play a DVD-V
(Video)
Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio
display menu shows several tab
options for playback. Press the
softkey located under any tab option
during DVD-V playback.
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either
the Play or Pause tab displayed on
the radio, to toggle between pausing
or restarting playback of a DVD.
If the forward arrow is showing on
the display, the system is in pause
mode. If the Pause tab is showing
on the display, the system is in
playback mode. If the DVD screen
is off, press the play button to turn
the screen on.
Some DVDs begin playing after the
previews have finished, although
there could be a delay of up to
30 seconds. If the DVD does not
begin playing the movie
automatically, press the softkey
located under the play/pause
symbol tag displayed on the radio.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
7-28
Black plate (28,1)
Infotainment System
If the DVD still does not play, refer
to the on-screen instructions,
if available.
c (Stop):
Press to stop playing,
rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.
r (Enter):
Press to select the
choices that are highlighted in
any menu.
y (Menu): Press to access the
DVD menu. The DVD menu is
different on every DVD. Use the
softkeys located under the
navigation arrows to navigate the
cursor through the DVD menu.
After making a selection press this
button. This button only operates
when using a DVD.
Nav (Navigate): Press to display
directional arrows for navigating
through the menus.
q (Return): Press to exit the
current active menu and return to
the previous menu. This button
operates only when a DVD is
playing and a menu is active.
The rear seat passenger can
navigate the DVD-V and DVD-A
menus and controls through the
remote control. See “Remote
Control” under Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) System on
page 7‑34 for more information.
The video screen automatically
turns on when the DVD-V is
inserted into the DVD slot, and does
not automatically power on when
the DVD-A is inserted into the DVD
slot. It must be manually turned on
by the rear seat occupant through
the remote control power button.
Using Softkeys to Play a DVD-A
(Audio)
Once a DVD-A is inserted, the radio
display menu shows several tab
options for playback. Press the
softkey located under any tab option
during DVD-A playback.
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either
the play or pause icon displayed on
the radio, to toggle between pausing
or restarting playback of a DVD.
If the forward arrow is showing on
the display, the system is in pause
mode. If the pause tab is showing
on the display, the system is in
playback mode.
q Group r : Press to cycle
through musical groupings on the
DVD-A disc.
Nav (Navigate): Press to display
directional arrows for navigating
through the menus.
e (Audio Stream): Press to cycle
through audio stream formats
located on the DVD-A disc. The
video screen shows the audio
stream changing.
The rear seat passenger can
navigate the DVD-V and DVD-A
menus and controls through the
remote control. See “Remote
Control” under Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) System on
page 7‑34 for more information.
The video screen automatically
turns on when the DVD-V is
inserted into the DVD slot, and
does not automatically power on
when the DVD-A is inserted into the
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (29,1)
Infotainment System
DVD slot. It must be manually
turned on by the rear seat occupant
through the remote control power
button.
or the stop button has been pressed
twice on the remote control, the disc
resumes playing at the beginning of
the disc.
Stopping and Resuming
Playback
CD/DVD Player Messages
To stop playing a DVD without
turning off the system, press the
c button on the remote control,
or press the softkey located under
the c or the r / j tabs displayed
on the radio. If the radio is sourced
to something other than DVD-V,
press the DVD/CD AUX button to
make DVD-V the active source.
To resume DVD playback, press the
r / j button on the remote control,
or press the softkey located under
the r / j tab on the radio. The DVD
should resume play from where it
last stopped if the disc has not been
ejected and the stop button has not
been pressed twice on the remote
control. If the disc has been ejected
Disc Format Error: This message
displays if the disc is inserted with
the disc label wrong side up, or if
the disc is damaged.
Disc Region Error: This message
displays if the disc is not from a
correct region.
No Disc Inserted: This message
displays if no disc is present when
the Z or DVD/CD AUX button is
pressed on the radio.
Optical Error: This message
displays if the disc was inserted
upside down.
Disk Read Error: This message
displays if a disc was inserted with
an invalid or unknown format.
7-29
Player Error: This message
displays if there are disc load or
disc eject problems.
.
It is very hot. When the
temperature returns to normal,
the disc should play.
.
The road is very rough. When
the road becomes smoother,
the disc should play.
.
The disc is dirty, scratched,
wet, or upside down.
.
The air is very humid. If so, wait
about an hour and try again.
.
There was a problem while
burning the disc.
.
The label is caught in the CD/
DVD player.
If the disc is not playing correctly,
for any other reason, try a known
good disc.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
7-30
Black plate (30,1)
Infotainment System
If any error occurs repeatedly or
if an error cannot be corrected,
contact your dealer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it
down and provide it to your dealer
when reporting the problem.
Auxiliary Devices
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
Radios with an auxiliary input jack
located on the lower right side of the
faceplate can connect to an external
audio device such as an iPod®,
MP3 player, CD player, for use as
another source for audio listening.
This input jack is not an audio
output; do not plug headphones
into the front auxiliary input jack.
Drivers are encouraged to set up
any auxiliary device while the
vehicle is in P (Park). See
Defensive Driving on page 9‑2 for
more information on driver
distraction.
To use a portable audio player,
connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
the radio's front auxiliary input jack.
When a device is connected, press
the radio CD/AUX button to begin
playing audio from the device over
the vehicle speakers.
For optimal sound quality, increase
the portable audio device's volume
to the loudest level.
It is always best to power the
portable audio device through its
own battery while playing.
O (Power/Volume):
Turn clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the volume of the portable
player. Additional volume
adjustments might have to be made
from the portable device if the
volume is not loud or soft enough.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio
when a portable audio device is
playing. The portable audio device
continues playing.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
play a CD when a portable audio
device is playing. Press again and
the system begins playing audio
from the connected portable audio
player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, “No Input Device
Found” displays.
DVD/CD AUX (CD/Auxiliary):
Press to cycle through DVD, CD,
or Auxiliary when listening to the
radio. The DVD/CD text tab and a
message showing track or chapter
number displays when a disc is in
either slot. Press again and the
system automatically searches for
an auxiliary input device, such as a
portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, “No
Aux Input Device” displays. If a disc
is in both the DVD slot and the CD
slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles
between the two sources and not
indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If a
front auxiliary device is connected,
the DVD/CD AUX button cycles
through all available options, such
as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (31,1)
Infotainment System
Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary
(if available). See “Using the
Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” in this
section, or “Audio/Video (A/V)
Jacks” under, Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) System on
page 7‑34 for more information.
Using the USB Port
Radios with a USB port can control
a USB storage device or an iPod
using the radio buttons and knobs.
USB Support
The USB connector is located in the
center console, and uses the
USB 2.0 standard.
USB Supported Devices
7-31
Not all iPods and USB Drives are
compatible with the USB port.
.
Files with an .mp3 or .wma file
extension.
Make sure the iPod has the latest
firmware from Apple® for proper
operation. iPod firmware can be
updated using the latest iTunes®
application. See www.apple.com/
itunes.
.
AAC files stored on an iPod.
.
FAT16
.
FAT32
For help with identifying your iPod,
go to www.apple.com/support.
Radios that have a USB port can
play .mp3 and .wma files that are
stored on a USB storage device as
well as AAC files that are stored on
an iPod.
USB Supported File and Folder
Structure
.
USB Flash Drives
The radio supports:
.
Portable USB Hard Drives
.
Up to 700 folders.
.
Fifth generation or later iPod
.
Up to 8 folders in depth.
.
iPod nanos
.
Up to 65,535 files.
.
iPod touch
.
.
iPod classic
Folder and file names up to
64 bytes.
Connecting a USB Storage
Device or iPod
The USB Port can be used to
control an iPod or a USB storage
device.
To connect a USB storage device,
connect the device to the USB port
located in the center console or on
the instrument panel.
To connect an iPod, connect one
end of the USB cable that came
with the iPod to the iPod’s dock
connector and connect the other
end to the USB port located in the
center console. If the vehicle is on
and the USB connection works, “OK
to disconnect” and a GM logo may
appear on the iPod and iPod
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
7-32
Black plate (32,1)
Infotainment System
appears on the radio display. The
iPod music appears on the radio’s
display and begins playing.
f (Tune): Turn to select files.
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of
The iPod charges while it is
connected to the vehicle if the
vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN position. When the
vehicle is turned off, the iPod
automatically powers off and will
not charge or draw power from the
vehicle's battery.
¨ SEEK:
If you have an older iPod model that
is not supported, it can still be used
by connecting it to the Auxiliary
Input Jack using a standard 3.5 mm
(1/8 in) stereo cable. See “Using the
Auxiliary Input Jack” earlier for more
information.
Using the Radio to Control a
USB Storage Device or iPod
The radio can control a USB
storage device or an iPod using the
radio buttons and knobs and display
song information on the radio’s
display.
the track, if more than ten seconds
have played. Press and hold or
press multiple times to continue
moving backward through tracks.
Press to go to the next
track. Press and hold or press
multiple times to continue moving
forward through tracks.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold
to reverse playback quickly. Sound
is heard at a reduced volume.
Release s REV to resume playing.
The elapsed time of the file
displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward):
Press
and hold to advance playback
quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume. Release \ FWD to
resume playing. The elapsed time of
the file displays.
4 (Information):
Press to display
additional information about the
selected track.
Using Softkeys to Control a
USB Storage Device or iPod
The five softkeys below the radio
display are used to control the
functions listed below.
To use the softkeys:
1. Press the first or fifth softkey
below the radio display to
display the functions listed
below, or press the softkey
below the function if it is
currently displayed.
2. Press the softkey below the tab
with the function on it to use that
function.
j (Pause): Press the softkey
below j to pause the track. The tab
appears raised when pause is being
used. Press the softkey below j
again to resume playback.
Back: Press the softkey below the
back tab to go back to the main
display screen on an iPod, or the
root directory on a USB storage
device.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (33,1)
Infotainment System
c (Folder View): Press the
softkey below c to view the
contents of the current folder on the
USB drive. To browse and select
files:
1. Press the softkey below
c.
2. Turn f to scroll through the list
of folders.
3. Press f to select the desired
folder. If there is more then one
folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until
the desired folder is reached.
.
Third softkey, 5% through the list
each time the softkey is pressed.
.
Fourth softkey, 10% through the
list each time the softkey is
pressed.
.
Fifth softkey, end of the list.
h (Music Navigator): Press the
softkey below h to view and
select a file on an iPod, using the
iPod's menu system. Files are
sorted by:
7-33
3. Press f to select the
desired menu.
4. Turn f to scroll through the
folders or files in the
selected menu.
5. Press f to select the desired file
to be played.
To skip through large lists, the
five softkeys can be used to
navigate in the following order:
Playlists
.
First softkey, first item in the list.
.
Artists
.
.
Albums
Second softkey, 1% through the
list each time the softkey is
pressed.
.
5. Press f to select the desired file
to be played.
Genres
.
.
Songs
Third softkey, 5% through the list
each time the softkey is pressed.
.
Composers
.
To skip through large lists, the
five softkeys can be used to
navigate in the following order:
To select files:
Fourth softkey, 10% through the
list each time the softkey is
pressed.
.
Fifth softkey, end of the list.
4. Turn f to scroll through the files
in the selected folder.
.
First softkey, first item in the list.
.
Second softkey, 1% through the
list each time the softkey is
pressed.
.
1. Press the softkey below
h.
2. Turn f to scroll through the list
of menus.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
7-34
Black plate (34,1)
Infotainment System
Repeat Functionality
To use Repeat:
Press the softkey below " or '
to select between Repeat All and
Repeat Track.
" (Repeat All): Press the softkey
below " to repeat all tracks. The
tab appears lowered when Repeat
All is being used. This is the default
mode when a USB storage device
or iPod is first connected.
' (Repeat Track): Press the
softkey below ' to repeat
one track. The tab appears raised
when Repeat Track is being used.
Shuffle Functionality
To use Shuffle:
Press the softkey below >, 2,
< or = to select between
Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/
Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album,
or Shuffle Folder.
> (Shuffle Off): Press the
softkey below 2 to turn shuffle
off. This is the default mode when a
USB storage device or iPod is first
connected.
2 (Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle
Songs): Press the softkey below
= or < to shuffle all songs on
the USB storage device or iPod.
< (Shuffle Album): Press the
softkey below > to shuffle all
songs in the current album on
an iPod.
= (Shuffle Folder): Press the
softkey below > to shuffle all
songs in the current folder on a
USB storage device.
Rear Seat
Infotainment
Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) System
The vehicle may have an
Overhead DVD Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) system.
The RSE system works with the
vehicle's audio system. The DVD
player is part of the front radio. The
RSE system includes a radio with a
DVD player, a video display screen,
and if the vehicle has a third row
seat, it could have a second video
display screen, audio/video jacks,
two wireless headphones, and a
remote control. See CD/DVD Player
on page 7‑19 for more information
on the vehicle's DVD system.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (35,1)
Infotainment System
Before Driving
The RSE is designed for rear seat
passengers only. The driver cannot
safely view the video screen while
driving and should not try to do so.
In severe or extreme weather
conditions, the RSE system might
not work until the temperature is
within the operating range. The
operating range for the RSE system
is above −20°C (−4°F) or below
60°C (140°F). If the temperature of
the vehicle is outside this range,
heat or cool the vehicle until the
temperature is within the operating
range of the RSE system.
Parental Control
The RSE system may have a
Parental Control feature, depending
on which radio the vehicle has. To
start Parental Control, press and
hold the radio power button for more
than two seconds to stop all system
features such as: radio, video
screen, Rear Seat Audio (RSA),
DVD, and/or CD. While Parental
Control is on, a padlock icon
displays.
7-35
Headphones
The radio can be turned back on
with a single press of the power
button, but the RSE system will
remain under Parental Control.
To turn Parental Control off, press
and hold the radio power button for
more than two seconds. The RSE
returns from where it was previously
left and the padlock icon disappears
from the radio display.
Parental Control can also be turned
off by inserting or ejecting any disc,
pressing the play icon on the radio
DVD display menu, or changing an
ignition position.
A. Battery cover
B. Channel 1 or 2 switch
C. Power button
D. Volume control
E. Power indicator light
The RSE includes two 2-channel
wireless headphones that are
dedicated to this system. Channel 1
is dedicated to the video screen,
while Channel 2 is dedicated to
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) selections.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
7-36
Black plate (36,1)
Infotainment System
These headphones can be used to
listen to the radio, CDs, DVDs,
MP3s, DVD‐As, or any auxiliary
source connected to A/V jacks or
the auxiliary input jack, if the vehicle
has this feature. The wireless
headphones have an On/Off button,
channel 1 or 2 switch, and a volume
control.
If the vehicle has a third row video
screen display, it has two additional
headphones.
Push the power button to turn on
the headphones. An indicator light
located on the headphones comes
on. If the light comes on, but there
is intermittent sound and/or static on
the headphones, or if the indicator
light does not come on, the batteries
might need to be replaced. See
“Battery Replacement” later in this
section for more information. Switch
the headphones to Off when not
in use.
Infrared transmitters are located at
the rear of the overhead console.
The headphones shut off
automatically to save the battery
power if the RSE system and RSA
are shut off, or if the headphones
are out of range of the transmitters
for more than three minutes. If you
move too far forward or step out of
the vehicle, the headphones lose
the audio signal.
To adjust the volume on the
headphones, use the volume control
located on the right side.
For optimal audio performance, the
headphones must be worn correctly.
Headphones should be worn with
the headband over the top of the
head for best audio reception. The
symbol L (Left) appears on the
outside bottom edge of the ear cup
and should be positioned on the left
ear. The symbol R (Right) appears
on the outside bottom edge of the
ear cup and should be positioned on
the right ear.
Notice: Do not store the
headphones in heat or direct
sunlight. This could damage the
headphones and repairs will not
be covered by the warranty.
Storage in extreme cold can
weaken the batteries. Keep the
headphones stored in a cool,
dry place.
If the foam ear pads attached to
the headphones become worn or
damaged, the pads can be replaced
separately from the headphone set.
To purchase replacement ear pads,
call 1‐888‐293‐3332, then prompt
zero (0), or contact your dealer.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (37,1)
Infotainment System
Battery Replacement
Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks
To change the batteries on the
headphones:
1. Turn the screw to loosen the
battery door located on the left
side of the headphones. Slide
the battery door open.
If the headphones are to be stored
for a long period of time, remove the
batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
the RSE system. Adapter
connectors or cables (not included)
may be required to connect the
auxiliary device to the A/V jacks.
Refer to the manufacturer’s
instructions for proper usage.
Power for auxiliary devices is not
supplied by the radio system.
2. Replace the two batteries in the
compartment. Make sure that
they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the
battery compartment.
3. Replace the battery door and
tighten the door screw.
7-37
A. Yellow: Video Input
B. White: Left Audio Input
C. Red: Right Audio Input
The A/V jacks are color coded to
match typical home entertainment
system equipment.
The A/V jacks, located on the rear
of the floor console, allow audio or
video signals to be connected from
an auxiliary device such as a
camcorder or a video game unit to
To use the auxiliary inputs of the
RSE system, connect an external
auxiliary device to the color-coded
A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliary
device and the video screen power
on. If the video screen is in the
DVD player mode, pressing the
AUX (auxiliary) button on the remote
control switches the video screen
from the DVD player mode to the
auxiliary device. The audio of the
connected source can be listened to
over the speakers by sourcing the
radio to the auxiliary device or by
sourcing the RSA to the Rear Aux
and listening with the wireless
headphones on Channel 2 or
with the wired headphones.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
7-38
Black plate (38,1)
Infotainment System
See “Using the Auxiliary Input
Jack” under Auxiliary Devices on
page 7‑30 for more information
about changing the source.
How to Change the RSE Video
Screen Settings
The screen display mode (normal,
full, and zoom), screen brightness,
and setup menu language can be
changed from the on screen setup
menu. To change any feature:
1. Press the z (display menu)
button on the remote control.
2. Use the remote control n, q,
p, o (navigation) arrows and
the r (enter) button to use the
setup menu.
3. Press the z button again to
remove the setup menu from the
screen.
Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or
auxiliary inputs can be heard
through the following possible
sources:
.
Wireless headphones
.
Vehicle speakers
.
Vehicle‐wired headphone jacks
on the RSA system, if the
vehicle has this feature.
The RSE system always transmits
the audio signal to the wireless
headphones, if there is audio
available. See “Headphones” earlier
in this section for more information.
The DVD player is capable of
outputting audio to the wired
headphone jacks on the RSA
system, if the vehicle has this
feature. The DVD player can be
selected as an audio source on the
RSA system. See Rear Seat Audio
(RSA) System on page 7‑45 for
more information.
When a device is connected to the
A/V jacks, or the radio's auxiliary
input jack if the vehicle has this
feature, the rear seat passengers
are able to hear audio from the
auxiliary device through the wireless
or wired headphones. The front seat
passengers are able to listen to
playback from this device through
the vehicle speakers by selecting
AUX as the source on the radio.
Video Screen(s)
The video screen(s) are located in
the overhead console.
To use the video screen(s):
1. Push the release button located
on the overhead console.
2. Move the screen to the desired
position.
When the video screen is not in
use, push it up into its locked
position.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (39,1)
Infotainment System
If a DVD is playing and the screen
is raised to its locked position, the
screen remains on. This is normal,
and the DVD continues to play
through the previous audio source.
Use the remote control power button
or eject the disc to turn off the
screen.
Remote Control
The overhead console contains the
infrared transmitters for the wireless
headphones and the infrared
receivers for the remote control.
They are located at the rear of the
console.
Notice: Avoid directly touching
the video screen, as damage may
occur. See “Cleaning the Video
Screen” later in this section for
more information.
To use the remote control, aim it at
the transmitter window at the rear of
the RSE overhead console and
press the desired button. Direct
sunlight or very bright light could
7-39
affect the ability of the RSE
transmitter to receive signals from
the remote control. If the remote
control does not seem to be
working, the batteries might need
to be replaced. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.
Objects blocking the line of sight
could also affect the function of the
remote control.
If a CD or DVD is in the Radio
DVD slot, the remote control
O (power) button can be used to
turn on the video screen display and
start the disc. The radio can also
turn on the video screen display.
See CD/DVD Player on page 7‑19
for more information.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
7-40
Black plate (40,1)
Infotainment System
Notice: Storing the remote
control in a hot area or in direct
sunlight can damage it, and the
repairs will not be covered by the
warranty. Storage in extreme cold
can weaken the batteries. Keep
the remote control stored in a
cool, dry place.
If the remote control becomes lost
or damaged, a new universal
remote control can be purchased.
If this happens, make sure the
universal remote control uses a
code set of Toshiba®.
v (Title): Press this button to
return the DVD to the main menu of
the DVD. This function could vary
for each disc.
y (Main Menu): Press this button
to access the DVD menu. The DVD
menu is different on every DVD.
Use the navigation arrows to move
the cursor around the DVD menu.
After making a selection press the
enter button. This button only
operates when using a DVD.
n, q , p , o (Menu Navigation
Remote Control Buttons
Arrows): Use the arrow buttons to
navigate through a menu.
O (Power): Press this button to
turn the video screen on and off.
r (Enter):
P (Illumination):
Press this button
to turn the remote control backlight
on. The backlight automatically
times out after 7 to 10 seconds if no
other button is pressed while the
backlight is on.
Press this button to
select the choice that is highlighted
in any menu.
z (Display Menu):
Press this
button to adjust the brightness,
screen display mode (normal, full,
or zoom), and display the
language menu.
q (Return): Press this button to
exit the current active menu and
return to the previous menu. This
button operates only when the
display menu or a DVD menu is
active.
c (Stop):
Press this button to stop
playing, fast reversing, or fast
forwarding a DVD. Press this button
twice to return to the beginning of
the DVD.
s (Play/Pause):
Press this
button to start playing a DVD. Press
this button while a DVD is playing to
pause it. Press it again to continue
playing the DVD.
While the DVD is playing, the DVD
can be played slowly by pressing
the play/pause button then pressing
the fast forward button. The DVD
continues playing in a slow play
mode. Also, reverse can be played
slowly by pressing the play/pause
button and then pressing the fast
reverse button. To cancel slow play
mode, press the play/pause button.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (41,1)
Infotainment System
t (Previous Track/Chapter):
Press this button to return to the
start of the current track or chapter.
Press this button again to go to the
previous track or chapter. This
button might not work when the
DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press
this button to go to the beginning
of the next chapter or track. This
button might not work while the
DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
r (Fast Reverse): Press this
button to quickly reverse the DVD or
CD. To stop fast reversing a DVD
video, press the play/pause button.
To stop fast reversing a DVD audio
or CD, release the fast reverse
button. This button might not work
when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the
previews.
[ (Fast Forward):
Press this
button to fast forward the DVD or
CD. To stop fast forwarding a DVD
video, press the play/pause button.
To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio
or CD, release the fast forward
button. This button might not work
while the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the
previews.
7-41
e (Audio): Press this button to
change audio tracks on DVDs that
have this feature when the DVD is
playing. The format and content of
this function vary for each disc.
{ (Subtitles):
Press this button to
turn on or off subtitles and to move
through subtitle options when a
DVD is playing. The format and
content of this function vary for
each disc.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button
to switch the system between the
DVD player and an auxiliary source.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
7-42
Infotainment System
If the vehicle has a third row video
screen, the AUX button controls the
source display on the second row
video screen, and the third row
video screen as described in the
table below:
Aux
Second Third Row
Button
Row
Screen
Press
Screen
Default
State (No
Press)
First
Press
Black plate (42,1)
DVD
Media
DVD
Media
Aux Video Aux Video
Source
Source
Second
Press
DVD
Media
Aux Video
Source
Third
Press
Aux Video
Source
DVD
Media
Fourth
Press
Return to
Default
State
Return to
Default
State
2 (Camera): Press this button to
change camera angles on DVDs
that have this feature while a DVD is
playing. The format and content of
this function vary for each disc.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):
The numeric keypad provides the
capability of direct chapter or track
number selection.
\ (Clear):
Press this button within
three seconds after entering a
numeric selection, to clear all
numerical inputs.
} 10 (Double Digit Entries):
Press
this button to select chapter or track
numbers greater than nine. Press
this button before entering the
number.
Battery Replacement
To change the remote control
batteries:
1. Slide the rear cover back on the
remote control.
2. Replace the two batteries in the
compartment. Make sure they
are installed correctly using the
diagram on the inside of the
remote control.
3. Replace the battery cover.
If the remote control is to be stored
for a long period of time, remove the
batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (43,1)
Infotainment System
7-43
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart
Problem
Recommended Action
There is no power.
The ignition might not be turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY.
The picture does not fill the screen. There are black
borders on the top and bottom or on both sides, or the
picture looks stretched out.
Check the display mode settings in the setup menu by
pressing the display menu button on the remote control.
In auxiliary mode, the picture moves or scrolls.
Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.
The remote control does not work.
Check to make sure there is no obstruction between
the remote control and the transmitter window.
Check the batteries to make sure they are not dead
or installed incorrectly.
After stopping the player, and pushing Play, sometimes
the DVD starts where it left off and sometimes at the
beginning.
If the stop button was pressed one time, the DVD player
resumes playing where the DVD was stopped. If the
stop button was pressed two times, the DVD player
begins to play from the beginning of the DVD.
The auxiliary source is running, but there is no picture or Check that the RSE video screen is in the auxiliary
sound.
source mode.
Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
7-44
Black plate (44,1)
Infotainment System
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont.)
Problem
Recommended Action
Sometimes the wireless headphone audio cuts out or
buzzes.
Check for obstructions, low batteries, reception range,
and interference from cellular telephone towers,
or use a cellular telephone in the vehicle.
Check that the headphones are on correctly using
the L (left) and R (right) on the headphones.
The remote and/or the headphones are lost.
See your dealer for assistance.
The DVD is playing, but there is no picture or sound.
Check that the RSE video screen is sourced to the
DVD player.
DVD Display Error Messages
The DVD display error message
depends on the radio that is in the
vehicle. The video screen can
display one of the following:
Disc Load/Eject Error: This
message displays when there are
disc load or eject problems.
Disc Format Error: This message
displays if the disc is inserted with
the disc label wrong side up, or if
the disc is damaged.
Disc Region Error: This message
displays if the disc is not from a
correct region.
It might be necessary to turn off the
DVD player when operating one of
these devices in or near the vehicle.
No Disc Inserted: This message
displays if no disc is present when
Z or DVD AUX is pressed on the
radio.
*Excludes the OnStar® System.
DVD Distortion
When cleaning the RSE overhead
console surface, use only a clean
cloth dampened with clean water.
Video distortion can occur when
operating cellular phones, scanners,
CB radios, Global Position Systems
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax
machines, or walkie talkies.
Cleaning the RSE Overhead
Console
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (45,1)
Infotainment System
Cleaning the Video Screen
When cleaning the video screen,
use only a clean cloth dampened
with clean water. Use care when
directly touching or cleaning the
screen, as damage could result.
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
System
Vehicles with this feature allow the
rear seat passengers to listen to
and control any of the music
sources: radio, CDs, DVDs, or other
auxiliary sources. However, the rear
seat passengers can only control
the music sources the front seat
passengers are not listening to
(except on some radios where dual
control is allowed). For example,
rear seat passengers can control
and listen to a CD through the
headphones, while the driver listens
to the radio through the front
speakers. The rear seat passengers
have control of the volume for each
set of headphones.
7-45
The radio functionality is controlled
by both the RSA and the front radio.
Only one band can be tuned to at
one time. Changing the band on the
RSA or the front radio will change
the band on the other system,
if they are both sourced to the radio.
The RSA functions operate even
when the main radio is off. The front
audio system will display the
headphone icon when the RSA is
on, and will disappear from the
display when it is off.
Audio can be heard through wired
headphones (not included) plugged
into the jacks on the RSA. If the
vehicle has this feature, audio can
also be heard on Channel 2 of the
wireless headphones.
The audio system mutes the rear
speakers when the RSA audio is
active through the headphones.
P (Power):
Press the
turn the RSA on or off.
P button to
Volume: Turn this knob to increase
or to decrease the volume of the
wired headphones. The left knob
controls the left headphones and
the right knob controls the right
headphones.
SRCE (Source): Press this button
to switch between the radio
(AM/FM), XM™ (if equipped), CD,
and if the vehicle has these
features, DVD, front auxiliary, and
rear auxiliary.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
7-46
Black plate (46,1)
Infotainment System
© ¨ (Seek):
When listening to FM,
AM, or XM™ (if equipped), press
the left © or right ¨ seek arrow to go
to the previous or to the next station
or channel and stay there. This
function is inactive, with some
radios, if the front seat passengers
are listening to the radio.
Press and hold the left © or
right ¨ seek arrow until the display
flashes, to tune to an individual
station. The display stops flashing
after the buttons have not been
pushed for more than two seconds.
This function is inactive, with some
radios, if the front seat passengers
are listening to the radio.
While listening to a disc, press the
left © seek arrow to go back to the
start of the current track or chapter
(if more than ten seconds have
played). Press the right ¨ seek
arrow to go to the next track or
chapter on the disc. This function is
inactive, with some radios, if the
front seat passengers are listening
to the disc.
When a DVD video menu is being
displayed, press the left © or
right ¨ seek arrow to perform a
cursor up or down on the menu.
Hold the left © or right ¨ arrow to
perform a cursor left or right on
the menu.
PROG (Program): Press this
button to go to the next preset radio
station or channel set on the main
radio. This function is inactive, with
some radios, if the front seat
passengers are listening to the
radio.
When a CD or DVD audio disc is
playing, press this button to go to
the beginning of the CD or DVD
audio. This function is inactive,
with some radios, if the front seat
passengers are listening to the disc.
When a disc is playing in the CD or
DVD changer, press this button to
select the next disc, if multiple discs
are loaded. This function is inactive,
with some radios, if the front seat
passengers are listening to the disc.
When a DVD video menu is being
displayed, press the PROG button
to perform the menu function, enter.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (47,1)
Infotainment System
Phone
.
Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.
The system may not work with
all cell phones. See “Pairing” in
this section for more information.
.
If the cell phone has voice
dialing capability, learn to use
that feature to access the
address book or contact list. See
“Voice Pass-Thru” in this section
for more information.
.
See “Storing and Deleting Phone
Numbers” in this section for
more information.
Bluetooth
For vehicles equipped with
Bluetooth capability, the system can
interact with many cell phones,
allowing:
.
Placement and receipt of calls in
a hands-free mode.
.
Sharing of the cell phone’s
address book or contact list with
the vehicle.
To minimize driver distraction,
before driving, and with the vehicle
parked:
.
.
Become familiar with the
features of the cell phone.
Organize the phone book and
contact lists clearly and delete
duplicate or rarely used entries.
If possible, program speed dial
or other shortcuts.
Review the controls and
operation of the infotainment
and navigation system.
{ WARNING
When using a cell phone, it can
be distracting to look too long or
too often at the screen of the
phone or the infotainment
(navigation) system. Taking your
eyes off the road too long or too
often could cause a crash
resulting in injury or death. Focus
your attention on driving.
7-47
A Bluetooth system can use a
Bluetooth‐capable cell phone with a
Hands‐Free Profile to make and
receive phone calls. The system
can be used while the key is in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
position. The range of the Bluetooth
system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).
Not all phones support all functions,
and not all phones are guaranteed
to work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth
system. See www.gm.com/bluetooth
for more information on compatible
phones.
Voice Recognition
The Bluetooth system uses voice
recognition to interpret voice
commands to dial phone numbers
and name tags.
For additional information, say
“Help” while you are in a voice
recognition menu.
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to
a minimum. The system may not
recognize voice commands if there
is too much background noise.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
7-48
Black plate (48,1)
Infotainment System
When to Speak: A short tone
sounds after the system responds
indicating when it is waiting for a
voice command. Wait until the tone
and then speak.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a
calm and natural voice.
Audio System
When using the in‐vehicle Bluetooth
system, sound comes through the
vehicle's front audio system
speakers and overrides the audio
system. Use the audio system
volume knob, during a call, to
change the volume level. The
adjusted volume level remains in
memory for later calls. To prevent
missed calls, a minimum volume
level is used if the volume is turned
down too low.
Bluetooth Controls
Pairing Information
Use the buttons located on the
steering wheel to operate the
in‐vehicle Bluetooth system. See
Steering Wheel Controls on
page 5‑3 for more information.
.
Up to five cell phones can be
paired to the Bluetooth system.
.
The pairing process is disabled
when the vehicle is moving.
.
Pairing only needs to be
completed once, unless the
pairing information on the cell
phone changes or the cell phone
is deleted from the system.
.
Only one paired cell phone can
be connected to the Bluetooth
system at a time.
.
If multiple paired cell phones are
within range of the system, the
system connects to the first
available paired cell phone in the
order that they were first paired
to the system. To connect to a
different paired phone, see
“Connecting to a Different
Phone” later in this section.
b g (Push To Talk):
Press to
answer incoming calls, confirm
system information, and start
speech recognition.
c x (Phone On Hook): Press to
end a call, reject a call, or cancel an
operation.
Pairing
A Bluetooth cell phone must be
paired to the Bluetooth system and
then connected to the vehicle before
it can be used. See the cell phone
manufacturer's user guide for
Bluetooth functions before pairing
the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone
is not connected, calls will be made
using OnStar Hands‐Free Calling,
if equipped. Refer to the OnStar
Owner's Guide for more information.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (49,1)
Infotainment System
Pairing a Phone
1. Press and hold
two seconds.
b g for
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
3. Say “Pair.” The system responds
with instructions and a four‐digit
Personal Identification Number
(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.
4. Start the pairing process on the
cell phone that you want to pair.
For help with this process, see
the cell phone manufacturer's
user guide.
5. Locate the device named “Your
Vehicle” in the list on the cell
phone. Follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the
PIN that was provided in Step 3.
After the PIN is successfully
entered, the system prompts you
to provide a name for the paired
cell phone. This name will be
used to indicate which phones
are paired and connected to the
vehicle. See “Listing All Paired
and Connected Phones” later in
this section for more information.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pair
additional phones.
Listing All Paired and Connected
Phones
The system can list all cell phones
paired to it. If a paired cell phone is
also connected to the vehicle, the
system responds with “is connected”
after that phone name.
1. Press and hold
two seconds.
b g for
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
3. Say “List.”
7-49
Deleting a Paired Phone
If the phone name you want to
delete is unknown, see “Listing All
Paired and Connected Phones.”
1. Press and hold
two seconds.
b g for
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
3. Say “Delete.” The system asks
which phone to delete.
4. Say the name of the phone you
want to delete.
Connecting to a Different Phone
To connect to a different cell phone,
the Bluetooth system looks for the
next available cell phone in the
order in which all the available cell
phones were paired. Depending on
which cell phone you want to
connect to, you may have to use
this command several times.
1. Press and hold
two seconds.
b g for
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
7-50
Infotainment System
3. Say “Change phone.”
.
.
Black plate (50,1)
If another cell phone is
found, the response will be
“<Phone name> is now
connected.”
If another cell phone is not
found, the original phone
remains connected.
Storing and Deleting Phone
Numbers
The system can store up to
30 phone numbers as name tags in
the Hands‐Free Directory that is
shared between the Bluetooth and
OnStar systems, if equipped.
The following commands are used
to delete and store phone numbers.
Store: This command will store a
phone number, or a group of
numbers as a name tag.
Digit Store: This command allows
a phone number to be stored as a
name tag by entering the digits one
at a time.
Delete: This command is used to
delete individual name tags.
Delete All Name Tags: This
command deletes all stored name
tags in the Hands‐Free Calling
Directory and the OnStar
Turn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory,
if equipped.
Using the “Store” Command
1. Press and hold
two seconds.
b g for
2. Say “Store.”
3. Say the phone number or group
of numbers you want to store all
at once with no pauses, then
follow the directions given by the
system to save a name tag for
this number.
Using the “Digit Store” Command
If an unwanted number is
recognized by the system, say
“Clear” at any time to clear the last
number.
To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system, say
“Verify” at any time.
1. Press and hold
two seconds.
b g for
2. Say “Digit Store.”
3. Say each digit, one at a time,
that you want to store. After
each digit is entered, the system
repeats back the digit it heard
followed by a tone. After the last
digit has been entered, say
“Store,” and then follow the
directions given by the system to
save a name tag for this number.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (51,1)
Infotainment System
Using the “Delete” Command
1. Press and hold
two seconds.
b g for
Using the “List” Command
1. Press and hold
two seconds.
b g for
7-51
Using the “Dial” or “Call”
Command
b g for
2. Say “Delete.”
2. Say “Directory.”
1. Press and hold
two seconds.
3. Say the name tag you want to
delete.
3. Say “Hands‐Free Calling.”
2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
4. Say “List.”
Using the “Delete All Name Tags”
Command
3. Say the entire number without
pausing, or say the name tag.
Making a Call
This command deletes all stored
name tags in the Hands‐Free
Calling Directory and the OnStar
Turn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory,
if equipped.
Calls can be made using the
following commands.
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
To delete all name tags:
1. Press and hold
two seconds.
b g for
2. Say “Delete all name tags.”
Listing Stored Numbers
The list command will list all stored
numbers and name tags.
Dial or Call: The dial or call
command can be used
interchangeably to dial a phone
number or a stored name tag.
Digit Dial: This command allows a
phone number to be dialed by
entering the digits one at a time.
Re‐dial: This command is used to
dial the last number used on the cell
phone.
Using the “Digit Dial” Command
The digit dial command allows a
phone number to be dialed by
entering the digits one at a time.
After each digit is entered, the
system repeats back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
If an unwanted number is
recognized by the system, say
“Clear” at any time to clear the last
number.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
7-52
Black plate (52,1)
Infotainment System
To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system, say
“Verify” at any time.
1. Press and hold
two seconds.
b g for
Receiving a Call
Three‐Way Calling
When an incoming call is received,
the audio system mutes and a ring
tone is heard in the vehicle.
Three‐way calling must be
supported on the cell phone and
enabled by the wireless service
carrier.
.
2. Say “Digit Dial.”
.
3. Say each digit, one at a time,
that you want to dial. After each
digit is entered, the system
repeats back the digit it heard
followed by a tone. After the last
digit has been entered,
say “Dial.”
Call Waiting
Call waiting must be supported on
the cell phone and enabled by the
wireless service carrier.
.
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
Using the “Re‐dial” Command
1. Press and hold
two seconds.
b g for
2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.”
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
b g to answer the call.
Press c x to ignore a call.
Press
Press b g to answer an
incoming call when another call
is active. The original call is
placed on hold.
.
Press b g again to return to the
original call.
.
To ignore the incoming call, no
action is required.
.
Press c x to disconnect the
current call and switch to the call
on hold.
1. While on a call, press
b g.
2. Say “Three‐way call.”
3. Use the dial or call command to
dial the number of the third party
to be called.
4. Once the call is connected,
press b g to link all callers
together.
Ending a Call
Press
c x to end a call.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (53,1)
Infotainment System
Muting a Call
During a call, all sounds from inside
the vehicle can be muted so that the
person on the other end of the call
cannot hear them.
.
.
To mute a call, press
then say “Mute call.”
b g, and
To cancel mute, press b
then say “Un‐mute call.”
g, and
Transferring a Call
Audio can be transferred between
the Bluetooth system and the cell
phone.
The cell phone must be paired and
connected with the Bluetooth
system before a call can be
transferred. The connection process
can take up to two minutes after the
ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
Transferring Audio from the
Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone
During a call with the audio in the
vehicle:
1. Press
b g.
2. Say “Transfer Call.”
Transferring Audio to the
Bluetooth System from a Cell
Phone
During a call with the audio on the
cell phone, press b g. The audio
transfers to the vehicle. If the audio
does not transfer to the vehicle, use
the audio transfer feature on the cell
phone. See your cell phone
manufacturer's user guide for more
information.
7-53
Voice Pass-Thru
Voice pass‐thru allows access to the
voice recognition commands on the
cell phone. See your cell phone
manufacturer's user guide to see if
the cell phone supports this feature.
To access contacts stored in the cell
phone:
1. Press and hold
two seconds.
b g for
2. Say “Bluetooth.” The system
responds “Bluetooth ready,”
followed by a tone.
3. Say “Voice.” The system
responds “OK, accessing
<phone name>.”
The cell phone's normal prompt
messages will go through their cycle
according to the phone's operating
instructions.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
7-54
Black plate (54,1)
Infotainment System
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
(DTMF) Tones
The Bluetooth system can send
numbers and the numbers stored as
name tags during a call. You can
use this feature when calling a
menu‐driven phone system.
Account numbers can also be
stored for use.
Sending a Number or Name Tag
During a Call
1. Press b g. The system
responds “Ready,” followed by
a tone.
2. Say “Dial.”
3. Say the number or name tag
to send.
Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out of
the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, it
will be retained indefinitely. This
includes all saved name tags in the
phone book and phone pairing
information. For information on how
to delete this information, see the
previous section “Deleting a Paired
Phone” and the previous sections
on deleting name tags.
Other Information
The Bluetooth® word mark and
logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by General Motors is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (1,1)
Climate Controls
8-1
Climate Controls
Climate Control Systems
Climate Control Systems
The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with
this system.
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Rear Climate Control System
(Rear Climate
Control Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Rear Climate Control System
(Rear Climate with Rear Seat
Audio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
A. Fan Control
B. REAR (Rear Climate Control)
F.
Driver and Passenger
Temperature Controls
C. Recirculation
G. Rear Window Defogger
D. Air Delivery Mode Control
Temperature Control: Move
the thumbwheels up or down
to increase or decrease the
temperature on the driver side or
the passenger side of the vehicle
for the dual zone system.
E. Air Conditioning
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
8-2
Black plate (2,1)
Climate Controls
9 (Fan Control): Turn the left
knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the fan
speed. Turn the knob all the way
counterclockwise to turn the front
system off.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise to
change the airflow direction inside
the vehicle. By positioning the knob
between two modes, a combination
of those modes is selected.
Select from the following modes:
H (Vent):
Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level):
Air is divided
between the instrument panel and
floor outlets. Some air is directed
towards the windshield and side
window outlets. Cooler air is
directed to the upper outlets and
warmer air to the floor outlets.
6 (Floor):
Air is directed to the
floor outlets, with some of the air
directed to the windshield, side
window, and second row floor
outlets. In this mode, the system
automatically selects outside air.
Recirculation cannot be selected
when in Floor Mode.
- (Defog): The defog mode is
used to clear the windows of fog
or moisture. Air is directed to the
windshield, floor outlets, and side
window vents. In this mode, the
system turns off recirculation and
runs the air conditioning compressor
unless the outside temperature is
close to freezing. The recirculation
mode cannot be selected while in
the defog mode.
0 (Defrost): The defrost mode is
used to remove fog or frost from the
windshield more quickly. Air is
directed to the windshield and side
window vents, with some directed to
the floor vents. In this mode, the
system automatically forces outside
air into the vehicle. The recirculation
mode cannot be selected while in
the defrost mode. The air
conditioning compressor runs
automatically in this setting, unless
the outside temperature is close to
freezing.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
# (Air Conditioning): Press this
button to turn the air conditioning
system on or off. An indicator light
comes on to show that the air
conditioning is on. The air
conditioning can be selected in any
mode as long as the fan switch
is on.
On hot days, open the windows to
let hot inside air escape; then close
them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for the vehicle to cool down.
It also helps the system to operate
more efficiently.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (3,1)
Climate Controls
The air conditioning system
removes moisture from the air, so a
small amount of water might drip
under the vehicle while idling or
after turning off the engine. This is
normal.
h (Recirculation):
Press this
button to turn the recirculation mode
on or off. An indicator light comes
on to show that recirculation is on.
This mode recirculates and helps to
quickly cool the air inside the
vehicle. It can be used to help
prevent outside air and odors from
entering the vehicle.
The recirculation mode cannot be
used with floor, defrost, or defogging
modes. If recirculation is selected
while in one of those modes, the
indicator flashes three times and
turns off. The air conditioning
8-3
compressor will also come on when
this mode is activated. While in
recirculation mode the windows may
fog when the weather is cold and
damp. To clear the fog, select either
the defog or defrost mode and
increase the fan speed. The
recirculation mode can also be
turned off by turning off the engine.
< (Rear Window Defogger):
Press this button to turn the rear
window defogger on or off. The
system automatically turns off
several minutes after it has been
activated. The defogger can also be
turned off by turning off the engine.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
REAR: Press to turn the rear
heating and air conditioning on. See
Rear Climate Control System (Rear
Climate Control Only) on page 8‑10
or Rear Climate Control System
(Rear Climate with Rear Seat Audio)
on page 8‑11 for more information.
For vehicles with heated outside
rearview mirrors, the mirrors will
heat to help clear fog or frost from
the surface of the mirror when the
rear window defog button is
pressed.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a
warming grid to remove fog from the
rear window.
Notice: Do not use anything
sharp on the inside of the rear
window. If you do, you could cut
or damage the warming grid, and
the repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Do not
attach a temporary vehicle
license, tape, a decal, or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
8-4
Black plate (4,1)
Climate Controls
Dual Automatic Climate Control System
K. Air Conditioning
The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with
this system. The vehicle also has a flow-through ventilation system
described later in this section.
L.
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the hybrid supplement for more information.
A. Fan Control
F.
Air Delivery Mode Control
B. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
G. Driver Temperature Control
C. Defrost
H. Display
D. Recirculation
I.
Power Button
E. REAR (Rear Climate Control)
J.
Rear Window Defogger
PASS
M. Passenger Temperature Control
O (On/Off):
Press to turn the
climate control system on or off.
Outside air still enters the vehicle,
and is directed to the floor. This
direction can be changed by
pressing the mode button.
Recirculation can be selected once
you have selected vent or bi-level
mode. The temperature can also be
adjusted using either temperature
button. If the air delivery mode or
temperature settings are adjusted
with the system off, the display
illuminates briefly to show the
settings and then returns to off. The
system can be turned back on by
pressing either O, D, C, #, the
defrost or the AUTO button.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (5,1)
Climate Controls
Driver and Passenger Side
Temperature Control
The driver and passenger side
temperature buttons are used to
adjust the temperature of the air
coming through the system on the
driver or passenger side of the
vehicle. The temperature can be
adjusted even if the system is
turned off. This is possible since
outside air always flows through
the system as the vehicle is
moving forward unless it is set
to recirculation mode. See
“Recirculation” later in this section.
Press the + or − buttons to increase
or decrease the cabin temperature.
The driver side or passenger side
temperature display shows the
temperature setting decreasing or
increasing.
The passenger temperature setting
can be set to match the driver
temperature setting by pressing
the PASS button and turning
off the PASS indicator. When the
passenger temperature setting is set
different than the driver setting, the
indicator on the PASS button
illuminates and both the driver side
and passenger side temperature
displays are shown.
When in defrost mode the
passenger temperature setting
cannot be changed.
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When
automatic operation is active the
system will control the inside
temperature, the air delivery, and
the fan speed.
8-5
Use the steps below to place the
entire system in automatic mode:
1. Press the AUTO button.
When AUTO is selected, the
display will change to show the
current temperature(s) and
AUTO will be lit on the display.
The current delivery mode and
fan speed will also be displayed
for approximately 5 seconds.
When AUTO is selected, the air
conditioning operation and air
inlet will be automatically
controlled. The air conditioning
compressor will run when the
outside temperature is over
about 4°C (40°F). The air inlet
will normally be set to outside
air. If it is hot outside, the air
inlet may automatically switch to
recirculate inside air to help
quickly cool down the vehicle.
The light on the button comes on
in recirculation.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
8-6
Black plate (6,1)
Climate Controls
2. Set the driver and passenger
temperature.
To find your comfort setting, start
with a 23°C (74°F) temperature
setting and allow about
20 minutes for the system to
regulate. Use the driver or
passenger temperature buttons
to adjust the temperature setting
as necessary. If a temperature
setting of 15°C (60°F) is chosen,
the system remains at the
maximum cooling setting.
If a temperature setting of
32°C (90°F) is chosen, the
system remains at the maximum
heat setting. Choosing either
maximum setting will not cause
the vehicle to heat or cool any
faster.
Do not to cover the solar sensor
located on the top of the instrument
panel near the windshield. This
sensor regulates air temperature
based on sun load and also turns
on the headlamps. For more
information on the solar sensor,
see “Sensors” later in this section.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold
weather, the system will delay
turning on the fan until warm air
is available. The length of delay
depends on the engine coolant
temperature. Pressing the fan
switch will override this delay and
change the fan to a selected speed.
Manual Operation
D C (Fan Control):
Press these
buttons to increase or decrease the
fan speed.
Pressing either fan button while in
automatic control places the fan
under manual control. The fan
setting remains displayed and the
AUTO light turns off. The air
delivery mode remains under
automatic control.
H G (Air Delivery Mode Control):
Press these buttons to change the
direction of the airflow in the vehicle.
Repeatedly press either button until
the desired mode appears on the
display. Pressing either mode button
while the system is off changes the
air delivery mode without turning the
system on. Pressing either mode
button while in automatic control
places the mode under manual
control.
The air delivery mode setting is
displayed and the AUTO light turns
off. The fan remains under
automatic control.
H (Vent): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level):
Air is divided
between the instrument panel and
floor outlets. Some air is directed
towards the windshield and side
window outlets.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (7,1)
Climate Controls
6 (Floor):
Air is directed to the
floor outlets, with some to the
windshield, side window outlets,
and second row floor outlets. In this
mode, the system automatically
selects outside air.
- (Defog): This mode clears the
windows of fog or moisture. Air is
directed to the windshield, floor
outlets, and side window vents. In
this mode, the system turns off
recirculation and runs the air
conditioning compressor unless the
outside temperature is close to
freezing. The recirculation mode
cannot be selected while in the
defog mode.
0 (Defrost): This mode removes
fog or frost from the windshield
more quickly. Air is directed to the
windshield and side window vents,
with some directed to the floor
vents. In this mode, the system
automatically forces outside air
into the vehicle and runs the air
conditioning compressor unless the
outside temperature is close to
freezing. The recirculation mode
cannot be selected while in the
defrost mode.
The passenger temperature control
cannot be activated while in defrost
mode. If the PASS button is
pressed, the button indicator flashes
three times and will not work. If the
passenger temperature buttons are
adjusted, the driver temperature
indicator changes. The passenger
temperature will not be displayed.
8-7
If vent, bi-level, or floor mode is
selected again, the climate control
system displays the previous
temperature settings.
Do not drive the vehicle until all
the windows are clear.
# (Air Conditioning):
Press to
turn the air conditioning (A/C)
compressor on and off. An indicator
light comes on to show that the air
conditioning is on.
If this button is pressed when the
air conditioning compressor is
unavailable, the indicator flashes
three times and then turns off.
If the air conditioning is on and the
outside temperature drops below a
temperature which is too cool for air
conditioning to be effective, the air
conditioning light turns off to show
that the air conditioning mode has
been canceled.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
8-8
Black plate (8,1)
Climate Controls
On hot days, open the windows long
enough to let hot inside air escape.
This helps to reduce the time it
takes for the vehicle to cool down.
It also helps the system to operate
more efficiently.
The air conditioning system
removes moisture from the air, so a
small amount of water might drip
under the vehicle while idling or
after turning off the engine. This is
normal.
@ (Recirculation):
Press to turn
the recirculation mode on or off.
An indicator light comes on to show
that the recirculation is on.
This mode recirculates and helps
to quickly cool the air inside the
vehicle. It can be used to help
prevent outside air and odors from
entering the vehicle.
The recirculation mode cannot be
used with floor, defog, or defrost
modes. If recirculation is selected
with one of those modes, the
indicator light flashes three times
and then turns off. The air
conditioning compressor also comes
on when this mode is activated.
While in recirculation mode the
windows may fog when the weather
is cold and damp. To clear the fog,
select either the defog or defrost
mode and increase the fan speed.
The recirculation mode can also be
turned off by turning off the ignition.
REAR: For vehicles with the rear
heat and air conditioning controls.
Press to turn the rear climate control
system on or off. See Rear Climate
Control System (Rear Climate
Control Only) on page 8‑10 or Rear
Climate Control System (Rear
Climate with Rear Seat Audio) on
page 8‑11.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a
warming grid to remove fog from the
rear window.
< (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. It automatically
turns off several minutes after it has
been activated. The defogger can
also be turned off by turning off the
engine. Do not drive the vehicle until
all the windows are clear.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade
or sharp object to clear the inside
rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid
lines in the rear glass. These
actions may damage the rear
defogger. Repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
Heated Mirrors: Press < to help
clear fog or frost from the surface of
the outside mirror. See Power
Mirrors on page 2‑18.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (9,1)
Climate Controls
Sensors
The solar sensor, located in the
defrost grille in the middle of the
instrument panel, monitors the solar
heat. Do not cover the solar sensor
or the system will not work properly.
8-9
There is also an exterior
temperature sensor located behind
the front grille. This sensor reads
the outside air temperature and
helps maintain the temperature
inside the vehicle. Any cover on the
front of the vehicle could cause a
false reading in the displayed
temperature.
The interior temperature sensors
located in the headliner above the
driver side seat and if equipped, in
the headliner above the second row
seats measure the temperature of
the air inside the vehicle.
The climate control system uses the
information from these sensors to
maintain your comfort setting by
adjusting the outlet temperature, fan
speed, and the air delivery mode.
The system may also supply cooler
air to the side of the vehicle facing
the sun. The recirculation mode will
also be used as needed to maintain
cool outlet temperatures.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
8-10
Black plate (10,1)
Climate Controls
Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate
Control Only)
For vehicles with this system, the rear controls are three knobs located in
the headliner. The system can also be controlled with the front controls.
Mimic Mode: This mode matches
the rear climate control to the front
climate control airflow settings.
It comes on when REAR is pressed
the first time.
Independent Mode: This mode
directs rear seating airflow
according to the settings of the rear
controls. It comes on when any rear
control is adjusted.
Temperature Control: Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the airflow
temperature into the
passenger area.
Fan Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the fan speed.
A. Fan Control
B. Temperature Control
C. Air Delivery Mode Control
REAR: Press the REAR button on
the front climate control system to
turn the rear climate control system
on or off. An indicator comes on
when the rear system is on. See
Climate Control Systems on
page 8‑1 or Dual Automatic Climate
Control System on page 8‑4. The
rear system can also be turned off
by turning the rear fan knob to the
9 position.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise to
change the direction of the airflow.
H
(Vent): Air is directed through
the headliner outlets.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (11,1)
Climate Controls
)
(Bi-Level): Air is directed
through the floor and headliner
outlets. The rear system floor
outlets are located directly behind
the second row seats. The flow can
be divided between vent and floor
outlets depending upon where the
knob is placed between the settings.
8-11
Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate with Rear
Seat Audio)
For vehicles with the rear heat and air conditioning controls, they are
integrated with the rear seat audio controls located in the center console.
The system can be controlled from the front controls as well as the rear
controls.
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the
floor outlets. The rear system floor
outlets are located directly behind
the second row seats.
Rear Climate Control with Rear Seat Audio Controls
A. Fan Control
B. Air Delivery Mode Control
C. Temperature Control
REAR: Press the REAR button on
the front climate control system to
turn the rear climate control system
on or off. An indicator comes on
when the rear system is on.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
8-12
Black plate (12,1)
Climate Controls
The rear climate control system can
also be turned off by pressing and
holding the C button. To turn the
system on from the rear seats,
press any rear climate control
button, except the C button.
Mimic Mode: This mode matches
the rear climate control to the front
climate control airflow settings.
It comes on when REAR is pressed
the first time.
Independent Mode: This mode
directs rear seating airflow
according to the settings of the
rear controls.
To turn the system on from the rear,
press any rear climate control
button, except the C button.
Automatic Operation, If
Equipped
AUTO: Press the air delivery mode
button until this setting is selected to
control the inside temperature, air
delivery, and fan speed. AUTO
appears in the display when
automatic operation is active.
+/− (Increase/Decrease
Manual Operation
D C (Fan Control):
Press these
buttons on the rear seat audio
control panel to increase or
decrease the airflow. Pressing the
fan up button when the system is off
will turn the system on. The air
delivery mode will remain under
automatic control.
Temperature): Press the + or
− buttons to increase or decrease
the cabin temperature. The rear
control temperature display will
show the temperature setting
increasing or decreasing.
+/− (Temperature Control):
The display only indicates climate
control functions when the system is
in rear independent mode.
N (Air Delivery Mode Control):
Press these buttons to adjust the
temperature of the air flowing into
the passenger area. Press the
+ button for warmer air and press
the − button for cooler air.
Press the mode button to change
the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. Repeatedly press the
button until the desired mode
appears on the display. Multiple
presses will cycle through the
delivery selections.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (13,1)
Climate Controls
Air Vents
Use the air outlets located in the
center and on the side of the
instrument panel to direct the
airflow.
Operation Tips
.
Keep the hood and front air
inlets free of ice, snow, or any
other obstruction (such as
leaves). The heater and
defroster will work far better,
reducing the chance of fogging
the inside of the windows.
.
When you enter a vehicle in cold
weather, press the fan up button
to the maximum fan level before
driving. This helps clear the
intake ducts of snow and
moisture, and reduces the
chance of fogging the inside of
the window.
.
Keep the air path under the front
seats clear of objects. This helps
air to circulate throughout the
vehicle.
.
Adding outside equipment to the
front of the vehicle, such as
hood-air deflectors, may affect
the performance of the heating
and air conditioning system.
Check with your dealer before
adding equipment to the outside
of the vehicle.
8-13
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
8-14
Black plate (14,1)
Climate Controls
2 NOTES
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (1,1)
Driving and Operating
Driving and
Operating
Driving Information
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . 9-17
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 9-18
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-21
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Starting and Operating
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-27
Adjustable Throttle and Brake
Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . .
Parking Over Things
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Active Fuel Management® . . .
9-29
9-31
9-32
9-32
9-34
9-34
9-34
Engine Exhaust
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Running the Vehicle While
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Automatic Transmission
Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-37
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Drive Systems
Four-Wheel Drive (Two Speed
Automatic
Transfer Case) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Four-Wheel Drive (Single
Speed Automatic
Transfer Case) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
9-1
Brakes
Antilock Brake
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Ride Control Systems
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . .
Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . .
Continuous Damping
Control (CDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Level Control . . . . .
9-52
9-54
9-54
9-54
Cruise Control
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
Object Detection Systems
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-58
Side Blind Zone
Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60
Rear Vision
Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-2
Black plate (2,1)
Driving and Operating
Fuel
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-68
Gasoline Specifications (U.S.
and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-68
California Fuel
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-68
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-69
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-72
Towing
General Towing
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving Characteristics and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . .
9-73
9-73
9-77
9-82
Driving Information
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always
expect the unexpected.” The first
step in driving defensively is to wear
the safety belt. See Safety Belts on
page 3‑20.
{ WARNING
Assume that other road users
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and other
drivers) are going to be careless
and make mistakes. Anticipate
what they might do and be ready.
In addition:
.
Allow enough following
distance between you and
the driver in front of you.
.
Focus on the task of driving.
(Continued)
Conversions and Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91
Adding a Snow Plow or
Similar Equipment . . . . . . . . . . 9-91
WARNING (Continued)
Driver distraction can cause
collisions resulting in injury or
possible death. These simple
defensive driving techniques
could save your life.
Drunk Driving
{ WARNING
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Your reflexes,
perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even
a small amount of alcohol. You
can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after
drinking.
Do not drink and drive or ride with
a driver who has been drinking.
Ride home in a cab; or if you are
with a group, designate a driver
who will not drink.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (3,1)
Driving and Operating
Death and injury associated with
drinking and driving is a global
tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that
anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
judgment, muscular coordination,
vision, and attentiveness.
Police records show that almost
40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve
alcohol. In most cases, these
deaths are the result of someone
who was drinking and driving. In
recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related
deaths have been associated with
the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
For persons under 21, it is against
the law in every U.S. state to drink
alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental
reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the
leading highway safety problem is
for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.
Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person's system
can make crash injuries worse,
especially injuries to the brain,
spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is
in a crash, that person's chance of
being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not
been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems
help to control the vehicle while
driving — brakes, steering, and
accelerator. At times, as when
driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
ask more of those control systems
than the tires and road can provide.
Meaning, you can lose control of the
vehicle. See StabiliTrak® System on
page 9‑52.
Adding non‐dealer accessories can
affect vehicle performance. See
Accessories and Modifications on
page 10‑3.
9-3
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on
page 5‑23.
Braking action involves perception
time and reaction time. Deciding to
push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is
reaction time.
Average reaction time is about
three‐fourths of a second. But that
is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as
two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition,
alertness, coordination, and
eyesight all play a part. So do
alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But
even in three‐fourths of a second,
a vehicle moving at 100 km/h
(60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft). That
could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough
space between the vehicle and
others is important.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-4
Black plate (4,1)
Driving and Operating
And, of course, actual stopping
distances vary greatly with the
surface of the road, whether it is
pavement or gravel; the condition
of the road, whether it is wet, dry,
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the
brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
and the amount of brake force
applied.
brakes. If the brakes are pumped,
the pedal could get harder to push
down. If the engine stops, there will
still be some power brake assist but
it will be used when the brake is
applied. Once the power assist is
used up, it can take longer to stop
and the brake pedal will be harder
to push.
Avoid needless heavy braking.
Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration
followed by heavy braking — rather
than keeping pace with traffic. This
is a mistake. The brakes might not
have time to cool between hard
stops. The brakes will wear out
much faster with a lot of heavy
braking. Keeping pace with the
traffic and allowing realistic following
distances eliminates a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
Adding non‐dealer accessories can
affect vehicle performance. See
Accessories and Modifications on
page 10‑3.
If the engine ever stops while the
vehicle is being driven, brake
normally but do not pump the
Steering
Power Steering
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
hybrid supplement for more
information.
If power steering assist is lost
because the engine stops or the
power steering system is not
functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but it will take more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a
reasonable speed.
Traction in a curve depends on the
condition of the tires and the road
surface, the angle at which the
curve is banked, and vehicle speed.
While in a curve, speed is the one
factor that can be controlled.
If there is a need to reduce speed,
do it before entering the curve, while
the front wheels are straight.
Try to adjust the speed so you can
drive through the curve. Maintain a
reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve, and
then accelerate gently into the
straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can
be more effective than braking. For
example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane,
or a car suddenly pulls out from
nowhere, or a child darts out from
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (5,1)
Driving and Operating
Off-Road Recovery
between parked cars and stops right
in front of you. These problems can
be avoided by braking — if you can
stop in time. But sometimes you
cannot stop in time because there
is no room. That is the time for
evasive action — steering around
the problem.
The vehicle can perform very well
in emergencies like these. First,
apply the brakes. See Braking on
page 9‑3. It is better to remove as
much speed as possible from a
collision. Then steer around the
problem, to the left or right
depending on the space available.
9-5
The vehicle's right wheels can drop
off the edge of a road onto the
shoulder while driving.
An emergency like this requires
close attention and a quick decision.
If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o'clock
positions, it can be turned a full
180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have
to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once
you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency
situations are always possible is a
good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety
belts properly.
If the level of the shoulder is only
slightly below the pavement,
recovery should be fairly easy. Ease
off the accelerator and then, if there
is nothing in the way, steer so that
the vehicle straddles the edge of the
pavement. Turn the steering wheel
8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 in), about
one-eighth turn, until the right front
tire contacts the pavement edge.
Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-6
Black plate (6,1)
Driving and Operating
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts
say about what happens when the
three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not
have enough friction where the tires
meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up.
Keep trying to steer and constantly
seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of
the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid
most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions,
and by not overdriving those
conditions. But skids are always
possible.
The three types of skids correspond
to the vehicle's three control
systems. In the braking skid, the
wheels are not rolling. In the
steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes
tires to slip and lose cornering force.
And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving
wheels to spin.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease
your foot off the accelerator pedal
and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start
steering quickly enough, the vehicle
may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when
water, snow, ice, gravel, or other
material is on the road. For safety,
slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to
slow down on slippery surfaces
because stopping distance is longer
and vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with
reduced traction, try to avoid
sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing
vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could
cause the tires to slide. You might
not realize the surface is slippery
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to
recognize warning clues — such as
enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored
surface — and slow down when you
have any doubt.
Remember: Antilock brakes help
avoid only the braking skid.
Off-Road Driving
Vehicles with four-wheel drive can
be used for off-road driving.
Vehicles without four-wheel drive
and vehicles with 20‐inch tire/wheel
assemblies should not be driven
off-road except on a level, solid
surface.
The airbag system is designed to
work properly under a wide range of
conditions, including off‐road usage.
Always wear your safety belt and
observe safe driving speeds,
especially on rough terrain.
Drinking and driving can be very
dangerous on any road and this is
certainly true for off-road driving.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (7,1)
Driving and Operating
At the very time you need special
alertness and driving skills, your
reflexes, perceptions, and judgment
can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You could have a
serious — or even fatal — accident
if you drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking.
Off-roading can be great fun but has
some definite hazards. The greatest
of these is the terrain itself. When
off-road driving, traffic lanes are not
marked, curves are not banked, and
there are no road signs. Surfaces
can be slippery, rough, uphill,
or downhill.
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt
maneuvers. Failure to operate the
vehicle correctly off‐road could
result in loss of vehicle control or
vehicle rollover.
Off-roading involves some new
skills. That is why it is very
important that you read these
driving tips and suggestions to help
make off-road driving safer and
more enjoyable.
Before You Go Off-Roading
.
Have all necessary maintenance
and service work done.
.
Make sure there is enough fuel,
that fluid levels are where they
should be, and that the spare
tire, if the vehicle has one, is
fully inflated.
.
Be sure to read all the
information about
four-wheel-drive vehicles
in this manual.
.
Make sure all underbody
shields, if the vehicle has them,
are properly attached.
.
Know the local laws that apply to
off-roading where you will be
driving or check with law
enforcement people in the area.
.
Be sure to get the necessary
permission if you will be on
private land.
9-7
If you think you will need some
more ground clearance at the front
of your vehicle, you can remove the
front fascia lower air dam. The air
dam is held in place by two bolts
and 10 snaps accessible from
underneath the front fascia.
To remove the air dam:
1. Remove the two outboard air
dam bolts.
2. With a flat‐blade tool, disengage
the snaps.
3. After the bolts are removed and
the snaps are disengaged, push
forward on the air dam until it
is free.
Notice: Operating your vehicle
for extended periods without the
front fascia lower air dam
installed can cause improper air
flow to the engine. Always be
sure to replace the front fascia air
dam when you are finished
off-road driving.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-8
Black plate (8,1)
Driving and Operating
After off-roading, be sure to reinstall
the air dam:
WARNING (Continued)
1. Line up the snaps and push the
air dam rearward to engage the
snaps.
.
2. Install the two outboard bolts.
Loading Your Vehicle for
Off-Road Driving
{ WARNING
.
.
Cargo on the load floor piled
higher than the seatbacks
can be thrown forward during
a sudden stop. You or your
passengers could be injured.
Keep cargo below the top of
the seatbacks.
Unsecured cargo on the load
floor can be tossed about
when driving over rough
terrain. You or your
passengers can be struck by
flying objects. Secure the
cargo properly.
(Continued)
Heavy loads on the roof raise
the vehicle's center of gravity,
making it more likely to roll
over. You can be seriously or
fatally injured if the vehicle
rolls over. Put heavy loads
inside the cargo area, not on
the roof. Keep cargo in the
cargo area as far forward and
low as possible.
There are some important things to
remember about how to load your
vehicle.
.
.
The heaviest things should be
on the floor, forward of the rear
axle. Put heavier items as far
forward as you can.
Be sure the load is properly
secured, so things are not
tossed around.
You will find other important
information under Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑22 and Tires on
page 10‑46.
Environmental Concerns
Off-road driving can provide
wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises
environmental concerns. We
recognize these concerns and urge
every off-roader to follow these
basic rules for protecting the
environment:
.
Always use established trails,
roads, and areas that have been
specially set aside for public
off-road recreational driving and
obey all posted regulations.
.
Avoid any driving practice that
could damage shrubs, flowers,
trees, or grasses or disturb
wildlife. This includes
wheel-spinning, breaking down
trees, or unnecessary driving
through streams or over soft
ground.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (9,1)
Driving and Operating
.
Always carry a litter bag and
make sure all refuse is removed
from any campsite before
leaving.
.
Take extreme care with open
fires (where permitted), camp
stoves, and lanterns.
.
Never park your vehicle over
dry grass or other combustible
materials that could catch fire
from the heat of the vehicle's
exhaust system.
Traveling to Remote Areas
It makes sense to plan your trip,
especially when going to a remote
area. Know the terrain and plan
your route. Get accurate maps of
trails and terrain. Check to see if
there are any blocked or closed
roads.
It is also a good idea to travel with
at least one other vehicle in case
something happens to one of them.
9-9
For vehicles with a winch, be sure
to read the winch instructions. In a
remote area, a winch can be handy
if you get stuck but you will want to
know how to use it properly.
Controlling the vehicle is the key to
successful off-road driving. One of
the best ways to control the vehicle
is to control the speed. At higher
speeds:
Getting Familiar with Off-Road
Driving
.
You approach things faster and
have less time to react.
.
There is less time to scan the
terrain for obstacles.
.
The vehicle has more bounce
when driving over obstacles.
.
More braking distance is
needed, especially on an
unpaved surface.
It is a good idea to practice in an
area that is safe and close to home
before you go into the wilderness.
Off-roading requires some new and
different skills.
Tune your senses to different kinds
of signals. Your eyes need to
constantly sweep the terrain for
unexpected obstacles. Your ears
need to listen for unusual tire or
engine sounds. Use your arms,
hands, feet, and body to respond
to vibrations and vehicle bounce.
{ WARNING
When you are driving off-road,
bouncing and quick changes in
direction can easily throw you out
of position. This could cause you
to lose control and crash. So,
whether you are driving on or
off the road, you and your
passengers should wear safety
belts.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-10
Black plate (10,1)
Driving and Operating
Scanning the Terrain
Some things to consider:
Off-road driving can take you over
many different kinds of terrain. Be
familiar with the terrain and its many
different features.
.
Is the path ahead clear?
.
Will the surface texture change
abruptly up ahead?
.
Does the travel take you uphill or
downhill?
.
Will you have to stop suddenly
or change direction quickly?
Surface Conditions: Off-roading
surfaces can be hard-packed dirt,
gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud,
snow, or ice. Each of these surfaces
affects the vehicle's steering,
acceleration, and braking in different
ways. Depending on the surface,
slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
delayed acceleration, poor traction,
and longer braking distances can
occur.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or
hidden obstacles can be hazardous.
A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump can
startle you if you are not prepared
for them. Often these obstacles are
hidden by grass, bushes, snow,
or even the rise and fall of the
terrain itself.
When driving over obstacles or
rough terrain, keep a firm grip on
the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs,
or other surface features can jerk
the wheel out of your hands.
When driving over bumps, rocks,
or other obstacles, the wheels can
leave the ground. If this happens,
even with one or two wheels, you
cannot control the vehicle as well or
at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved
surface, it is especially important to
avoid sudden acceleration, sudden
turns, or sudden braking.
Off-roading requires a different kind
of alertness from driving on paved
roads and highways. There are no
road signs, posted speed limits,
or signal lights. Use good judgment
about what is safe and what is not.
Driving on Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up,
down, or across a hill. Driving safely
on hills requires good judgment and
an understanding of what the
vehicle can and cannot do. There
are some hills that simply cannot be
driven, no matter how well built the
vehicle.
{ WARNING
Many hills are simply too steep
for any vehicle. If you drive up
them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you cannot control
your speed. If you drive across
them, you will roll over. You could
(Continued)
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (11,1)
Driving and Operating
WARNING (Continued)
be seriously injured or killed.
If you have any doubt about the
steepness, do not drive the hill.
Consider this as you approach a hill:
.
Is there a constant incline,
or does the hill get sharply
steeper in places?
.
Is there good traction on the
hillside, or will the surface cause
tire slipping?
Approaching a Hill
When you approach a hill, decide if
it is too steep to climb, descend,
or cross. Steepness can be hard to
judge. On a very small hill, for
example, there may be a smooth,
constant incline with only a small
change in elevation where you can
easily see all the way to the top.
On a large hill, the incline may get
steeper as you near the top, but you
might not see this because the crest
of the hill is hidden by bushes,
grass, or shrubs.
.
Is there a straight path up or
down the hill so you will not
have to make turning
maneuvers?
.
Are there obstructions on the hill
that can block your path, such
as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?
.
What is beyond the hill? Is there
a cliff, an embankment, a
drop-off, a fence? Get out and
walk the hill if you do not know.
It is the smart way to find out.
.
Is the hill simply too rough?
Steep hills often have ruts,
gullies, troughs, and exposed
rocks because they are more
susceptible to the effects of
erosion.
9-11
Driving Uphill
Once you decide it is safe to drive
up the hill:
.
Use a low gear and get a firm
grip on the steering wheel.
.
Get a smooth start up the hill
and try to maintain speed. Not
using more power than needed
can avoid spinning the wheels or
sliding.
{ WARNING
Turning or driving across steep
hills can be dangerous. You could
lose traction, slide sideways, and
possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When
driving up hills, always try to go
straight up.
.
Try to drive straight up the hill if
at all possible. If the path twists
and turns, you might want to find
another route.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-12
Driving and Operating
.
Ease up on the speed as you
approach the top of the hill.
.
Attach a flag to the vehicle to be
more visible to approaching
traffic on trails or hills.
.
.
Black plate (12,1)
Sound the horn as you approach
the top of the hill to let opposing
traffic know you are there.
If the vehicle stalls, or is about to
stall, and you cannot make it up
the hill:
.
Push the brake pedal to stop the
vehicle and keep it from rolling
backwards and apply the
parking brake.
.
If the engine is still running, shift
the transmission to R (Reverse),
release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in
R (Reverse).
.
If the engine has stopped
running, you need to restart it.
With the brake pedal pressed
and the parking brake still
applied, shift the transmission to
P (Park) and restart the engine.
Then, shift to R (Reverse),
release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill as
straight as possible in
R (Reverse).
Use headlamps even during the
day to make the vehicle more
visible to oncoming traffic.
{ WARNING
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill
at full speed can cause an
accident. There could be a
drop-off, embankment, cliff,
or even another vehicle. You
could be seriously injured or
killed. As you near the top of a
hill, slow down and stay alert.
.
While backing down the hill, put
your left hand on the steering
wheel at the 12 o'clock position
so you can tell if the wheels are
straight and can maneuver as
you back down. It is best to back
down the hill with the wheels
straight rather than in the left or
right direction. Turning the wheel
too far to the left or right will
increase the possibility of a
rollover.
Things not to do if the vehicle stalls,
or is about to stall, when going up
a hill:
.
Never attempt to prevent a stall
by shifting into N (Neutral) to
rev-up the engine and regain
forward momentum. This will
not work. The vehicle can roll
backward very quickly and could
go out of control.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (13,1)
Driving and Operating
.
Never try to turn around if about
to stall when going up a hill.
If the hill is steep enough to stall
the vehicle, it is steep enough to
cause it to roll over. If you
cannot make it up the hill, back
straight down the hill.
If, after stalling, you try to back
down the hill and decide you just
cannot do it, set the parking brake,
put your transmission in P (Park),
and turn off the engine. Leave the
vehicle and go get some help. Exit
on the uphill side and stay clear of
the path the vehicle would take if it
rolled downhill. If the vehicle has a
transfer case with a N (Neutral)
position, do not shift the transfer
case to Neutral when you leave the
vehicle. Leave it in some gear.
{ WARNING
If the vehicle has the two‐speed
automatic transfer case, shifting
the transfer case to Neutral can
cause your vehicle to roll even if
the transmission is in P (Park).
This is because the Neutral
position on the transfer case
overrides the transmission. You or
someone else could be injured.
If you are going to leave your
vehicle, set the parking brake and
shift the transmission to P (Park).
But, if the vehicle has a
two‐speed automatic transfer
case, do not shift the transfer
case to Neutral.
9-13
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you
downhill, consider:
.
How steep is the downhill? Will I
be able to maintain vehicle
control?
.
What is the surface like?
Smooth? Rough? Slippery?
Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
.
Are there hidden surface
obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
.
What is at the bottom of the hill?
Is there a hidden creek bank or
even a river bottom with large
rocks?
If you decide you can go down a
hill safely, try to keep the vehicle
headed straight down. Use a low
gear so engine drag can help the
brakes so they do not have to do all
the work. Descend slowly, keeping
the vehicle under control at all
times.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-14
Driving and Operating
{ WARNING
Heavy braking when going down
a hill can cause your brakes to
overheat and fade. This could
cause loss of control and a
serious accident. Apply the
brakes lightly when descending a
hill and use a low gear to keep
vehicle speed under control.
Things not to do when driving down
a hill:
.
Black plate (14,1)
When driving downhill, avoid
turns that take you across the
incline of the hill. A hill that is not
too steep to drive down might be
too steep to drive across. The
vehicle could roll over.
.
Never go downhill with the
transmission in N (Neutral),
called free-wheeling. The brakes
will have to do all the work and
could overheat and fade.
Vehicles are much more likely to
stall when going uphill, but if it
happens when going downhill:
Driving Across an Incline
An off-road trail will probably go
across the incline of a hill. To decide
whether to try to drive across the
incline, consider the following:
{ WARNING
1. Stop the vehicle by applying the
regular brakes and apply the
parking brake.
Driving across an incline that is
too steep will make your vehicle
roll over. You could be seriously
injured or killed. If you have any
doubt about the steepness of the
incline, do not drive across it.
Find another route instead.
2. Shift to P (Park) and, while still
braking, restart the engine.
3. Shift back to a low gear, release
the parking brake, and drive
straight down.
4. If the engine will not start, get
out and get help.
.
A hill that can be driven straight
up or down might be too steep to
drive across. When going
straight up or down a hill, the
length of the wheel base — the
distance from the front wheels to
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (15,1)
Driving and Operating
the rear wheels — reduces the
likelihood the vehicle will tumble
end over end. But when driving
across an incline, the narrower
track width — the distance
between the left and right
wheels — might not prevent the
vehicle from tilting and rolling
over. Driving across an incline
puts more weight on the downhill
wheels which could cause a
downhill slide or a rollover.
.
Surface conditions can be a
problem. Loose gravel, muddy
spots, or even wet grass can
cause the tires to slip sideways,
downhill. If the vehicle slips
sideways, it can hit something
that will trip it — a rock, a rut,
etc. — and roll over.
.
Hidden obstacles can make the
steepness of the incline even
worse. If you drive across a rock
with the uphill wheels, or if the
downhill wheels drop into a rut
or depression, the vehicle can tilt
even more.
For these reasons, carefully
consider whether to try to drive
across an incline. Just because the
trail goes across the incline does
not mean you have to drive it.
The last vehicle to try it might
have rolled over.
If you feel the vehicle starting to
slide sideways, turn downhill. This
should help straighten out the
vehicle and prevent the side
slipping. The best way to prevent
this is to “walk the course” first, so
you know what the surface is like
before driving it.
9-15
Stalling on an Incline
{ WARNING
Getting out on the downhill (low)
side of a vehicle stopped across
an incline is dangerous. If the
vehicle rolls over, you could be
crushed or killed. Always get out
on the uphill (high) side of the
vehicle and stay well clear of the
rollover path.
If the vehicle stalls when crossing
an incline, be sure you, and any
passengers, get out on the uphill
side, even if the door there is harder
to open. If you get out on the
downhill side and the vehicle starts
to roll over, you will be right in
its path.
If you have to walk down the slope,
stay out of the path the vehicle will
take if it does roll over.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-16
Black plate (16,1)
Driving and Operating
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow,
or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow,
or sand, the wheels do not get good
traction. Acceleration is not as
quick, turning is more difficult, and
braking distances are longer.
It is best to use a low gear when in
mud — the deeper the mud, the
lower the gear. In really deep mud,
keep the vehicle moving so it does
not get stuck.
When driving on sand, wheel
traction changes. On loosely packed
sand, such as on beaches or sand
dunes, the tires will tend to sink into
the sand. This affects steering,
accelerating, and braking. Drive at a
reduced speed and avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Hard packed snow and ice offer
the worst tire traction. On these
surfaces, it is very easy to lose
control. On wet ice, for example, the
traction is so poor that you will have
difficulty accelerating. And, if the
vehicle does get moving, poor
steering and difficult braking can
cause it to slide out of control.
{ WARNING
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,
or rivers can be dangerous.
Underwater springs, currents
under the ice, or sudden thaws
can weaken the ice. Your vehicle
could fall through the ice and you
and your passengers could
drown. Drive your vehicle on safe
surfaces only.
Driving in Water
{ WARNING
Driving through rushing water can
be dangerous. Deep water can
sweep your vehicle downstream
and you and your passengers
could drown. If it is only shallow
water, it can still wash away the
ground from under your tires, and
you could lose traction and roll
the vehicle over. Do not drive
through rushing water.
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding,
and flood waters demand extreme
caution.
Find out how deep the water is
before driving through it. Do not try
it if it is deep enough to cover the
wheel hubs, axles, or exhaust
pipe — you probably will not get
through. Deep water can damage
the axle and other vehicle parts.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (17,1)
Driving and Operating
If the water is not too deep, drive
slowly through it. At faster speeds,
water splashes on the ignition
system and the vehicle can stall.
Stalling can also occur if you get the
tailpipe under water. If the tailpipe is
under water, you will never be able
to start the engine. When going
through water, remember that when
the brakes get wet, it might take
longer to stop. See Driving on Wet
Roads on page 9‑17.
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that
has collected on the underbody,
chassis, or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand,
have the brake linings cleaned and
checked. These substances can
cause glazing and uneven braking.
Check the body structure, steering,
suspension, wheels, tires, and
exhaust system for damage and
check the fuel lines and cooling
system for any leakage.
The vehicle requires more frequent
service due to off-road use. Refer to
the Maintenance Schedule for
additional information.
Driving on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can reduce
vehicle traction and affect your
ability to stop and accelerate.
Always drive slower in these types
of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and
deep‐standing or flowing water.
{ WARNING
Wet brakes can cause crashes.
They might not work as well in a
quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
9-17
WARNING (Continued)
After driving through a large
puddle of water or a car/vehicle
wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work
normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates
strong forces. Driving through
flowing water could cause the
vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be
very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-18
Black plate (18,1)
Driving and Operating
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
can build up under the vehicle's
tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is
wet enough and you are going fast
enough. When the vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no
contact with the road.
There is no hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
slow down when the road is wet.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet
weather driving tips include:
.
Keep the windshield washer
fluid reservoir filled.
Hill and Mountain Roads
.
Have good tires with proper
tread depth. See Tires on
page 10‑46.
.
Turn off cruise control.
Driving on steep hills or through
mountains is different than driving
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
driving in these conditions include:
Highway Hypnosis
Always be alert and pay attention to
your surroundings while driving.
If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park the vehicle
and rest.
Other driving tips include:
.
Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
.
Allow extra following distance.
.
Keep interior temperature cool.
.
Pass with caution.
.
.
Keep windshield wiping
equipment in good shape.
Keep your eyes moving — scan
the road ahead and to the sides.
.
Check the rearview mirror and
vehicle instruments often.
.
Keep the vehicle serviced and in
good shape.
.
Check all fluid levels and brakes,
tires, cooling system, and
transmission.
.
Shift to a lower gear when going
down steep or long hills.
{ WARNING
If you do not shift down, the
brakes could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would
then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (19,1)
Driving and Operating
{ WARNING
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
or with the ignition off is
dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down
and they could get so hot that
they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or
even none going down a hill. You
could crash. Always have the
engine running and the vehicle in
gear when going downhill.
.
.
Stay in your own lane. Do not
swing wide or cut across the
center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your
own lane.
Top of hills: Be alert —
something could be in your lane
(stalled car, accident).
.
Pay attention to special road
signs (falling rocks area, winding
roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take
appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow
or ice between the tires and the
road, creating less traction or grip.
Wet ice can occur at about 0°C
(32°F) when freezing rain begins to
fall, resulting in even less traction.
Avoid driving on wet ice or in
freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
Drive with caution, whatever the
condition. Accelerate gently so
traction is not lost. Accelerating too
quickly causes the wheels to spin
and makes the surface under the
tires slick, so there is even less
traction.
9-19
Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive
wheels will spin and polish the
surface under the tires even more.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 9‑50 improves vehicle
stability during hard stops on
slippery roads, but apply the brakes
sooner than when on dry pavement.
Allow greater following distance on
any slippery road and watch for
slippery spots. Icy patches can
occur on otherwise clear roads in
shaded areas. The surface of a
curve or an overpass can remain icy
when the surrounding roads are
clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while
on ice.
Turn off cruise control on slippery
surfaces.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-20
Black plate (20,1)
Driving and Operating
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be a
serious situation. Stay with the
vehicle unless there is help nearby.
If possible, use the Roadside
Assistance Program (U.S. and
Canada) on page 13‑7 or Roadside
Assistance Program (Mexico) on
page 13‑9. To get help and keep
everyone in the vehicle safe:
.
.
Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
WARNING (Continued)
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
.
.
Check again from time to
time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
.
Open a window about 5 cm
(2 in) on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
.
Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
.
Adjust the climate control
system to a setting that
circulates the air inside the
vehicle and set the fan speed
to the highest setting. See
Climate Control System in the
Index.
(Continued)
Tie a red cloth to an outside
mirror.
{ WARNING
Snow can trap engine exhaust
under the vehicle. This may
cause exhaust gases to get
inside. Engine exhaust contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can
cause unconsciousness and even
death.
(Continued)
Clear away snow from around
the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
WARNING (Continued)
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑35.
Snow can trap exhaust gases
under your vehicle. This can
cause deadly CO (Carbon
Monoxide) gas to get inside. CO
could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so
you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking the
exhaust.
Run the engine for short periods
only as needed to keep warm, but
be careful.
To save fuel, run the engine for only
short periods as needed to warm
the vehicle and then shut the engine
off and close the window most of
the way to save heat. Repeat this
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (21,1)
Driving and Operating
until help arrives but only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the
cold. Moving about to keep warm
also helps.
If it takes some time for help to
arrive, now and then when you run
the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine runs
faster than the idle speed. This
keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help
with the headlamps. Do this as little
as possible to save fuel.
If the Vehicle is Stuck
Slowly and cautiously spin the
wheels to free the vehicle when
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
If the vehicle has a traction system,
it can often help to free a stuck
vehicle. Refer to the vehicle's
traction system in the Index. If stuck
too severely for the traction system
to free the vehicle, turn the traction
system off and use the rocking
method.
{ WARNING
If the vehicle's tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you
or others could be injured. The
vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little
as possible and avoid going
above 55 km/h (35 mph).
For information about using tire
chains on the vehicle, see Tire
Chains on page 10‑66.
Rocking the Vehicle to Get
it Out
Turn the steering wheel left and
right to clear the area around the
front wheels. For four-wheel-drive
vehicles, shift into Four‐Wheel High
or, if the vehicle has a two‐speed
automatic transfer case, Four‐Wheel
Low. For vehicles with StabiliTrak®,
9-21
turn the traction control part of the
system off. Shift back and forth
between R (Reverse) and a forward
gear, spinning the wheels as little as
possible. To prevent transmission
wear, wait until the wheels stop
spinning before shifting gears.
Release the accelerator pedal while
shifting, and press lightly on the
accelerator pedal when the
transmission is in gear. Slowly
spinning the wheels in the forward
and reverse directions causes a
rocking motion that could free the
vehicle. If that does not get the
vehicle out after a few tries, it might
need to be towed out. Recovery
hooks can be used, if the vehicle
has them. If the vehicle does need
to be towed out, see Towing the
Vehicle on page 10‑87.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-22
Black plate (22,1)
Driving and Operating
vehicle capacity weight and
includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all
nonfactory-installed options.
Two labels on your vehicle
show how much weight it was
designed to carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and
the Certification/Tire label.
Recovery Hooks
{ WARNING
These hooks, when used, are
under a lot of force. Always pull
the vehicle straight out. Never pull
on the hooks at a sideways angle.
The hooks could break off and
you or others could be injured
from the chain or cable
snapping back.
{ WARNING
Notice: Never use recovery
hooks to tow the vehicle. Your
vehicle could be damaged and it
would not be covered by
warranty.
For vehicles with recovery hooks at
the front of the vehicle, you can use
them if you are stuck off-road and
need to be pulled to some place
where you can continue driving.
Vehicle Load Limits
It is very important to know how
much weight your vehicle can
carry. This weight is called the
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), or either the
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
This can cause systems to
break and change the way the
vehicle handles. This could
cause loss of control and a
crash. Overloading can also
shorten the life of the vehicle.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (23,1)
Driving and Operating
Tire and Loading Information
Label
the number of occupant seating
positions (A), and the maximum
vehicle capacity weight (B) in
kilograms and pounds.
The Tire and Loading
Information label also shows the
size of the original equipment
tires (C) and the recommended
cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires
and inflation see Tires on
page 10‑46 and Tire Pressure on
page 10‑53.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
attached to the center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver door
open, you will find the label
attached below the door lock
post (striker). The tire and
loading information label shows
There is also important loading
information on the vehicle
Certification/Tire label. It tells
you the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for
the front and rear axles. See
“Certification/Tire Label” later in
this section.
9-23
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The
combined weight of
occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on your vehicle's
placard.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-24
Black plate (24,1)
Driving and Operating
4. The resulting figure equals
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs and
there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750
(5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing
a trailer, the load from your
trailer will be transferred to
your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo
and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle. SeeTrailer
Towing on page 9‑77 for
important information on
towing a trailer, towing safety
rules and trailering tips.
Example 1
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 1 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg
(300 lbs)
C. Available Occupant and Cargo
Weight = 317 kg (700 lbs)
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (25,1)
Driving and Operating
9-25
The combined weight of the
driver, passengers, and cargo
should never exceed your
vehicle's capacity weight.
Certification/Tire Label
Example 2
Example 3
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 2 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 3 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 136 kg
(750 lbs)
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs)
C. Available Cargo Weight =
113 kg (250 lbs)
C. Available Cargo Weight =
0 kg (0 lbs)
Refer to your vehicle's tire and
loading information label for
specific information about
your vehicle's capacity weight
and seating positions.
A vehicle specific Certification/
Tire label is found on the rear
edge of the driver door. The
label shows the size of your
vehicle's original tires and the
inflation pressures needed to
obtain the gross weight capacity
of your vehicle. This is called
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-26
Black plate (26,1)
Driving and Operating
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes
the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel, and cargo.
The Certification/Tire label also
tells you the maximum weights
for the front and rear axles,
called Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR). To find out the actual
loads on your front and rear
axles, you need to go to a weigh
station and weigh your vehicle.
Your dealer can help you with
this. Be sure to spread out your
load equally on both sides of the
centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for
your vehicle, or the GAWR for
either the front or rear axle.
The Certification/Tire label also
contains information about your
Front Axle Reserve Capacity.
And, if you do have a heavy
load, you should spread it out.
{ WARNING
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), or either the
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
This can cause systems to
break and change the way the
vehicle handles. This could
cause loss of control and a
crash. Overloading can also
shorten the life of the vehicle.
Notice : Overloading the
vehicle may cause damage.
Repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Do
not overload the vehicle.
The label will help you decide
how much cargo and installed
equipment your truck can carry.
Using heavier suspension
components to get added
durability might not change your
weight ratings. Ask your dealer
to help you load your vehicle the
right way.
If you put things inside your
vehicle — like suitcases, tools,
packages, or anything
else — they go as fast as the
vehicle goes. If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a
crash, they will keep going.
{ WARNING
Things you put inside the
vehicle can strike and injure
people in a sudden stop or
turn, or in a crash.
.
Put things in the cargo
area of the vehicle. Try to
spread the weight evenly.
(Continued)
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (27,1)
Driving and Operating
WARNING (Continued)
.
.
.
.
Never stack heavier
things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above
the tops of the seats.
Do not leave an
unsecured child restraint
in the vehicle.
When you carry something
inside the vehicle, secure
it whenever you can.
Do not leave a seat folded
down unless you need to.
There is also important loading
information for off-road driving in
this manual. See “Loading Your
Vehicle for Off-Road Driving”
under Off-Road Driving on
page 9‑6.
Starting and
Operating
.
Avoid making hard stops for
the first 322 km (200 miles) or
so. During this time the new
brake linings are not yet
broken in. Hard stops with
new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this
breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake
linings.
.
Do not tow a trailer during
break-in. See Trailer Towing
on page 9‑77 for the trailer
towing capabilities of the
vehicle and more
information.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does not
need an elaborate break-in. But it
will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
.
.
Keep the vehicle speed at
88 km/h (55 mph) or less for
the first 805 km (500 miles).
Do not drive at any one
constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 805 km
(500 miles). Do not make
full-throttle starts. Avoid
downshifting to brake or
slow the vehicle.
9-27
Following break‐in, engine speed
and load can be gradually
increased.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-28
Black plate (28,1)
Driving and Operating
Adjustable Throttle and
Brake Pedal
On vehicles with this feature, you
can change the position of the
throttle and brake pedals.
No adjustment to the pedals can
be made when the vehicle is in
R (Reverse) or while using cruise
control.
Before you start driving, fully press
the brake pedal to confirm the
adjustment is right for you. While
driving, make only small
adjustments.
The vehicle may have a memory
function which lets pedal settings be
saved and recalled. See Power
Seat Adjustment on page 3‑4 for
more information.
Ignition Positions
To shift out of P (Park), the ignition
must be in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY and the regular brake
pedal must be applied.
A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/
LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is
stopped, turn the ignition switch to
LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
will remain active. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9‑32.
This position locks the ignition.
It also locks the transmission on
automatic transmission vehicles.
The key can be removed in
LOCK/OFF.
The control used to adjust the
pedals is located on the instrument
panel below the climate control
system.
Do not turn the engine off when the
vehicle is moving. This will cause a
loss of power assist in the brake
and steering systems and disable
the airbags.
Press the bottom of the control to
move the pedals closer. Press the
top of the control to move the
pedals away.
The ignition switch has four different
positions.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (29,1)
Driving and Operating
In an emergency:
1. Brake using a firm and steady
pressure. Do not pump the
brakes repeatedly. This may
deplete power assist, requiring
increased brake pedal force.
2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. This
can be done while the vehicle is
moving. After shifting to neutral,
firmly apply the brakes and steer
the vehicle to a safe location.
3. Come to a complete stop, shift
to P (Park), and turn the ignition
to LOCK/OFF. On vehicles with
an automatic transmission, the
shift lever must be in P (Park) to
turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake. See
Parking Brake on page 9‑51.
The steering can bind with the
wheels turned off center. If this
happens, move the steering wheel
from right to left while turning the
key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this
doesn't work, then the vehicle
needs service.
Notice: Using a tool to force the
key to turn in the ignition could
cause damage to the switch or
break the key. Use the correct
key, make sure it is all the way in,
and turn it only with your hand.
If the key cannot be turned by
hand, see your dealer.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This
position lets things like the radio
and the windshield wipers operate
while the engine is off. Use this
position if the vehicle must be
pushed or towed.
C (ON/RUN): This position can
be used to operate the electrical
accessories and to display some
instrument panel cluster warning
and indicator lights. The switch
stays in this position when the
engine is running. The transmission
is also unlocked in this position on
automatic transmission vehicles.
9-29
If you leave the key in the ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position
with the engine off, the battery could
be drained. You may not be able to
start the vehicle if the battery is
allowed to drain for an extended
period of time.
D (START): This is the position that
starts the engine. When the engine
starts, release the key. The ignition
switch returns to ON/RUN for
driving.
A warning tone will sound when
the driver door is opened and the
ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF, and the key is in the
ignition.
Starting the Engine
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
hybrid supplement for more
information.
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or
N (Neutral). The engine will not start
in any other position. To restart the
engine when the vehicle is already
moving, use N (Neutral) only.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-30
Black plate (30,1)
Driving and Operating
Notice: Do not try to shift to
P (Park) if the vehicle is moving.
If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park)
only when the vehicle is stopped.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition to START.
When the engine starts, let go of
the key. The idle speed will go
down as the engine warms. Do
not race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently
to allow the oil to warm up and
lubricate all moving parts.
The vehicle has a
Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in
starting the engine and protects
components. If the ignition key is
turned to the START position,
and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the
engine will continue cranking
for a few seconds or until the
vehicle starts. If the engine does
not start and the key is held in
START, cranking will be stopped
after 15 seconds to prevent
cranking motor damage. To
prevent gear damage, this
system also prevents cranking if
the engine is already running.
Engine cranking can be stopped
by turning the ignition switch to
the ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF position.
When the Low Fuel warning
lamp is on and the FUEL LEVEL
LOW message is displayed in
the Driver Information Center
(DIC), the Computer‐Controlled
Cranking System is disabled to
prevent possible vehicle
component damage. When this
happens, hold the ignition switch
in the START position to
continue engine cranking.
Notice: Cranking the engine for
long periods of time, by returning
the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has
ended, can overheat and damage
the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
between each try, to let the
cranking motor cool down.
2. If the engine does not start after
5‐10 seconds, especially in very
cold weather (below −18°C
or 0°F), it could be flooded with
too much gasoline. Try pushing
the accelerator pedal all the way
to the floor and holding it there
as you hold the key in START
for up to a maximum of
15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to
allow the cranking motor to cool
down. When the engine starts,
let go of the key and accelerator.
If the vehicle starts briefly but
then stops again, repeat these
steps. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine. Do not
race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently
until the oil warms up and
lubricates all moving parts.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (31,1)
Driving and Operating
Notice: The engine is designed to
work with the electronics in the
vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change
the way the engine operates.
Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your
dealer. If you do not, the engine
might not perform properly. Any
resulting damage would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Engine Heater
The engine coolant heater can
provide easier starting and better
fuel economy during engine
warm-up in cold weather conditions
at or below −18°C (0°F). Vehicles
with an engine heater should be
plugged in at least four hours before
starting. An internal thermostat in
the plug-end of the cord may exist
which will prevent engine coolant
heater operation at temperatures
above −18°C (0°F).
To Use the Engine Coolant
Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the
electrical cord. The cord is
secured to the Engine
Compartment Fuse Block with a
clip. Carefully remove the wire
tie which secures the electrical
cord. Do not cut the
electrical cord.
3. Plug the cord into a normal,
grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
{ WARNING
Plugging the cord into an
ungrounded outlet could cause an
electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could
overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug
the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
(Continued)
9-31
WARNING (Continued)
If the cord will not reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension
cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be
sure to unplug and store the
cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts.
If you do not, it could be
damaged.
The length of time the heater should
remain plugged in depends on
several factors. Ask a dealer in the
area where you will be parking the
vehicle for the best advice on this.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-32
Black plate (32,1)
Driving and Operating
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP)
The following vehicle accessories
can be used for up to 10 minutes
after the engine is turned off:
.
Audio System
.
Power Windows
.
OnStar System (if equipped)
.
Sunroof (if equipped)
These features work when the
key is in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY. Once the key is
turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,
the windows and sunroof continue
to work up to 10 minutes until any
door is opened. The radio continues
to work for up to 10 minutes or until
the driver door is opened.
Shifting Into Park
{ WARNING
It can be dangerous to get out of
the vehicle if the shift lever is not
fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine
running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure the vehicle will
not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, use the steps
that follow. If you have a
four-wheel drive transfer case
with a N (Neutral) position, and
the transfer case is in N (Neutral),
the vehicle will be free to roll,
even if the shift lever is in
P (Park). So, be sure the transfer
case is in a drive gear — not in
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
N (Neutral). If you are pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9‑73.
Always set the parking brake.
1. Hold the brake pedal down, then
set the parking brake.
See Parking Brake on page 9‑51
for more information.
2. Move the shift lever into the
P (Park) position by pulling the
shift lever toward you and
moving it up as far as it will go.
3. Be sure the transfer case is in a
drive gear — not in N (Neutral).
4. Turn the ignition key to
LOCK/OFF.
5. Remove the key and take it with
you. If you can leave the vehicle
with the ignition key in your
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (33,1)
Driving and Operating
Leaving the Vehicle With the
Engine Running
{ WARNING
It can be dangerous to leave the
vehicle with the engine running.
The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in
P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set.
If you have four-wheel drive and
the transfer case is in N (Neutral),
the vehicle will be free to roll,
even if the shift lever is in
P (Park). So be sure the transfer
case is in a drive gear — not in
N (Neutral).
And, if you leave the vehicle with
the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire. You
or others could be injured. Do not
leave the vehicle with the engine
running unless you have to.
If you have to leave the vehicle with
the engine running, be sure your
vehicle is in P (Park) and the
parking brake is firmly set before
you leave it. After you move the shift
lever into P (Park), hold the regular
brake pedal down. Then, see if you
can move the shift lever away from
P (Park) without first pulling it toward
you. If you can, it means that the
shift lever was not fully locked into
P (Park).
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you
do not shift your transmission into
P (Park) properly, the weight of
the vehicle may put too much
force on the parking pawl in the
transmission. You may find it difficult
to pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
9-33
This is called torque lock. To
prevent torque lock, set the parking
brake and then shift into P (Park)
properly before you leave the driver
seat. To find out how, see Shifting
Into Park on page 9‑32.
When you are ready to drive, move
the shift lever out of P (Park) before
you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may
need to have another vehicle push
yours a little uphill to take some of
the pressure from the parking pawl
in the transmission, then you will be
able to pull the shift lever out of
P (Park).
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-34
Driving and Operating
Shifting Out of Park
This vehicle is equipped with an
electronic shift lock release system.
The shift lock release is
designed to:
.
.
Black plate (34,1)
Prevent ignition key removal
unless the shift lever is in
P (Park) with the shift lever
button fully released.
Prevent movement of the shift
lever out of P (Park), unless the
ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY and the regular
brake pedal is applied.
The shift lock release is always
functional except in the case of an
uncharged or low voltage (less than
9 volt) battery.
If the vehicle has an uncharged
battery or a battery with low voltage,
try charging or jump starting the
battery. See Jump Starting on
page 10‑83 for more information.
To shift out of P (Park) use the
following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.
Parking Over Things
That Burn
{ WARNING
1. Ease the pressure on the shift
lever.
Things that can burn could touch
hot exhaust parts under the
vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass,
or other things that can burn.
2. While holding down the brake
pedal, press the shift lever all
the way into P (Park).
Active Fuel Management®
If you still are unable to shift out of
P (Park):
3. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.
If you are still having a problem
shifting, then have the vehicle
serviced soon.
Vehicles with V8 engines may have
Active Fuel Management™. This
system allows the engine to operate
on either all or half of its cylinders,
depending on the driving conditions.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (35,1)
Driving and Operating
When less power is required, such
as cruising at a constant vehicle
speed, the system will operate in
the half cylinder mode, allowing the
vehicle to achieve better fuel
economy. When greater power
demands are required, such as
accelerating from a stop, passing,
or merging onto a freeway, the
system will maintain full-cylinder
operation.
If the vehicle has an Active Fuel
Management™ indicator, see Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑27 for more information on
using this display.
Engine Exhaust
{ WARNING
Engine exhaust contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and
even death.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
.
The vehicle idles in areas
with poor ventilation (parking
garages, tunnels, deep snow
that may block underbody
airflow or tail pipes).
.
The exhaust smells or
sounds strange or different.
.
The exhaust system leaks
due to corrosion or damage.
.
The vehicle exhaust system
has been modified, damaged
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
9-35
WARNING (Continued)
.
There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
damage or after market
modifications that are not
completely sealed.
If unusual fumes are detected or
if it is suspected that exhaust is
coming into the vehicle:
.
Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
.
Have the vehicle repaired
immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed
area such as a garage or a
building that has no fresh air
ventilation.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-36
Black plate (36,1)
Driving and Operating
Running the Vehicle
While Parked
It is better not to park with the
engine running. But if you ever have
to, here are some things to know.
{ WARNING
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
area with poor ventilation is
dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death. Never run the
engine in an enclosed area that
has no fresh air ventilation. For
more information, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑35.
{ WARNING
{ WARNING
It can be dangerous to get out
of the vehicle if the automatic
transmission shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when
the engine is running unless you
have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
If the vehicle has a four-wheel
drive transfer case with a
N (Neutral) position, and the
transfer case is in N (Neutral),
the vehicle may roll, even if the
automatic transmission shift
lever is in P (Park). So, be sure
the transfer case is in a drive
gear — not in N (Neutral). Always
set the parking brake.
Follow the proper steps to be sure
the vehicle will not move. See
Shifting Into Park on page 9‑32.
If parking on a hill and pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9‑73.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (37,1)
Driving and Operating
Automatic
Transmission
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
hybrid supplement for more
information.
If the vehicle is has an automatic
transmission, it has an electronic
shift position indicator within the
instrument panel cluster. This
display comes on when the ignition
key is turned to the ON/RUN
position.
There are several different positions
for the shift lever.
Heavy Duty 6-Speed Automatic
Transmission Shown (Light
Duty Similar)
See “Range Selection Mode” under
Manual Mode on page 9‑40.
P (Park): This position locks the
rear wheels. It is the best position
to use when starting the engine
because the vehicle cannot move
easily. When parked on a hill,
especially when the vehicle has a
heavy load, you might notice an
increase in the effort to shift out of
P (Park). See “Torque Lock” under
Shifting Into Park on page 9‑32 for
more information.
{ WARNING
It is dangerous to get out of the
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you
have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
(Continued)
9-37
WARNING (Continued)
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
See Shifting Into Park on
page 9‑32. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9‑73.
{ WARNING
If the vehicle has a four-wheel
drive transfer case with a
N (Neutral) position, and the
transfer case is in N (Neutral), the
vehicle will be free to roll — even
if the shift lever is in P (Park). Be
sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear, Two-Wheel Drive High or
Four-Wheel Drive High or
Four-Wheel Drive Low — not in
N (Neutral). See Shifting Into Park
on page 9‑32. Always set the
parking brake.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-38
Black plate (38,1)
Driving and Operating
R (Reverse): Use this gear to
back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving
forward could damage the
transmission. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
after the vehicle is stopped.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to
get out of snow, ice, or sand without
damaging the transmission, see If
the Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑21.
N (Neutral): In this position, the
engine does not connect with the
wheels. To restart the engine when
the vehicle is already moving, use
N (Neutral) only. Also, use
N (Neutral) when the vehicle is
being towed.
{ WARNING
Shifting into a drive gear while the
engine is running at high speed is
dangerous. Unless your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could move very rapidly.
You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift
into a drive gear while the engine
is running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or
N (Neutral) with the engine
running at high speed may
damage the transmission. The
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the
engine is not running at high
speed when shifting the vehicle.
D (Drive): This position is for
normal driving. It provides the best
fuel economy. If you need more
power for passing, and you are:
.
Going less than about 55 km/h
(35 mph), push the accelerator
pedal about halfway down.
.
Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) or
more, push the accelerator all
the way down.
By doing this, the vehicle shifts
down to the next gear and has
more power.
D (Drive) can be used when towing
a trailer, carrying a heavy load,
driving on steep hills, or for off-road
driving. You might want to shift the
transmission to a lower gear
selection if the transmission shifts
too often.
Downshifting the transmission in
slippery road conditions could result
in skidding. See “Skidding” under
Loss of Control on page 9‑6.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (39,1)
Driving and Operating
The vehicle has a shift stabilization
feature that adjusts the transmission
shifting to the current driving
conditions in order to reduce rapid
upshifts and downshifts. This shift
stabilization feature is designed to
determine, before making an
upshift, if the engine is able to
maintain vehicle speed by analyzing
things such as vehicle speed,
throttle position, and vehicle load.
If the shift stabilization feature
determines that a current vehicle
speed cannot be maintained, the
transmission does not upshift and
instead holds the current gear. In
some cases, this could appear to
be a delayed shift, however the
transmission is operating normally.
The vehicle's transmission uses
adaptive shift controls. Adaptive
shift controls continually compares
key shift parameters to
pre-programmed ideal shifts stored
in the transmissions computer.
The transmission constantly makes
adjustments to improve vehicle
performance according to how the
vehicle is being used, such as
with a heavy load or when the
temperature changes. During this
adaptive shift control process,
shifting might feel different as the
transmission determines the best
settings.
When temperatures are very cold,
shifting could be delayed providing
more stable shifts until the engine
warms up. Shifts could be more
noticeable with a cold transmission.
This difference in shifting is normal.
M (Manual Mode): This position
lets drivers select the range of gears
appropriate for current driving
conditions. If the vehicle has this
feature, see “Range Selection
Mode” under Manual Mode on
page 9‑40.
9-39
3 (Third): This position is also used
for normal driving. It reduces vehicle
speed more than D (Drive) without
using the brakes. You might choose
3 (Third) instead of D (Drive) when
driving on hilly, winding roads, when
towing a trailer, so there is less
shifting between gears and when
going down a steep hill.
2 (Second): This position reduces
vehicle speed even more than
3 (Third) without using the brakes.
You can use 2 (Second) on hills.
It can help control vehicle speed as
you go down steep mountain roads,
but then you would also want to use
the brakes off and on.
If you manually select 2 (Second) in
an automatic transmission, the
transmission will start in
second gear. You can use this
feature for reducing the speed of the
rear wheels when you are trying to
start the vehicle from a stop on
slippery road surfaces.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-40
Black plate (40,1)
Driving and Operating
1 (First): This position reduces
vehicle speed without using the
brakes. You can use it for major/
severe downgrades and off-road
driving where the vehicle would
otherwise accelerate due to
steepness of grade. When you shift
to 1 (First) it provides the lowest
gear appropriate to the vehicle's
current road speed and continues to
downshift as the vehicle slows,
eventually downshifting to
1 (First) gear.
Manual Mode
To use this feature, do the following:
Range Selection Mode
(Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed
Transmission)
1. Move the shift lever to
M (Manual Mode).
Notice: Spinning the tires or
holding the vehicle in one place
on a hill using only the
accelerator pedal may damage
the transmission. The repair will
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. If you are stuck, do not
spin the tires. When stopping on
a hill, use the brakes to hold the
vehicle in place.
The vehicle may have a Range
Selection Mode. The Range
Selection Mode helps control the
vehicle's transmission and vehicle
speed while driving down hill or
towing a trailer by letting you select
a desired range of gears.
Base Trim Shown (Uplevel Similar)
2. Press the plus/minus buttons,
located on the steering column
shift lever, to select the desired
range of gears for the current
driving conditions.
When M (Manual Mode) is selected
a number displays next to the M,
indicating the current gear.
This number is the highest gear that
can be used. However, the vehicle
can automatically shift to lower
gears as it adjusts to driving
conditions. This means that all
gears below that number are
available. When 5 (Fifth) is selected,
1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears are
automatically shifted by the vehicle,
but 6 (Sixth) cannot be used until
the plus/minus button located on the
steering column lever is used to
change to the gear.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (41,1)
Driving and Operating
Grade Braking is not available when
Range Selection Mode is active.
See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑41.
While using Range Selection Mode,
Cruise Control and the Tow/Haul
Mode can be used.
Notice: Spinning the tires or
holding the vehicle in one place
on a hill using only the
accelerator pedal may damage
the transmission. The repair will
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. If you are stuck, do not
spin the tires. When stopping on
a hill, use the brakes to hold the
vehicle in place.
Low Traction Mode
If the vehicle has the Hydra-Matic®
6-Speed Automatic Transmission,
it has a Low Traction Mode that
assists in vehicle acceleration when
road conditions are slippery, such
as with ice or snow. While the
9-41
vehicle is at a stop, select the
second gear range using Range
Selection Mode. This will limit
torque to the wheels after it detects
wheel slip, preventing the tires from
spinning.
Tow/Haul Mode
When Tow/Haul Mode is selected
the tow/haul indicator light will
come on.
The Tow/Haul Mode works with the
Autoride® feature, if the vehicle has
this, to enhance the ride when
trailering or with a loaded vehicle.
See Continuous Damping Control
(CDC) on page 9‑54.
The vehicle has a Tow/Haul Mode.
The selector button is located on the
end of the column shift lever. You
can use this feature to assist when
towing or hauling a heavy load or if
there is a need to charge a battery
installed in a trailer. See Towing
Equipment on page 9‑82 for more
information.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-42
Black plate (42,1)
Driving and Operating
Grade Braking (Hydra-Matic®
6-Speed Automatic
Transmission)
The Grade Braking shift modes can
be activated by pressing the button
on the end of the shift control lever.
While in Range Selection Mode,
Grade Braking is deactivated
allowing the driver to select a
desired range of gears.
Grade Braking is only active while
the Tow/Haul Mode is selected and
you are not in the Range Selection
Mode. See “Tow/Haul Mode” listed
previously and Manual Mode on
page 9‑40 for more information on
the Range Selection Mode. Grade
Braking assists in maintaining
desired vehicle speeds when driving
on downhill grades by automatically
implementing a shift schedule that
utilizes the engine and transmission
to slow the vehicle. This reduces
wear on the braking system and
increases control of the vehicle.
Grade Braking monitors vehicle
speed, acceleration, engine torque
and brake pedal usage. Using this
information, it detects when the
truck is on a downhill grade and the
driver desires to slow the vehicle by
pressing the brake.
Also see Towing Equipment on
page 9‑82 for more information.
Cruise Grade Braking
(Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed
Automatic Transmission)
Cruise Grade Braking assists when
driving on a downhill grade.
It maintains vehicle speed by
automatically implementing a shift
schedule that uses the engine and
the transmission to slow the vehicle.
Cruise Grade Braking operates
while Cruise Control is engaged in
Tow/Haul Mode to assist in
maintaining vehicle speed under
loaded vehicle conditions. It utilizes
vehicle acceleration and deviation
from desired speed to determine
the correct gear for the operating
condition. If vehicle speed is above
the desired speed the transmission
will downshift to slow the vehicle.
If vehicle speed is near or below
desired speed the trans will upshift,
allowing vehicle speed to increase.
While in the Range Selection Mode,
Cruise Grade Braking is not
available.
See “Range Selection Mode” under
Manual Mode on page 9‑40.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (43,1)
Driving and Operating
Drive Systems
Four-Wheel Drive
(Two Speed Automatic
Transfer Case)
If the vehicle has four-wheel drive,
you can send the engine's driving
power to all four wheels for extra
traction. Read the following before
using four-wheel drive.
Notice: Driving on clean, dry
pavement in Four-Wheel Drive
High or Four-Wheel Drive Low for
an extended period of time may
cause premature wear on the
vehicle's powertrain. Do not drive
on clean, dry pavement in
Four-Wheel Drive High or
Four-Wheel Drive Low for
extended periods of time.
While driving on clean dry pavement
and during tight turns, you may
experience a vibration in the
steering system.
9-43
Automatic Transfer Case
The vehicle has StabiliTrak®.
Shifting into Four-Wheel Drive Low
will turn Traction Control and
StabiliTrak off. See StabiliTrak®
System on page 9‑52.
Front Axle
The front axle engages and
disengages automatically when you
shift the transfer case. Some delay
for the axle to engage or disengage
is normal.
The transfer case knob is located to
the left of the instrument panel
cluster.
Use this dial to shift into and out of
four-wheel drive.
You can choose among five driving
settings:
Indicator lights in the switches show
you which setting you are in. The
indicator lights will come on briefly
when you turn on the ignition and
the last chosen setting will stay on.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-44
Black plate (44,1)
Driving and Operating
If the lights do not come on, you
should take the vehicle to your
dealer for service. An indicator light
will flash while shifting. It will stay on
when the shift is completed. If for
some reason the transfer case
cannot make a requested shift, it will
return to the last chosen setting.
4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use
the Four-Wheel Drive High position
when you need extra traction, such
as on snowy or icy roads or in most
off-road situations. This setting also
engages your front axle to help
drive the vehicle. This is the best
setting to use when plowing snow.
2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): This
setting is used for driving in most
street and highway situations.
The front axle is not engaged in
two-wheel drive. This setting also
provides the best fuel economy.
4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): This
setting also engages the front axle
and delivers extra torque. You may
never need this setting. It sends
maximum power to all four wheels.
You might choose Four-Wheel Drive
Low if you are driving off-road in
deep sand, deep mud, deep snow,
and while climbing or descending
steep hills.
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel
Drive): This setting is ideal for
use when road surface traction
conditions are variable. When
driving the vehicle in AUTO, the
front axle is engaged, and the
vehicle's power is sent to the front
and rear wheels automatically
based on driving conditions. Driving
in this mode results in slightly lower
fuel economy than Two-Wheel
Drive High.
The vehicle has StabiliTrak. Shifting
into Four-Wheel Drive Low will turn
Traction Control and StabiliTrak off.
See StabiliTrak® System on
page 9‑52.
{ WARNING
Shifting the transfer case to
N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle
to roll even if the transmission is
in P (Park). You or someone else
could be seriously injured. Be
sure to set the parking brake
before placing the transfer case in
N (Neutral). See Parking Brake on
page 9‑51.
N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle's
transfer case to N (Neutral) only
when towing the vehicle. See
Recreational Vehicle Towing on
page 10‑87 or Towing the Vehicle
on page 10‑87 for more information.
If the SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE
message stays on, you should take
the vehicle to your dealer for
service. See “SERVICE 4 WHEEL
DRIVE” message under
Transmission Messages on
page 5‑44.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (45,1)
Driving and Operating
Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive
High or AUTO (Automatic
Four-Wheel Drive)
Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel
Drive High or AUTO position. This
can be done at any speed, except
when shifting from Four-Wheel
Drive Low. The indicator light will
flash while shifting. It will remain
on when the shift is completed.
Shifting Into Two-Wheel
Drive High
Turn the knob to the Two-Wheel
Drive High position. This can be
done at any speed, except when
shifting from Four-Wheel Drive Low.
See “Shifting Out of Four-Wheel
Drive Low” in this section for more
information.
Shifting Into Four-Wheel
Drive Low
When Four-Wheel Drive Low is
engaged, vehicle speed should
be kept below 72 km/h (45 mph).
Extended high-speed operation
in 4L may damage or shorten the
life of the drivetrain.
To shift to the Four-Wheel Drive
Low position, the ignition must be in
ON/RUN and the vehicle must be
stopped or moving less than 5 km/h
(3 mph) with the transmission in
N (Neutral). The preferred method
for shifting into Four-Wheel Drive
Low is to have the vehicle moving
1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph). Turn the
knob to the Four-Wheel Drive Low
position. You must wait for the
Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light
to stop flashing and remain on
before shifting the transmission
into gear.
Notice: Shifting the transmission
into gear before the Four-Wheel
Drive Low indicator light has
9-45
stopped flashing could damage
the transfer case. To help avoid
damaging the vehicle, always wait
for the Four-Wheel Drive Low
indicator light to stop flashing
before shifting the transmission
into gear.
The vehicle may have significant
engagement noise and bump when
shifting between Four-Wheel Drive
Low and Four-Wheel Drive High
ranges or from N (Neutral) while
the engine is running.
If the knob is turned to the
Four-Wheel Drive Low position
when the vehicle is in gear and/or
moving more than 1.6 to 3.2 km/h
(1 to 2 mph), the Four-Wheel Drive
Low indicator light will flash for
30 seconds and not complete the
shift. After 30 seconds the transfer
case will shift to Four-Wheel Drive
High mode. With the vehicle moving
less than 5 km/h (3 mph) and the
transmission in N (Neutral), attempt
the shift again.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-46
Black plate (46,1)
Driving and Operating
Shifting Out of Four-Wheel
Drive Low
To shift from Four-Wheel Drive Low
to Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO,
or Two-Wheel Drive High, the
vehicle must be stopped or moving
less than 5 km/h (3 mph) with the
transmission in N (Neutral) and the
ignition in ON/RUN. The preferred
method for shifting out of
Four-Wheel Drive Low is to have
your vehicle moving 1.6 to 3.2 km/h
(1 to 2 mph). Turn the knob to the
Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO,
or Two-Wheel Drive High position.
You must wait for the Four-Wheel
Drive High, AUTO, or Two-Wheel
Drive High indicator light to stop
flashing and remain on before
shifting the transmission into gear.
Notice: Shifting the transmission
into gear before the Four-Wheel
Drive Low indicator light has
stopped flashing could damage
the transfer case. To help avoid
damaging the vehicle, always wait
for the Four-Wheel Drive Low
indicator light to stop flashing
before shifting the transmission
into gear.
The vehicle may have significant
engagement noise and bump when
shifting between Four-Wheel Drive
Low and Four-Wheel Drive High
ranges or from N (Neutral) while
the engine is running.
If the knob is turned to the
Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO,
or Two-Wheel Drive High switch
position when the vehicle is in
gear and/or moving more than
1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph), the
Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO or
Two-Wheel Drive High indicator light
will flash for 30 seconds but will not
complete the shift. With the vehicle
moving less than 5 km/h (3 mph)
and the transmission is in
N (Neutral), attempt the shift again.
Shifting into Neutral
To shift the transfer case to
N (Neutral) do the following:
1. Make sure the vehicle is parked
so that it will not roll.
2. Set the parking brake and apply
the regular brake pedal. See
Parking Brake on page 9‑51 for
more information.
3. Start the vehicle or turn the
ignition to ON/RUN.
4. Put the transmission in
N (Neutral).
5. Shift the transfer case to
Two-Wheel Drive High.
6. Turn the transfer case dial
clockwise to N (Neutral) until it
stops and hold it there until the
N (Neutral) light starts blinking.
This will take at least
10 seconds. Then slowly release
the dial to the Four‐Wheel Drive
Low position. The N (Neutral)
light will come on when the
transfer case shift to N (Neutral)
is complete.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (47,1)
Driving and Operating
7. If the engine is running, verify
that the transfer case is in
N (Neutral) by shifting the
transmission to R (Reverse) for
one second, then shift the
transmission to D (Drive) for
one second.
8. Turn the ignition to ACC/
ACCESSORY, which will turn
the engine off.
9. Place the transmission shift
lever in P (Park).
10. Release the parking brake prior
to moving the vehicle.
11. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Shifting Out of Neutral
To shift out of N Neutral do the
following:
1. Set the parking brake and apply
the regular brake pedal.
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
the engine off, and shift the
transmission to N (Neutral).
3. Turn the transfer case dial to the
desired transfer case shift
position (Two-Wheel Drive High,
Four-Wheel Drive High,
or AUTO).
After the transfer case has
shifted out of N (Neutral), the
N (Neutral) light will go out.
4. Release the parking brake prior
to moving the vehicle.
Notice: Shifting the transmission
into gear before the Four-Wheel
Drive Low indicator light has
stopped flashing could damage
the transfer case. To help avoid
damaging the vehicle, always wait
for the Four-Wheel Drive Low
indicator light to stop flashing
before shifting the transmission
into gear.
9-47
5. Start the engine and shift the
transmission to the desired
position.
Excessively shifting the transfer
case into or out of the different
modes may cause the transfer case
to enter the shift protection mode.
This will protect the transfer case
from possible damage and will only
allow the transfer case to respond to
one shift per 10 seconds. The
transfer case may stay in this mode
for up to three minutes.
Four-Wheel Drive (Single
Speed Automatic
Transfer Case)
If the vehicle has four-wheel drive,
you can send the engine's driving
power to all four wheels for extra
traction. Read the following before
using four-wheel drive.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-48
Black plate (48,1)
Driving and Operating
Notice: Driving on clean, dry
pavement in Four-Wheel Drive
High for an extended period of
time may cause premature wear
on the vehicle's powertrain. Do
not drive on clean, dry pavement
in Four-Wheel Drive High for
extended periods of time.
Automatic Transfer Case
While driving on clean dry pavement
and during tight turns, you may
experience a vibration in the
steering system.
Front Axle
The front axle engages and
disengages automatically when you
shift the transfer case. Some delay
for the axle to engage or disengage
is normal.
The transfer case knob is located to
the left of the instrument panel
cluster.
Use this dial to shift into and out of
four-wheel drive.
The vehicle has Four-Wheel Drive
with StabiliTrak®. For information on
StabiliTrak, see StabiliTrak® System
on page 9‑52.
You can choose among
three driving settings:
Indicator lights in the switch show
you which setting you are in. The
indicator lights will come on briefly
when you turn on the ignition and
the last chosen setting will stay on.
If the lights do not come on, you
should take the vehicle to your
dealer for service. An indicator light
will flash while shifting. It will stay on
when the shift is completed. If for
some reason the transfer case
cannot make a requested shift, it will
return to the last chosen setting.
2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): This
setting is used for driving in most
street and highway situations.
The front axle is not engaged in
two-wheel drive. This setting also
provides the best fuel economy.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (49,1)
Driving and Operating
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel
Drive): This setting is ideal for
use when road surface traction
conditions are variable. When
driving the vehicle in AUTO, the
front axle is engaged, and the
vehicle's power is sent to the front
and rear wheels automatically
based on driving conditions. Driving
in this mode results in slightly lower
fuel economy than Two-Wheel
Drive High.
Service Four‐Wheel Drive
4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use
the Four-Wheel Drive High position
when you need extra traction, such
as on snowy or icy roads or in most
off-road situations. This setting also
engages the front axle to help drive
the vehicle. This is the best setting
to use when plowing snow.
Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel
Drive High or AUTO position. This
can be done at any speed. The
indicator light will flash while
shifting. It will remain on when
the shift is completed.
If the SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE
message stays on, you should take
the vehicle to your dealer for
service. See “SERVICE 4 WHEEL
DRIVE” message under
Transmission Messages on
page 5‑44.
Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive
High or AUTO (Automatic
Four-Wheel Drive)
9-49
Shifting Into Two-Wheel
Drive High
Turn the knob to the Two-Wheel
Drive High position. This can be
done at any speed. The indicator
light will flash while shifting. It will
remain on when the shift is
completed.
Excessively shifting the transfer
case into or out of the different
modes may cause the transfer case
to enter the shift protection mode.
This will protect the transfer case
from possible damage and will only
allow the transfer case to respond
to one shift per 10 seconds. The
transfer case may stay in this
mode for up to three minutes.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-50
Black plate (50,1)
Driving and Operating
Brakes
Antilock Brake
System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), an advanced
electronic braking system that helps
prevent a braking skid.
When the engine is started and the
vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
checks itself. A momentary motor or
clicking noise might be heard while
this test is going on, and it might
even be noticed that the brake
pedal moves a little. This is normal.
If there is a problem with ABS, this
warning light stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 5‑24.
If driving safely on a wet road and it
becomes necessary to slam on the
brakes and continue braking to
avoid a sudden obstacle, a
computer senses that the wheels
are slowing down. If one of the
wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the
brakes at each wheel.
ABS can change the brake pressure
to each wheel, as required, faster
than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
As the brakes are applied, the
computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls
braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change
the time needed to get a foot up to
the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too
close to the vehicle in front of you,
there will not be enough time to
apply the brakes if that vehicle
suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to
stop, even with ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
the brake pedal down firmly and let
ABS work. You might hear the ABS
pump or motor operating and feel
the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
normal.
Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows the driver to steer and
brake at the same time. In many
emergencies, steering can help
more than even the very best
braking.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (51,1)
Driving and Operating
Parking Brake
Set the parking brake by holding the
regular brake pedal down, then
pushing down the parking brake
pedal.
If the ignition is on, the brake
system warning light will come on.
See Brake System Warning Light on
page 5‑23.
Notice: Driving with the parking
brake on can overheat the brake
system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system
parts. Make sure that the parking
brake is fully released and the
brake warning light is off before
driving.
To release the parking brake, hold
the regular brake pedal down, then
push down momentarily on the
parking brake pedal until you feel
the pedal release. Slowly pull your
foot up off the parking brake pedal.
If the parking brake is not released
when you begin to drive, the brake
system warning light will flash and a
chime will sound warning you that
the parking brake is still on.
If you are towing a trailer and are
parking on a hill, see Driving
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 9‑73.
9-51
Brake Assist
This vehicle has a brake assist
feature designed to assist the driver
in stopping or decreasing vehicle
speed in emergency driving
conditions. This feature uses the
stability system hydraulic brake
control module to supplement the
power brake system under
conditions where the driver has
quickly and forcefully applied the
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly
stop or slow down the vehicle. The
stability system hydraulic brake
control module increases brake
pressure at each corner of the
vehicle until the ABS activates.
Minor brake pedal pulsation or
pedal movement during this time is
normal and the driver should
continue to apply the brake pedal
as the driving situation dictates.
The brake assist feature will
automatically disengage when the
brake pedal is released or brake
pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-52
Black plate (52,1)
Driving and Operating
Ride Control Systems
StabiliTrak® System
The vehicle has a vehicle stability
enhancement system called
StabiliTrak. It is an advanced
computer-controlled system that
assists the driver with directional
control of the vehicle in difficult
driving conditions.
StabiliTrak activates when the
computer senses a discrepancy
between the intended path and the
direction the vehicle is actually
traveling. StabiliTrak selectively
applies braking pressure at any one
of the vehicle's brakes to assist the
driver with keeping the vehicle on
the intended path.
When the vehicle is started and
begins to move, the system
performs several diagnostic checks
to insure there are no problems.
The system may be heard or felt
while it is working. This is normal
and does not mean there is a
problem with the vehicle. The
system should initialize before the
vehicle reaches 32 km/h (20 mph).
In some cases, it may take
approximately 3.2 km (2 mi) of
driving before the system initializes.
If cruise control is being used when
StabiliTrak activates, the cruise
control automatically disengages.
The cruise control can be
re-engaged when road conditions
allow. See Cruise Control on
page 9‑55.
If the system fails to turn on or
activate, the StabiliTrak light along
with one of the following messages
will be displayed on the Driver
Information Center (DIC):
TRACTION CONTROL OFF,
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL,
STABILITRAK OFF, SERVICE
STABILITRAK. If these DIC
messages appear, make sure the
StabiliTrak system has not been
turned off using the StabiliTrak on/
off button. Then turn the vehicle off,
wait 15 seconds, and then turn it
back on again to reset the system.
If any of these messages still
appear on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), the vehicle should be
taken in for service. For more
information on the DIC messages,
see Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 5‑27.
The StabiliTrak light will flash on the
instrument panel cluster when the
system is both on and activated.
The system may be heard or felt
while it is working; this is normal.
The traction control disable button is
located on the instrument panel.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (53,1)
Driving and Operating
The traction control part of
StabiliTrak can be turned off by
pressing and releasing the
StabiliTrak button if both systems
(traction control and StabiliTrak)
were previously on. To disable both
TCS and StabiliTrak, press and
hold 5 until F illuminates and the
appropriate DIC message displays.
Traction control and StabiliTrak
can be turned on by pressing and
releasing the StabiliTrak button if
they are not automatically shut off
for any other reason.
When the traction control system
(TCS) or StabiliTrak system is
turned off, the StabiliTrak light
and the appropriate TCS off or
StabiliTrak off message will be
displayed on the DIC to warn the
driver. The vehicle will still have
brake-traction control when traction
control is off, but will not be able to
use the engine speed management
system. See “Traction Control
Operation” next for more
information.
When the traction control system
has been turned off, system noises
may still be heard as a result of the
brake-traction control coming on.
It is recommended to leave the
system on for normal driving
conditions, but it may be necessary
to turn the system off if the vehicle
is stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow,
and you want to “rock” the vehicle to
attempt to free it. It may also be
necessary to turn off the system
when driving in extreme off-road
conditions where high wheel spin is
required. See If the Vehicle is Stuck
on page 9‑21.
When the transfer case is in 4LO,
the stability system is automatically
disabled, the StabiliTrak light comes
on, and the STABILITRAK OFF
message will appear on the DIC.
Both traction control and StabiliTrak
are automatically disabled in this
condition.
9-53
Traction Control Operation
The traction control system is part of
the StabiliTrak system. Traction
control limits wheel spin by reducing
engine power to the wheels (engine
speed management) and by
applying brakes to each individual
wheel (brake-traction control) as
necessary.
The traction control system is
enabled automatically when the
vehicle is started. It will activate and
the StabiliTrak light will flash if it
senses that any of the wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose
traction while driving. If traction
control is turned off, only the
brake-traction control portion of
traction control will work. The
engine speed management will be
disabled. In this mode, engine
power is not reduced automatically
and the driven wheels can spin
more freely. This can cause the
brake-traction control to activate
constantly.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-54
Black plate (54,1)
Driving and Operating
Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle
is allowed to spin excessively
while the StabiliTrak®, ABS, brake
warning lights, and any relevant
DIC messages are displayed, the
transfer case could be damaged.
The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Reduce
engine power and do not spin the
wheel(s) excessively while these
lights and messages are
displayed.
The traction control system may
activate on dry or rough roads or
under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt
upshifts/downshifts of the
transmission. When this happens, a
reduction in acceleration may be
noticed, or a noise or vibration may
be heard. This is normal.
If cruise control is being used when
the system activates, the StabiliTrak
light will flash and cruise control will
automatically disengage. Cruise
control may be reengaged when
road conditions allow. See Cruise
Control on page 9‑55.
StabiliTrak may also turn off
automatically if it determines that a
problem exists with the system.
If the problem does not clear itself
after restarting the vehicle, see your
dealer for service.
Locking Rear Axle
Vehicles with a locking rear axle can
give more traction on snow, mud,
ice, sand, or gravel. It works like a
standard axle most of the time, but
when traction is low, this feature will
allow the rear wheel with the most
traction to move the vehicle.
Continuous Damping
Control (CDC)
This vehicle may have a continuous
damping control system called
Autoride®. With this feature,
improved vehicle ride and handling
is provided under a variety of
passenger and loading conditions.
Autoride is fully automatic and
uses a computer controller to
continuously monitor vehicle speed,
wheel to body position, lift/dive,
and steering position of the vehicle.
The controller then sends signals
to each shock absorber to
independently adjust the damping
level to provide the optimum
vehicle ride.
Autoride also interact with the tow/
haul mode that, when activated, will
provide additional control of the
shock absorbers. This additional
control results in better ride and
handling characteristics when the
vehicle is loaded or towing a trailer.
See “Tow/Haul Mode” under Trailer
Towing on page 9‑77 for more
information.
Automatic Level Control
The automatic level control rear
suspension is available on light‐duty
vehicles and comes as a part of the
Continuous Damping Control (CDC)
suspension, if equipped.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (55,1)
Driving and Operating
This type of level control is fully
automatic and will provide a better
leveled riding position as well as
better handling under a variety of
passenger and loading conditions.
An air compressor connected to the
rear shocks will raise or lower the
rear of the vehicle to maintain
proper vehicle height. The system is
activated when the ignition key is
turned to ON/RUN and will
automatically adjust vehicle height
thereafter. The system may exhaust
(lower vehicle height) for up to
ten minutes after the ignition key
has been turned off. You may hear
the air compressor operating when
the height is being adjusted.
Cruise Control
If a weight‐distributing hitch is being
used, it is recommended to allow
the shocks to inflate, thereby
leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting
the hitch.
With cruise control, a speed of
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can
be maintained without keeping your
foot on the accelerator. Cruise
control does not work at speeds
below about 40 km/h (25 mph).
{ WARNING
Cruise control can be dangerous
where you cannot drive safely at
a steady speed. So, do not use
the cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
9-55
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak and the
system begins to limit wheel spin,
cruise control will automatically
disengage. See StabiliTrak® System
on page 9‑52. When road conditions
allow the cruise control to be safely
used again, it can be turned
back on.
Cruise control can be dangerous
on slippery roads. On such roads,
fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use
cruise control on slippery roads.
When the brakes are applied, cruise
control is turned off.
The cruise control buttons are
located on left side of the steering
wheel.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-56
Black plate (56,1)
Driving and Operating
I (On/Off): Press to turn the
system on or off. The indicator light
is on when cruise control is on and
turns off when cruise control is off.
The cruise control light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on
after the cruise control has been set
to the desired speed.
+RES (Resume/Accelerate):
Press briefly to make the vehicle
resume to a previously set speed,
or press and hold to accelerate.
1. Press the
SET− (Set/Coast): Press to set the
speed and activate cruise control or
make the vehicle decelerate.
[ (Cancel):
Press to disengage
cruise control without erasing the
set speed from memory.
Setting Cruise Control
If the cruise button is on when not in
use, it could get bumped and go into
cruise when not desired. Keep the
cruise control switch off when cruise
is not being used.
I button.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET− button located
on the steering wheel and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the
accelerator.
Once the vehicle speed reaches
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,
press the +RES button on the
steering wheel. The vehicle returns
to the previous set speed and stays
there.
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
If the cruise control system is
already activated,
.
Press and hold the +RES button
on the steering wheel until the
desired speed is reached, then
release it.
.
To increase vehicle speed in
small amounts, press the
+RES button. Each time this is
done, the vehicle goes about
1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.
Resuming a Set Speed
If the cruise control is set at a
desired speed and then the brakes
are applied, the cruise control is
disengaged without erasing the set
speed from memory.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (57,1)
Driving and Operating
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
Passing Another Vehicle While
Using Cruise Control
If the cruise control system is
already activated,
Use the accelerator pedal to
increase the vehicle speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle will slow down to the
previous set cruise speed.
.
.
Press and hold the SET– button
on the steering wheel until the
desired lower speed is reached,
then release it.
To slow down in small amounts,
press the SET– button on the
steering wheel briefly. Each time
this is done, the vehicle goes
about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to end cruise
control:
.
To disengage cruise control,
step lightly on the brake pedal.
.
Press the
wheel.
.
To turn off the cruise control,
press I on the steering wheel.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control will work
on hills depends upon the vehicle
speed, load, and the steepness of
the hills. When going up steep hills,
you might have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain the
vehicle speed. When going
downhill, you might have to brake or
shift to a lower gear to keep the
vehicle speed down. When the
brakes are applied the cruise control
is disengaged.
9-57
[ on the steering
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed is
erased from memory by pressing
the I button or if the ignition is
turned off.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-58
Black plate (58,1)
Driving and Operating
Object Detection
Systems
Ultrasonic Parking Assist
For vehicles with the Ultrasonic
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
it operates at speeds less than
8 km/h (5 mph), and assists the
driver with parking and avoiding
objects while in R (Reverse). The
sensors on the rear bumper are
used to detect the distance to an
object up to 2.5 m (8 ft) behind the
vehicle, and at least 25.4 cm (10 in)
off the ground.
{ WARNING
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) system does not
replace driver vision. It cannot
detect:
.
.
Objects that are below the
bumper, underneath the
vehicle, or too close or far
from the vehicle.
Children, pedestrians,
bicyclists, or pets.
If you do not use proper care
before and while backing, vehicle
damage, injury, or death could
occur. Even with URPA, always
check behind the vehicle before
backing up. While backing, be
sure to look for objects and check
the vehicle's mirrors.
How the System Works
URPA comes on automatically
when the shift lever is moved into
R (Reverse). A single tone sounds
to indicate the system is working.
URPA operates only at speeds less
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
An obstacle is indicated by audible
beeps. The interval between the
beeps becomes shorter as the
vehicle gets closer to the obstacle.
When the distance is less than
30 cm (12 in) the beeps are
continuous.
To be detected, objects must be at
least 25.4 cm (10 in) off the ground
and below liftgate level. Objects
must also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) from
the rear bumper. This distance may
be less during warmer or humid
weather.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (59,1)
Driving and Operating
SERVICE PARK ASSIST: If this
message occurs, take the vehicle to
your dealer to repair the system.
.
A trailer was attached to the
vehicle, or a bicycle or an object
was hanging out of the liftgate
during the last drive cycle. Once
the attached object is removed,
URPA will return to normal
operation.
.
A tow bar is attached to the
vehicle.
.
The vehicle's bumper is
damaged. Take the vehicle to
your dealer to repair the system.
.
Other conditions may affect
system performance, such as
vibrations from a jackhammer or
the compression of air brakes on
a very large truck.
PARK ASSIST OFF: This message
occurs if the driver disables the
system.
The system can be disabled by
pressing the rear park aid disable
button located next to the radio.
The indicator light will come on and
PARK ASSIST OFF displays on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) to
indicate that URPA is off, see Object
Detection System Messages on
page 5‑41.
PARK ASST BLOCKED SEE
OWNERS MANUAL: This
message can occur under the
following conditions:
.
When the System Does Not
Seem to Work Properly
If the URPA system will not activate
due to a temporary condition, the
messages PARK ASSIST OFF or
PARK ASST BLOCKED SEE
OWNERS MANUAL will be
displayed on the DIC.
.
The ultrasonic sensors are not
clean. Keep the vehicle's rear
bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,
ice and slush. For cleaning
instructions, see “Washing the
Vehicle” under Exterior Care on
page 10‑93.
The park assist sensors are
covered by frost or ice. Frost or
ice can form around and behind
the sensors and may not always
be seen; this can occur after
washing the vehicle in cold
weather. The message may not
clear until the frost or ice has
melted.
9-59
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-60
Black plate (60,1)
Driving and Operating
Side Blind Zone
Alert (SBZA)
The vehicle may have a Side Blind
Zone Alert (SBZA) system. Read
this entire section before using the
system.
{ WARNING
When the system detects a vehicle
in the side blind zone, amber SBZA
displays light up in the side mirrors.
This indicates that it may be unsafe
to change lanes. Before making a
lane change, always check the
SBZA display, check the outside
and rearview mirrors, look over your
shoulder for vehicles and hazards,
and use the turn signal.
Vehicles outside the side
blind zones which may be
rapidly approaching.
.
Pedestrians, bicyclists,
or animals.
Failure to use proper care when
changing lanes may result in
damage to the vehicle, injury,
or death. Always check the
outside and rearview mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and
use the turn signal before
changing lanes.
Use caution while changing lanes
when towing a trailer, as the SBZA
detection zones do not change
when a trailer is towed.
How the System Works
SBZA is only a lane changing aid
and does not replace driver
vision. SBZA does not detect:
.
each side mirror and goes back
approximately 5.0 m (16 ft). The
height of the zone is approximately
between 0.5 m (1.5 ft) and
2.0 m (6 ft) off the ground.
Left Side Mirror Right Side Mirror
Display
Display
SBZA Detection Zones
The SBZA sensor covers a zone
of approximately one lane over
from both sides of the vehicle,
3.5 m (11 ft). This zone starts at
When the vehicle is started, both
outside mirror displays will briefly
come on to indicate that the system
is operating. When the vehicle is
moving forward, the left or right side
mirror SBZA display will light up if a
vehicle is detected in that blind
zone. If the turn signal is activated
and a vehicle is also detected on
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (61,1)
Driving and Operating
the same side, the SBZA display will
flash to give you extra warning not
to change lanes.
missed alert. The number of missed
alerts will increase with increased
rainfall or road spray.
SBZA displays do not come on
while the vehicle is approaching or
passing other vehicles. At speeds
greater then 32 km/h (20 mph),
SBZA displays may come on when
a vehicle you have passed remains
in or drops back into the
detection zone.
If the SBZA displays do not light up
when the system is on and vehicles
are in the blind zone, the system
may need service. Take the vehicle
to your dealer.
SBZA can be disabled through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See
Driver Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑27 for more information.
If the SBZA is disabled by the
driver, the SBZA mirror displays will
not light up during normal driving.
When the System Does Not Seem
To Work Properly
Occasional missed alerts can occur
under normal circumstances and will
increase in wet conditions. The
system does not need to be
serviced due to an occasional
SBZA is designed to ignore
stationary objects; however, the
system may occasionally light up
due to guard rails, signs, trees,
shrubs, and other stationary objects.
This is normal system operation, the
vehicle does not need service.
SBZA does not operate when the
left or right corners of the rear
bumper are covered with mud,
dirt, snow, ice, slush, or in heavy
rainstorms. For cleaning
instructions, see “Washing the
Vehicle” under Exterior Care on
page 10‑93. If the DIC still displays
the SIDE BLIND ZONE SYS.
UNAVAILABLE message after
cleaning the bumper, see your
dealer.
9-61
The SBZA displays may remain on
if a trailer is attached to the vehicle,
or a bicycle or object is extending
out to either side of the vehicle.
When SBZA is disabled for any
reason other than the driver turning
it off, the driver will not be able to
turn SBZA back on using the DIC.
The SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT ON
option will not be selectable if the
conditions for normal system
operation are not met. Until normal
operating conditions for SBZA are
met, you should not rely upon SBZA
while driving.
SBZA Error Messages
The following messages may
appear in the DIC:
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
SYSTEM OFF: This message
indicates that the driver has turned
the system off.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-62
Black plate (62,1)
Driving and Operating
SIDE BLIND ZONE SYS.
UNAVAILABLE: This message
indicates that the SBZA system is
disabled either because the sensor
is blocked and cannot detect
vehicles in your blind zone, or the
vehicle is passing through an open
field of view area, such as the
desert, where there is insufficient
data for operation. The sensor may
be blocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice,
slush, or even heavy rainstorms.
This message may also activate
during heavy rain or due to road
spray. The vehicle does not need
service. For cleaning, see “Washing
the Vehicle” under Exterior Care on
page 10‑93.
SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONE
ALERT SYSTEM: If this message
appears, both SBZA displays will
remain on indicating there is a
problem with the SBZA system.
If these displays remain on after
continued driving, the system needs
service. Take the vehicle to your
dealer.
FCC Information
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑18 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-210/220/310.
Frequency of operation: 24.05GHz –
24.25GHz
Field Strength: Not greater than
2.5V/m peak (0.25V/m average) at a
distance of 3m
The manufacturer is not responsible
for any radio or TV interference
caused by unauthorized
modifications to this equipment.
Such modifications could void the
user's authority to operate the
equipment.
Rear Vision
Camera (RVC)
This vehicle may have a Rear
Vision Camera system. Read this
entire section before using it.
{ WARNING
The Rear Vision Camera (RVC)
system does not replace driver
vision. RVC does not:
.
Detect objects that are
outside the camera's field of
view, below the bumper,
or underneath the vehicle.
.
Detect children, pedestrians,
bicyclists, or pets.
Do not back the vehicle by only
looking at the RVC screen, or use
the screen during longer, higher
speed backing maneuvers or
where there could be cross-traffic.
(Continued)
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (63,1)
Driving and Operating
WARNING (Continued)
Your judged distances using the
screen will differ from actual
distances.
If you do not use proper care
before backing up, you could
hit a vehicle, child, pedestrian,
bicyclist, or pet, resulting in
vehicle damage, injury, or death.
Even though the vehicle has the
RVC system, always check
carefully before backing up by
checking behind and around the
vehicle.
Vehicles Without Navigation
System
The rear vision camera system is
designed to help the driver when
backing up by displaying a view
of the area behind the vehicle.
When the key is in the ON/RUN
position and the driver shifts the
vehicle into R (Reverse), the video
image automatically appears on the
inside rear view mirror. Once the
driver shifts out of R (Reverse),
the video image automatically
disappears from the inside rear
view mirror.
Turning the Rear Vision Camera
System Off or On
To turn off the rear vision camera
system, press and hold z, located
on the inside rearview mirror, until
the left indicator light turns off. The
rear camera vision display is now
disabled.
To turn the rear vision camera
system on again, press and hold z
until the left indicator light
illuminates. The rear vision camera
system display is now enabled and
the display will appear in the mirror
normally.
9-63
Vehicles With Navigation
System
The rear vision camera system is
designed to help the driver when
backing up by displaying a view of
the area behind the vehicle. When
the driver shifts the vehicle into
R (Reverse), the video image
automatically appears on the
navigation screen. Once the driver
shifts out of R (Reverse), the
navigation screen will go back to the
last screen that had been displayed,
after a delay.
Turning the Rear Vision Camera
System On or Off
To turn the rear vision camera
system on or off:
1. Shift into P (Park).
2. Press the MENU button to enter
the configure menu options, then
press the MENU hard key to
select Display or touch the
Display screen button.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-64
Black plate (64,1)
Driving and Operating
3. Select the Rear Camera Options
screen button. The Rear Camera
Options screen will display.
The delay can be cancelled by
performing one of the following:
.
Pressing a hard key on the
navigation system.
Touch the + (plus)
or – (minus) screen buttons to
increase or decrease the contrast of
the screen.
.
Shifting in to P (Park).
Symbols
.
Reach a vehicle speed of
5 mph (8 km/h).
The navigation system may have a
feature that lets the driver view
symbols on the navigation screen
while using the rear vision camera.
The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist
(URPA) system must not be
disabled to use the caution symbols.
If URPA has been disabled and the
symbols have been turned on, the
Rear Parking Assist Symbols
Unavailable error message may
display. See Ultrasonic Parking
Assist on page 9‑58.
There is a message on the rear
vision camera screen that states
“Check Surroundings for Safety.”
Adjusting the Brightness and
Contrast of the Screen
4. Select the Video screen button.
When the Video screen button is
highlighted the RVC
system is on.
The delay that is received after
shifting out of R (Reverse)
is approximately 10 seconds.
_ (Contrast):
To adjust the brightness and
contrast of the screen, press the
MENU button while the rear vision
camera image is on the display. Any
adjustments made will only affect
the rear vision camera screen.
] (Brightness): Touch the + (plus)
or – (minus) screen buttons to
increase or decrease the brightness
of the screen.
The symbols appear when an object
has been detected by the URPA
system. The symbol may cover the
object when viewing the navigation
screen.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (65,1)
Driving and Operating
To turn the symbols on or off:
1. Make sure that URPA has not
been disabled.
2. Shift into P (Park).
3. Press the MENU hard key to
enter the configure menu
options, then press the MENU
hard key repeatedly until Display
is selected or touch the Display
screen button.
Rear Vision Camera Error
Messages
Service Rear Vision Camera
System: This message can display
when the system is not receiving
information it requires from other
vehicle systems.
If any other problem occurs or if a
problem persists, see your dealer.
Rear Vision Camera Location
4. Select the Rear Camera Options
screen button. The Rear Camera
Options screen will display.
5. Touch the Symbols screen
button. The screen button will be
highlighted when on.
The image is provided by the
camera located above the license
plate.
9-65
The camera uses a special lens.
The distance of the image that
appears on the screen differs from
the actual distance. The area
displayed by the camera is limited.
The camera does not display
objects which are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the
bumper. The area displayed on the
screen can vary according to
vehicle orientation or road
conditions.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-66
Black plate (66,1)
Driving and Operating
The following illustration shows the
field of view that the camera
provides.
When the System Does Not
Seem To Work Properly
The rear vision camera system
might not work properly or display a
clear image if:
.
.
It is dark.
.
The sun or the beam of
headlights is shining directly into
the camera lens.
.
Ice, snow, mud, or anything else
builds up on the camera lens.
Clean the lens, rinse it with
water, and wipe it with a soft
cloth.
.
A. View displayed by the camera.
B. Corner of the rear bumper.
The RVC is turned off. See
“Turning the Rear Camera
System On or Off” earlier in this
section.
The back of the vehicle is in an
accident, the position and
mounting angle of the camera
can change or the camera can
be affected. Be sure to have the
camera and its position and
mounting angle checked at your
dealer.
The rear vision camera system
display in the rearview mirror may
turn off or not appear as expected
due to one of the following
conditions. If this occurs the left
indicator light on the mirror will
flash.
.
A slow flash may indicate a loss
of video signal, or no video
signal present during the reverse
cycle.
.
A fast flash may indicate that the
display has been on for the
maximum allowable time during
a reverse cycle, or the display
has reached an Over
Temperature limit.
The fast flash conditions are
used to protect the video device
from high temperature
conditions. Once conditions
return to normal the device will
reset and the green indicator will
stop flashing.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (67,1)
Driving and Operating
During any of these fault conditions,
the display will be blank and the
indicator will continue to flash as
long as the vehicle is in R (Reverse)
or until the conditions return to
normal.
Pressing and holding z when the
left indicator light is flashing will turn
off the video display along with the
left indicator light.
9-67
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an
important part of the proper
maintenance of this vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain
optimum vehicle performance, we
recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline.
Look for the TOP TIER label on the
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets
enhanced detergency standards
developed by auto companies. A list
of marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com.
The eighth digit of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) shows
the code letter or number that
identifies the vehicle's engine.
The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) on
page 12‑1.
Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge
and a yellow fuel cap can use either
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-68
Black plate (68,1)
Driving and Operating
See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on
page 9‑69. For all other vehicles,
use only the unleaded gasoline
described under Recommended
Fuel on page 9‑68.
Recommended Fuel
Use regular unleaded gasoline with
a posted octane rating of 87 or
higher. If the octane rating is less
than 87, an audible knocking noise,
commonly referred to as spark
knock, might be heard when driving.
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated
at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. If heavy knocking is heard
when using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher, the engine
needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
(U.S. and Canada Only)
At a minimum, gasoline should
meet ASTM specification D 4814
in the United States or CAN/
CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.
Some gasolines contain an
octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
against the use of gasolines
containing MMT. See Fuel Additives
on page 9‑68 for additional
information.
California Fuel
Requirements
If the vehicle is certified to meet
California Emissions Standards, it is
designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See
the underhood emission control
label. If this fuel is not available in
states adopting California Emissions
Standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission
control system performance might
be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 5‑20. If this occurs, return to
your authorized dealer for diagnosis.
If it is determined that the condition
is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Fuels in Foreign
Countries
Never use leaded gasoline or any
other fuel not recommended in the
previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel
would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an
auto club, or contact a major oil
company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Fuel Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines
in the United States are now
required to contain additives that
help prevent engine and fuel system
deposits from forming, allowing the
emission control system to work
properly. In most cases, nothing
should have to be added to the fuel.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (69,1)
Driving and Operating
However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of
additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency
regulations. To help keep fuel
injectors and intake valves clean
and avoid problems due to dirty
injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline. Look for the
TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to
ensure gasoline meets enhanced
detergency standards developed
by the auto companies. A list of
marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found
at www.toptiergas.com.
For customers who do not use TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,
one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel
tank at every engine oil change,
can help clean deposits from fuel
injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel
System Treatment PLUS is the only
gasoline additive recommended by
General Motors. It is available at
your dealer.
Gasolines containing oxygenates,
such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines might be
available in your area. We
recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than
10% ethanol must not be used in
vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Notice: This vehicle was not
designed for fuel that contains
methanol. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can
corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic
and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
Some gasolines that are
not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an
octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
where you buy gasoline whether the
9-69
fuel contains MMT. We recommend
against the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce
spark plug life and affect emission
control system performance. The
malfunction indicator lamp might
turn on. If this occurs, return to your
dealer for service.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge
and a yellow fuel cap can use either
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
For all other vehicles, use only the
unleaded gasoline described under
Recommended Fuel on page 9‑68.
We encourage the use of E85 in
vehicles that are designed to use it.
The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable”
fuel, meaning it is made from
renewable sources such as corn
and other crops.
Many service stations will not have
an 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pump
available. The U.S. Department of
Energy has an alternative fuels
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-70
Black plate (70,1)
Driving and Operating
website (www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/
locator/stations/) that can help you
find E85 fuel. Those stations that do
have E85 should have a label
indicating ethanol content. Do not
use the fuel if the ethanol content is
greater than 85%.
At a minimum, E85 should meet
ASTM Specification D 5798. By
definition, this means that fuel
labeled E85 will have an ethanol
content between 70% and 85%.
Filling the fuel tank with fuel
mixtures that do not meet ASTM
specifications can affect driveability
and could cause the malfunction
indicator lamp to come on.
To ensure quick starts in the
wintertime, the E85 fuel must be
formulated properly for your climate
according to ASTM specification
D 5798. If you have trouble starting
on E85, it could be because the
E85 fuel is not properly formulated
for your climate. If this happens,
switching to gasoline or adding
gasoline to the fuel tank can
improve starting. For good starting
and heater efficiency below 0°C
(32°F), the fuel mix in the fuel tank
should contain no more than
70% ethanol. It is best not to
alternate repeatedly between
gasoline and E85. If you do switch
fuels, it is recommended that you
add as much fuel as possible — do
not add less than 11 L (3 gal) when
refueling. You should drive the
vehicle immediately after refueling
for at least 11 km (7 mi) to allow the
vehicle to adapt to the change in
ethanol concentration.
E85 has less energy per
liter (gallon) than gasoline, so you
will need to refill the fuel tank more
often when using E85 than when
you are using gasoline. See Filling
the Tank on page 9‑70.
Notice: Some additives are not
compatible with E85 fuel and can
harm the vehicle's fuel system.
Do not add anything to E85.
Damage caused by additives
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Notice: This vehicle was not
designed for fuel that contains
methanol. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can
corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic
and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
Filling the Tank
{ WARNING
Fuel vapor burns violently and a
fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
To help avoid injuries to you and
others, read and follow all the
instructions on the fuel pump
island. Turn off the engine when
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel
or when refueling the vehicle. Do
not use cellular phones. Keep
sparks, flames, and smoking
materials away from fuel. Do not
leave the fuel pump unattended
(Continued)
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (71,1)
Driving and Operating
WARNING (Continued)
when refueling the vehicle. This is
against the law in some places.
Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away
from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
E85 or gasoline can be used.
See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on
page 9‑69.
To open the fuel door, push the
rearward center edge in and release
and it will open.
The tethered fuel cap is located
behind a hinged fuel door on the
driver side of the vehicle. If the
vehicle has E85 fuel capability, the
fuel cap will be yellow and state that
To remove the fuel cap, turn it
slowly counterclockwise. The fuel
cap has a spring in it; if the cap is
released too soon, it will spring back
to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered
fuel cap from the hook on the
fuel door.
9-71
{ WARNING
Fuel can spray out on you if you
open the fuel cap too quickly.
If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be
badly burned. This spray can
happen if the tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait
for any hiss noise to stop. Then
unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not
top off or overfill the tank and wait a
few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the
nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
surfaces as soon as possible. See
Exterior Care on page 10‑93.
When replacing the fuel cap, insert
the tether in its hole before
tightening the cap. Turn the fuel cap
clockwise until it clicks. It will require
more effort to turn the fuel cap on
the last turn as you tighten it. Make
sure the cap is fully installed.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-72
Black plate (72,1)
Driving and Operating
The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been
left off or improperly installed. This
would allow fuel to evaporate into
the atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 5‑20.
If the vehicle has a Driver
Information Center (DIC), the
TIGHTEN GAS CAP message
displays if the fuel cap is not
properly installed.
{ WARNING
If a fire starts while you are
refueling, do not remove the
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel
by shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant.
Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If a new fuel cap is
needed, be sure to get the right
type of cap from your dealer. The
wrong type of fuel cap might not
fit properly, might cause the
malfunction indicator lamp to
light, and could damage the fuel
tank and emissions system. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 5‑20.
WARNING (Continued)
and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you
and others:
.
Dispense fuel only into
approved containers.
.
Do not fill a container while it
is inside a vehicle, in a
vehicle's trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than
the ground.
.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact
with the inside of the fill
opening before operating the
nozzle. Contact should be
maintained until the filling is
complete.
.
Do not smoke while
pumping fuel.
.
Do not use a cellular phone
while pumping fuel.
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container
{ WARNING
Never fill a portable fuel container
while it is in the vehicle. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel
vapor. You can be badly burned
(Continued)
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (73,1)
Driving and Operating
Towing
General Towing
Information
Only use towing equipment that has
been designed for the vehicle.
Contact your dealer or trailering
dealer for assistance with preparing
the vehicle for towing a trailer.
See the following trailer towing
information in this section:
.
.
.
For information on driving while
towing a trailer, see “Driving
Characteristics and
Towing Tips.”
For information on towing a disabled
vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on
page 10‑87. For information on
towing the vehicle behind another
vehicle such as a motor home, see
Recreational Vehicle Towing on
page 10‑87.
.
Do not tow a trailer at all during
the first 800 km (500 miles) the
new vehicle is driven. The
engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
.
Then, during the first 800 km
(500 miles) that a trailer is
towed, do not drive over 80 km/h
(50 mph) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This helps the
engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier
loads.
.
Vehicles can tow in D (Drive).
Shift the transmission to a lower
gear if the transmission shifts
too often under heavy loads and/
or hilly conditions.
.
If the vehicle has the Side Blind
Zone Alert (SBZA) system and it
doesn't seem to be working
properly while pulling a trailer,
turn the system off. See Side
Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on
page 9‑60 for more information.
Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips
Pulling a Trailer
Here are some important points:
.
For maximum vehicle and trailer
weights, see “Trailer Towing.”
For information on equipment to
tow a trailer, see “Towing
Equipment.”
.
There are many different laws,
including speed limit restrictions,
having to do with trailering.
Make sure the rig will be legal,
not only where you live but also
where you will be driving.
A good source for this
information can be state or
provincial police.
Consider using a sway control.
See “Hitches” in Towing
Equipment on page 9‑82.
9-73
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-74
Black plate (74,1)
Driving and Operating
Important considerations that have
to do with weight:
.
The weight of the trailer
.
The weight of the trailer tongue
.
The weight on the vehicle's tires
.
And the weight of the trailering
combination
Driving with a Trailer
WARNING (Continued)
To maximize safety when towing
a trailer:
.
.
Never drive with the liftgate,
trunk/hatch, or rear-most
window open.
.
Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
.
Adjust the Climate Control
system to a setting that
brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the
highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
{ WARNING
When towing a trailer, exhaust
gases may collect at the rear of
the vehicle and enter if the
liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most
window is open.
Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
(Continued)
Have the exhaust system
inspected for leaks and make
necessary repairs before
starting a trip.
For more information about
Carbon Monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑35.
Towing a trailer requires a certain
amount of experience. The
combination you are driving is
longer and not as responsive as the
vehicle itself. Get acquainted with
the handling and braking of the rig
before setting out for the open road.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch
parts and attachments, safety
chains, electrical connectors, lamps,
tires and mirrors. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start the
combination moving and then apply
the trailer brake controller by hand
to be sure the brakes work.
During the trip, check occasionally
to be sure that the load is secure
and the lamps and any trailer
brakes still work.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (75,1)
Driving and Operating
9-75
Following Distance
Making Turns
Driving on Grades
Stay at least twice as far behind the
vehicle ahead as you would when
driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid heavy
braking and sudden turns.
Notice: Making very sharp turns
while trailering could cause the
trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. The vehicle could be
damaged. Avoid making very
sharp turns while trailering.
Reduce speed and shift to a
lower gear before starting down a
long or steep downgrade. If the
transmission is not shifted down, the
brakes might get hot and no longer
work well.
When turning with a trailer, make
wider turns than normal. Do this
so the trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees
or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift
the transmission to a lower gear if
the transmission shifts too often
under heavy loads and/or hilly
conditions.
Passing
More passing distance is needed
when towing a trailer. The
combination will not accelerate
as quickly and is longer so it is
necessary to go much farther
beyond the passed vehicle
before returning to the lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering
wheel with one hand. Then, to move
the trailer to the left, move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the
right, move your hand to the right.
Always back up slowly and,
if possible, have someone
guide you.
If the trailer turn signal bulbs burn
out, the arrows on the instrument
panel will still flash for turns. It is
important to check occasionally to
be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working.
The tow/haul mode may be used if
the transmission shifts too often.
See Tow/Haul Mode Light on
page 5‑24.
When towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, consider the
following: Engine coolant will boil at
a lower temperature than at normal
altitudes. If the engine is turned off
immediately after towing at high
altitude on steep uphill grades, the
vehicle may show signs similar to
engine overheating. To avoid this,
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-76
Black plate (76,1)
Driving and Operating
let the engine run while parked,
preferably on level ground, with the
automatic transmission in P (Park)
for a few minutes before turning the
engine off. If the overheat warning
comes on, see Engine Overheating
on page 10‑21.
Parking on Hills
{ WARNING
Parking the vehicle on a hill with
the trailer attached can be
dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move.
People can be injured, and both
the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always
park the rig on a flat surface.
If parking the rig on a hill:
1. Press the brake pedal, but do
not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn
the wheels into the curb if facing
downhill or into traffic if facing
uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks
under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in
place, release the regular brakes
until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then
apply the parking brake and shift
into P (Park).
5. If the vehicle is four-wheel-drive
and has a two-speed transfer
case, be sure the transfer case
is in a drive gear and not in
N (Neutral).
6. Release the brake pedal.
{ WARNING
It can be dangerous to get out of
the vehicle if the shift lever is not
fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle
can roll.
If the engine has been left
running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure the vehicle will
not move, even when on fairly
level ground, use the steps that
follow.
Always put the shift lever fully in
P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set.
If the transfer case on a
four-wheel-drive vehicle is in
N (Neutral), the vehicle will be
free to roll, even if the shift lever
is in P (Park). Be sure the transfer
case is in a drive gear — not in
N (Neutral).
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (77,1)
Driving and Operating
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine.
3. Shift into a gear.
4. Release the parking brake.
5. Let up on the brake pedal.
6. Drive slowly until the trailer is
clear of the chocks.
7. Stop and have someone pick up
and store the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer
Towing
The vehicle needs service more
often when pulling a trailer. See this
manual's Maintenance Schedule or
Index for more information. Things
that are especially important in
trailer operation are automatic
transmission fluid, engine oil, axle
lubricant, belts, cooling system and
brake system. It is a good idea to
inspect these before and during
the trip.
Check periodically to see that all
hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
Trailer Towing
If the vehicle has a hybrid engine,
see the Hybrid supplement for more
information.
9-77
Do not tow a trailer during break‐in.
See New Vehicle Break-In on
page 9‑27 for more information.
{ WARNING
The driver can lose control when
pulling a trailer if the correct
equipment is not used or the
vehicle is not driven properly.
For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work
well — or even at all. The driver
and passengers could be
seriously injured. The vehicle may
also be damaged; the resulting
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer
only if all the steps in this section
have been followed. Ask your
dealer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with the
vehicle.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-78
Black plate (78,1)
Driving and Operating
Notice: Pulling a trailer
improperly can damage the
vehicle and result in costly
repairs not covered by the vehicle
warranty. To pull a trailer
correctly, follow the advice in this
section and see your dealer for
important information about
towing a trailer with the vehicle.
The following information has many
time-tested, important trailering tips
and safety rules. Many of these are
important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read
this section carefully before pulling a
trailer.
To identify the trailering capacity of
the vehicle, read the information in
“Weight of the Trailer” that appears
later in this section.
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
Trailering is different than just
driving the vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in
handling, acceleration, braking,
durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be
used properly.
Weight of the Trailer
It depends on how the rig is used.
Speed, altitude, road grades,
outside temperature and how much
the vehicle is used to pull a trailer
are all important. It can depend on
any special equipment on the
vehicle, and the amount of tongue
weight the vehicle can carry. See
“Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later
in this section for more information.
Trailer weight rating (TWR) is
calculated assuming the tow vehicle
has only the driver but all required
trailering equipment. Weight of
additional optional equipment,
passengers and cargo in the tow
vehicle must be subtracted from the
trailer weight rating.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (79,1)
Driving and Operating
9-79
Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options.
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
5.3L V8 (LC9)
3.08
2 540 kg (5,600 lbs)
4 990 kg (11,000 lbs)
1500 Series 2WD Short Wheel Base
5.3L V8 (LMG)
3.08
2 495 kg (5,500 lbs)
4 990 kg (11,000 lbs)
5.3L V8
3.42
2 722 kg (6,000 lbs)
5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
3.42
3 856 kg (8,500 lbs)
6 350 kg (14,000 lbs)
5.3L V8
3.08
2 313 kg (5,100 lbs)
4 990 kg (11,000 lbs)
5.3L V8
3.42
2 540 kg (5,600 lbs)
5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
3.42
3 674 kg (8,100 lbs)
6 350 kg (14,000 lbs)
5.3L V8
3.08
2 359 kg (5,200 lbs)
4 990 kg (11,000 lbs)
5.3L V8
3.42
2 586 kg (5,700 lbs)
5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
3.42
3 720 kg (8,200 lbs)
6 350 kg (14,000 lbs)
5.3L V8 (LC9)
3.08
2 268 kg (5,000 lbs)
4 990 kg (11,000 lbs)
5.3L V8
3.42
2 495 kg (5,500 lbs)
5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)
1500 Series 2WD Long Wheel Base
1500 Series 4WD Short Wheel Base
1500 Series 4WD Long Wheel Base
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-80
Black plate (80,1)
Driving and Operating
Vehicle
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
3.42
3 629 kg (8,000 lbs)
6 350 kg (14,000 lbs)
3.73
4 355 kg (9,600 lbs)
7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
3.73
4 264 kg (9,400 lbs)
7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
2500 Series 2WD Long Wheel Base
6.0L V8
2500 Series 4WD Long Wheel Base
6.0L V8
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be
exceeded.
Ask your dealer for trailering
information or advice, or write us at
our Customer Assistance Offices,
See Customer Assistance Offices
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5 or
Customer Assistance Offices
(Mexico) on page 13‑5.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is
very important because it is also
part of the vehicle weight. The
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the
vehicle, any cargo carried in it, and
the people who will be riding in the
vehicle as well as trailer tongue
weight. Vehicle options, equipment,
passengers and cargo in the vehicle
reduce the amount of tongue weight
the vehicle can carry, which will also
reduce the trailer weight the vehicle
can tow. See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑22 for more information
about the vehicle's maximum load
capacity.
Trailer tongue weight (A) should
be 10 percent to 15 percent and
fifth wheel or gooseneck kingpin
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (81,1)
Driving and Operating
weight should be 15 to 25 percent
of the loaded trailer weight (B) up to
the maximums for vehicle series
and hitch type shown below:
proper. If they are not, adjustments
might be made by moving some
items around in the trailer.
Vehicle Series
Hitch Type
Maximum Tongue
Weight
1500
Weight Carrying
272 kg (600 lbs)
2500
Weight Carrying
453 kg (1,000 lbs)
1500
Weight Distributing
499 kg (1,100 lbs)
2500
Weight Distributing
680 kg (1,500 lbs)
Do not exceed the maximum
allowable tongue weight for the
vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch
extension that will position the hitch
ball closest to the vehicle. This will
help reduce the effect of trailer
tongue weight on the rear axle.
9-81
Trailering may be limited by the
vehicle's ability to carry tongue
weight. Tongue or kingpin weight
cannot cause the vehicle to exceed
the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating). See “Total
Weight on the Vehicle's Tires” later
in this section for more information.
After loading the trailer, weigh
the trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are
Total Weight on the Vehicle's
Tires
Be sure the vehicle's tires are
inflated to the inflation pressures
found on the Certification label on
the drivers door or see Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑22 for more
information. Make sure not to
exceed the GVWR limit for the
vehicle, or the RGAWR, with the tow
vehicle and trailer fully loaded for
the trip including the weight of the
trailer tongue. If using a weight
distributing hitch, make sure not to
exceed the RGAWR before applying
the weight distribution spring bars.
Weight of the Trailering
Combination
It is important that the combination
of the tow vehicle and trailer does
not exceed any of its weight
ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,
Trailer Weight Rating or Tongue
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-82
Black plate (82,1)
Driving and Operating
Weight. The only way to be sure it is
not exceeding any of these ratings
is to weigh the tow vehicle and
trailer combination, fully loaded for
the trip, getting individual weights
for each of these items.
Towing Equipment
Consider using sway controls with
any trailer. Ask a trailering
professional about sway controls or
refer to the trailer manufacturer's
recommendations and instructions.
Weight‐Distributing Hitch
Adjustment
Hitches
The correct hitch equipment helps
maintain combination control. Most
small-to-medium trailers can be
towed with a weight carrying hitch
which simply features a coupler
latched to the hitch ball. Larger
trailers may require a weight
distributing hitch that uses spring
bars to distribute the trailer tongue
weight among the two vehicle and
trailer axles. See “Weight of the
Trailer Tongue” in Trailer Towing on
page 9‑77 for rating limits with
various hitch types.
A. Body to Ground Distance
Safety Chains
Always attach chains between the
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
safety chains under the tongue of
the trailer to help prevent the tongue
from contacting the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains
may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer
manufacturer. If the trailer being
towed weighs up to 2 271 kg
(5,000 lbs) with a factory-installed
step bumper, safety chains may be
attached to the attaching points on
the bumper, otherwise, safety
chains should be attached to holes
on the trailer hitch platform. Always
leave just enough slack so the
combination can turn. Never allow
safety chains to drag on the ground.
B. Front of Vehicle
Trailer Brakes
When using a weight-distributing
hitch, the spring bars should be
adjusted so the distance (A) is the
same after coupling the trailer to the
tow vehicle and adjusting the hitch.
A loaded trailer that weighs more
than 900 kg (2,000 lbs) needs to
have its own brake system that is
adequate for the weight of the
trailer. Be sure to read and follow
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (83,1)
Driving and Operating
the instructions for the trailer brakes
so they are installed, adjusted and
maintained properly.
Since the vehicle is equipped with
StabiliTrak®, the trailer brakes
cannot tap into the vehicle's
hydraulic system.
connector can be plugged into a
seven-pin universal heavy-duty
trailer connector available through
your dealer.
Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
Trailer Wiring Harness
.
The vehicle is equipped with the
following wiring harnesses for
towing a trailer.
Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn
Signal
.
Brown: Taillamps
.
White: Ground
.
Light Green: Back-up Lamps
.
Red: Battery Feed*
.
Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*
The trailer wiring harness, with a
seven-pin connector, is located at
the rear of the vehicle and is tied to
the vehicle's frame. The harness
Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Harness
Package
The seven-wire harness contains
the following trailer circuits:
.
Basic Trailer Wiring
9-83
*The fuses for these two circuits are
installed in the underhood electrical
center, but the wires are not
connected. They should be
connected by your dealer or a
qualified service center.
The vehicle is equipped with the
seven-wire trailer towing harness.
This harness with a seven-pin
universal trailer connector is
attached to a bracket on the hitch
platform.
The seven-wire harness contains
the following trailer circuits:
.
Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
.
Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn
Signal
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-84
Black plate (84,1)
Driving and Operating
.
Brown: Taillamps
.
White: Ground
.
Light Green: Back-up Lamps
.
Red: Battery Feed*
.
Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*
*The fuses for these two circuits are
installed in the underhood electrical
center, but the wires are not
connected. They should be
connected by your dealer or a
qualified service center.
If charging a remote (non-vehicle)
battery, press the tow/haul mode
button located at the end of the shift
lever. This will boost the vehicle
system voltage and properly charge
the battery. If the trailer is too light
for tow/haul mode, turn on the
headlamps as a second way to
boost the vehicle system and
charge the battery.
Electric Brake Control Wiring
Provisions
These wiring provisions are
included with the vehicle as part of
the trailer wiring package. These
provisions are for an electric brake
controller. The instrument panel
contains blunt cut wires near the
data link connector for the trailer
brake controller. The harness
contains the following wires:
.
Dark Blue: Brake Signal to
Trailer Connector
.
Red/Black: Battery
.
Light Blue/White: Brake Switch
.
White: Ground
Do not power both ITBC and
aftermarket controllers to control the
trailer brakes at the same time.
Tow/Haul Mode
Pressing this button at the end of
the shift lever turns on and off the
tow/haul mode.
It should be installed by your dealer
or a qualified service center.
If the vehicle is equipped with an
ITBC, the blunt cuts exist, but are
not connected further in the
harness. If an aftermarket trailer
brake controller is installed, the
ITBC must be disconnected.
This indicator light on the instrument
panel cluster comes on when the
tow/haul mode is on.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (85,1)
Driving and Operating
Tow/Haul is a feature that assists
when pulling a heavy trailer or a
large or heavy load. See Tow/Haul
Mode on page 9‑41 for more
information.
Tow/Haul is designed to be most
effective when the vehicle and
trailer combined weight is at least
75 percent of the vehicle's Gross
Combined Weight Rating (GCWR).
See “Weight of the Trailer” earlier in
the section. Tow/Haul is most useful
under the following driving
conditions:
.
When pulling a heavy trailer or a
large or heavy load through
rolling terrain.
.
When pulling a heavy trailer or a
large or heavy load in stop and
go traffic.
.
When pulling a heavy trailer or a
large or heavy load in busy
parking lots where improved low
speed control of the vehicle is
desired.
Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul
when lightly loaded or with no trailer
at all will not cause damage.
However, there is no benefit to the
selection of Tow/Haul when the
vehicle is unloaded. Such a
selection when unloaded may
result in unpleasant engine and
transmission driving characteristics
and reduced fuel economy. Tow/
Haul is recommended only when
pulling a heavy trailer or a large or
heavy load.
Integrated Trailer Brake
Control System
The vehicle may have an Integrated
Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system
for electric trailer brakes.
9-85
This symbol is located on the Trailer
Brake Control Panel on vehicles
with an Integrated Trailer Brake
Control System. The power output
to the trailer brakes is based on the
amount of brake pressure being
applied by the vehicle’s brake
system. This available power output
to the trailer brakes can be adjusted
to a wide range of trailering
situations.
The ITBC system is integrated with
the vehicle’s brake, anti‐lock brake
and StabiliTrak systems. In trailering
conditions that cause the vehicle’s
anti‐lock brake or StabiliTrak
systems to activate, power sent to
the trailer's brakes will be
automatically adjusted to minimize
trailer wheel lock-up. This does not
imply that the trailer has the
StabiliTrak system.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-86
Black plate (86,1)
Driving and Operating
If the vehicle’s brake, anti‐lock
brake or StabiliTrak systems are
not functioning properly, the ITBC
system may not be fully functional
or may not function at all. Make
sure all of these systems are
fully operational to ensure full
functionality of the ITBC system.
The ITBC system is powered
through the vehicle's electrical
system. Turning the ignition off will
also turn off the ITBC system. The
ITBC system is fully functional only
when the ignition is in ON or
in RUN.
The ITBC system can only be used
with trailers with electric brakes.
{ WARNING
Connecting a trailer that is not
compatible with the ITBC system
may result in reduced or complete
loss of trailer braking. There may
be an increase in stopping
distance or trailer instability which
could result in personal injury or
damage to the vehicle, trailer,
or other property. An aftermarket
controller may be available for
use with trailers with surge, air,
or electric‐over‐hydraulic trailer
brake systems. To determine the
type of brakes on the trailer and
the availability of controllers,
check with your trailer
manufacturer or dealer.
When trailering, make sure of the
following:
.
The ITBC system is used only
with trailers that are equipped
with electric brakes.
.
All applicable local and federal
laws and regulations are
followed.
.
All electrical and mechanical
connections to the trailer are
made correctly.
.
The trailer’s brakes are in proper
working condition.
.
The trailer and vehicle are
properly loaded for the towing
condition.
The ITBC system is a factory
installed item. Out‐of‐factory
installation of this system should not
be attempted. GM is not responsible
for warranty or performance of the
system resulting from out‐of‐factory
installation.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (87,1)
Driving and Operating
Trailer Brake Control Panel
brakes. The Trailer Brake Control
Panel is used along with the Trailer
Brake Display Page on the DIC to
adjust and display power output to
the trailer brakes.
.
Pressing a Trailer Gain
button – If the Trailer Brake
Display Page is not currently
displayed, pressing a Trailer
Gain button will first recall the
current Trailer Gain setting. After
the Trailer Brake Display Page is
displayed, each press and
release of the gain buttons will
then cause the Trailer Gain
setting to change.
.
Activating the Manual Trailer
Brake Apply lever
.
Connecting a trailer equipped
with electric trailer brakes
Trailer Brake DIC Display Page
The ITBC system displays
messages into the vehicle’s Driver
Information Center (DIC). See
Driver Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑27 for more information.
A. Manual Trailer Brake Apply
Lever
B. Trailer Gain Adjustment Buttons
The ITBC system has a control
panel located on the instrument
panel to the left of the steering
column. The control panel allows
adjustment to the amount of output,
referred to as trailer gain, available
to the electric trailer brakes and
allows manual application the trailer
The display page indicates Trailer
Gain setting, power output to the
electric trailer brakes, trailer
connection and system operational
status.
The Trailer Brake Display Page can
be displayed by performing any of
the following actions:
.
Scrolling through the DIC menu
pages using the odometer trip
stem or the DIC Vehicle
Information button (if equipped).
9-87
All DIC warning and service
messages must first be
acknowledged by the driver by
pressing the odometer trip stem or
the DIC Vehicle Information button
(if equipped) before the Trailer
Brake Display Page can be
displayed and Trailer Gain can
be adjusted.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-88
Black plate (88,1)
Driving and Operating
TRAILER GAIN – This setting is
displayed anytime the Trailer Brake
Display Page is active. This setting
can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0
with either a trailer connected or
disconnected. To adjust the Trailer
Gain, press one of the Trailer Gain
adjustment buttons located on the
Trailer Brake Control Panel. Press
and hold a gain button to cause the
Trailer Gain to continuously adjust.
To turn the output to the trailer off,
adjust the Trailer Gain setting to
0.0 (zero).
0.0 (zero) gain is the factory default
setting. To properly adjust trailer
gain, see the Trailer Gain
Adjustment Procedure later in this
section.
TRAILER OUTPUT – This is
displayed any time a trailer with
electric brakes is connected. Output
to the electric brakes is based on
the amount of vehicle braking
present and relative to the Trailer
Gain setting. Output is displayed
from 0 to 10 bars for each gain
setting.
The Trailer Output will indicate “- - - - -“ on the Trailer Brake Display
Page whenever the following occur:
.
No trailer is connected.
.
A trailer without electric brakes
is connected (no DIC message
is displayed).
.
A trailer with electric brakes
has become disconnected
(a CHECK TRAILER WIRING
message will also be displayed
on the DIC).
.
There is a fault present in the
wiring to the electric trailer
brakes (a CHECK TRAILER
WIRING message will also be
displayed on the DIC).
.
There is a fault in the ITBC
system (a SERVICE TRAILER
BRAKE SYSTEM message will
also be displayed in the DIC).
Manual Trailer Brake Apply
The Manual Trailer Brake Apply
Lever is located on the Trailer Brake
Control Panel and is used to apply
the trailer’s electric brakes
independent of the vehicle’s brakes.
This lever is used in the Trailer Gain
Adjustment Procedure to properly
adjust the power output to the trailer
brakes. Sliding the lever to the left
will apply only the trailer brakes.
The power output to the trailer is
indicated in the Trailer Brake
Display Page in the DIC. If the
vehicle’s service brakes are applied
while using the Manual Trailer Brake
Apply Lever, the trailer output power
will be the greater of the two.
The trailer and the vehicle's brake
lamps will come on when either
vehicle braking or manual trailer
brakes are applied.
Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure
Trailer Gain should be set for a
specific trailering condition and
must be adjusted any time vehicle
loading, trailer loading or road
surface conditions change.
Setting the Trailer Gain properly is
needed for the best trailer stopping
performance. A trailer that is
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (89,1)
Driving and Operating
over-gained may result in locked
trailer brakes. A trailer that is
under-gained may result in not
enough trailer braking. Both of these
conditions may result in poorer
stopping and stability of the vehicle
and trailer.
Use the following procedure to
correctly adjust Trailer Gain for each
towing condition:
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are
in proper working condition.
2. Connect a properly loaded trailer
to the vehicle and make all
necessary mechanical and
electrical connections. See
Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑22 for more information.
3. After the electrical connection is
made to a trailer equipped with
electric brakes:
.
A TRAILER CONNECTED
message will be briefly
displayed on the DIC
display.
.
The Trailer Brake Display
Page will appear on the
DIC showing TRAILER
GAIN and TRAILER
OUTPUT.
.
In the Trailer Output display
on the DIC, “- - - - - -“ will
disappear if there is no
error present. Connecting a
trailer without electric
brakes will not clear the six
dashed lines.
4. Adjust the Trailer Gain by using
the gain adjustment (+ / -)
buttons on the Trailer Brake
Control Panel.
5. Drive the vehicle with the trailer
attached on a level road surface
representative of the towing
condition and free of traffic at
about 32 to 40 km/h (20 to
25 mph) and fully apply the
Manual Trailer Brake Apply
lever.
9-89
Adjusting trailer gain at speeds
lower than 32 to 40 km/h (20 to
25 mph) may result in an
incorrect gain setting.
6. Adjust the Trailer Gain to just
below the point of trailer wheel
lock-up, indicated by trailer
wheel squeal or tire smoke when
a trailer wheel locks.
Trailer wheel lock-up may not
occur if towing a heavily loaded
trailer. In this case, adjust the
Trailer Gain to the highest
allowable setting for the towing
condition.
7. Re-adjust Trailer Gain any time
vehicle loading, trailer loading or
road surface conditions change
or if trailer wheel lock-up is
noticed at any time while towing
Other ITBC Related DIC Messages
In addition to displaying TRAILER
GAIN and TRAILER OUTPUT
through the DIC, trailer connection
and ITBC system status is displayed
in the DIC.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-90
Black plate (90,1)
Driving and Operating
TRAILER CONNECTED – This
message will be briefly displayed
when a trailer with electric brakes is
first connected to the vehicle. This
message will automatically turn off
in about ten seconds. The driver
can also acknowledge this message
before it automatically turns off.
CHECK TRAILER WIRING – This
message will be displayed if:
1. The ITBC system first
determines connection to a
trailer with electric brakes and
then the trailer harness becomes
disconnected from the vehicle.
If the disconnect occurs while
the vehicle is stationary, this
message will automatically turn
off in about thirty seconds. This
message will also turn off if the
driver acknowledges this
message off or if the trailer
harness is re-connected.
If the disconnect occurs while
the vehicle is moving, this
message will continue until
the ignition is turned off.
This message will also turn off if
the driver acknowledges this
message off or if the trailer
harness is re-connected.
2. There is an electrical fault in the
wiring to the electric trailer
brakes. This message will
continue as long as there is an
electrical fault in the trailer
wiring. This message will also
turn off if the driver
acknowledges this message off.
To determine if the electrical fault is
on the vehicle side or trailer side of
the trailer wiring harness
connection, do the following:
1. Disconnect the trailer wiring
harness from the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
3. Wait ten seconds, then turn the
ignition back to RUN.
4. If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING
message re-appears, the
electrical fault is on the
vehicle side.
If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING
message only re-appears when
connecting the trailer wiring
harness to the vehicle, the
electrical fault is on the
trailer side.
SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE
SYSTEM – This message will be
displayed when there is a problem
with the ITBC system. If this
message persists over multiple
ignition cycles there is problem with
the ITBC system. Take the vehicle
to an authorized GM dealer to have
the ITBC system diagnosed and
repaired.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (91,1)
Driving and Operating
If either the CHECK TRAILER
WIRING or SERVICE TRAILER
BRAKE SYSTEM message is
displayed while driving the vehicle,
power is no longer available to the
trailer brakes. When traffic
conditions allow, carefully pull the
vehicle over to the side of the road
and turn the ignition off. Check the
wiring connection to the trailer and
turn the ignition back on. If either of
these messages continues, either
the vehicle or trailer needs service.
An authorized GM dealer may be
able to diagnose and repair
problems with the trailer. However,
any diagnosis and repair of the
trailer is not covered under the
vehicle warranty. Please contact
your trailer dealer for assistance
with trailer repairs and trailer
warranty information.
Conversions and
Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical
Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything
electrical to the vehicle unless
you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can
damage the vehicle and the
damage would not be covered by
the vehicle's warranty. Some
add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from
working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain the
vehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if the
vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to add anything
electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑49 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑50.
9-91
Adding a Snow Plow or
Similar Equipment
Before installing a snow plow on the
vehicle, here are some things you
need to know:
Notice: If the vehicle does not
have the snow plow prep
package, adding a plow can
damage the vehicle, and the
repairs would not be covered by
warranty. Unless the vehicle was
built to carry a snow plow, do not
add one to the vehicle. If the
vehicle has the snow plow prep
package, called RPO VYU, then
the payload the vehicle can carry
will be reduced when a snow
plow is installed. The vehicle can
be damaged if either the front or
rear axle ratings or the Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVW) are
exceeded.
Some vehicles are built with a
special snow plow prep package,
called RPO VYU. If the vehicle has
this option, you can add a plow to it,
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-92
Black plate (92,1)
Driving and Operating
provided certain weights, such as
the weights on the vehicle's axles
and the Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW), are not exceeded.
The plow the vehicle can carry
depends on many things, such as:
.
The options the vehicle came
with, and the weight of those
options.
.
The weight and number of
passengers intended to be
carried.
.
The weight of items added to the
vehicle.
.
The total weight of any
additional cargo intended to be
carried.
Say, for example, you have a 318 kg
(700 lb) snow plow. The total weight
of all occupants and cargo inside
the cab should not exceed 135 kg
(300 lb). This means that you may
only be able to carry one passenger.
But, even this may be too much if
there is other equipment already
adding to the weight of the vehicle.
.
The snow plow manufacturer or
installer can assist in
determining the amount of rear
ballast required, to help make
sure the snowplow/vehicle
combination does not exceed
the GVW rating, the front and
rear axle ratings, and the front
and rear weight distribution ratio.
.
The total vehicle must not
exceed the GVW rating.
Here are some guidelines for safely
carrying a snow plow on the vehicle:
.
Make sure the weight on the
front and rear axles does not
exceed the axle rating for each.
.
For the front axle, if more cargo
or passengers must be carried,
appropriate counter ballast must
be installed rear of the rear axle.
Counter ballast must be properly
secured so it will not move
during driving.
.
Follow the snow plow
manufacturer's
recommendations regarding rear
ballast. Rear ballast may be
required to ensure a proper front
and rear weight distribution ratio,
even though the actual weight at
the front axle may be less than
the front axle rating.
Front axle reserve capacity is the
difference between the front Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) and the
front axle weight of the vehicle with
full fuel and passengers. Basically, it
is the amount of weight that can be
added to the front axle before
reaching the front GAWR.
The front axle reserve capacity for
the vehicle can be found in the
lower right corner of the
Certification/Tire label, as shown.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (93,1)
Driving and Operating
In order to calculate the amount of
weight any front accessory, such as
a snow plow, is adding to the front
axle, use the following formula:
For example, adding a 318 kg
(700 lb) snow plow actually adds
more than 318 kg (700 lb) to the
front axle. Using the formula, if the
snow plow is 122 cm (4 ft) in front of
the front axle and the wheel base is
305 cm (10 ft), then:
W = 318 kg (700 lb)
A = 122 cm (4 ft)
W.B. = 305 cm (10 ft)
(W x (A + W.B.))/W.B. =
(318 x (122 + 305))/305 = 445 kg
(980 lb)
United States
(W x (A + W.B.)) /W.B.= Weight the
accessory is adding to the
front axle.
Where:
W = Weight of added accessory
A = Distance that the accessory
is in front of the front axle
W.B. = Vehicle Wheelbase
Canada
9-93
So, if the vehicle's front axle reserve
capacity is more than 980 lbs
(445 kg), the snow plow could be
added without exceeding the
front GAWR.
Heavier equipment can be added
on the front of the vehicle if it is
compensated for by carrying fewer
passengers, less cargo, or by
positioning cargo toward the rear.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
9-94
Black plate (94,1)
Driving and Operating
This has the effect of reducing the
load on the front. However, the front
GAWR, rear GAWR, and the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
must never be exceeded.
{ WARNING
On some vehicles that have
certain front mounted equipment,
such as a snow plow, it may be
possible to load the front axle to
the front gross axle weight rating
(GAWR) but not have enough
weight on the rear axle to have
proper braking performance. If the
brakes cannot work properly, you
could have a crash. To help the
brakes work properly when a
snow plow is installed, always
follow the snow plow
manufacturer or installer's
recommendation for rear ballast
to ensure a proper front and rear
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
weight distribution ratio, even
though the actual front weight
may be less than the front
GAWR, and the total vehicle
weight is less than the gross
vehicle weight rating (GVWR).
Maintaining a proper front and
rear weight distribution ratio is
necessary to provide proper
braking performance.
Total vehicle reserve capacity is the
difference between the GVWR and
the weight of the vehicle with full
fuel and passengers. It is the
amount of weight that can be added
to the vehicle before reaching
theGVWR. Keep in mind that
reserve capacity numbers are
intended as a guide when selecting
the amount of equipment or cargo
the vehicle can carry. If you are
unsure of the vehicle's front, rear,
or total weight, go to a weigh station
and weigh the vehicle. Your dealer
can also help you with this.
The total vehicle reserve capacity
for the vehicle can be found
in the lower right corner of the
Certification/Tire label as shown
previously.
See your dealer for additional
advice and information about using
a snow plow on the vehicle. Also,
see Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑22.
Emergency Roof Lamp
Provisions
Vehicles with the RPO VYU snow
plow prep package also have an
emergency roof lamp provision
package, RPO TRW. Wiring for the
emergency roof lamp is provided
above the overhead console. See
Auxiliary Roof-Mounted Lamp on
page 6‑6 for switch location.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (1,1)
Vehicle Care
Vehicle Care
General Information
General Information . . . . . . . . . .
California Proposition
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements . . . .
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2
10-2
10-3
10-3
Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Engine Compartment
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10
Automatic Transmission
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-15
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-21
Overheated Engine
Protection
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-24
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-31
Automatic Transmission Shift
Lock Control Function
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Ignition Transmission Lock
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-32
Wiper Blade
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-34
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Bulb Replacement
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
10-1
Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Stoplamps, and Back-Up
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-37
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Electrical System
Electrical System
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-38
10-39
10-39
10-43
Wheels and Tires
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-47
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Tire Terminology and
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Tire Pressure Monitor
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-2
Black plate (2,1)
Vehicle Care
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Different Size Tires and
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-65
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Secondary Latch System . . . 10-79
Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-82
Jump Starting
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
Towing
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-87
Recreational Vehicle
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
Appearance Care
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-100
General Information
For service and parts needs, visit
your dealer. You will receive
genuine GM parts and GM-trained
and supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of
these marks:
California Proposition
65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this
one, contain and/or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Engine
exhaust, many parts and systems,
many fluids, and some component
wear by-products contain and/or
emit these chemicals.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (3,1)
Vehicle Care
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements
Accessories and
Modifications
Certain types of automotive
applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners,
and lithium batteries contained in
Remote Keyless Entry transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials.
Special handling may be necessary.
For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
Adding non‐dealer accessories or
making modifications to the vehicle
can affect vehicle performance and
safety, including such things as
airbags, braking, stability, ride and
handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and
electronic systems like antilock
brakes, traction control, and stability
control. These accessories or
modifications could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
Damage to vehicle components
resulting from modifications or the
installation or use of non‐GM
certified parts, including control
10-3
module or software modifications, is
not covered under the terms of the
vehicle warranty and may affect
remaining warranty coverage for
affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to
complement and function with other
systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer can accessorize the vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories.
When you go to your GM dealer
and ask for GM Accessories, you
will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM
Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑50.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-4
Black plate (4,1)
Vehicle Care
Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own
Service Work
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
hybrid supplement for more
information.
{ WARNING
You can be injured and the
vehicle could be damaged if you
try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
.
Be sure you have sufficient
knowledge, experience,
the proper replacement
parts, and tools before
attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
.
Be sure to use the proper
nuts, bolts, and other
fasteners. Metric and English
fasteners can be easily
confused. If the wrong
fasteners are used, parts can
later break or fall off. You
could be hurt.
If doing some of your own service
work, use the proper service
manual. It tells you much more
about how to service the vehicle
than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information
on page 13‑14.
This vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to do your own
service work, see Airbag System
Check on page 3‑51.
Keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date of
any service work performed. See
Maintenance Records on
page 11‑10.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (5,1)
Vehicle Care
Hood
3. Push the secondary hood
release to the right.
To open the hood:
1. Pull the handle with this symbol
on it. It is located inside the
vehicle to the lower left of the
steering wheel.
10-5
4. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure
all the filler caps are on properly.
Then bring the hood from full
open to within 152 mm (6 in)
from the closed position, pause,
then push the front center of the
hood with a swift, firm motion to
fully close the hood.
2. Then go to the front of the
vehicle and locate the secondary
hood release, near the center of
the grille.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-6
Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
5.3 L V8 Engine Shown, 6.0 L V8 Engine Similar
Black plate (6,1)
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (7,1)
Vehicle Care
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 10‑15.
F.
B. Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap. See Cooling
System on page 10‑16.
Automatic Transmission
Dipstick (Out of View). See
“Checking the Fluid Level”
under Automatic Transmission
Fluid on page 10‑12.
C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
See Jump Starting on
page 10‑83.
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When
to Add Engine Oil” under
Engine Oil on page 10‑8.
D. Battery on page 10‑28.
H. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of
View). See “Checking Engine
Oil” under Engine Oil on
page 10‑8.
E. Remote Negative (−) Terminal
(Out of View). See Jump
Starting on page 10‑83.
I.
Engine Cooling Fan (Out of
View). See Cooling System on
page 10‑16.
J.
10-7
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir.
See Power Steering Fluid on
page 10‑24.
K. Brake Master Cylinder
Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brake Fluid on
page 10‑27.
L.
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block on page 10‑39.
M. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See “Adding Washer
Fluid” under Washer Fluid on
page 10‑25.
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
hybrid supplement for more
information.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-8
Black plate (8,1)
Vehicle Care
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
To ensure proper engine
performance and long life, careful
attention must be paid to engine oil.
Following these simple, but
important steps will help protect
your investment:
It is a good idea to check the engine
oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
get an accurate reading, the vehicle
must be on level ground. The
engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow
loop. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 10‑6 for the
location of the engine oil dipstick.
.
Always use engine oil approved
to the proper specification and of
the proper viscosity grade. See
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”
in this section.
.
Check the engine oil level
regularly and maintain the
proper oil level. See “Checking
Engine Oil” and “When to Add
Engine Oil” in this section.
.
Change the engine oil at the
appropriate time. See Engine Oil
Life System on page 10‑10.
.
Always dispose of engine oil
properly. See “What to Do with
Used Oil” in this section.
Obtaining an accurate oil level
reading is essential:
1. If the engine has been running
recently, turn off the engine and
allow several minutes for the oil
to drain back into the oil pan.
Checking the oil level too soon
after engine shutoff will not
provide an accurate oil level
reading.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it
with a paper towel or cloth, then
push it back in all the way.
Remove it again, keeping the
tip down, and check the level.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the cross-hatched
area at the tip of the dipstick, add
1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil
and then recheck the level. See
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” in
this section for an explanation of
what kind of oil to use. For engine
oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on
page 12‑2.
Notice: Do not add too much oil.
Oil levels above or below the
acceptable operating range
shown on the dipstick are harmful
to the engine. If you find that you
have an oil level above the
operating range, i.e., the engine
has so much oil that the oil level
gets above the cross-hatched
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (9,1)
Vehicle Care
area that shows the proper
operating range, the engine could
be damaged. You should drain
out the excess oil or limit driving
of the vehicle and seek a service
professional to remove the
excess amount of oil.
This certification mark indicates that
the oil has been approved to the
dexos specification.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6 for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
Add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating
range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when through.
Selecting the Right Engine Oil
Selecting the right engine oil
depends on both the proper oil
specification and viscosity grade:
Specification
Use and ask for engine oils with the
dexos™ certification mark. Oils
meeting the requirements of the
vehicle should have the dexos
certification mark on the container.
This vehicle was filled at the factory
with dexos‐approved engine oil.
Notice: Use only engine oil
that is approved to the dexos
specification or an equivalent
engine oil of the appropriate
viscosity grade. Engine oils
approved to the dexos
specification will show the dexos
symbol on the container. Failure
to use the recommended engine
oil or equivalent can result in
engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty. If you are
unsure whether the oil is
10-9
approved to the dexos
specification, ask your service
provider.
Use of Substitute Engine Oils if
dexos is unavailable: In the event
that dexos‐approved engine oil is
not available at an oil change or for
maintaining proper oil level, you
may use substitute engine oil
displaying the API Starburst symbol
and of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade.
Use of oils that do not meet the
dexos specification, however, may
result in reduced performance under
certain circumstances.
Viscosity Grade
SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity
grade for the vehicle. Do not use
other viscosity oils such as
SAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W-50.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-10
Black plate (10,1)
Vehicle Care
be used. An oil of this viscosity
grade will provide easier cold
starting for the engine at extremely
low temperatures. When selecting
an oil of the appropriate viscosity
grade, be sure to always select
an oil that meets the required
specification, dexos. See
“Specification” earlier in this
section for more information.
Engine Oil Additives/Engine
Oil Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The
recommended oils with the dexos
specification and displaying the
dexos certification mark are all that
is needed for good performance
and engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not
recommended and could cause
engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
Cold Temperature Operation: In an
area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −29°C
(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil should
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain
elements that can be unhealthy for
your skin and could even cause
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
your skin for very long. Clean your
skin and nails with soap and water,
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the
manufacturer's warnings about the
use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the
environment. If you change your
own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
from the filter before disposal. Never
dispose of oil by putting it in the
trash or pouring it on the ground,
into sewers, or into streams or
bodies of water. Recycle it by taking
it to a place that collects used oil.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system
that indicates when to change the
engine oil and filter. This is based
on engine revolutions and engine
temperature, and not on mileage.
Based on driving conditions, the
mileage at which an oil change is
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (11,1)
Vehicle Care
indicated can vary considerably. For
the oil life system to work properly,
the system must be reset every time
the oil is changed.
important to check the oil regularly
over the course of an oil drain
interval and keep it at the proper
level.
On some vehicles, when the system
has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, a CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message comes on to
indicate that an oil change is
necessary. See Engine Oil
Messages on page 5‑39. Change
the oil as soon as possible within
the next 1 000 km (600 mi). It is
possible that, if driving under the
best conditions, the oil life system
might indicate that an oil change is
not necessary for up to a year.
The engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and,
at this time, the system must be
reset. For vehicles without the
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message, an oil change is
needed when the OIL LIFE
REMAINING percentage is near
0%. Your dealer has trained service
people who will perform this work
and reset the system. It is also
If the system is ever reset
accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)
since the last oil change.
Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil
Life System
Reset the system whenever the
engine oil is changed so that the
system can calculate the next
engine oil change. Always reset the
engine oil life to 100% after every oil
change. It will not reset itself. To
reset the system on most vehicles:
1. Display the OIL LIFE
REMAINING on the DIC. If the
vehicle does not have DIC
buttons, the vehicle must be in
P (Park) to access this display.
See Driver Information Center
(DIC) on page 5‑27.
10-11
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET
button on the DIC, or the trip
odometer reset stem if the
vehicle does not have DIC
buttons, for more than
five seconds. The oil life will
change to 100%.
On all vehicles, the Engine Oil Life
System can be reset as follows:
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
the engine off.
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal
slowly three times within
five seconds.
3. Display the OIL LIFE
REMAINING on the DIC. If the
display shows 100%, the system
is reset. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑27.
If the vehicle has a CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message and it
comes back on when the vehicle is
started and/or the OIL LIFE
REMAINING is near 0%, the engine
oil life system has not been reset.
Repeat the procedure.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-12
Black plate (12,1)
Vehicle Care
Automatic Transmission
Fluid
When to Check and Change
Automatic Transmission Fluid
It is usually not necessary to check
the transmission fluid level. The
only reason for fluid loss is a
transmission leak or overheated
transmission. If a small leak is
suspected, then use the following
checking procedures to check the
fluid level. However, if there is a
large leak, then it may be necessary
to have the vehicle towed to a
dealer service department and have
it repaired before driving the vehicle
further.
Notice: Use of the incorrect
automatic transmission fluid may
damage the vehicle, and the
damages may not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Always use
the automatic transmission fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 11‑7.
Change the fluid and filter at the
scheduled maintenance intervals
listed in Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑3. Be sure to use the
transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑7.
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Notice: Too much or too little
fluid can damage the
transmission. Too much can
mean that some of the fluid could
come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts,
starting a fire. Too little fluid
could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an
accurate reading if checking the
transmission fluid.
Before checking the fluid level,
prepare the vehicle as follows:
1. Start the engine and park the
vehicle on a level surface.
Keep the engine running.
2. Apply the parking brake and
place the shift lever in P (Park).
3. With your foot on the brake
pedal, move the shift lever
through each gear range,
pausing for about three seconds
in each range. Then, move the
shift lever back to P (Park).
4. Allow the engine to idle
(500 – 800 rpm) for at least
1 minute. Slowly release the
brake pedal.
5. Keep the engine running and
press the Trip/Fuel button or trip
odometer reset stem until
TRANS TEMP (Transmission
Temperature) displays on the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (13,1)
Vehicle Care
6. Using the TRANS TEMP
reading, determine and perform
the appropriate check
procedure. If the TRANS TEMP
reading is not within the required
temperature ranges, allow the
vehicle to cool, or operate the
vehicle until the appropriate
transmission fluid temperature is
reached.
Cold Check Procedure
Use this procedure only as a
reference to determine if the
transmission has enough fluid to be
operated safely until a hot check
procedure can be made. The hot
check procedure is the most
accurate method to check the fluid
level. Perform the hot check
procedure at the first opportunity.
Use this cold check procedure to
check fluid level when the
transmission temperature is
between 27°C and 32°C
(80°F and 90°F).
1. Locate the transmission dipstick
at the rear of the engine
compartment, on the passenger
side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 10‑6 for more
information.
2. Flip the handle up, then pull out
the dipstick and wipe it with a
clean rag or paper towel.
3. Install the dipstick by pushing it
back in all the way; wait
three seconds, and then pull it
back out again.
4. Check both sides of the dipstick
and read the lower level. Repeat
the check procedure to verify the
reading.
10-13
5. If the fluid level is below the
COLD check band, add only
enough fluid as necessary to
bring the level into the COLD
band. It does not take much
fluid, generally less than 0.5 L
(1 pt). Do not overfill.
6. Perform a hot check at the
first opportunity after the
transmission reaches a normal
operating temperature between
71°C to 93°C (160°F to 200°F).
7. If the fluid level is in the
acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way, then
flip the handle down to lock the
dipstick in place.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-14
Black plate (14,1)
Vehicle Care
Hot Check Procedure
Use this procedure to check the
transmission fluid level when the
transmission fluid temperature is
between 71°C and 93°C (160°F
and 200°F).
The hot check is the most accurate
method to check the fluid level. The
hot check should be performed at
the first opportunity in order to verify
the cold check. The fluid level rises
as fluid temperature increases,
so it is important to ensure the
transmission temperature is within
range.
1. Locate the transmission dipstick
at the rear of the engine
compartment, on the passenger
side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 10‑6 for more
information.
2. Flip the handle up, then pull out
the dipstick and wipe it with a
clean rag or paper towel.
3. Install the dipstick by pushing it
back in all the way; wait
three seconds, and then pull it
back out again.
4. Check both sides of the dipstick
and read the lower level. Repeat
the check procedure to verify the
reading.
5. Safe operating level is within the
HOT cross hatch band on the
dipstick. If the fluid level is not
within the HOT band, and the
transmission temperature is
between 71°C and 93°C (160°F
and 200°F), add or drain fluid as
necessary to bring the level into
the HOT band. If the fluid level is
low, add only enough fluid to
bring the level into the HOT
band. It does not take much
fluid, generally less than 0.5 L
(1 pt). Do not overfill.
6. If the fluid level is in the
acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way, then
flip the handle down to lock the
dipstick in place.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (15,1)
Vehicle Care
Consistency of Readings
Always check the fluid level at least
twice using the procedure described
previously. Consistency (repeatable
readings) is important to maintaining
proper fluid level. If readings are still
inconsistent, contact the dealer.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6 for the location of the
engine air cleaner/filter.
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
scheduled maintenance intervals
and replace it at the first oil change
after each 80 000 km (50,000 mi)
interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 11‑3 for more
information. If driving on dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at each
engine oil change.
10-15
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
remove the engine air cleaner/filter
from the vehicle by following
Steps 1 through 6. When the engine
air cleaner/filter is removed, lightly
shake it to release loose dust and
dirt. If the engine air cleaner/filter
remains covered with dirt, a new
filter is required. Never use
compressed air to clean the filter.
Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/
Filter
1. Locate the air cleaner/filter
assembly . See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6.
2. Loosen the four screws on the
cover of the housing and lift up
the cover.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-16
Black plate (16,1)
Vehicle Care
{ WARNING
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or
others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner/
filter from the housing. Care
should be taken to dislodge as
little dirt as possible.
4. Clean the engine air cleaner/
filter sealing surfaces and the
housing.
5. Inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter.
6. Reinstall the cover and tighten
the screws.
Cooling System
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
hybrid supplement for more
information.
The cooling system allows the
engine to maintain the correct
working temperature.
5.3 L V8 Engine Shown,
6.0 L V8 Engine Similar
A. Coolant Surge Tank
B. Coolant Surge Tank
Pressure Cap
C. Engine Cooling Fan(s)
(Out of View)
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (17,1)
Vehicle Care
{ WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
Do not run the engine if there is a
leak. If you run the engine, it
could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you
could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
{
WARNING
Heater and radiator hoses, and
other engine parts, can be very
hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
you can be burned.
(Continued)
Notice: Using coolant other than
DEX-COOL® can cause premature
engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant could require changing
sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi)
or 24 months, whichever occurs
first. Any repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL
(silicate-free) coolant in the
vehicle.
10-17
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is
filled with DEX-COOL engine
coolant. This coolant is designed to
remain in the vehicle for 5 years or
240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
occurs first.
The following explains the cooling
system and how to check and add
coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating,
see Engine Overheating on
page 10‑21.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-18
Black plate (18,1)
Vehicle Care
What to Use
{ WARNING
Adding only plain water or some
other liquid to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water
and other liquids, can boil before
the proper coolant mixture will.
The coolant warning system is set
for the proper coolant mixture.
With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too
hot but you would not get the
overheat warning. The engine
could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL coolant.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL
coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
This mixture:
.
Gives freezing protection down
to −37°C (−34°F), outside
temperature.
.
Gives boiling protection up to
129°C (265°F), engine
temperature.
.
Protects against rust and
corrosion.
.
Will not damage aluminum parts.
.
Helps keep the proper engine
temperature.
Notice: If an improper coolant
mixture is used, the engine could
overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Too much water in the mixture
can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other
parts.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or
additives are used in the vehicle
cooling system, the vehicle could
be damaged. Use only the proper
mixture of the engine coolant
listed in this manual for the
cooling system. See
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑7 for more
information.
Never dispose of engine coolant by
putting it in the trash, pouring it on
the ground, or into sewers, streams,
or bodies of water. Have the coolant
changed by an authorized service
center, familiar with legal
requirements regarding used
coolant disposal. This will help
protect the environment and your
health.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (19,1)
Vehicle Care
Checking Coolant
How to Add Coolant to the
Surge Tank
The vehicle must be on a level
surface when checking the coolant
level.
Check to see if coolant is visible in
the coolant surge tank. If the coolant
inside the coolant surge tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until
it cools down. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at or
above the FULL COLD mark, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL coolant at the
coolant surge tank, but be sure the
cooling system is cool before this
is done.
10-19
{ WARNING
You can be burned if you spill
coolant on hot engine parts.
Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts
are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
The coolant surge tank is located in
the engine compartment on the
passenger side of the vehicle. See
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6 for more information on
location.
The coolant level should be at or
above the FULL COLD mark. If it is
not, the vehicle may have a leak in
the cooling system.
Notice: This vehicle has a
specific coolant fill procedure.
Failure to follow this procedure
could cause the engine to
overheat and be severely
damaged.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-20
Black plate (20,1)
Vehicle Care
{ WARNING
If no coolant is visible in the surge
tank, add coolant as follows:
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{ WARNING
Steam and scalding liquids from a
hot cooling system can blow out
and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn
the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — they can
come out at high speed. Never
turn the cap when the cooling
system, including the surge tank
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the
cooling system and surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever
have to turn the pressure cap.
1. Remove the coolant surge tank
pressure cap when the cooling
system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and
upper radiator hose, is no
longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise about one full
turn. If a hiss is heard, wait for
that to stop. A hiss means there
is still some pressure left.
2. Keep turning the pressure cap
slowly and remove it.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with
the proper mixture to the FULL
COLD mark.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (21,1)
Vehicle Care
4. With the coolant surge tank
pressure cap off, start the
engine and let it run until the
upper radiator hose can be felt
getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level
inside the coolant surge tank
may be lower. If the level is
lower, add more of the proper
mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FULL
COLD mark.
10-21
5. Replace the pressure cap.
Be sure the pressure cap is
hand-tight and fully seated.
Engine Cooling System Messages
on page 5‑40 and Engine Power
Messages on page 5‑40.
6. Verify coolant level after engine
is shut off and the coolant is
cold. If necessary, repeat coolant
fill procedure Steps 1 through 6.
If the decision is made not to lift the
hood when this warning appears,
but instead get service help right
away. See Roadside Assistance
Program (U.S. and Canada) on
page 13‑7 or Roadside Assistance
Program (Mexico) on page 13‑9.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not
tightly installed, coolant loss and
possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has several indicators
to warn of engine overheating.
There is a coolant temperature
gauge on your vehicle's instrument
panel. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge on page 5‑16.
In addition, ENGINE OVERHEATED
STOP ENGINE, ENGINE
OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE,
and a ENGINE POWER IS
REDUCED message comes on in
the Driver Information Center (DIC)
on the instrument panel. See
If the decision is made to lift the
hood, make sure the vehicle is
parked on a level surface.
Then check to see if the engine
cooling fans are running. If the
engine is overheating, both fans
should be running. If they are not,
do not continue to run the engine
and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Engine damage from
running the engine without
coolant is not covered by the
vehicle warranty. See Overheated
Engine Protection Operating
Mode on page 10‑23 for
information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-22
Black plate (22,1)
Vehicle Care
Notice: If the engine catches fire
while driving with no coolant, the
vehicle can be badly damaged.
The costly repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
See Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode on
page 10‑23 for information on
driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
If Steam Is Coming from the
Engine Compartment
{ WARNING
Steam from an overheated engine
can burn you badly, even if you
just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
steam coming from it. Turn it off
and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down. Wait
until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open
the hood.
If you keep driving when the
vehicles engine is overheated,
the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned.
Stop the engine if it overheats,
and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
See Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode on
page 10‑23 for information on
driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
If No Steam Is Coming from
the Engine Compartment
The ENGINE OVERHEATED
STOP ENGINE or the ENGINE
OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
message, along with a low coolant
condition, can indicate a serious
problem.
If an engine overheat warning is
displayed but no steam can be seen
or heard, the problem may not be
too serious. Sometimes the engine
can get a little too hot when the
vehicle:
.
Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
.
Stops after high-speed driving.
.
Idles for long periods in traffic.
.
Tows a trailer. See Trailer
Towing on page 9‑77.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (23,1)
Vehicle Care
If the overheat warning is displayed
with no sign of steam:
1. Turn the air conditioning off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest
temperature and to the highest
fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine
idle in N (Neutral) while stopped.
If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to P (Park) or
N (Neutral) and let the
engine idle.
If the temperature overheat gauge
is no longer in the overheat zone
or an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven.
Continue to drive the vehicle slowly
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the vehicle in
front. If the warning does not come
back on, continue to drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over,
stop, and park the vehicle
right away.
If there is no sign of steam, idle
the engine for three minutes while
parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it
cools down. Also, see “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode”
later in this section.
Overheated Engine
Protection
Operating Mode
If an overheated engine condition
exists and the ENGINE POWER IS
REDUCED message is displayed,
an overheat protection mode which
alternates firing groups of cylinders
helps prevent engine damage. In
this mode, a loss in power and
engine performance will be noticed.
This operating mode allows the
vehicle to be driven to a safe place
in an emergency. Driving extended
distances and/or towing a trailer in
the overheat protection mode
should be avoided.
10-23
Notice: After driving in the
overheated engine protection
operating mode, to avoid engine
damage, allow the engine to cool
before attempting any repair.
The engine oil will be severely
degraded. Repair the cause of
coolant loss, change the oil and
reset the oil life system. See
Engine Oil on page 10‑8.
Engine Fan
If the vehicle has a clutched engine
cooling fan, when the clutch is
engaged, the fan spins faster to
provide more air to cool the engine.
In most everyday driving conditions,
the fan is spinning slower and the
clutch is not fully engaged. This
improves fuel economy and reduces
fan noise. Under heavy vehicle
loading, trailer towing, and/or high
outside temperatures, the fan speed
increases as the clutch more fully
engages, so an increase in fan
noise may be heard. This is normal
and should not be mistaken as the
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-24
Black plate (24,1)
Vehicle Care
transmission slipping or making
extra shifts. It is merely the cooling
system functioning properly. The fan
will slow down when additional
cooling is not required and the
clutch disengages.
Power Steering Fluid
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
hybrid supplement for more
information.
This fan noise may also be heard
when starting the engine. It will go
away as the fan clutch partially
disengages.
If the vehicle has electric cooling
fans, the fans may be heard
spinning at low speed during most
everyday driving. The fans may turn
off if no cooling is required. Under
heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing,
high outside temperatures,
or operation of the air conditioning
system, the fans may change to
high speed and an increase in fan
noise may be heard. This is normal
and indicates that the cooling
system is functioning properly. The
fans will change to low speed when
additional cooling is no longer
required.
How to Check Power Steering
Fluid
To check the power steering fluid:
1. Turn the key off and let the
engine compartment cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the
reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the
dipstick with a clean rag.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6 for reservoir location.
When to Check Power Steering
Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly
check power steering fluid unless
there is a leak suspected in the
system or an unusual noise is
heard. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the
system inspected and repaired.
4. Replace the cap and completely
tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look
at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL
COLD mark. If necessary, add only
enough fluid to bring the level up to
the mark.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (25,1)
Vehicle Care
What to Use
Adding Washer Fluid
To determine what kind of fluid to
use, see Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑7. Always
use the proper fluid.
The vehicle has a low washer fluid
message on the DIC that comes
on when the washer fluid is low.
The message is displayed for
15 seconds at the start of each
ignition cycle. When the WASHER
FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message
displays, washer fluid will need to
be added to the windshield washer
fluid reservoir.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid
may damage the vehicle and the
damages may not be covered by
the vehicle's warranty. Always
use the correct fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑7.
Washer Fluid
Notice
.
When using concentrated
washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer's instructions
for adding water.
.
Do not mix water with
ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution
to freeze and damage the
washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean
as well as washer fluid.
.
Fill the washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is
very cold. This allows for
fluid expansion if freezing
occurs, which could damage
the tank if it is
completely full.
.
Do not use engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the windshield
washer. It can damage the
windshield washer system
and paint.
What to Use
When windshield washer fluid needs
to be added, be sure to read the
manufacturer's instructions before
use. Use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing in an
area where the temperature may
fall below freezing.
Open the cap with the washer
symbol on it. Add washer fluid
until the tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6 for reservoir location.
10-25
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-26
Black plate (26,1)
Vehicle Care
Brakes
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc
brake pads have built-in wear
indicators that make a high-pitched
warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed.
The sound can come and go or be
heard all the time the vehicle is
moving, except when applying the
brake pedal firmly.
{ WARNING
The brake wear warning sound
means that soon the brakes will
not work well. That could lead to
a crash. When the brake wear
warning sound is heard, have the
vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with
worn-out brake pads could result
in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates
can cause a brake squeal when the
brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean
something is wrong with the brakes.
Brake Adjustment
Properly torqued wheel nuts are
necessary to help prevent brake
pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and
evenly tighten wheel nuts in the
proper sequence to torque
specifications in Capacities and
Specifications on page 12‑2.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Brake linings should always be
replaced as complete axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal
does not return to normal height,
or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign
that brake service might be
required.
Every time the brakes are applied,
with or without the vehicle moving,
the brakes adjust for wear.
The braking system on a vehicle is
complex. Its many parts have to be
of top quality and work well together
if the vehicle is to have really good
braking. The vehicle was designed
and tested with top-quality brake
parts. When parts of the braking
system are replaced, be sure to get
new, approved replacement parts.
If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example,
installing disc brake pads that are
wrong for the vehicle, can change
the balance between the front and
rear brakes — for the worse. The
braking performance expected can
change in many other ways if the
wrong replacement brake parts are
installed.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (27,1)
Vehicle Care
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder reservoir
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. See
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6 for the location of the
reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the
brake fluid level in the reservoir
might go down:
.
The brake fluid level goes down
because of normal brake lining
wear. When new linings are
installed, the fluid level goes
back up.
.
A fluid leak in the brake
hydraulic system can also cause
a low fluid level. Have the brake
hydraulic system fixed, since a
leak means that sooner or later
the brakes will not work well.
Do not top off the brake fluid.
Adding fluid does not correct a leak.
If fluid is added when the linings are
worn, there will be too much fluid
when new brake linings are
installed. Add or remove brake fluid,
as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
{ WARNING
10-27
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
to determine when to check the
brake fluid. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 11‑3.
Checking Brake Fluid
Check brake fluid by looking at the
brake fluid reservoir. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6.
If too much brake fluid is added, it
can spill on the engine and burn,
if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and
the vehicle could be damaged.
Add brake fluid only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic
system. See “Checking Brake
Fluid” in this section.
When the brake fluid falls to a low
level, the brake warning light comes
on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 5‑23.
The fluid level should be above
MIN. If it is not, have the brake
hydraulic system checked to see if
there is a leak.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-28
Black plate (28,1)
Vehicle Care
After work is done on the brake
hydraulic system, make sure the
level is above the MIN but not over
the MAX mark.
Notice
.
What to Add
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid
from a sealed container. See
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑7.
Always clean the brake fluid
reservoir cap and the area around
the cap before removing it. This
helps keep dirt from entering the
reservoir.
{ WARNING
With the wrong kind of fluid in the
brake hydraulic system, the
brakes might not work well. This
could cause a crash. Always use
the proper brake fluid.
.
Using the wrong fluid
can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For
example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as
engine oil, in the brake
hydraulic system can
damage brake hydraulic
system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in
the wrong kind of fluid.
If brake fluid is spilled on the
vehicle's painted surfaces,
the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not
to spill brake fluid on the
vehicle. If you do, wash it
off immediately.
Battery
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
hybrid supplement for more
information.
Refer to the replacement number on
the original battery label when a
new battery is needed. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6 for battery location.
{ DANGER
Battery posts, terminals, and
related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Wash hands after handling.
Vehicle Storage
{ WARNING
Batteries have acid that can burn
you and gas that can explode.
You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 10‑83 for tips on working
around a battery without
getting hurt.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (29,1)
Vehicle Care
Infrequent Usage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery to keep the battery from
running down.
How to Check Lubricant
10-29
When to Change Lubricant
Refer to Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑3 to determine how often to
change the lubricant.
Extended Storage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery or use a battery trickle
charger.
What to Use
Four-Wheel Drive
Refer to Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑7 to
determine what kind of lubricant
to use.
Transfer Case
Front Axle
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑3 to determine when to
check the lubricant.
Active Transfer Case
A. Fill Plug
B. Drain Plug
To get an accurate reading, the
vehicle should be on a level
surface.
If the level is below the bottom of
the fill plug hole, some lubricant will
need to be added. Add enough
lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the fill plug hole. Use
care not to overtighten the plug.
When to Check and Change
Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly
check front axle fluid unless a leak
is suspected, or an unusual noise is
heard. A fluid loss could indicate a
problem. Have it inspected and
repaired.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-30
Black plate (30,1)
Vehicle Care
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
To get an accurate reading, the
vehicle should be on a level
surface.
Refer to Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑7 to
determine what kind of lubricant
to use.
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
All Except 1500 Series
A. Fill Plug
B. Drain Plug
1500 Series
.
When the differential is cold, add
enough lubricant to raise the
level from 0 mm (0 in) to 3.2 mm
(1/8 in) below the fill plug hole.
.
When the differential is at
operating temperature (warm),
add enough lubricant to raise the
level to the bottom of the fill
plug hole.
A. Fill Plug
B. Drain Plug
It is not necessary to regularly
check rear axle fluid unless there is
a leak suspected, or an unusual
noise is heard. A fluid loss could
indicate a problem. Have it
inspected and repaired.
All axle assemblies are filled by
volume of fluid during production.
They are not filled to reach a certain
level. When checking the fluid level
on any axle, variations in the
readings can be caused by factory
fill differences between the minimum
and the maximum fluid volume.
Also, if a vehicle has just been
driven before checking the fluid
level, it may appear lower than
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (31,1)
Vehicle Care
normal because fluid has traveled
out along the axle tubes and has
not drained back to the sump area.
Therefore, a reading taken
five minutes after the vehicle has
been driven will appear to have a
lower fluid level than a vehicle that
has been stationary for an hour or
two. Remember that the rear axle
assembly must be supported to get
a true reading.
fill plug hole, located at the front
of the axle. Add only enough
fluid to reach the proper level.
Starter Switch Check
{ WARNING
How to Check Lubricant
2500 Series
To get an accurate reading, the
vehicle should be on a level
surface.
.
.
1500 Series
10-31
For the 1500 series, the proper
level is from 1.0 mm to 19.0 mm
(0.04 in to 0.75 in) below the
bottom of the fill plug hole,
located on the rear axle. Add
only enough fluid to reach the
proper level.
For the 2500 series, the proper
level is from 0 mm to 13 mm (0 in
to 1/2 in) below the bottom of the
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be
injured.
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking
brake and the regular brake.
See Parking Brake on
page 9‑51.
Do not use the accelerator
pedal, and be ready to turn off
the engine immediately if it
starts.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-32
Black plate (32,1)
Vehicle Care
3. Try to start the engine in each
gear. The vehicle should start
only in P (Park) or N (Neutral).
If the vehicle starts in any other
position, contact your dealer for
service.
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Control
Function Check
{ WARNING
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be
injured.
Be ready to apply the regular
brake immediately if the vehicle
begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the
ignition on, but do not start the
engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the
shift lever out of P (Park) with
normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact
your dealer for service.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
See Parking Brake on
page 9‑51.
{ WARNING
When you are doing this check,
the vehicle could begin to move.
You or others could be injured
and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front
of the vehicle in case it begins to
roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move.
Ignition Transmission
Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking
brake set, try to turn the ignition to
LOCK/OFF in each shift lever
position.
.
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle. It should be
parked on a level surface.
Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check
.
The ignition should turn to
LOCK/OFF only when the shift
lever is in P (Park).
The ignition key should come
out only in LOCK/OFF.
Contact your dealer if service is
required.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
your foot on the regular brake, set
the parking brake.
.
To check the parking brake's
holding ability: With the engine
running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (33,1)
Vehicle Care
.
To check the P (Park)
mechanism's holding ability:
With the engine running, shift
to P (Park). Then release the
parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your dealer if service is
required.
Wiper Blade Replacement
Rear Wiper Blade Replacement
1. Lift the wiper blade assembly up
and out of the park rest position.
2. Squeeze the grooved areas on
each side of the blade, and turn
the blade assembly away from
the arm connector.
Windshield wiper blades should
be inspected for wear or cracking.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑3.
2. Pull the wiper blade assembly
away from the backglass. The
backglass wiper blade will not
lock in a vertical position, so
care should be used when
pulling it away from the vehicle.
Replacement blades come in
different types and are removed in
different ways.
Front Wiper Blade
Replacement
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm
connector away from the
windshield.
10-33
3. Install the new blade onto the
arm connector and make sure
the grooved areas are fully set in
the locked position.
For the proper type and size, see
Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 11‑9.
3. Turn the wiper blade assembly,
and pull it off of the wiper arm.
Hold the wiper arm in position
and push the blade away from
the wiper arm.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-34
Black plate (34,1)
Vehicle Care
Headlamp Aiming
4. Replace the wiper blade.
5. Return the wiper blade assembly
to the park rest position.
Glass Replacement
If the windshield or front side glass
must be replaced, see your dealer
to determine the correct
replacement glass.
The vehicle has a visual optical
headlamp aiming system. The aim
of the headlamps has been preset
at the factory and should need no
further adjustment.
However, if the vehicle is damaged
in a crash, the aim of the headlamps
may be affected and adjustment
may be necessary.
If oncoming vehicles flash their high
beams at you, this may mean the
vertical aim of the headlamps needs
to be adjusted.
It is recommended that the vehicle
be taken to your dealer for service if
the headlamps need to be adjusted.
It is possible, however, to re-aim the
headlamps as described.
The vehicle should:
.
Be placed so the headlamps
are 7.6 m (25 ft) from a
light‐colored wall.
.
Have all four tires on a level
surface which is level all the
way to the wall.
.
Be placed so it is perpendicular
to the wall.
.
Not have any snow, ice, or mud
on it.
.
Be fully assembled and all other
work stopped while headlamp
aiming is being performed.
.
Be loaded with a full tank of fuel
and one person or 75 kg
(160 lbs) sitting on the
driver seat.
.
Have the tires properly inflated.
.
Have the spare tire in its proper
location in the vehicle.
Headlamp aiming is done with the
vehicle's low-beam headlamps.
The high-beam headlamps will be
correctly aimed if the low-beam
headlamps are aimed properly.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (35,1)
Vehicle Care
10-35
6. Turn on the low-beam
headlamps and place a piece of
cardboard or equivalent in front
of the headlamp not being
adjusted. This allows only the
beam of light from the headlamp
being adjusted to be seen on the
flat surface.
To adjust the vertical aim:
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 10‑5
4. At a wall, measure from the
ground upward (A) to the
recorded distance from
Step 3 and mark it.
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of
the low‐beam headlamp.
3. Record the distance from the
ground to the aim dot on the
low‐beam headlamp.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)
on the wall the width of the
vehicle at the height of the mark
in Step 4.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp
to improve beam cut-off when
aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up
which may cause damage to the
headlamp.
7. Locate the vertical headlamp
aiming screws, which are under
the hood near each headlamp
assembly.
The adjustment screw can be
turned with an E8 Torx® socket.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-36
Black plate (36,1)
Vehicle Care
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw
until the headlamp beam is
aimed to the horizontal tape line.
Turn it clockwise or
counterclockwise to raise or
lower the angle of the beam.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
page 10‑38.
For any bulb‐changing procedure
not listed in this section, contact
your dealer.
Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Stoplamps, and Back-Up
Lamps
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
hybrid supplement for the bulb
changing procedure.
Halogen Bulbs
{ WARNING
9. Make sure that the light from the
headlamp is positioned at the
bottom edge of the horizontal
tape line. The lamp on the
left (A) shows the correct
headlamp aim. The lamp on the
right (B) shows the incorrect
headlamp aim.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for
the opposite headlamp.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you
drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure
to read and follow the instructions
on the bulb package.
A. Stoplamp/Taillamp
B. Back-up Lamp
C. Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamp
D. Side Marker Lamp
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (37,1)
Vehicle Care
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
(Power) on page 2‑10 or Liftgate
(Manual) on page 2‑12.
4. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise to remove it
from the taillamp assembly.
10-37
License Plate Lamp
5. Pull the old bulb straight out
from the bulb socket.
6. Press a new bulb into the bulb
socket and install the socket into
the taillamp assembly by turning
it clockwise.
7. Reinstall the taillamp assembly.
When reinstalling, make sure to
line up the pins on the taillamp
assembly with the vehicle.
If this is not done, the taillamp
assembly will not be able to
be installed correctly.
2. Remove the two screws from
the taillamp assembly.
3. Pull the taillamp assembly
rearward disengaging the
two outer pins on the taillamp
assembly from the vehicle.
1. Remove the two screws holding
each of the license plate lamps
to the molding that is part of the
liftgate.
2. Twist and pull the license plate
lamp assembly forward through
the molding opening.
3. Remove the bulb socket from
the lamp assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-38
Black plate (38,1)
Vehicle Care
4. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket and install the new bulb.
Electrical System
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to
reinstall the license plate lamp.
Electrical System
Overload
Replacement Bulbs
The vehicle has fuses and circuit
breakers to protect against an
electrical system overload.
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
hybrid supplement for more
information.
Exterior Lamp
Back-up Lamp
Bulb
Number
7441
License Plate Lamp
W5WLL
Rear Turn Signal
Lamp, Taillamp, and
Stoplamp
3057K
Side Marker Lamp
194
For replacement bulbs not listed
here, contact your dealer.
When the current electrical load is
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
and closes, protecting the circuit
until the current load returns to
normal or the problem is fixed. This
greatly reduces the chance of circuit
overload and fire caused by
electrical problems.
Fuses and circuit breakers protect
the following in the vehicle:
.
Headlamp Wiring
.
Windshield Wiper Motor
.
Power Windows and Other
Power Accessories
Replace a bad fuse with a new one
of the identical size and rating.
If there is a problem on the road and
a fuse needs to be replaced, the
same amperage fuse can be
borrowed. Choose some feature of
the vehicle that is not needed to use
and replace it as soon as possible.
Headlamp Wiring
An electrical overload may cause
the lamps to go on and off, or in
some cases to remain off. Have the
headlamp wiring checked right away
if the lamps go on and off or
remain off.
Windshield Wipers
If the wiper motor overheats due to
heavy snow or ice, the windshield
wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart.
Although the circuit is protected
from electrical overload, overload
due to heavy snow or ice may
cause wiper linkage damage.
Always clear ice and heavy snow
from the windshield before using
the windshield wipers.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (39,1)
Vehicle Care
If the overload is caused by an
electrical problem and not snow or
ice, be sure to get it fixed.
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
hybrid supplement for more
information.
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
protected from short circuits by a
combination of fuses, circuit
breakers and fusible thermal links.
This greatly reduces the chance of
fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band
inside the fuse. If the band is broken
or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
you replace a bad fuse with a new
one of the identical size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the
road and don't have a spare fuse,
you can borrow one that has the
same amperage. Just pick some
feature of your vehicle that you can
get along without – like the radio or
cigarette lighter – and use its fuse,
if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block
The Engine Compartment Fuse
Block is located in the engine
compartment, on the driver side of
the vehicle. Lift the cover for access
to the fuse/relay block.
10-39
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
hybrid supplement for more
information.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical component on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component.
To remove fuses, hold the end of
the fuse between your thumb and
index finger and pull straight out.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-40
Vehicle Care
Black plate (40,1)
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (41,1)
Vehicle Care
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
Fuses
Usage
1
2
Right Trailer Stop/
Turn Lamp
Electronic Stability
Suspension Control,
Automatic Level
Control Exhaust
Fuses
Usage
10
Trailer Back-up
Lamps
11
Driver Side
Low-Beam Headlamp
12
Engine Control
Module (Battery)
13
Fuel Injectors, Ignition
Coils (Right Side)
14
Transmission Control
Module (Battery)
15
Vehicle Back-up
Lamps
16
Passenger Side
Low-Beam Headlamp
Air Conditioning
Compressor
3
Left Trailer Stop/
Turn Lamp
4
Engine Controls
5
Engine Control
Module, Throttle
Control
6
Trailer Brake
Controller
17
7
Front Washer
18
Oxygen Sensors
8
Oxygen Sensors
19
9
Antilock Brakes
System 2
Transmission Controls
(Ignition)
20
Fuel Pump
Fuses
10-41
Usage
21
Fuel System Control
Module
22
Headlamp Washer
23
Rear Windshield
Washer
24
Fuel Injectors, Ignition
Coils (Left Side)
25
Trailer Park Lamps
26
Driver Side Park
Lamps
27
Passenger Side Park
Lamps
28
Fog Lamps
29
Horn
30
Passenger Side
High-Beam Headlamp
31
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL)
(If Equipped)
32
Driver Side
High-Beam Headlamp
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-42
Black plate (42,1)
Vehicle Care
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
33
Daytime Running
Lamps 2 (If Equipped)
45
Airbag System
(Battery)
34
Sunroof
46
35
Key Ignition System,
Theft Deterrent
System
Instrument Panel
Cluster
47
Not Used
36
Windshield Wiper
48
Auxiliary Climate
Control (Ignition)
57
Cooling Fan 1
37
SEO B2 Upfitter
Usage (Battery)
49
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
58
Automatic Level
Control Compressor
38
Electric Adjustable
Pedals
50
Rear Defogger
59
Heavy Duty Antilock
Braking System
51
Heated Mirrors
60
Cooling Fan 2
39
Climate Controls
(Battery)
52
SEO B1 Upfitter
Usage (Battery)
61
40
Airbag System
(Ignition)
Antilock Brake
System 1
53
Cigarette Lighter,
Auxiliary Power Outlet
62
Starter
41
Amplifier
63
42
Audio System
54
Stud 2 (Trailer
Brakes)
64
43
Miscellaneous
(Ignition), Cruise
Control
Automatic Level
Control Compressor
Relay
Left Bussed Electrical
Center 1
65
Electric Running
Boards
44
Liftgate Release
55
Usage
Climate Controls
(Ignition)
Fuses
56
Usage
Engine Control
Module, Secondary
Fuel Pump (Ignition)
J-Case
Fuses
Usage
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (43,1)
Vehicle Care
J-Case
Fuses
Usage
66
Heated Windshield
Washer System
67
Transfer Case
68
Stud 1 (Trailer
Connector Battery
Power)
69
Mid-Bussed Electrical
Center 1
70
Climate Control
Blower
71
Power Liftgate
Module
72
Relays
Left Bussed Electrical
Center 2
Usage
FAN HI
Cooling Fan High
Speed
FAN LO
Cooling Fan Low
Speed
Relays
Usage
FAN
CNTRL
Cooling Fan Control
HDLP
LO/HID
Low-Beam Headlamp
FOG
LAMP
Front Fog Lamps
A/C
CMPRSR
Air Conditioning
Compressor
STRTR
Starter
10-43
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block
PWR/TRN Powertrain
FUEL
PMP
Fuel Pump
PRK
LAMP
Parking Lamps
REAR
DEFOG
Rear Defogger
RUN/
CRNK
Switched Power
The instrument panel fuse block
access door is located on the driver
side edge of the instrument panel.
Pull off the cover to access the fuse
block.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-44
Black plate (44,1)
Vehicle Care
Fuses
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
Fuses
Usage
1
Rear Seats
2
Rear Accessory
Power Outlet
Fuses
Usage
3
Steering Wheel
Controls Backlight
4
Driver Door Module
5
Dome Lamps, Driver
Side Turn Signal
6
Driver Side Turn
Signal, Stoplamp
Usage
7
Instrument Panel
Back Lighting
8
Passenger Side Turn
Signal, Stoplamp
9
Passenger Door
Module, Driver Unlock
10
Power Door Lock 2
(Unlock Feature)
11
Power Door Lock 2
(Lock Feature)
12
Stoplamps, Center
High‐ Mounted
Stoplamp
13
Rear Climate Controls
14
Power Mirror
15
Body Control
Module (BCM)
16
Accessory Power
Outlets
17
Interior Lamps
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (45,1)
Vehicle Care
Fuses
Usage
Circuit
Breaker
Usage
18
Power Door Lock 1
(Unlock Feature)
19
Rear Seat
Entertainment
20
Ultrasonic Rear
Parking Assist, Power
Liftgate
21
Power Door Lock 1
(Lock Feature)
LT DR
Driver Door
Harness
Connection
22
Driver Information
Center (DIC)
BODY
Harness Connector
23
Rear Wiper
BODY
Harness Connector
24
Cooled Seats
25
Driver Seat Module,
Remote Keyless Entry
System
26
Driver Power Door
Lock (Unlock Feature)
LT DR
Harness
Connector
10-45
Top View
Driver Side Power
Window Circuit
Breaker
Usage
Center Instrument Panel Fuse
Block
The center instrument panel fuse
block is located underneath the
instrument panel, to the left of the
steering column.
Harness
Connector
Usage
BODY 2
Body Harness
Connector 2
BODY 1
Body Harness
Connector 1
BODY 3
Body Harness
Connector 3
HEADLINER Headliner Harness
3
Connector 3
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-46
Vehicle Care
Harness
Connector
Wheels and Tires
HEADLINER Headliner Harness
1
Connector 1
SEO/
UPFITTER
CB1
WARNING (Continued)
Usage
HEADLINER Headliner Harness
2
Connector 2
Circuit
Breaker
Black plate (46,1)
Special Equipment
Option Upfitter
Harness Connector
Usage
Passenger Side
Power Window Circuit
Breaker
CB2
Passenger Seat
Circuit Breaker
CB3
Driver Seat Circuit
Breaker
CB4
Rear Sliding Window
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with
high-quality tires made by a
leading tire manufacturer. If you
ever have questions about your
tire warranty and where to
obtain service, see your vehicle
Warranty booklet for details. For
additional information refer to
the tire manufacturer.
.
Underinflated tires pose the
same danger as overloaded
tires. The resulting crash
could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when the
tires are cold.
.
Overinflated tires are more
likely to be cut, punctured,
or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when
hitting a pothole. Keep tires at
the recommended pressure.
.
Worn or old tires can cause a
crash. If the tread is badly
worn, replace them.
.
Replace any tires that have
been damaged by impacts
with potholes, curbs, etc.
(Continued)
{ WARNING
.
.
Poorly maintained and
improperly used tires are
dangerous.
Overloading the tires can
cause overheating as a result
of too much flexing. There
could be a blowout and a
serious crash. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑22.
(Continued)
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (47,1)
Vehicle Care
WARNING (Continued)
.
Improperly repaired tires can
cause a crash. Only the
dealer or an authorized tire
service center should repair,
replace, dismount, and mount
the tires.
.
Do not spin the tires in
excess of 55 km/h (35 mph)
on slippery surfaces such
as snow, mud, ice, etc.
Excessive spinning may
cause the tires to explode.
20‐Inch Tires
If your vehicle has the optional
20‐inch P275/55R20 size tires,
they are classified as touring
tires and are designed for on
road use. The low‐profile,
wide tread design is not
recommended for off‐road
driving. See Off-Road Driving on
page 9‑6, for additional
information.
Notice: If the vehicle has
low‐profile tires, they are more
susceptible to damage from
road hazards or curb impact
than standard profile tires.
Tire and/or wheel assembly
damage can occur when
coming into contact with
road hazards like, potholes,
or sharp edged objects,
or when sliding into a curb.
The vehicle warranty does
not cover this type of damage.
Keep tires set to the correct
inflation pressure and, when
possible avoid contact with
curbs, potholes, and other
road hazards.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire
is molded into the sidewall.
The following illustrations are
examples of a typical P‐Metric
and a LT‐Metric tire sidewall.
10-47
Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size
code is a combination of letters
and numbers used to define a
particular tire's width, height,
aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the
“Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria
Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-48
Black plate (48,1)
Vehicle Care
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet or
exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of
Transportation): The
Department of Transportation
(DOT) code indicates that the
tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number
(TIN): The letters and numbers
following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The
TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date
the tire was manufactured. The
TIN is molded onto both sides of
the tire, although only one side
may have the date of
manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material : The type
of cord and number of plies in
the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality
Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required
to grade tires based on
three performance factors:
treadwear, traction, and
temperature resistance. For
more information, see Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on
page 10‑63.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit: Maximum load
that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed
to support that load. For
information on recommended
tire pressure see Tire Pressure
on page 10‑53 and Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑22.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size
code is a combination of letters
and numbers used to define a
particular tire's width, height,
aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the
“Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria
Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (49,1)
Vehicle Care
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet or
exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load:
Maximum load that can be
carried and the maximum
pressure needed to support that
load when used in a dual
configuration. For information on
recommended tire pressure see
Tire Pressure on page 10‑53
and Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑22.
(D) DOT (Department of
Transportation): The
Department of Transportation
(DOT) code indicates that the
tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(E) Tire Identification Number
(TIN): The letters and numbers
following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The
TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date
the tire was manufactured. The
TIN is molded onto both sides of
the tire, although only one side
may have the date of
manufacture.
(F) Tire Ply Material : The type
of cord and number of plies in
the sidewall and under the tread.
(G) Single Tire Maximum
Load: Maximum load that can
be carried and the maximum
pressure needed to support that
load when used as a single. For
information on recommended
tire pressure see Tire Pressure
on page 10‑53 and Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑22.
10-49
Tire Designations
Tire Size
The following examples show
the different parts of a tire size.
Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire
(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:
The United States version of a
metric tire sizing system. The
letter P as the first character in
the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to
standards set by the U.S.
Tire and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three‐digit
number indicates the tire section
width in millimeters from
sidewall to sidewall.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-50
Black plate (50,1)
Vehicle Care
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit
number that indicates the tire
height‐to‐width measurements.
For example, if the tire size
aspect ratio is 75, as shown in
item C of the tire illustration, it
would mean that the tire's
sidewall is 75 percent as high
as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A
letter code is used to indicate
the type of ply construction in
the tire. The letter R means
radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or
bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted‐bias ply
construction.
(E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of
the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: These
characters represent the load
index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents
the load carrying capacity a tire
is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a
tire is certified to carry a load.
Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire
(A) Light Truck (LT‐Metric)
Tire: The United States version
of a metric tire sizing system.
The letters LT as the first two
characters in the tire size means
a light truck tire engineered to
standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three‐digit
number indicates the tire section
width in millimeters from
sidewall to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit
number that indicates the tire
height‐to‐width measurements.
For example, if the tire size
aspect ratio is 75, as shown
in item C of the light truck
(LT‐Metric) tire illustration, it
would mean that the tire's
sidewall is 75 percent as
high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A
letter code is used to indicate
the type of ply construction in
the tire. The letter R means
radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or
bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted‐bias ply
construction.
(E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of
the wheel in inches.
(F) Load Range : Load Range.
(G) Service Description: The
service description indicates the
load index and speed rating of a
tire. If two numbers are given as
in the example, 120/116, then
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (51,1)
Vehicle Care
this represents the load index for
single versus dual wheel usage
(single/dual). The speed rating is
the maximum speed a tire is
certified to carry a load.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of
cords that is located between
the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other
reinforcing materials.
Tire Terminology and
Definitions
Bead: The tire bead contains
steel wires wrapped by steel
cords that hold the tire onto
the rim.
Air Pressure: The amount of
air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch
of the tire. Air pressure is
expressed in kPa (kilopascal)
or psi (pounds per square inch).
Accessory Weight: The
combined weight of optional
accessories. Some examples
of optional accessories are
automatic transmission, power
steering, power brakes, power
windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship
of a tire's height to its width.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire
in which the plies are laid at
alternate angles less than
90 degrees to the centerline
of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The
amount of air pressure in a tire,
measured in kPa (kilopascal)
or psi (pounds per square inch)
before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Tire Pressure
on page 10‑53.
Curb Weight: The weight of a
motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
10-51
maximum capacity of fuel, oil,
and coolant, but without
passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded
into the sidewall of a tire
signifying that the tire is in
compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation
(DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
designator which can also
identify the tire manufacturer,
production plant, brand, and
date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑22.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the front axle. See
Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑22.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-52
Black plate (52,1)
Vehicle Care
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the rear axle. See
Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑22.
Maximum Load Rating: The
load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the same
moldings on the other sidewall
of the tire.
Intended Outboard Sidewall :
The side of an asymmetrical tire,
that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle
Weight: The sum of curb
weight, accessory weight,
vehicle capacity weight, and
production options weight.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A
tire used on passenger cars and
some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A
tire used on light duty trucks and
some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned
number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure:
The maximum air pressure to
which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is
molded onto the sidewall.
Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle
is designed to seat multiplied by
68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑22.
Occupant Distribution :
Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire that
has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a
vehicle. The side of the tire that
contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or
Recommended Inflation
Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer's recommended
tire inflation pressure as shown
on the tire placard. See Tire
Pressure on page 10‑53
andVehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑22.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic
tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire
and upon which the tire beads
are seated.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (53,1)
Vehicle Care
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating: An
alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum
speed at which a tire can
operate.
Traction: The friction between
the tire and the road surface.
The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire
that comes into contact with
the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called wear
bars, that show across the tread
of a tire when only 1.6 mm
(1/16 in) of tread remains. See
When It Is Time for New Tires
on page 10‑60.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards): A tire
information system that provides
consumers with ratings for a
10-53
tire's traction, temperature,
and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire
manufacturers using
government testing procedures.
The ratings are molded into the
sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on
page 10‑63.
recommended inflation pressure.
See “Tire and Loading
Information Label” under Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑22.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The
number of designated seating
positions multiplied by
68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated
cargo load. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑22.
Tires need the correct amount of
air pressure to operate
effectively.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire
due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and
cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label
permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle
capacity weight and the original
equipment tire size and
Tire Pressure
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
hybrid supplement for more
information.
Notice: Neither tire
underinflation nor
overinflation is good.
Underinflated tires, or tires
that do not have enough air,
can result in:
.
Tire overloading and
over-heating which could
lead to a blowout.
.
Premature or
irregular wear.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-54
Black plate (54,1)
Vehicle Care
.
Poor handling.
.
Reduced fuel economy.
Overinflated tires, or tires that
have too much air, can
result in:
.
Unusual wear.
.
Poor handling.
.
Rough ride.
.
Needless damage from
road hazards.
A vehicle specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
attached to your vehicle. This
label shows your vehicle's
original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for
your tires when they are cold.
The recommended cold tire
inflation pressure, shown on the
label, is the minimum amount of
air pressure needed to support
your vehicle's maximum load
carrying capacity.
For additional information
regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an
example of the Tire and Loading
Information label, see Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑22. How
you load your vehicle affects
vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle
with more weight than it was
designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month
or more.
Do not forget to check the
pressure of the spare tire.
See Full-Size Spare Tire on
page 10‑82 for additional
information.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type
gauge to check tire pressure.
You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by
looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when
they are underinflated. Check
the tire's inflation pressure when
the tires are cold. Cold means
your vehicle has been sitting for
at least three hours or driven no
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
Remove the valve cap from the
tire valve stem. Press the tire
gauge firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement.
If the cold tire inflation pressure
matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and
Loading Information label, no
further adjustment is necessary.
If the pressure is low, add air
until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air
by pushing on the metal stem in
the center of the tire valve.
Recheck the tire pressure with
the tire gauge.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (55,1)
Vehicle Care
Be sure to put the valve caps
back on the valve stems. They
help prevent leaks by keeping
out dirt and moisture.
Tire Pressure Monitor
System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor
technology to check tire pressure
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
the air pressure in your tires and
transmit tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare
(if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or
tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more
of your tires is significantly under‐
inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under‐inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is
not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under‐inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
10-55
Your vehicle has also been
equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start‐ups as
long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-56
Black plate (56,1)
Vehicle Care
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 10‑56 for
additional information.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and
Industry Canada
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑18 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-210/220/310.
Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
hybrid supplement for more
information.
This vehicle may have a Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
The TPMS is designed to warn the
driver when a low tire pressure
condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel
assembly, excluding the spare tire
and wheel assembly. The TPMS
sensors monitor the air pressure in
the tires and transmit the tire
pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
When a low tire pressure condition
is detected, the TPMS illuminates
the low tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument cluster.
If the warning light comes on, stop
as soon as possible and inflate the
tires to the recommended pressure
shown on the tire loading
information label. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑22.
A message to check the pressure in
a specific tire displays in the Driver
Information Center (DIC). The low
tire pressure warning light and the
DIC warning message come on at
each ignition cycle until the tires are
inflated to the correct inflation
pressure. Using the DIC, tire
pressure levels can be viewed. For
additional information and details
about the DIC operation and
displays see Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑27 and Tire
Messages on page 5‑44.
The low tire pressure warning light
may come on in cool weather when
the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This
could be an early indicator that the
air pressure is getting low and
needs to be inflated to the proper
pressure.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (57,1)
Vehicle Care
A Tire and Loading Information label
shows the size of the original
equipment tires and the correct
inflation pressure for the tires when
they are cold. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑22, for an example
of the Tire and Loading Information
label and its location. Also see Tire
Pressure on page 10‑53.
The TPMS can warn about a
low tire pressure condition but it
does not replace normal tire
maintenance. See Tire Inspection
on page 10‑59, Tire Rotation on
page 10‑59 and Tires on
page 10‑46.
Notice: Tire sealant materials are
not all the same. A non-approved
tire sealant could damage the
TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor
damage caused by using an
incorrect tire sealant is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use only the
GM-approved tire sealant
available through your dealer or
included in the vehicle.
TPMS Malfunction Light and
Message
The TPMS will not function properly
if one or more of the TPMS sensors
are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the
low tire warning light flashes for
about one minute and then stays on
for the remainder of the ignition
cycle. A DIC warning message also
displays. The malfunction light and
DIC warning message come on at
each ignition cycle until the problem
is corrected. Some of the conditions
that can cause these to come
on are:
.
One of the road tires has been
replaced with the spare tire.
The spare tire does not have a
TPMS sensor. The malfunction
light and DIC message should
go off after the road tire is
replaced and the sensor
matching process is performed
successfully. See "TPMS Sensor
Matching Process" later in this
section.
10-57
.
The TPMS sensor matching
process was not done or not
completed successfully after
rotating the tires. The
malfunction light and the DIC
message should go off after
successfully completing the
sensor matching process. See
"TPMS Sensor Matching
Process" later in this section.
.
One or more TPMS sensors
are missing or damaged. The
malfunction light and the DIC
message should go off when the
TPMS sensors are installed and
the sensor matching process is
performed successfully. See
your dealer for service.
.
Replacement tires or wheels do
not match the original equipment
tires or wheels. Tires and wheels
other than those recommended
could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying
New Tires on page 10‑61.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-58
.
Black plate (58,1)
Vehicle Care
Operating electronic devices or
being near facilities using radio
wave frequencies similar to the
TPMS could cause the TPMS
sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning
properly, it cannot detect or signal a
low tire condition. See your dealer
for service if the TPMS malfunction
light and DIC message comes on
and stays on.
TPMS Sensor Matching
Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique
identification code. The identification
code needs to be matched to a new
tire/wheel position after rotating the
vehicle’s tires or replacing one or
more of the TPMS sensors. The
TPMS sensor matching process
should also be performed after
replacing a spare tire with a road
tire containing the TPMS sensor.
The malfunction light and the DIC
message should go off at the next
ignition cycle. The sensors are
matched to the tire/wheel positions,
using a TPMS relearn tool, in the
following order: driver side front tire,
passenger side front tire, passenger
side rear tire, and driver side rear.
See your dealer for service or to
purchase a relearn tool.
There are two minutes to match
the first tire/wheel position, and
five minutes overall to match all
four tire/wheel positions. If it takes
longer, the matching process stops
and must be restarted.
The TPMS sensor matching process
is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
the engine off.
3. Press Q and K on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
at the same time for
approximately five seconds. The
horn sounds twice to signal the
receiver is in relearn mode and
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
message displays on the DIC
screen.
4. Start with the driver side
front tire.
5. Place the relearn tool against
the tire sidewall, near the valve
stem. Then press the button to
activate the TPMS sensor.
A horn chirp confirms that the
sensor identification code has
been matched to this tire and
wheel position.
6. Proceed to the passenger side
front tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5.
7. Proceed to the passenger side
rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5.
8. Proceed to the driver side rear
tire, and repeat the procedure
in Step 5. The horn sounds
two times to indicate the sensor
identification code has been
matched to the driver side rear
tire, and the TPMS sensor
matching process is no longer
active. The TIRE LEARNING
ACTIVE message on the DIC
display screen goes off.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (59,1)
Vehicle Care
9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
10. Set all four tires to the
recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
Tire Inspection
GM recommends that the tires,
including the spare tire, if the
vehicle has one, be inspected
for signs of wear or damage at
least once a month.
Replace the tire if:
.
.
.
The indicators at three or
more places around the tire
can be seen.
There is cord or fabric
showing through the tire's
rubber.
The tread or sidewall is
cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or
fabric.
.
The tire has a bump, bulge,
or split.
.
The tire has a puncture, cut,
or other damage that cannot
be repaired well because of
the size or location of the
damage.
10-59
See When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 10‑60 and Wheel
Replacement on page 10‑65.
Tire Rotation
Tires should be rotated every
12 000 km (7,500 miles). See
Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑3.
The purpose of a regular tire
rotation is to achieve a uniform
wear for all tires on the vehicle.
This will ensure that the vehicle
continues to perform most like it
did when the tires were new.
When rotating the vehicle's tires,
always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate the tires as soon
as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for
damaged tires or wheels.
After the tires have been
rotated, adjust the front and rear
inflation pressures as shown on
the Tire and Loading Information
Do not include the spare tire in
the tire rotation.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-60
Black plate (60,1)
Vehicle Care
label. See Tire Pressure on
page 10‑53 and Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑22.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor
System. See Tire Pressure
Monitor Operation on
page 10‑56.
Make certain that all wheel nuts
are properly tightened. See
“Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on
page 12‑2.
{ WARNING
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, use a cloth or a
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust
or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 10‑66.
Lightly coat the center of the
wheel hub with wheel bearing
grease after a wheel change or
tire rotation to prevent corrosion
or rust build-up. Do not get
grease on the flat wheel
mounting surface or on the
wheel nuts or bolts.
When It Is Time for New
Tires
Various factors, such as
maintenance, temperatures, driving
speeds, vehicle loading, and road
conditions influence when you need
new tires.
One way to tell when it is time for
new tires is to check the treadwear
indicators, which appear when the
tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) or
less of tread remaining. Some
commercial truck tires may not have
treadwear indicators. See Tire
Inspection on page 10‑59 and Tire
Rotation on page 10‑59 for
additional information.
The rubber in tires ages over time.
This is also true for the spare tire,
if the vehicle has one, even if it is
not being used. Multiple conditions
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (61,1)
Vehicle Care
affect how fast this aging takes
place, including temperatures,
loading conditions, and inflation
pressure maintenance. Tires will
typically need to be replaced due to
wear before they may need to be
replaced due to age. Consult the tire
manufacturer for more information
on when tires should be replaced.
Vehicle Storage
Tires age when stored normally
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park
a vehicle that will be stored for at
least a month in a cool, dry, clean
area away from direct sunlight to
slow aging. This area should be
free of grease, gasoline or other
substances that can deteriorate
rubber.
Parking for an extended period can
cause flat spots on the tires that
may result in vibrations while
driving. When storing a vehicle for
at least a month, remove the tires or
raise the vehicle to reduce the
weight from the tires.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched
specific tires for the vehicle. The
original equipment tires installed on
the vehicle, when it was new, were
designed to meet General Motors
Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec) system
rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that
you get tires with the same TPC
Spec rating. This way, the vehicle
will continue to have tires that are
designed to give the same
performance and vehicle safety,
during normal use, as the original
tires.
GM's exclusive TPC Spec system
considers over a dozen critical
specifications that impact the overall
performance of the vehicle,
including brake system
performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire pressure
monitoring performance. GM's TPC
Spec number is molded onto the
tire's sidewall near the tire size.
10-61
If the tires have an all‐season tread
design, the TPC spec number will
be followed by an MS for mud and
snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on
page 10‑47 for additional
information.
GM recommends replacing tires in
sets of four. This is because uniform
tread depth on all tires will help
keep the vehicle performing most
like it did when the tires were new.
Replacing less than a full set of tires
can affect the braking and handling
performance of the vehicle. See Tire
Inspection on page 10‑59 and Tire
Rotation on page 10‑59 for
information on proper tire rotation.
{ WARNING
Tires could explode during
improper service. Attempting to
mount or dismount a tire could
cause injury or death. Only your
dealer or authorized tire service
center should mount or dismount
the tires.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-62
Black plate (62,1)
Vehicle Care
{ WARNING
Mixing tires could cause you to
lose control while driving. If you
mix tires of different sizes,
brands, or types (radial and
bias-belted tires), the vehicle
might not handle properly, and
you could have a crash. Using
tires of different sizes, brands,
or types could also cause
damage to the vehicle. Be sure to
use the same size, brand, and
type of tires on all wheels.
This vehicle may have a different
size spare than the road tires
(those originally installed on the
vehicle). When new, the vehicle
included a spare tire and wheel
assembly with a similar overall
diameter as the vehicle's road
tires and wheels, so it is all right
to drive on it. Because this spare
was developed for use on the
vehicle, it will not affect vehicle
handling.
{ WARNING
Using bias-ply tires on the
vehicle may cause the wheel
rim flanges to develop cracks
after many miles of driving.
A tire and/or wheel could fail
suddenly and cause a crash.
Use only radial-ply tires with
the wheels on the vehicle.
If you must replace the vehicle's
tires with those that do not have a
TPC Spec number, make sure they
are the same size, load range,
speed rating, and construction type
(radial and bias‐belted tires) as the
vehicle's original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure
monitoring system may give an
inaccurate low‐pressure warning if
non‐TPC Spec-rated tires are
installed on the vehicle. Non‐TPC
Spec-rated tires may give a low‐
pressure warning that is higher or
lower than the proper warning level
you would get with TPC Spec-rated
tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 10‑55.
The vehicle's original equipment
tires are listed on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑22
for more information about the Tire
and Loading Information label and
its location on the vehicle.
Different Size Tires and
Wheels
If wheels or tires are installed that
are a different size than the original
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle
performance, including its braking,
ride and handling characteristics,
stability, and resistance to rollover
may be affected. If the vehicle has
electronic systems such as antilock
brakes, rollover airbags, traction
control, and electronic stability
control, the performance of these
systems can also be affected.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (63,1)
Vehicle Care
{ WARNING
If different sized wheels are used,
there may not be an acceptable
level of performance and safety if
tires not recommended for those
wheels are selected. This
increases the chance of a crash
and serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems
developed for the vehicle, and
have them properly installed by a
GM certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on
page 10‑61 and Accessories and
Modifications on page 10‑3 for
additional information.
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading
Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates
to the system developed by the
United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA), which grades tires
by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This
applies only to vehicles sold in
the United States. The grades
are molded on the sidewalls
of most passenger car tires.
10-63
The Uniform Tire Quality
Grading (UTQG) system
does not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires,
space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal
rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on
General Motors passenger cars
and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they
must also conform to federal
safety requirements and
additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
All Passenger Car Tires Must
Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements In Addition To
These Grades.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-64
Black plate (64,1)
Vehicle Care
Treadwear
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test
course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1½) times as well on the
government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and
differences in road
characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on
specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature – A, B, C
The temperature grades are
A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire's resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure. The grade
C corresponds to a level of
performance which all
passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and
A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law. Warning: The
temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (65,1)
Vehicle Care
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance
Your dealer will know the kind of
wheel that is needed.
The tires and wheels were aligned
and balanced at the factory to
provide the longest tire life and best
overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing
will not be necessary on a regular
basis. However, check the
alignment if there is unusual tire
wear or if the vehicle is pulling to
one side or the other. If the vehicle
vibrates when driving on a smooth
road, the tires and wheels might
need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer for proper diagnosis.
Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel
nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) sensors with new
GM original equipment parts.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent,
cracked, or badly rusted or
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and
wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it.
Some aluminum wheels can be
repaired. See your dealer if any of
these conditions exist.
Each new wheel should have the
same load-carrying capacity,
diameter, width, offset, and be
mounted the same way as the
one it replaces.
10-65
Notice: The wrong wheel can
also cause problems with bearing
life, brake cooling, speedometer
or odometer calibration,
headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire
or tire chain clearance to the
body and chassis.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 10‑66 for more information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{ WARNING
{ WARNING
Using the wrong replacement
wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
nuts can be dangerous. It could
affect the braking and handling of
the vehicle. Tires can lose air,
and cause loss of control, causing
a crash. Always use the correct
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
nuts for replacement.
Replacing a wheel with a used
one is dangerous. How it has
been used or how far it has been
driven may be unknown. It could
fail suddenly and cause a crash.
When replacing wheels, use a
new GM original equipment
wheel.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-66
Black plate (66,1)
Vehicle Care
Tire Chains
If your vehicle is a Hybrid, see the
Hybrid Supplement for more
information.
{ WARNING
If your vehicle has P265/65R18 or
P275/55R20 size tires, do not use
tire chains. They can damage
your vehicle because there is not
enough clearance. Tire chains
used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes,
suspension, or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause you to
lose control of your vehicle and
you or others may be injured in a
crash.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Do not use chains on the
front tires.
Use another type of traction
device only if its manufacturer
recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination
and road conditions. Follow that
manufacturer's instructions. To
help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or
remove the device if it is
contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your vehicle's wheels.
Tighten them as tightly as
possible with the ends securely
fastened. Drive slowly and follow
the chain manufacturer's
instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle,
stop and retighten them. If the
contact continues, slow down
until it stops. Driving too fast or
spinning the wheels with chains
on will damage your vehicle.
If you do find traction devices that
will fit, install them on the rear
tires.
If a Tire Goes Flat
Notice: If your vehicle has P265/
70R17 size tires, use tire chains
only where legal and only when
you must. Use chains that are the
proper size for your vehicle's
tires. Install them on the rear
tires only.
It is unusual for a tire to blowout
while you are driving, especially if
you maintain your vehicle's tires
properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is
much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a
blowout, here are a few tips about
what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
toward that side. Take your foot off
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (67,1)
Vehicle Care
the accelerator pedal and grip the
steering wheel firmly. Steer to
maintain lane position, and then
gently brake to a stop, well off the
road, if possible.
A rear blowout, particularly on a
curve, acts much like a skid and
may require the same correction
you would use in a skid. In any rear
blowout remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle
under control by steering the way
you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you
can still steer. Gently brake to a
stop, well off the road, if possible.
10-67
{ WARNING
{ WARNING
Driving on a flat tire will cause
permanent damage to the tire.
Re-inflating a tire after it has
been driven on while severely
underinflated or flat may cause a
blowout and a serious crash.
Never attempt to re-inflate a tire
that has been driven on while
severely underinflated or flat.
Have your dealer or an authorized
tire service center repair or
replace the flat tire as soon as
possible.
Lifting a vehicle and getting under
it to do maintenance or repairs is
dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and
training. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, only
use it for changing a flat tire.
If your vehicle is a hybrid, see the
hybrid supplement for more
information.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-68
Black plate (68,1)
Vehicle Care
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place, well off the road,
if possible. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 6‑5.
{ WARNING
Changing a tire can be
dangerous. The vehicle can slip
off the jack and roll over or fall on
you or other people. You and they
could be badly injured or even
killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent
the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in
P (Park).
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
3. If you have a
four-wheel-drive vehicle with
a N (Neutral) transfer case
position, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive
gear — not in N (Neutral).
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),
use the following example as a
guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks (A).
4. Turn off the engine and do
not restart while the vehicle
is raised.
5. Do not allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle.
6. Put the wheel blocks at the
front and rear of the tire
farthest away from the one
being changed. That would
be the tire on the other side,
at the opposite end of the
vehicle.
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
The following information explains
how to use the jack and change
a tire.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (69,1)
Vehicle Care
Tire Changing
The tools you will be using include
the following:
Removing the Spare Tire and
Tools
The equipment you will need to
change a flat tire is stored under the
storage tray, which is located on the
driver side trim panel (over the rear
wheelhouse).
2. Remove the wing nut (B) used to
retain the tool bag by turning it
counterclockwise.
3. Turn the knob (A) on the jack
counterclockwise to release the
jack and wheel blocks from the
bracket.
Regular Wheelbase Shown,
Extended Wheelbase Similar
1. Remove the tray to access the
tools by pulling up on the finger
depression under the jack
symbol.
10-69
4. Remove the wheel blocks and
the wheel block retainer by
turning the wing nut (C)
counterclockwise.
A.
Jack
B. Wheel Blocks
C. Jack Handle
D. Jack Handle Extensions
E. Wheel Wrench
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-70
Black plate (70,1)
Vehicle Care
To access the spare tire, refer to the
following graphics and instructions:
E. Wheel Wrench
F.
Hoist Cable
G. Tire/Wheel Retainer
H. Spare Tire (Valve Stem
Pointed Down)
I.
Hoist Shaft Access Hole
J.
Hoist End of Extension Tool
K. Spare Tire Lock
1. Open the hoist shaft access
door (C) on the bumper to
access the spare tire lock (K).
A. Hoist Assembly
B. Hoist Shaft
C. Hoist Shaft Access Cover/Hole
D. Jack Handle Extensions
2. To remove the spare tire lock,
insert the ignition key, turn it
clockwise and then pull it
straight out.
3. Assemble the two jack handle
extensions (D) and wheel
wrench (E) as shown.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (71,1)
Vehicle Care
10-71
If the spare tire does not lower to
the ground, the secondary latch
is engaged causing the tire not
to lower. See Secondary Latch
System on page 10‑79 for more
information.
4. Insert the open end of the
extension (J) through the hole in
the rear bumper (I) (hoist shaft
access hole).
Be sure the hoist end (J) of the
extension (D) connects to the
hoist shaft (B). The ribbed
square end of the extension is
used to lower the spare tire.
5. Turn the wheel wrench (E)
counterclockwise to lower the
spare tire (H) to the ground.
Continue to turn the wheel
wrench until the spare tire can
be pulled out from under the
vehicle.
7. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle
with some slack in the cable to
access the tire/wheel retainer.
Separate the retainer from the
guide pin by sliding the retainer
up the pin while pressing down
on the latch.
6. Use the wheel wrench hook that
allows you to pull the hoist cable
towards you, to assist in
reaching the spare tire.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-72
Black plate (72,1)
Vehicle Care
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 10‑66 for more
information.
If the wheel has a bolt-on hub
cap, loosen the plastic nut caps
by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. The plastic
nut caps will be retained in the
hub cap after it is removed from
the wheel.
Once the retainer is separated
from the guide pin, tilt the
retainer and pull it through the
center of the wheel along with
the cable and latch.
8. Put the spare tire near the
flat tire.
2. If your vehicle has a center cap
that covers the wheel fasteners,
place the chisel end of the wheel
wrench in the slot on the wheel
and gently pry the cap out.
3. Use the wheel wrench to loosen
all the wheel nuts. Turn the
wheel wrench counterclockwise
to loosen the wheel nuts. Do not
remove the wheel nuts yet.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (73,1)
Vehicle Care
Jacking Locations (Overall View)
Front Position – 1500 Models
A. Front Position
B. Rear Position
4. Position the jack under the
vehicle as shown.
Front Position – 2500 Models
10-73
Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire is
on a front tire of the vehicle, you
will need to use the jack handle
and only one jack handle
extension. Attach the wheel
wrench to the jack handle
extension. Attach the jack
handle to the jack (A). Position
the jack on the frame behind the
flat tire where the frame sections
overlap. Turn the wheel wrench
clockwise to raise the vehicle.
Raise the vehicle far enough off
the ground so there is enough
room for the spare tire to clear
the ground.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-74
Black plate (74,1)
Vehicle Care
Rear Position – 1500 Models
Rear Tire Flat: If the flat tire
is on a rear tire of the vehicle,
you will need to use the jack
handle (B) and both jack handle
extensions (C). Attach the wheel
wrench (D) to the jack handle
extensions (C). Attach the jack
handle (B) to the jack (A). Use
the jacking pad provided on
the rear axle. Turn the wheel
wrench (D) clockwise to raise the
vehicle. Raise the vehicle far
enough off the ground so there
is enough room for the spare tire
to clear the ground.
{ WARNING
Raising the vehicle with the jack
improperly positioned can
damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help
avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location
before raising the vehicle.
{ WARNING
Getting under a vehicle when it is
jacked up is dangerous. If the
vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed.
Never get under a vehicle when it
is supported only by a jack.
Rear Position – All Other Models
5. Remove all of the wheel nuts.
6. Take off the flat tire.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (75,1)
Vehicle Care
WARNING (Continued)
7. Remove any rust or dirt from the
wheel bolts, mounting surfaces,
and spare wheel.
{ WARNING
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
(Continued)
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust
or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 10‑66.
8. Put the wheel nuts back on with
the rounded end of the nuts
toward the wheel after mounting
the spare tire.
10-75
{ WARNING
Never use oil or grease on bolts
or nuts because the nuts might
come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
9. Tighten each wheel nut by hand.
Then use the wheel wrench to
tighten the nuts until the wheel is
held against the hub.
10. Turn the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to lower
the vehicle. Lower the jack
completely.
11. Tighten the nuts firmly in a
crisscross sequence as shown
by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-76
Black plate (76,1)
Vehicle Care
.
WARNING (Continued)
Specifications on page 12‑2 for
original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
{ WARNING
Wheel nuts that are improperly or
incorrectly tightened can cause
the wheels to become loose or
come off. The wheel nuts should
be tightened with a torque wrench
to the proper torque specification
after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the
aftermarket manufacturer when
using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and
(Continued)
Notice: Improperly tightened
wheel nuts can lead to brake
pulsation and rotor damage. To
avoid expensive brake repairs,
evenly tighten the wheel nuts in
the proper sequence and to the
proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on
page 12‑2 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
When you reinstall the regular
wheel and tire, you must also
reinstall either the center cap or the
bolt-on hub cap, depending on
which your vehicle has.
.
For center caps, line up the tab
on the center cap with the slot in
the wheel. The cap only goes in
one way. Place the cap on the
wheel and press until it snaps
into place.
For bolt-on hub caps, line up the
plastic nut caps with the wheel
nuts and tighten clockwise by
hand to get them started. Then
tighten with the wheel wrench
until snug.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
{ WARNING
Storing a jack, a tire, or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
Notice: Storing an aluminum
wheel with a flat tire under your
vehicle for an extended period of
time or with the valve stem
pointing up can damage the
wheel. Always stow the wheel
with the valve stem pointing
down and have the wheel/tire
repaired as soon as possible.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (77,1)
Vehicle Care
Store the tire under the rear of the
vehicle in the spare tire carrier.
Refer to the following graphics and
instructions to help you:
H. Spare Tire/Flat Tire (Valve
Stem Pointed Down)
I.
Hoist Shaft Access Hole
J.
Hoist End of Extension Tool
K. Spare Tire Lock
1. Put the tire (H) on the ground at
the rear of the vehicle with the
valve stem pointed down, and to
the rear.
10-77
Pull the pin through the center of
the wheel. Tilt the retainer down
through the center wheel
opening.
Make sure the retainer is fully
seated across the underside of
the wheel.
A. Hoist Assembly
B. Hoist Shaft
C. Hoist Shaft Access Cover/Hole
3. Assemble the two jack handle
extensions (D) and wheel
wrench (E) as shown.
D. Jack Handle Extensions
E. Wheel Wrench
F.
Hoist Cable
G. Tire/Wheel Retainer
2. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle.
Separate the tire/wheel
retainer (G) from the guide pin.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-78
Black plate (78,1)
Vehicle Care
To store the tools, do the following:
4. Insert the open end of the
extension (J) through the hole in
the rear bumper (I) (hoist shaft
access hole).
5. Raise the tire part way upward.
Make sure the retainer is seated
in the wheel opening.
6. Raise the tire fully against the
underside of the vehicle by
turning the wheel wrench
clockwise until you hear
two clicks or feel it skip twice.
You cannot overtighten the
cable.
7. Make sure the tire is stored
securely. Push, pull (A), and then
try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire
moves, use the wheel wrench to
tighten the cable.
8. Reinstall the spare tire lock.
9. Reinstall the hoist shaft access
cover.
A. Wheel Blocks
B. Tool Bag with Jack Tools
C. Retaining Bracket
D. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Bag
E. Jack
F.
Wing Nut Retaining Wheel
Blocks
G. Jack Knob
1. Return the tools (wheel wrench,
jack handle, and jack handle
extensions) to the tool bag (B).
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (79,1)
Vehicle Care
2. Assemble wheel blocks (A) and
jack (E) together with the
wing nut (F).
designed to stop the spare tire from
suddenly falling off your vehicle. For
the secondary latch to work, the
spare must be installed with the
valve stem pointing down. See
“Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools” under Tire Changing on
page 10‑69.
3. Position the jack (E) and wheel
blocks (A) in the driver side trim
panel over the wheelhouse.
4. Turn the jack knob (G) clockwise
until the jack is secured tight in
the mounting bracket. Be sure to
position the holes in the base of
the jack onto the pin in the
mounting bracket.
5. Use the retaining bracket (C) to
fasten the tool bag (B) on the
stud and turn the wing nut (D)
clockwise to secure.
10-79
{ WARNING
6. Return the storage tray to its
original stored position.
Secondary Latch System
This vehicle has an
underbody-mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a
secondary latch system. It is
Before beginning this procedure
read all the instructions. Failure to
read and follow the instructions
could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get
hurt. Read and follow the
instructions listed next.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-80
Black plate (80,1)
Vehicle Care
To release the spare tire from the
secondary latch:
3. Loosen the cable by turning the
wrench counterclockwise three
or four turns.
4. Repeat this procedure at least
two times. If the spare tire
lowers to the ground, continue
with Step 5 under “Removing the
Spare Tire and Tools” under Tire
Changing on page 10‑69.
5. If the spare does not lower, turn
the wrench counterclockwise
until approximately 15 cm (6 in)
of cable is exposed.
1. Check under the vehicle to see if
the cable end is visible. If the
cable is not visible proceed to
Step 6.
2. If it is visible, first try to tighten
the cable by turning the wheel
wrench clockwise until you hear
two clicks or feel it skip twice.
You cannot overtighten the
cable.
6. Stand the wheel blocks on their
shortest ends, with the backs
facing each other.
7. Place the bottom edge of the
jack (A) on the wheel blocks (B),
separating them so that the jack
is balanced securely.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (81,1)
Vehicle Care
10-81
12. Lower the jack by turning
the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep
lowering the jack until the
spare tire slides off the jack or
is hanging by the cable.
{ WARNING
8. Attach the jack handle,
extension, and wheel wrench to
the jack and place it (with the
wheel blocks) under the vehicle
toward the front of the rear
bumper.
9. Position the center lift point of
the jack under the center of the
spare tire.
10. Turn the wrench clockwise to
raise the jack until it lifts the
end fitting.
11. Continue raising the jack until
the spare tire stops moving
upward and is held firmly in
place. The secondary latch has
released and the spare tire is
balancing on the jack.
Someone standing too close
during the procedure could be
injured by the jack. If the spare
tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is
behind you or on either side of
you as you pull the jack out from
under the spare.
13. Disconnect the jack handle
from the jack and carefully
remove the jack. Use one hand
to push against the spare while
firmly pulling the jack out from
under the spare tire with the
other hand.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-82
Black plate (82,1)
Vehicle Care
If the spare tire is hanging from
the cable, insert the hoist end
of extension, and wheel
wrench into the hoist shaft hole
in the bumper and turn the
wheel wrench counterclockwise
to lower the spare the rest of
the way.
14. Turn the wheel wrench in the
hoist shaft hole in the bumper
clockwise to raise the cable
back up if the cable is hanging
under the vehicle.
Have the hoist assembly inspected
as soon as you can. You will not be
able to store a spare or flat tire
using the hoist assembly until it has
been inspected and/or replaced.
To continue changing the flat tire,
see “Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire” under Tire
Changing on page 10‑69.
Full-Size Spare Tire
Your vehicle, when new, had a
fully-inflated spare tire. A spare tire
may lose air over time, so check its
inflation pressure regularly. See Tire
Pressure on page 10‑53 and
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑22
for information regarding proper tire
inflation and loading your vehicle.
For instruction on how to remove,
install or store a spare tire, see
“Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare” and “Storing a
Flat or Spare Tire and Tools” under
Tire Changing on page 10‑69.
Notice: If the vehicle has
four-wheel drive and the different
size spare tire is installed on the
vehicle, do not drive in four-wheel
drive until you can have your flat
tire repaired and/or replaced. You
could damage the vehicle, and
the repair costs would not be
covered by your warranty. Never
use four-wheel drive when the
different size spare tire is
installed on the vehicle.
Your vehicle may have a different
size spare tire than the road tires
originally installed on your vehicle.
This spare tire was developed for
use on your vehicle, so it is all right
to drive on it. If your vehicle has
four-wheel drive and the different
size spare tire is installed, keep the
vehicle in two-wheel drive.
After installing the spare tire on your
vehicle, you should stop as soon as
possible and make sure the spare
tire is correctly inflated. Have the
damaged or flat road tire repaired or
replaced as soon as you can and
installed back onto your vehicle.
This way, the spare tire will be
available in case you need it again.
Do not mix tires and wheels of
different sizes, because they will not
fit. Keep your spare tire and its
wheel together. If your vehicle has a
spare tire that does not match your
vehicle's original road tires and
wheels in size and type, do not
include the spare in the tire rotation.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (83,1)
Vehicle Care
Jump Starting
For more information about the
vehicle battery, see Battery on
page 10‑28.
If the vehicle is a Hybrid, see the
Hybrid manual for more information.
If the vehicle's battery (or batteries)
has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure
to use the following steps to do it
safely.
{ WARNING
Batteries can hurt you. They can
be dangerous because:
.
They contain acid that can
burn you.
.
They contain gas that can
explode or ignite.
.
They contain enough
electricity to burn you.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
If you do not follow these steps
exactly, some or all of these
things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps
could result in costly damage to
the vehicle that would not be
covered by the warranty.
Trying to start the vehicle by
pushing or pulling it will not
work, and it could damage the
vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must
have a 12-volt battery with a
negative ground system.
Notice: Only use a vehicle that
has a 12-volt system with a
negative ground for jump
starting. If the other vehicle does
not have a 12-volt system with a
negative ground, both vehicles
can be damaged.
10-83
2. Get the vehicles close enough
so the jumper cables can reach,
but be sure the vehicles are not
touching each other. If they are,
it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You
would not be able to start your
vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical
systems.
To avoid the possibility of the
vehicles rolling, set the parking
brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start
procedure. Put the automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a
manual transmission in
N (Neutral) before setting the
parking brake. If the vehicle has
a four-wheel-drive transfer case
with a N (Neutral) position, be
sure the transfer case is in a
drive gear, not in N (Neutral).
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-84
Black plate (84,1)
Vehicle Care
Notice: If the radio or other
accessories are left on during the
jump starting procedure, they
could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by the
warranty. Always turn off the
radio and other accessories when
jump starting the vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both
vehicles. Unplug unnecessary
accessories plugged into the
cigarette lighter or the accessory
power outlets. Turn off the radio
and all the lamps that are not
needed. This avoids sparks and
helps save both batteries. And it
could save the radio!
terminal. You should always use
these remote terminals instead
of the terminals on the battery.
If the vehicle has a remote
positive (+) terminal, it is located
under a red plastic cover at the
positive battery post. To uncover
the remote positive (+) terminal,
open the red plastic cover.
{ WARNING
An electric fan can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
{ WARNING
4. Open the hood on the other
vehicle and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−)
terminal locations on that
vehicle.
Your vehicle has a remote
positive (+) jump starting
terminal and a remote
negative (−) jump starting
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 10‑6 for more
information on the location of the
remote positive (+) and remote
negative (−) terminals.
The remote negative (−) terminal
is a stud located on the right
front of the engine, where the
negative battery cable attaches.
Using an open flame near a
battery can cause battery gas to
explode. People have been hurt
doing this, and some have been
blinded. Use a flashlight if you
need more light.
(Continued)
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (85,1)
Vehicle Care
WARNING (Continued)
Be sure the battery has enough
water. You do not need to add
water to the battery installed in
your new vehicle. But if a battery
has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that
first. If you do not, explosive gas
could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that
can burn you. Do not get it on
you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush
the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
{ WARNING
Fans or other moving engine
parts can injure you badly. Keep
your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
10-85
5. Check that the jumper cables
do not have loose or missing
insulation. If they do, you could
get a shock. The vehicles could
be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables,
here are some basic things you
should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine
part or to a remote negative (−)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to
negative (−) or you will get a
short that would damage the
battery and maybe other parts
too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal on the dead
battery because this can cause
sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+)
cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the vehicle with the dead
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end
touch metal. Connect it to the
positive (+) terminal of the
good battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-86
Black plate (86,1)
Vehicle Care
8. Now connect the black
negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the
good battery. Use a remote
negative (−) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch
anything until the next step. The
other end of the negative (−)
cable does not go to the dead
battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or
to the remote negative (−)
terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the
negative (−) cable to the remote
negative (−) terminal, on the
vehicle with the dead battery.
10. Now start the vehicle with the
good battery and run the
engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had
the dead battery. If it will not
start after a few tries, it
probably needs service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are
connected or removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the
vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always connect and remove the
jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or
other metal.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine
Part or Remote Negative (−)
Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote
Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote
Positive (+) Terminal
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (87,1)
Vehicle Care
To disconnect the jumper cables
from both vehicles do the following:
Towing
1. Disconnect the black
negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the bad battery.
Towing the Vehicle
2. Disconnect the black
negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the vehicle with the
good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the other vehicle.
5. Return the remote positive (+)
terminal cover, if the vehicle has
one, to its original position.
Notice: To avoid damage, the
disabled vehicle should be towed
with all four wheels off the
ground. Care must be taken with
vehicles that have low ground
clearance and/or special
equipment. Always flatbed on a
car carrier.
Consult your dealer or a
professional towing service if the
disabled vehicle must be towed.
See Roadside Assistance Program
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑7 or
Roadside Assistance Program
(Mexico) on page 13‑9.
To tow the vehicle behind another
vehicle for recreational purposes,
such as behind a motor home, see
“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in this
section.
10-87
Recreational Vehicle
Towing
If the vehicle has a hybrid engine,
see the hybrid manual for more
information.
Recreational vehicle towing means
towing the vehicle behind another
vehicle – such as behind a motor
home. The two most common types
of recreational vehicle towing are
known as dinghy towing and dolly
towing. Dinghy towing is towing the
vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground. Dolly towing is towing the
vehicle with two wheels on the
ground and two wheels up on a
device known as a dolly.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-88
Black plate (88,1)
Vehicle Care
Here are some important things to
consider before recreational vehicle
towing:
.
What is the towing capacity of
the towing vehicle? Be sure to
read the tow vehicle
manufacturer's
recommendations.
.
What is the distance that will be
travelled? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.
.
Is the proper towing equipment
going to be used? See your
dealer or trailering professional
for additional advice and
equipment recommendations.
.
Is the vehicle ready to be
towed? Just as preparing the
vehicle for a long trip, make sure
the vehicle is prepared to be
towed.
Dinghy Towing
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles and
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles with a
Single Speed Automatic
Transfer Case
Notice: If the vehicle is towed
with all four wheels on the
ground, the drivetrain
components could be damaged.
The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Do not
tow the vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles and
four-wheel drive vehicles with a
single speed automatic transfer
case should not be towed with all
four wheels on the ground.
Two-wheel-drive transmissions have
no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed. Four-wheel drive
vehicles with a single speed
automatic transfer case have no
neutral position and will spin the
transmission when the rear
wheels turn.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (89,1)
Vehicle Care
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles with a
Two Speed Automatic
Transfer Case
2. Turn the engine off and firmly set
the parking brake.
3. Securely attach the vehicle
being towed to the tow vehicle.
{ WARNING
Use the following procedure to
dinghy tow a four-wheel drive
vehicle with a two speed automatic
transfer case:
1. Position the vehicle being towed
behind the tow vehicle and shift
the transmission to P (Park).
Shifting a four-wheel-drive
vehicle's transfer case into
N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle
to roll even if the transmission is
in P (Park). The driver or others
could be injured. Make sure the
parking brake is firmly set before
the transfer case is shifted to
N (Neutral).
4. Shift the transfer case to
N (Neutral). See “Shifting into
Neutral” under “Four-Wheel
Drive” for the proper procedure
to select the Neutral position for
the vehicle.
10-89
5. Release the parking brake only
after the vehicle being towed is
firmly attached to the towing
vehicle.
6. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF
and remove the key — the
steering wheel will still turn.
After towing, see “Shifting Out of
Neutral” under “Four-Wheel Drive”
for the proper procedure to take the
vehicle out of the Neutral position.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-90
Black plate (90,1)
Vehicle Care
Dolly Towing – Front Towing
(Front Wheels Off the Ground)
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles and
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles with a
Single Speed Automatic
Transfer Case
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Never tow the vehicle
with the rear wheels on the
ground.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles and
four-wheel drive vehicles with a
single speed automatic transfer
case should not be towed with the
rear wheels on the ground.
Two-wheel-drive transmissions have
no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed. Four-wheel drive
vehicles with a single speed
automatic transfer case have no
neutral position and will spin the
transmission when the rear
wheels turn.
Notice: If a two-wheel drive
vehicle or a four-wheel drive
vehicle with a single speed
automatic transfer case is towed
with the rear wheels on the
ground, the transmission could
be damaged. The repairs would
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles with a
Two Speed Automatic
Transfer Case
To dolly tow a two‐wheel‐drive
vehicle or a four-wheel drive vehicle
with a single speed automatic
transfer case, the vehicle must be
towed with the rear wheels on the
dolly. See “Rear Towing (Rear
Wheels Off the Ground)” later in this
section for more information.
Use the following procedure to dolly
tow a four-wheel drive vehicle from
the front:
1. Attach the dolly to the tow
vehicle following the dolly
manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto
the dolly.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (91,1)
Vehicle Care
3. Shift the transmission to
P (Park).
4. Firmly set the parking brake.
{ WARNING
Shifting a four-wheel-drive
vehicle's transfer case into
N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle
to roll even if the transmission is
in P (Park). The driver or others
could be injured. Make sure the
parking brake is firmly set before
the transfer case is shifted to
N (Neutral).
5. Use an adequate clamping
device designed for towing to
ensure that the front wheels are
locked into the straight position.
6. Shift the transfer case to
N (Neutral). See “Shifting into
N (Neutral)” under “Four-Wheel
Drive”.
10-91
Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off
the Ground)
7. Secure the vehicle to the dolly
following the manufacturer's
instructions.
8. Release the parking brake only
after the vehicle being towed is
firmly attached to the towing
vehicle.
9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
After towing, see “Shifting Out of
N (Neutral)” under “Four-Wheel
Drive”.
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles and
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles with a
Single Speed Automatic
Transfer Case
Use the following procedure to dolly
tow the vehicle from the rear:
1. Attach the dolly to the tow
vehicle following the dolly
manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the
dolly.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-92
Black plate (92,1)
Vehicle Care
3. Firmly set the parking brake.
See Parking Brake on
page 9‑51.
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles with a
Two Speed Automatic
Transfer Case
4. Put the transmission in P (Park).
Use the following procedure to dolly
tow a four-wheel drive vehicle from
the rear:
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly
following the manufacturer's
instructions.
6. Use an adequate clamping
device designed for towing to
ensure that the front wheels are
locked into the straight position.
7. For four-wheel drive vehicles
with a single speed automatic
transfer case, turn the transfer
case knob to the Two-Wheel
High position.
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
1. Attach the dolly to the tow
vehicle following the dolly
manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the
dolly.
3. Firmly set the parking brake.
See Parking Brake on
page 9‑51.
4. Put the transmission in P (Park).
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly
following the manufacturer's
instructions.
6. Use an adequate clamping
device designed for towing to
ensure that the front wheels are
locked into the straight position.
{ WARNING
Shifting a four-wheel-drive
vehicle's transfer case into
N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle
to roll even if the transmission is
in P (Park). The driver or others
could be injured. Make sure the
parking brake is firmly set before
the transfer case is shifted to
N (Neutral).
7. Shift the transfer case to
N (Neutral). See “Shifting into
N (Neutral)” under “Four-Wheel
Drive”.
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
After towing, see “Shifting Out of
N (Neutral)” under “Four-Wheel
Drive”.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (93,1)
Vehicle Care
Appearance Care
Exterior Care
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will
make them last longer, seal better,
and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth.
During very cold, damp weather
frequent application may be
required. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 11‑7.
Washing the Vehicle
The best way to preserve the
vehicle's finish is to keep it clean by
washing it often.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain
chemicals that can damage the
emblems or nameplates on the
vehicle. Check the cleaning
product label. If it states that it
should not be used on plastic
parts, do not use it on the vehicle
or damage may occur and it
would not be covered by the
warranty.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight. Use a car washing soap.
Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain
acid or abrasives, as they can
damage the paint, metal or plastic
on the vehicle. Approved cleaning
products can be obtained from your
dealer. Follow all manufacturers'
directions regarding correct product
usage, necessary safety
precautions and appropriate
disposal of any vehicle care
product.
Rinse the vehicle well, before
washing and after to remove all
cleaning agents completely. If they
are allowed to dry on the surface,
they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean
chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water
spotting.
10-93
High pressure car washes may
cause water to enter the vehicle.
Avoid using high pressure washes
closer than 30 cm (12 in) to the
surface of the vehicle. Use of power
washers exceeding 8 274 kPa
(1,200 psi) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/
Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
soft cloth and a car washing soap to
clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing
the Vehicle” in Exterior Care.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing
of the vehicle by hand may be
necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning
products can be obtained from your
dealer.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-94
Black plate (94,1)
Vehicle Care
If the vehicle has a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat
gives more depth and gloss to the
colored basecoat. Always use
waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
Exterior painted surfaces are
subject to aging, weather and
chemical fallout that can take their
toll over a period of years. To help
keep the paint finish looking new,
keep the vehicle garaged or
covered whenever possible.
Notice: Machine compounding or
aggressive polishing on a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only
non-abrasive waxes and polishes
that are made for a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish on the
vehicle.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
Parts
Foreign materials such as calcium
chloride and other salts, ice melting
agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,
bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage the vehicle's finish if they
remain on painted surfaces. Wash
the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive
cleaners that are marked safe for
painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
Bright metal parts should be
cleaned regularly to keep their
luster. Washing with water is all that
is usually needed. However, chrome
polish may be used on chrome or
stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum
trim. To avoid damaging protective
trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap to
clean aluminum. A coating of wax,
rubbed to high polish, is
recommended for all bright metal
parts.
Windshield, Backglass, and
Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield
and backglass with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint
free cloth or paper towel soaked
with windshield washer fluid or a
mild detergent. Wash the windshield
thoroughly when you clean the
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax
treatments may cause wiper
streaking. Replace the wiper blades
if they are worn or damaged.
Wipers can be damaged by:
.
Extreme dusty conditions
.
Sand and salt
.
Heat and sun
.
Snow and ice, without proper
removal
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (95,1)
Vehicle Care
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: Using strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes,
cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Use only approved
cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft
clean cloth with mild soap and
water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft
clean towel. A wax may then be
applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on
aluminum wheels could damage
the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
The surface of these wheels is
similar to the painted surface of the
vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes,
abrasive cleaners, cleaners with
acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
on them because the surface could
be damaged. Do not use chrome
polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: Driving the vehicle
through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, could damage
the aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Never drive a vehicle that has
aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels through an automatic car
wash that uses silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes.
10-95
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush
with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based
tire dressing products on the
vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying
a tire dressing, always wipe off
any overspray from all painted
surfaces on the vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and
requires sheet metal repair or
replacement, make sure the body
repair shop applies anti-corrosion
material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion
protection.
Original manufacturer replacement
parts will provide the corrosion
protection while maintaining the
vehicle warranty.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-96
Black plate (96,1)
Vehicle Care
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep
scratches in the finish should be
repaired right away. Bare metal will
corrode quickly and may develop
into major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be
repaired with touch-up materials
available from your dealer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be
corrected in your dealer's body
and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow
removal and dust control can collect
on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can
develop on the underbody parts
such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though
they have corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these
materials from the underbody
with plain water. Clean any areas
where mud and debris can collect.
Dirt packed in close areas of the
frame should be loosened before
being flushed. Your dealer or an
underbody car washing system can
do this.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric
conditions can create a chemical
fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall
upon and attack painted surfaces on
the vehicle. This damage can take
two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped
discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Although no defect in the paint job
causes this, we will repair, at no
charge to the owner, the surfaces
of new vehicles damaged by this
fallout condition within 12 months or
20 000 km (12,000 mi) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Interior Care
The interior will continue to look its
best if it is cleaned often. Although
not always visible, dust and dirt can
accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt
can damage carpet, fabric, leather,
and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to
remove particles from the
upholstery. It is important to keep
the upholstery from becoming and
remaining heavily soiled. Soils
should be removed as quickly as
possible. The interior may
experience extremes of heat that
could cause stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require
more frequent cleaning. Use care
because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to home
furnishings may also transfer color
to the interior.
When cleaning the interior, only
use cleaners specifically designed
for the surfaces being cleaned.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (97,1)
Vehicle Care
Permanent damage may result from
using cleaners on surfaces for
which they were not intended. Use
glass cleaner only on glass.
Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To
prevent over-spray, apply cleaner
directly to the cleaning cloth.
Products that remove odors from
the upholstery and clean the glass
can be obtained from your dealer.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners
when cleaning glass surfaces on
the vehicle, could scratch the
glass and/or cause damage to the
rear window defogger. When
cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass
cleaner.
.
A stiff brush. It can cause
damage to the interior surfaces.
.
Heavy pressure or aggressive
rubbing with a cleaning cloth.
Use of heavy pressure can
damage the interior and does
not improve the effectiveness of
soil removal.
Many cleaners contain solvents that
may become concentrated in the
breathing space. Before using
cleaners, read and adhere to all
safety instructions on the label.
While cleaning the interior, maintain
adequate ventilation by opening the
doors and windows.
.
Laundry detergents or
dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue
that streaks and attracts dirt. For
liquid cleaners, about 20 drops
per 3.78 L (1 gal) of water is a
good guide. Use only mild,
neutral-pH soaps.
Dust may be removed from small
buttons and knobs using a small
brush with soft bristles.
.
Too much cleaner that saturates
the upholstery.
.
Cleaners that contain solvents
can damage the interior.
Do not clean the vehicle using:
.
A knife or any other sharp object
to remove a soil from any interior
surface.
10-97
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft
brush attachment frequently to
remove dust and loose dirt.
A canister vacuum with a beater bar
in the nozzle may only be used on
floor carpet and carpeted floor mats.
For any soil, always try to remove it
first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as
much of the soil as possible using
one of the following techniques:
.
For liquids: gently blot the
remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb
into the paper towel until no
more can be removed.
.
For solid dry soils: remove as
much as possible and then
vacuum.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-98
Black plate (98,1)
Vehicle Care
To clean:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white
cloth with water or club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove
excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the
soil and gently rub toward the
center. Continue cleaning, using
a clean area of the cloth each
time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled
area until the cleaning cloth
remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely
removed, use a mild soap
solution and repeat the cleaning
process that was used with plain
water.
If any of the soil remains, a
commercial fabric cleaner or spot
lifter may be necessary. When a
commercial upholstery cleaner or
spot lifter is to be used, test a small
hidden area for colorfastness first.
If the locally cleaned area gives any
impression that a ring formation may
result, clean the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been
completed, a paper towel can be
used to blot excess moisture from
the fabric or carpet.
Leather
Leather, and lighter colored leather
in particular, will need more frequent
cleaning to prevent the buildup of
dust, dirt, and colors transferred
from other items so that these do
not become permanent stains.
To remove dust, a soft cloth
dampened with water can be used.
If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a soft cloth dampened
with a mild soap solution can be
used. Your dealer has a GM
approved leather cleaner available
that provides superior cleaning
performance when used regularly
on finished automotive leathers.
Allow the leather to dry naturally.
Do not use heat, steam, spot lifters
or spot removers, or shoe polish on
leather. Many commercial leather
cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may
permanently change the
appearance and feel of the leather
and are not recommended. Do not
use silicone or wax-based products,
or those containing organic solvents
to clean the interior because they
can alter the appearance by
increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl and
other Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with
water may be used to remove dust.
If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a clean soft cloth
dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust
and dirt. Never use spot lifters or
removers on plastic surfaces.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (99,1)
Vehicle Care
Many commercial cleaners and
coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect soft plastic surfaces
may permanently change the
appearance and feel of the interior
and are not recommended. Do not
use silicone or wax-based products,
or those containing organic solvents
to clean the interior because they
can alter the appearance by
increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner.
Notice: Air fresheners contain
solvents that may cause damage
to plastics and painted surfaces.
Follow the manufacturer’s
instructions when using air
fresheners in the vehicle. If air
freshener comes in contact with
paint or a plastic surface, blot
immediately with a soft cloth.
Damage caused by using air
fresheners would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
Some commercial products may
increase gloss on the instrument
panel. The increase in gloss may
cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult
to see through the windshield under
certain conditions.
Wood Panels
Use a clean cloth moistened in
warm, soapy water (use mild dish
washing soap). Dry the wood
immediately with a clean cloth.
10-99
Speaker Covers
Vacuum around a speaker cover
gently, so that the speaker will not
be damaged. Clean spots with just
water and mild soap.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{ WARNING
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them. In
a crash, they might not be able to
provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
10-100
Black plate (100,1)
Vehicle Care
Floor Mats
{ WARNING
If a floor mat is the wrong size or
is not properly installed, it can
interfere with the accelerator
pedal and/or brake pedal.
Interference with the pedals can
cause unintended acceleration
and/or increased stopping
distance which can cause a crash
and injury. Make sure the floor
mat does not interfere with the
accelerator or brake pedal.
Use the following guidelines for
proper floor mat usage.
.
.
The original equipment floor
mats were designed for the
vehicle. If the floor mats need
replacing, it is recommended
that GM certified floor mats be
purchased. Non-GM floor mats
may not fit properly and may
interfere with the accelerator or
brake pedal. Always check that
the floor mats do not interfere
with the pedals.
Use the floor mat with the
correct side up. Do not turn
it over.
.
Do not place anything on top of
the driver side floor mat.
.
Use only a single floor mat on
the driver side.
.
Do not place one floor mat on
top of another.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (1,1)
Service and Maintenance
Service and
Maintenance
General Information
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Scheduled Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-3
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Maintenance Replacement
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Maintenance Records
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-10
General Information
Notice: Maintenance intervals,
checks, inspections,
recommended fluids, and
lubricants are necessary to keep
this vehicle in good working
condition. Damage caused by
failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
As the vehicle owner, you are
responsible for the scheduled
maintenance in this section. We
recommend having your dealer
perform these services. Proper
vehicle maintenance helps to keep
the vehicle in good working
condition, improves fuel economy,
and reduces vehicle emissions for
better air quality.
11-1
Because of all the different ways
people use vehicles, maintenance
needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services.
Please read the information under
Scheduled Maintenance. To keep
the vehicle in good condition, see
your dealer.
The maintenance schedule is for
vehicles that:
.
Carry passengers and cargo
within recommended limits on
the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑22.
.
Are driven on reasonable road
surfaces within legal driving
limits.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
11-2
.
.
Black plate (2,1)
Service and Maintenance
Are driven off-road in the
recommended manner. See
Off-Road Driving on page 9‑6.
Use the recommended fuel.
See Recommended Fuel on
page 9‑68.
{ WARNING
Performing maintenance work can
be dangerous. Some jobs can
cause serious injury. Perform
maintenance work only if you
have the required know-how and
the proper tools and equipment.
If in doubt, see your dealer to
have a qualified technician do the
work. See Doing Your Own
Service Work on page 10‑4.
At your dealer, you can be certain
that you will receive the highest
level of service available. Your
dealer has specially trained
service technicians, uses genuine
replacement parts, as well as,
up‐to‐date tools and equipment
to ensure fast and accurate
diagnostics.
The proper replacement parts,
fluids, and lubricants to use are
listed in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑7 and
Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 11‑9. We recommend the use
of genuine parts from your dealer.
Rotation of New Tires
To maintain ride, handling, and
performance of the vehicle, it is
important that the first rotation
service for new tires be performed.
Tires should be rotated every
12 000 km/7,500 miles. See Tire
Rotation on page 10‑59.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (3,1)
Service and Maintenance
Scheduled
Maintenance
When the Change Engine Oil
Soon Message Displays
Change engine oil and filter. See
Engine Oil on page 10‑8. An
Emission Control Service.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message displays, service is
required for the vehicle as soon as
possible, within the next 1 000 km/
600 miles. If driving under the best
conditions, the engine oil life system
might not indicate the need for
vehicle service for more than a year.
The engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and
the oil life system must be reset.
Your dealer has trained service
technicians who will perform this
work and reset the system. If the
engine oil life system is reset
accidentally, service the vehicle
within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since
the last service. Reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed.
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑10.
.
Windshield wiper blade
inspection for wear, cracking,
or contamination and windshield
and wiper blade cleaning,
if contaminated. See Exterior
Care on page 10‑93. Worn or
damaged wiper blade
replacement. See Wiper Blade
Replacement on page 10‑33.
.
Tire inflation pressures check.
See Tire Pressure on
page 10‑53.
.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire
Inspection on page 10‑59.
.
Rotate tires if necessary. See
Tire Rotation on page 10‑59.
.
Fluids visual leak check
(or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). A leak in any
system must be repaired and the
fluid level checked.
.
Engine air cleaner filter
inspection. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑15.
Every Engine Oil Change
.
Change engine oil and filter.
Reset oil life system. See
Engine Oil on page 10‑8 and
Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑10. An Emission
Control Service.
.
Engine coolant level check. See
Engine Coolant on page 10‑17.
.
Engine cooling system
inspection. Visual inspection of
hoses, pipes, fittings, and
clamps and replacement,
if needed.
.
Windshield washer fluid level
check. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑25.
11-3
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
11-4
Black plate (4,1)
Service and Maintenance
.
Brake system inspection
(or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first).
.
Steering and suspension
inspection. Visual inspection for
damaged, loose, or missing
parts or signs of wear.
.
Lubricate the front suspension,
steering linkage, and parking
brake cable guides. For vehicles
mainly driven in heavy city traffic
in hot weather, in hilly or
mountainous terrain, when
frequently towing a trailer,
or used for taxi, police,
or delivery service, lubricate
every 5 000 km/3,000 miles.
Control arm ball joints on 2500
series vehicles require
lubrication but should not be
lubricated unless their
temperature is −12°C (10°F) or
higher, or they could be
damaged. Control arm ball joints
on 1500 series vehicles are
maintenance‐free.
.
Body hinges and latches, key
lock cylinders, folding seat
hardware, and liftgate hinges,
linkage, and handle pivot points
lubrication. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on
page 11‑7. More frequent
lubrication may be required
when the vehicle is exposed to a
corrosive environment. Applying
silicone grease on weatherstrips
with a clean cloth makes them
last longer, seal better, and not
stick or squeak.
Additional Required Services
Every 12 000 km/7,500 Miles
.
Rotate tires. Tires should be
rotated every 12 000 km/
7,500 miles. See Tire Rotation
on page 10‑59.
At Each Fuel Stop
.
Engine oil level check. See
Engine Oil on page 10‑8.
.
Engine coolant level check. See
Engine Coolant on page 10‑17.
Windshield washer fluid level
check. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑25.
.
Restraint system components
check. See Safety System
Check on page 3‑35.
.
.
Fuel system inspection for
damage or leaks.
Once a Month
.
Exhaust system and nearby heat
shields inspection for loose or
damaged components.
.
Tire inflation pressures check.
See Tire Pressure on
page 10‑53.
.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire
Inspection on page 10‑59.
.
Sunroof track and seal
inspection, if equipped. See
Sunroof on page 2‑23.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (5,1)
Service and Maintenance
Once a Year
.
.
See Starter Switch Check on
page 10‑31.
See Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Control Function
Check on page 10‑32.
.
See Ignition Transmission Lock
Check on page 10‑32.
.
See Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check on
page 10‑32.
.
Accelerator pedal check for
damage, high effort, or binding.
Replace if needed.
.
Underbody flushing service.
.
Hood/Decklid/Liftgate/Liftglass
Support Gas Strut Service:
Visually inspect gas strut,
if equipped, for signs of wear,
cracks, or other damage. Check
the hold open ability of the gas
strut. Contact your dealer if
service is required.
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles
.
Engine air cleaner filter
replacement. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑15.
.
Automatic transmission fluid
change (severe service) for
vehicles mainly driven in heavy
city traffic in hot weather, in hilly
or mountainous terrain, when
frequently towing a trailer,
or used for taxi, police,
or delivery service. See
Automatic Transmission Fluid on
page 10‑12.
.
Four‐wheel drive only: Transfer
case fluid change (severe
service) for vehicles mainly
driven when frequently towing a
trailer, or used for taxi, police,
or delivery service. Check vent
hose at transfer case for kinks
and proper installation. Check
to be sure vent hose is
unobstructed, clear, and free of
debris. During any maintenance,
11-5
if a power washer is used to
clean mud and dirt from the
underbody, care should be taken
to not directly spray the transfer
case output seals. High pressure
water can overcome the seals
and contaminate the transfer
case fluid. Contaminated fluid
will decrease the life of the
transfer case and should be
replaced.
.
Evaporative control system
inspection. Check all fuel and
vapor lines and hoses for proper
hook‐up, routing, and condition.
Check that the purge valve,
if the vehicle has one, works
properly. Replace as needed.
An Emission Control Service.
The U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board
has determined that the failure
to perform this maintenance item
will not nullify the emission
warranty or limit recall liability
prior to the completion of the
vehicle's useful life.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
11-6
Black plate (6,1)
Service and Maintenance
We, however, urge that all
recommended maintenance
services be performed at the
indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
clear, and free of debris. During
any maintenance, if a power
washer is used to clean mud
and dirt from the underbody,
care should be taken to not
directly spray the transfer case
output seals. High pressure
water can overcome the seals
and contaminate the transfer
case fluid. Contaminated fluid
will decrease the life of the
transfer case and should be
replaced.
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles
.
.
Automatic transmission fluid
change (normal service). See
Automatic Transmission Fluid on
page 10‑12.
Four‐wheel drive only: Transfer
case fluid change (normal
service). Check vent hose at
transfer case for kinks and
proper installation. Check to be
sure vent hose is unobstructed,
.
Spark plug replacement and
spark plug wires inspection.
An Emission Control Service.
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles
.
Engine cooling system drain,
flush, and refill (or every five
years, whichever occurs first).
See Engine Coolant on
page 10‑17. An Emission
Control Service.
.
Engine drive belts inspection
for fraying, excessive cracks,
or obvious damage (or every
10 years, whichever occurs
first). Replace, if needed.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (7,1)
Service and Maintenance
11-7
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil
The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos specification.
Oils meeting this specification can be identified with the dexos certification
mark. Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the dexos
certification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil on
page 10‑8.
Engine Coolant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 10‑17.
Hydraulic Brake System
Windshield Washer
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 12377967,
in Canada 89021320).
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Power Steering System
GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186).
Automatic Transmission
DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Chassis Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
11-8
Black plate (8,1)
Service and Maintenance
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Front Axle (1500 Series Vehicles
with Four-Wheel Drive)
SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021671,
in Canada 89021672).
Front Axle (2500 Series Vehicles
with Four-Wheel Drive)
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021677,
in Canada 89021678).
Rear Axle
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021677,
in Canada 89021678).
Transfer Case (Four‐Wheel Drive)
DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Front Axle Propshaft Spline or
One-Piece Propshaft Spline
(Two-Wheel Drive with Auto. Trans.)
Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant (GM Part No. 12345879,
in Canada 10953511).
Hood Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Outer Tailgate Handle Pivot Points
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Weatherstrip Squeaks
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).
Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287,
in Canada 10953437).
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (9,1)
Service and Maintenance
11-9
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
Standard Filter
15908916*
A3086C*
High Capacity Filter
15908915
A3085C
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Oil Filter
89017524
PF48
Spark Plugs
12621258
41-110
Front – 55.0 cm (21.6 in)
25877402
—
Rear – 30.0 cm (11.8 in)
25820122
—
Wiper Blades
*15908915 (A3085C) high-capacity air cleaner filter may be substituted.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
11-10
Black plate (10,1)
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Services Performed
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (11,1)
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Record (cont.)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Services Performed
11-11
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
11-12
Black plate (12,1)
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Record (cont.)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Services Performed
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (13,1)
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Record (cont.)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Services Performed
11-13
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
11-14
Black plate (14,1)
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Record (cont.)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Services Performed
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (1,1)
Technical Data
Technical Data
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Service Parts Identification
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4
12-1
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is
the engine code. This code
identifies the vehicle's engine,
specifications, and replacement
parts. See “Engine Specifications”
under Capacities and Specifications
on page 12‑2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Service Parts
Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove
box, has the following information:
This legal identifier is in the front
corner of the instrument panel, on
the left side of the vehicle. It can be
seen through the windshield from
outside. The VIN also appears on
the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
.
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
.
Model designation.
.
Paint information.
.
Production options and special
equipment.
Do not remove this label from the
vehicle.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
12-2
Black plate (2,1)
Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
If your vehicle is a Hybrid, see the Hybrid manual for more information.
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑7 for more information.
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Capacities
Metric
English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant label located under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System
5.3L V8
17.3 L
18.3 qt
6.0L V8 2500 Series
16.5 L
17.4 qt
5.7 L†
6.0 qt†
Regular
98.4 L
26.0 gal
Extended 1500 Series
119.2 L
31.5 gal
Extended 2500 Series
147.6 L
39.0 gal
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (3,1)
Technical Data
12-3
Capacities
Application
Metric
English
6L80-E Transmission
5.7 L
6.0 qt
6L90-E Transmission
6.0 L
6.3 qt
Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)
Transfer Case Fluid
Wheel Nut Torque
1.5 L
1.6 qt
190 Y
140 lb ft
†Oil filter should be changed at every oil change.
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
5.3L V8 FlexFuel with Active Fuel
Management™ (Iron Block)
0
Automatic
1.01 mm (0.040 in)
5.3L V8 FlexFuel with Active Fuel
Management™ (Aluminum Block)
3
Automatic
1.01 mm (0.040 in)
6.0L V8 with Active Fuel
Management™ (Iron Block)
G
Automatic
1.01 mm (0.040 in)
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
12-4
Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
hybrid supplement for more
information.
Black plate (4,1)
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (1,1)
Customer Information
Customer
Information
Customer Information
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure (U.S. and
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-4
Customer Assistance Offices
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Customer Assistance Offices
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users (U.S.
and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program (U.S. and
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Roadside Assistance Program
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Roadside Assistance Program
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Scheduling Service
Appointments (U.S. and
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Courtesy Transportation
Program (U.S. and
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Collision Damage Repair
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-11
Service Publications
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-14
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to
the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Reporting Safety Defects to
the Canadian
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
13-1
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-16
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-18
Radio Frequency
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
13-2
Black plate (2,1)
Customer Information
Customer Information
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure (U.S. and
Canada)
Your satisfaction and goodwill are
important to your dealer and to
Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the
operation of the vehicle will be
resolved by the dealer's sales or
service departments. Sometimes,
however, despite the best intentions
of all concerned, misunderstandings
can occur. If your concern has not
been resolved to your satisfaction,
the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
with a member of dealership
management. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at that level.
If the matter has already been
reviewed with the sales, service,
or parts manager, contact the owner
of the dealership or the general
manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a
member of dealership management,
it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without
further help, in the U.S., call the
Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In
Canada, call General Motors of
Canada Customer Communication
Centre at 1-800-263-3777 (English),
or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the
toll-free number in order to give your
inquiry prompt attention. Have the
following information available to
give the Customer Assistance
representative:
.
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). This is available
from the vehicle registration or
title, or the plate at the top left of
the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.
.
Dealership name and location.
.
Vehicle delivery date and
present mileage.
When contacting Chevrolet,
remember that your concern will
likely be resolved at a dealer's
facility. That is why we suggest
following Step One first.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:
Both General Motors and your
dealer are committed to making
sure you are completely satisfied
with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied
after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you
can file with the Better Business
Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program
to enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an
out-of-court program administered
by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive
disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may
be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the
program is free of charge and your
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (3,1)
Customer Information
case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the
decision given in your case, you
may reject it and proceed with any
other venue for relief available
to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto
Line Program using the toll-free
telephone number or write them
at the following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business
Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all
50 states and the District of
Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
vehicle age, mileage, and other
factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility
limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
STEP THREE — Canadian
Owners: In the event that you do
not feel your concerns have been
addressed after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One
and Two, General Motors of Canada
Limited wants you to be aware of its
participation in a no-charge
Mediation/Arbitration Program.
General Motors of Canada Limited
has committed to binding arbitration
of owner disputes involving
factory-related vehicle service
claims. The program provides for
the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and
may include an informal hearing
before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time
you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in
about 70 days. We believe our
impartial program offers advantages
over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and
free of charge.
13-3
For further information concerning
eligibility in the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call
the General Motors Customer
Communication Centre,
1-800-263-3777 (English),
1-800-263-7854 (French),
or write to:
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication
Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied
by the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
13-4
Black plate (4,1)
Customer Information
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure (Mexico)
However, we recognize that despite
the good intentions of all parties
involved, sometimes a
misunderstanding may occur.
If you have a problem that has not
been satisfactorily handled through
the normal means, we suggest the
following steps:
STEP ONE
Did you get the Warranty Extension
Plan? This plan is recommended by
General Motors to supplement the
warranty included with the new
vehicle purchase.
See your dealer for details.
Customer Assistance
Procedure
Owner satisfaction and goodwill are
very important to your dealer and
General Motors.
Normally, any problem with the
transaction, sale, or usage of the
vehicle must be handled by your
dealer sales or service departments.
Explain your case to the dealer
service agent, service manager,
dealer sales agent, or sales
manager, depending on your case.
Make sure that they have all
necessary information. They are
interested in your continual
satisfaction.
STEP TWO
If you are not satisfied, please
contact the general manager or the
dealership owner to ask for their
help. If they are not able to resolve
your case, ask them to contact the
right people at General Motors for
support, if needed.
STEP THREE
If your case is not resolved in a
reasonable amount of time by your
dealer, please call the General
Motors Customer Assistance
Center (CAC) and provide the
following information:
.
Name
.
Address
.
Phone number
.
Model year
.
Brand
.
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
.
Mileage
.
Delivery date
.
Description of the problem
.
Dealership name
.
Dealership address
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (5,1)
Customer Information
See Customer Assistance Offices
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5 or
Customer Assistance Offices
(Mexico) on page 13‑5 for more
information.
Customer Assistance
Offices (U.S. and Canada)
Chevrolet encourages customers
to call the toll-free number for
assistance. However, if a customer
wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
the letter should be addressed to:
United States
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer
Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
www.Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text
Telephone Devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-243-8872
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre,
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gm.ca
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-268-6800
Overseas
Please contact the local General
Motors Business Unit.
13-5
Mexico, Central America, and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.
Virgin Islands)
General Motors de Mexico,
S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Av. Ejercito Nacional #843
Col. Granada
C.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-466-0800
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0800
Customer Assistance
Offices (Mexico)
To contact the Customer Assistance
Center (CAC), use the phone
numbers listed in this section.
Customer assistance is available
Monday through Friday, 08:00 to
20:00 hours, and Saturdays from
08:00 to 15:00 hours.
All e-mail inquiries to the Customer
Assistance Center (CAC) should be
sent to: [email protected].
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
13-6
Black plate (6,1)
Customer Information
Mexico
From Mexico City
5329-0811
From Other Mexico Locations
01-800-466-0811
United States and Canada
1-866-466-8190
Costa Rica
00-800-052-1005
Guatemala
Customer Assistance for
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users (U.S. and Canada)
To assist customers who are deaf,
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired
and who use Text Telephones
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY
equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user in
the U.S. can communicate with
Chevrolet by dialing:
1-800-833-2438. TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
1-800-999-5252
Online Owner Center
Panama
Chevrolet Owner Center (U.S.)
www.chevyownercenter.com
00-800-052-0001
Dominican Republic
1-888-751-5301
El Salvador
800-6273
Honduras
800-0122-6101
Information and services
customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient
place.
.
Digital owner manual, warranty
information, and more.
.
Storage for online service and
maintenance records.
.
Chevrolet dealer locator for
service nationwide.
.
Exclusive privileges and offers.
.
Recall notices for your specific
vehicle.
.
OnStar and GM Cardmember
Services Earnings summaries.
Other Helpful Links
Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com
Chevrolet Merchandise —
www.chevymall.com
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/
pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do
.
FAQ
.
Contact Us
My GM Canada www.gm.ca
My GM Canada is a
password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save
information on GM vehicles, get
personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (7,1)
Customer Information
Here are a few of the valuable
tools and services you will have
access to:
GM Mobility
Reimbursement Program
(U.S. and Canada)
.
My Showroom: Find and save
information on vehicles and
current offers in your area.
.
My Dealers: Save details such
as address and phone number
for each of your preferred GM
dealers.
.
My Driveway: Access quick links
to parts and service estimates,
check trade-in values,
or schedule a service
appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your
driveway profile.
This program is available to
qualified applicants for cost
reimbursement of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment
required for the vehicle, such as
hand controls or a wheelchair/
scooter lift for the vehicle.
My Preferences: Manage your
profile and use tools and forms
with greater ease.
For more information on the limited
offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or
call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
Telephone (TTY) users, call
1-800-833-9935.
.
To sign up, visit the My GM.ca
section within www.gm.ca.
13-7
General Motors of Canada also
has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for
details. TTY users call
1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance
Program (U.S. and
Canada)
For U.S.‐purchased vehicles, call
1‐800‐243‐8872; (Text Telephone
(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438).
For Canadian‐purchased vehicles,
call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year.
Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance,
have the following information
ready:
.
Your name, home address, and
home telephone number.
.
Telephone number of your
location.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
13-8
Black plate (8,1)
Customer Information
.
Location of the vehicle.
.
Model, year, color, and license
plate number of the vehicle.
.
Odometer reading, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), and
delivery date of the vehicle.
.
Description of the problem.
Coverage
Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the
claims are made too often, or the
same type of claim is made many
times.
Services Provided
.
Services are provided up to 5 years/
160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever
comes first.
In the U.S., anyone driving the
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not
covered.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
make any changes or discontinue
the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
.
.
Emergency Fuel Delivery:
Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest
service station.
.
Flat Tire Change: Service to
change a flat tire with the spare
tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
must be in good condition and
properly inflated. It is the owner's
responsibility for the repair or
replacement of the tire if it is
not covered by the warranty.
.
Battery Jump Start: Service
to jump start a dead battery.
Services Not Included in
Roadside Assistance
Lock‐Out Service: Service to
unlock the vehicle if you are
locked out. A remote unlock may
be available if you have OnStar.
For security reasons, the driver
must present identification
before this service is given.
.
Impound towing caused by
violation of any laws.
.
Legal fines.
.
Mounting, dismounting,
or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
Emergency Tow From a Public
Road or Highway: Tow to the
nearest Chevrolet dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle
was in a crash and cannot be
driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in the
sand, mud, or snow.
.
Towing or services for vehicles
driven on a non-public road or
highway.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (9,1)
Customer Information
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
.
.
Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement
is approximately $5 Canadian.
Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other
fuels are not provided through
this service.
.
Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
registration is required.
.
Trip Routing Service: Detailed
maps of North America are
provided when requested either
with the most direct route or the
most scenic route. There is a
limit of six requests per year.
Additional travel information is
also available. Allow three
weeks for delivery.
.
Trip Interruption Benefits and
Assistance: Must be over
250 kilometers from where
your trip was started to
qualify. General Motors of
Canada Limited requires
pre-authorization, original
detailed receipts, and a copy
of the repair orders. Once
authorization has been received,
the Roadside Assistance advisor
will help to make arrangements
and explain how to receive
payment.
Alternative Service: If
assistance cannot be provided
right away, the Roadside
Assistance advisor may give
permission to get local
emergency road service. You will
receive payment, up to $100,
after sending the original receipt
to Roadside Assistance.
Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for
parts and labor for repairs not
covered by the warranty are the
owner responsibility.
13-9
Roadside Assistance
Program (Mexico)
Roadside Assistance is available
24 hours a day, 365 days of
the year.
For detailed information about
Roadside Assistance, please see
the brochure provided with your
new vehicle or visit our website at:
www.chevrolet.com.mx. Navigate
the site and click on “Asistencia en
el Camino.” E-mail correspondence
should be sent to:
[email protected].
To contact Roadside Assistance by
phone, use the following numbers:
Mexico
01-800-466-0800
United States
1-866-466-8901
Canada
1-800-268-6800
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
13-10
Black plate (10,1)
Customer Information
Scheduling Service
Appointments (U.S. and
Canada)
Courtesy Transportation
Program (U.S. and
Canada)
When the vehicle requires warranty
service, contact the dealer and
request an appointment. By
scheduling a service appointment
and advising the service consultant
of your transportation needs, the
dealer can help minimize your
inconvenience.
To enhance your ownership
experience, we and our participating
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support
program for vehicles with the
Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty
Coverage period in Canada),
extended powertrain, and/or hybrid‐
specific warranties in both the U.S.
and Canada.
If the vehicle cannot be scheduled
into the service department
immediately, keep driving it until it
can be scheduled for service,
unless, of course, the problem is
safety related. If it is, please call the
dealership, let them know this, and
ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests you to bring
the vehicle for service, you are
urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the
same day-repair.
Several Courtesy Transportation
options are available to assist in
reducing inconvenience when
warranty repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a
part of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. A separate booklet
entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished
with each new vehicle provides
detailed warranty coverage
information.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be
completed while you wait. However,
if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize inconvenience by
providing several transportation
options. Depending on the
circumstances, the dealer can
offer one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred
means of offering Courtesy
Transportation. Dealers may provide
shuttle service to get you to your
destination with minimal interruption
of your daily schedule. This includes
one‐way or round‐trip shuttle service
within reasonable time and distance
parameters of the dealer's area.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If the vehicle requires overnight
warranty repairs, and public
transportation is used instead of the
dealer's shuttle service, the expense
must be supported by original
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (11,1)
Customer Information
receipts and can only be up to the
maximum amount allowed by GM
for shuttle service. In addition, for
U.S. customers, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or
relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be
available. Claim amounts should
reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts. See
the dealer for information regarding
the allowance amounts for
reimbursement of fuel or other
transportation costs.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
The dealer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or
reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if the vehicle is kept
for an overnight warranty repair.
Rental reimbursement will be limited
and must be supported by original
receipts. This requires that you sign
and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and
rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements,
insurance coverage, credit card, etc.
You are responsible for fuel usage
charges and may also be
responsible for taxes, levies, usage
fees, excessive mileage, or rental
usage beyond the completion of the
repair.
It may not be possible to provide a
like vehicle as a courtesy rental.
Additional Program
Information
All program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at
every dealer. Please contact the
dealer for specific information
about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be
administered by appropriate dealer
personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to
unilaterally modify, change,
or discontinue Courtesy
Transportation at any time and to
resolve all questions of claim
eligibility pursuant to the terms and
conditions described herein at its
sole discretion.
13-11
Collision Damage Repair
(U.S. and Canada)
If the vehicle is involved in a
collision and it is damaged, have the
damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper
equipment and quality replacement
parts. Poorly performed collision
repairs diminish the vehicle resale
value, and safety performance can
be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new
parts made with the same materials
and construction methods as the
parts with which the vehicle was
originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are the best choice to
ensure that the vehicle's designed
appearance, durability, and safety
are preserved. The use of Genuine
GM parts can help maintain the GM
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
13-12
Black plate (12,1)
Customer Information
Recycled original equipment parts
may also be used for repair. These
parts are typically removed from
vehicles that were total losses in
prior crashes. In most cases, the
parts being recycled are from
undamaged sections of the vehicle.
A recycled original equipment GM
part may be an acceptable choice to
maintain the vehicle's originally
designed appearance and safety
performance; however, the history of
these parts is not known. Such parts
are not covered by the GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
related failures are not covered by
that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also
available. These are made by
companies other than GM and may
not have been tested for the vehicle.
As a result, these parts may fit
poorly, exhibit premature durability/
corrosion problems, and may not
perform properly in subsequent
collisions. Aftermarket parts are not
covered by the GM New Vehicle
Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
failure related to such parts is not
covered by that warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you
choose a collision repair facility that
meets your needs before you ever
need collision repairs. The dealer
may have a collision repair center
with GM-trained technicians and
state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be
able to recommend a collision repair
center that has GM-trained
technicians and comparable
equipment.
Insuring The Vehicle
Protect your investment in the GM
vehicle with comprehensive and
collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the
quality of coverage afforded by
various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide
reduced protection to the GM
vehicle by limiting compensation
for damage repairs by using
aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not
specify aftermarket collision parts.
When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you ensure that the
vehicle will be repaired with GM
original equipment collision parts.
If such insurance coverage is not
available from your current
insurance carrier, consider switching
to another insurance carrier.
If the vehicle is leased, the leasing
company may require you to have
insurance that ensures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
Genuine Manufacturer replacement
parts. Read the lease carefully, as
you may be charged at the end of
the lease for poor quality repairs.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (13,1)
Customer Information
If a Crash Occurs
If there has been an injury, call
emergency services for help. Do not
leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of.
Move the vehicle only if its position
puts you in danger, or you are
instructed to move it by a police
officer.
Give only the necessary information
to police and other parties involved
in the crash.
For emergency towing see
Roadside Assistance Program (U.S.
and Canada) on page 13‑7 or
Roadside Assistance Program
(Mexico) on page 13‑9.
Gather the following information:
.
Driver name, address, and
telephone number.
.
Driver license number.
.
Owner name, address, and
telephone number.
.
Vehicle license plate number.
.
Vehicle make, model, and
model year.
.
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
.
Insurance company and policy
number.
.
General description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
Choose a reputable repair facility
that uses quality replacement parts.
See “Collision Parts” earlier in this
section.
If the airbag has inflated, see What
Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? on page 3‑44.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
In the event that the vehicle requires
damage repairs, GM recommends
that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined
repair facility of choice, take the
vehicle there, or have it towed there.
13-13
Specify to the facility that any
required replacement collision parts
be original equipment parts, either
new Genuine GM parts or recycled
original GM parts. Remember,
recycled parts will not be covered by
the GM vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
but you must live with the repair.
Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may
initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
the repair professional, and insist on
Genuine GM parts. Remember,
if the vehicle is leased, you may be
obligated to have the vehicle
repaired with Genuine GM parts,
even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.
If another party's insurance
company is paying for the repairs,
you are not obligated to accept a
repair valuation based on that
insurance company's collision policy
repair limits, as you have no
contractual limits with that company.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
13-14
Black plate (14,1)
Customer Information
In such cases, you can have control
of the repair and parts choices as
long as the cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Service Publications
Ordering Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis
and repair information on the
engines, transmission, axle,
suspension, brakes, electrical,
steering, body, etc.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional
technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions
to assist in the diagnosis and
service of the vehicle.
Owner Information
Current and Past Models
Owner publications are written
specifically for owners and intended
to provide basic operational
information about the vehicle.
The Owner Manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all
models.
Technical Service Bulletins and
Manuals are available for current
and past model GM vehicles.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
Owner Manual, and Warranty
Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling
and shipping fees.
Without Portfolio: Owner
Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling
and shipping fees.
ORDER TOLL FREE:
1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday
8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit
Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
Or write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for
delivery.
All listed prices are quoted in U.S.
funds. Make checks payable in U.S.
funds.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (15,1)
Customer Information
Reporting Safety
Defects
Reporting Safety Defects
to the United States
Government
If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could cause
a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual
problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may
call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor
vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
13-15
Reporting Safety Defects
to the Canadian
Government
If you live in Canada, and you
believe that the vehicle has a safety
defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, and notify General
Motors of Canada Limited. Call
them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
13-16
Black plate (16,1)
Customer Information
Reporting Safety Defects
to General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA
(or Transport Canada) in a situation
like this, notify General Motors.
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer
Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
(French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre,
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Vehicle Data
Recording and
Privacy
This GM vehicle has a number of
sophisticated computers that record
information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven.
For example, the vehicle uses
computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission
performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment
and deploy airbags in a crash, and,
if so equipped, to provide antilock
braking to help the driver control the
vehicle. These modules may store
data to help the dealer technician
service the vehicle. Some modules
may also store data about how you
operate the vehicle, such as rate of
fuel consumption or average speed.
These modules may also retain the
owner’s personal preferences, such
as radio pre-sets, seat positions,
and temperature settings.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose
of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an airbag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a
vehicle's systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and
safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed
to record such data as:
.
How various systems in the
vehicle were operating.
.
Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened.
.
How far, if at all, the driver was
pressing the accelerator and/or
brake pedal.
.
How fast the vehicle was
traveling.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (17,1)
Customer Information
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances
in which crashes and injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded
by the vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal
driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) is recorded.
However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
GM will not access this data or
share it with others except: with the
consent of the vehicle owner or,
if the vehicle is leased, with the
consent of the lessee; in response
to an official request by police or
similar government office; as part of
GM's defense of litigation through
the discovery process; or, as
required by law. Data that GM
collects or receives may also be
used for GM research needs or may
be made available to others for
research purposes, where a need is
shown and the data is not tied to a
specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
13-17
OnStar®
If the vehicle is equipped with an
active OnStar system, that system
may also record data in crash or
near crash‐like situations. The
OnStar Terms and Conditions
provides information on data
collection and use and is available
in the OnStar glove box kit, at
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
www.onstar.ca (Canada), or by
pressing the Q button and
speaking to an advisor.
Navigation System
If the vehicle has a navigation
system, use of the system may
result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and
other trip information. Refer to the
navigation system operating manual
for information on stored data and
for deletion instructions.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
13-18
Black plate (18,1)
Customer Information
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
Radio Frequency
Statement
RFID technology is used in some
vehicles for functions such as tire
pressure monitoring and ignition
system security, as well as in
connection with conveniences such
as key fobs for remote door locking/
unlocking and starting, and
in-vehicle transmitters for garage
door openers. RFID technology in
GM vehicles does not use or record
personal information or link with any
other GM system containing
personal information.
This vehicle has systems that
operate on a radio frequency that
comply with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS‐210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. The device may not cause
interference.
2. The device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
Changes or modifications to any of
these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (1,1)
INDEX
A
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Active Fuel Management® . . . . . 9-34
Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91
Adding a Snow Plow or
Similar Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91
Adjustable Throttle and
Brake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Adjustments
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-15
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Airbag
Adding Equipment to the
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-50
Airbag System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43
Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43
Airbag System (cont.)
What Will You See After
an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .3-44
When Should an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-39
Airbags
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-19
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Servicing Airbag-Equipped
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
Alarm System
Anti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Antenna
Rear Side Window . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Anti-Theft
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-43
Antilock Brake
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Appearance Care
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96
i-1
Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Assistance Program,
Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-9
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
CD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19
Audio System
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Rear Seat (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-45
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Automatic
Dimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Level Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-37
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Shift Lock Control
Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Auxiliary
Roof Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
i-2
Black plate (2,1)
INDEX
B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Voltage and Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-33
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Brake
Pedal and Adjustable
Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28
Brake System Warning Light . . . 5-23
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-37
Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Stoplamps, and
Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
C
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
California
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-68
Perchlorate Materials
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-62
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Carbon Monoxide
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10, 2-12
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Cargo
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Cautions, Danger, and
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Charging
System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Check
Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Ignition
Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-32
Child Restraints
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-54
Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-61
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-52
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69, 3-72
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-57
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Cleaning
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (3,1)
INDEX
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10, 8-11
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-11
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Continuous Damping
Control (CDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Coolant
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Engine Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Courtesy Transportation
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Cover
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6
Customer Information
Service Publications
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-14
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2, 13-4
D
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-11
Danger, Warnings, and
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-16
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Door
Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
i-3
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Driving
Characteristics and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-73
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . .9-18
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-21
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Driving for Better Fuel
Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Dual Automatic Climate
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
DVD
Rear Seat Entertainment
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-34
DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
i-4
Black plate (4,1)
INDEX
E
E85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69
Electrical Equipment,
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91
Electrical System
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Check and Service Engine
Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Coolant Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Cooling System Messages . . .5-38
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
Engine (cont.)
Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Overheated Protection
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-36
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Engine Oil
Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-82
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-16
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2
F
Fan
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Features
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Filter,
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-5
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-100
Fluid
Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-12
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Four-Wheel Drive
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . 9-43, 9-47
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Fog Lamps
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Four-Wheel
Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29, 9-43, 9-47
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Front Fog Lamp
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Front Seats
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . .3-10
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (5,1)
INDEX
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-68
E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . .9-69
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-72
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-70
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-68
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-68
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-26
Management, Active . . . . . . . . . .9-34
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-68
Requirements, California . . . . .9-68
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Fuel Economy
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28
Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
Fuses
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
i-5
G
H
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-54
Gasoline
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-68
Gauges
Engine Coolant
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Warning Lights and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
General Information
Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-73
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-5
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Headlamps
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-26
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Heated
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Heated and Ventilated Front
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Heater
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-18
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
i-6
Black plate (6,1)
INDEX
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
I
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Ignition Transmission Lock
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Infants and Young Children,
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . 1-2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
J
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
K
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-41
Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-47
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Lamps
Auxiliary Roof
Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-3
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-20
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
LATCH System
Replacing Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-69
LATCH, Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
Level Control
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54
Liftgate
Carbon Monoxide . . . . . . . 2-10, 2-12
Lighting
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Lights
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-23
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-17
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
StabiliTrak® Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-24
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (7,1)
INDEX
Locks
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-26
Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
M
Maintenance
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10
Maintenance Schedule
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-3
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . 9-43, 9-47
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-20
Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Messages
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . .5-43
Battery Voltage and
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-38
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Object Detection System . . . . .5-41
Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
i-7
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Automatic Dimming
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Trailer Tow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Monitor System, Tire
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
N
Navigation
Vehicle Data Recording
and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
i-8
Black plate (8,1)
INDEX
O
Object Detection System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Object Detection, Side Blind
Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Oil
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10
Engine Oil Pressure
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-52
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Operation, Infotainment
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Ordering
Service Publications . . . . . . . . 13-14
Outlets
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Overheated Engine
Protection
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
P
Park
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Parking
Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51
Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-32
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-34
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-45
Perchlorate Materials
Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3
Personalization
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Phone
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-47
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-32
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Pregnancy, Using Safety
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Privacy
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-18
Program
Courtesy Transportation . . . . 13-10
Proposition 65 Warning,
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (9,1)
INDEX
R
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-18
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Radios
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54
Rear Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10, 8-11
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Rear Seat Entertainment
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) . . . . . . .7-45
Rear Seats
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Rear Side Window Antenna . . . 7-13
Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-62
Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-6
Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68
Records
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10
Recreational Vehicle
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
Reimbursement Program,
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, 2-3
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Replacement
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Replacement Parts
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-52
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-52
Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
i-9
Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-15
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Restraints
Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-60
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Ride Control Systems
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Roads
Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17
Roadside Assistance
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-9
Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4
Running the Vehicle While
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
i-10
Black plate (10,1)
INDEX
S
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .3-36
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-34
Safety Defects Reporting
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-15
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-3
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-10
Seats
Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Heated and Ventilated
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Seats (cont.)
Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Heated, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-6
Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Second Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Third Row Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Secondary Latch System . . . . . 10-79
Securing Child
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69, 3-72
Security
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Service
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-10
Maintenance, General
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1
Publications Ordering
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-10
Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Shift Lock Control Function
Check, Automatic
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Shifting
Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
Side Blind Zone Alert . . . . . . . . . . 9-60
Signals, Turn and
Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91
Specifications and
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . . 5-24
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Steps
Power Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (11,1)
INDEX
Stoplamps and Back-Up Lamps
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Storage
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Storage Areas
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
System
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Taillamps
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-16
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Third-Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Throttle, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Tires
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-56
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-55
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Secondary Latch System . . . 10-79
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Terminology and
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
i-11
Tires (cont.)
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-65
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Towing
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-73
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-82
General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-73
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-87
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-77
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
Trailer
Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-77
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43, 9-47
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Transportation Program,
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual - 2011
i-12
Black plate (12,1)
INDEX
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Turn Signal
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
U
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-58
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-54
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-59
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-54
Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
V
Vehicle
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Vehicle (cont.)
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Vehicle Identification
Service Parts Identification
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
W
Warning
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Warning Lights, Gauges,
and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . . 5-46
Wheels
Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-60
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Windshield
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Winter
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-33
Wipers
Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6